7

./ 6 f ^

ILMAM IftH.

Coudmx :

TisieuEm, §«, & 'JTACMS asm kewcate § t.

1831 .

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

/

DURING A RESIDENCE OF NEARLY
EIGHT YEARS IN THE

SOCIETY AND SANDWICH ISLANDS.

BY WILLIAM ELLIS.

* * a

SECOND EDITION, ENLARGED AND IMPROVED .

VOL. III.

BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY

1389

1890

library.

LONDON:

FISHER, SON, & JACKSON, NEWGATE STREET.
1832 .

P' HUB

CONTENTS OF VOL. III.

CHAP. i.

FROM PAGE 1 TO PAGE 33.

Establishment of new stations at Mahapu and Maeva—
Appearance of the lake and surrounding scenery—-
Increased desire for books—Applications from the blind
—Account of Hiro an idolatrous priest—Methods of dis¬
tributing books—Dangerous voyages—Motives influ¬
encing to desire the scriptures—Character of the trans¬
lation—Cause of delay in baptizing native converts—■
General view of the ordinance—Baptism of the king—
Preparatory instructions—First baptism in Huahine—
Mode of applying the water—Introduction of Christian
names—Baptism of infants—Views and feelings of the
parents.

CHAP. II.

FROM PAGE 34 TO PAGE 52.

Interesting state of the people—Extensive prevalence of a
severe epidemic—Former diseases in the islands com¬
paratively few and mild—Priests the general physicians
—Native practice of physic—Its intimate connexion with
sorcery—Gods of the healing art—The tuabu, or broken
— back-—Insanity—Native warm bath—Oculists—Sur¬
gery—Setting a broken neck or back—The operation of
trepan — Native remedies superseded by European
medicine—Need of a more abundant supply—Former
cruelty towards the sick—Parricide—Present treatment
of invalids—Death of Messrs. Tessier and Bicknell—
Dying charge to the people—Missionary responsibility.

IV

CONTENTS.

CHAP. III.

FROM PAGE 53 TO PAGE 92.

General view of a Christian church—Uniformity of pro¬
cedure in the different stations—Instructions from
England—Preparatory teaching—Distinct nature of a
Christian church—Qualifications and duties of com¬
municants—The sacrament of the Lord’s Supper—For¬
mation of the first church of Christ in the Leeward
Islands—Administration of the ordinance—Substitute
for bread—Order of the service—Character, experience,
and peculiarities of the communicants—Buaiti—Manner
of admitting church members—Regard to the decla¬
rations of scripture—Instances of the power of con¬
science—Appointment of deacons—Improvement in
parental discipline—Great attention to religion.

CHAP. IV.

FROM PAGE 93 TO PAGE 118.

Government of the South Sea Islands monarchical and
arbitrary—Intimately connected with idolatry—Differ¬
ent ranks in society—Slavery—The proprietors of land
•—The regal family—Sovereignty hereditary—Abdica¬
tion of the father in favour of the son—Distinctions of
royalty—Modes of travelling—Sacredness of the king’s
person—Homage of the people—Singular ceremonies
attending the inauguration of the king—Language of
the Tahitian court—The royal residences—Dress, &c.—
Sources of revenue—Tenure of land—Division of the
country—National councils—Forfeiture of possessions.

CHAP. V.

FROM PAGE 119 TO PAGE 145.

Power of the chiefs and proprietors of land—Banishment
and confiscation—The king’s messenger—The niau, an
emblem of authority—Ancient usages in reference to
crime, &c.— Fatal effects of jealousy—Seizure of pro¬
perty—-Punishment of theft—Public works—Supplies
for the king—Despotic rapacity—Extortion of the king’s
servants—Unorganized state of civil polity—Desire a
code of Christian laws—Advice and conduct of the

CONTENTS.

V

Missionaries—Preparation of the laws—Public enact¬
ment by the king in a national assembly at Tahiti-
Capital punishments—Manner of conducting public

1 trials—Establishment of laws in Raiatea—Prepara¬
tion of those for Huahine.

CHAP. VI.

FROM PAGE 146 TO PAGE 174.

Pomare’s proposed restrictions on barter rejected by the
chiefs of the Leeward Islands—Voyage to Eimeo—De¬
parture for Tahiti—Danger during the night—Arrival
at Burder’s Point—State of the settlement—Papeete—
Mount Hope—Interview' with the king—The laws revised
—Approved by the queen—Arrival of the Hope from
England—Influence of letters, &c.—Return to Eimeo—
Embarkation for the Leeward Islands—A night at sea—
Appearance of the heavens—Astronomy of the natives—
Names of the stars—The Twins—Tradition of their origin
—Arrival in Huahine.

CHAP. VII.

FROM PAGE 175 TO PAGE 214.

Promulgation of the new code of laws in Huahine—Lite¬
ral translation of the laws on Murder—Theft—Trespass
— Stolen property—Lost property—Barter — Sabbath¬
breaking—Rebellion—Bigamy, &c.—Divorce,&c.—Mar¬
riage—False accusation—Drunkenness—Dogs—Pigs—•
Conspiracy— Confessions — Revenue for the king and
chiefs—Tatauing—Voyaging—Judges and magistrates—
Regulations for judges, and trial by jury—Messengers
or peace-officers—Manner of conducting public trials—
Character of theHuahinean code—Reasons for dissuading
from capital punishments—Omission of oaths—Remarks
on the different enactments—Subsequent amendments
and enactments relative to the fisheries—Land-marks—
Land rendered freehold property—First Tahitian par¬
liament— Regulations relating to seamen deserting
their vessels—Publicity of trials—Beneficial effects of
the laws.

VI

CONTENTS.

CHAP. VIII.

FROM PAGE 215 TO PAGE 247.

Visit from the Windward Islands—Opposition to the
moral restraints of Christianity—Tatauing prohibited
by the chiefs—Revival of the practice—Trial and pe¬
nalty of the offenders—Rebellion against the laws and
government—Public assembly—Address of Tana—De¬
parture of the chiefs and people from the encampment
of the king's son—Singularity of their dress and ap¬
pearance—Interview between the rival parties—Return
of Hautia and the captives-—Arrival of the deputation
at Tahiti—Account of Taaroarii—Encouraging circum¬
stances connected with his early life—His marriage—
Profligate associates—Effects of bad example—Disor¬
derly conduct—His illness—Attention of the chiefs and
people—Visits to his encampment—-Last interview—■
Death of Taaroarii—Funeral procession—Impressive
circumstances connected with his decease and interment
—His monument and epitaph—Notice of his father—
His widow and daughter—Institution of Christian
burial—Dying expressions of native converts.

CHAP. IX.

FROM PAGE 248 TO PAGE 275.

Arrival of the deputation in Huahine—Death of Pomare—
Notice of his ancestry—Description of his person—His
mental character and habits—Perseverance and profi¬
ciency in writing—His letter to England, &c.—Fac¬
simile of his hand-writing—Translation of his letter on
the art of drawing—Estimation in which he was held
by the people—Pomare the first convert to Christianity—*
His commendable endeavours to promote its extension
—Declension during the latter part cf his life—His
friendship to the Missionaries uniform—His aid im¬
portant—Circumstances connected with his death—
Accession of his son Pomare III.—Coronation of the
infant king—Encouraging progress in learning—Early
death—Extensive use of letters among the islanders—
Writing on plantain-leaves—Value of writing-paper—
South Sea Academy—Trials peculiar to Mission families
among uncivilized nations—Advantages oL sending
Missionary children to civilized countries.

CONTENTS.

VU

CHAP. X.

FROM PAGE 276 TO PAGE 297.

Voyage to Borabora—Appearance of the Settlement-
Description of the island — Geology — Opening of
the new place of worship—Visit of the Dauntless—
Arrival of the Mermaid—Designation of native Mis¬
sionaries—Voyage to the Sandwich Islands—Interview
between the prince of Tahaa and the princess of Tahiti
—Marriage of Pomare and Aimata—Dress of the parties
and appearance of the attendants—Christian marriage
— Advantageous results — Female occupations — Em¬
barkation for England—Visit to Fare—Improvement of
the settlement—Visit to Rurutu and Raivavai—Final
departure from the South Sea Islands.

CHAP. XI.

FROM PAGE 298 TO PAGE 828.

Efforts of the natives to propagate Christianity—Amount
of early contributions—Effect of annual meetings—
Exertions of the first converts—Description of the Pau-
motus, or Dangerous Archipelago—Visits of the people
to Tahiti—Their reception of Christianity—The number
and situation of the Marquesas—Their appearance and
productions—Population, dress, and figure of the natives
—Tatauing—Disposition—Government—War and can¬
nibalism—Attempts to introduce Christianity among
their inhabitants—Pitcairn's Island—Descendants of the
mutineers of the Bounty—Waihu or Easter Island-
Cape Horn—Juan Fernandez—Alexander Selkirk.

CHAP. XII.

FROM PAGE 329 TO PAGE 862.

South-western borders of Polynesia—New Holland—-
Tempest off the coast—Observations on the aborigines
—New Zealand—Situation — Soil — Productions—Cli¬
mate—Forest scenery—Native flax—Population—Sa¬
vage dispositions of the people—Cannibalism—Govern¬
ment-Slavery—in New Zealand—in Rio Janeiro—
Cruel treatment of New Zealand slaves—Superstitions
—Instance of parental tenderness—Occurrences at New
Zealand—Tatauing—Sham fighting and war dances—
Influence of reports from Tahiti—Prospects of the Mis¬
sion.

VIII

CONTENTS.

CHAP. XIII.

FROM PAGE 363 TO PAGE 406.

Situation, extent, and productions of Rapa —Singularity of
its structure—Appearance of the inhabitants—Violent
proceedings on board—Remarkable interposition of Pro¬
vidence—Visit of some natives to Tahiti—Introduction
of Christianity into Rapa— Raivavai —Accounts of its
inhabitants—Visit of Capt. Henry—Establishment of a
native mission—Fatal ravages of a contagious disease—
Tubuai —Notice of the mutineers of the Bounty—Origin
of the inhabitants—Prevention of war—Establishment
of salutary laws— Rimatara —Productions—Circum¬
stances of the inhabitants—Abolition of idolatry—Ge¬
neral improvement— Rurutu —Geological character—
Population—Auura—His voyage to Maurua—Return
to his native island—Destruction of the idols—Visit to
Rurutu—Advancement of the people in knowledge, in¬
dustry, and comfort—Unjust conduct of visitors—Treat¬
ment of the shipwrecked by the natives—Progress of
Christianity.

LIST OF PLATES FOR VOL III.

Vignette ... to face the Title.

View of Fa-re Harbour,, m Huahine.. £96

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

CHAP. I.

Establishment of new stations at Mahapu and Maeva—
Appearance of the lake and surrounding scenery—
Increased desire for books—Applications from the blind
—Account of Hiro an idolatrous priest—Methods of dis¬
tributing books—Dangerous voyages—Motives influ¬
encing to desire the scriptures—Character of the trans¬
lation—Cause of delay in baptizing native converts—
General view of the ordinance—Baptism of the king—■
Preparatory instructions—First baptism in Huahine—■
Mode of applying the water—Introduction of Christian
names—Baptism of infants—Views and feelings of the
parents.

An intelligent observer may, during a transient
visit to a foreign land, become acquainted, to a
certain extent, with the mental, moral, and spi¬
ritual necessities of its inhabitants, but it is only
by a continued residence among them that these
can be accurately known. Our daily inter¬
course with the people of Huahine strength¬
ened the impression of their claims to our sym¬
pathy and exertions, which our earliest interviews
had made. So long, however, as we remained
unable to address them in their own tongue,
we felt that exhibiting a good example was all
in. B

2

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

that we could do, but as soon as we had acquired
a sufficient knowledge of the native language to
engage in public teaching, while we alternately
performed the regular serviced at the settlement
in Fare, we established branch stations in different
parts of the island.

Two were commenced on the west and southern
coasts, viz. one in the fertile, and formerly popu¬
lous valley of Maliapu, and the other in the ex¬
tensive district of Parea. Schools were opened by
approved native masters at each of these places.
In the former, three hundred scholars were in¬
structed by Narii, a well-qualified teacher. The
inhabitants also erected neat places of worship.
Mr. Barff performed divine service at each station
alternately every other Sabbath; when between
three and four hundred attended.

A similar branch-station was commenced at
Tamabua, a populous and central village in the
district of Maeva, on the borders of a beautiful
and extensive roto, or lake, of the same name, in
the northern part of the island. Here a school
was opened by Tiori, an intelligent native, and
three hundred and eighty adults and children were
taught. A commodious native chapel was also
built, and a cottage for the accommodation of the
Missionary who visited them.

As it was a considerable distance from our place
of abode, I went on the Saturday afternoon, and
spent the Sabbath at Maeva, where upwards of
four hundred usually attended public worship.
We continued our labours at these stations until
the summer of 1820, when the greater part of the
residents were induced to remove to the settle¬
ment at Fare harbour. Some of the happiest
seasons I have enjoyed in Missionary occupations

DSl

LAKE OF M A EVA.

3

were in connexion with my occasional services at
this place. The scenery of the adjacent country
is remarkably fine, and, though different in cha¬
racter, in no respect inferior to that which adorns
the borders of Windermere or Derwent Water.
The lake of Maeva is five miles in length, and of
unequal breadth, though often two miles wide.
Unagitated by the long rolling billows of the
Pacific, and seldom ruffled by the northern and
eastern breezes, from which it is sheltered by
mountains, its surface was often smooth as a
polished mirror, reflecting the groves around, and
the heavens above. It abounds with fish. These
not only supply the inhabitants of the shores of
the lake with the means of subsistence, but, when
viewed from the light canoe, as they sported in
the depths beneath, or leaped above its surface,
enlivened its solitude. On the eastern side, a
number of streams rose among the mountains, and,
winding their way through the valleys, at length
united with its waters. On this side, though the
ascent from its margin to the distant mountains
was generally gradual, it was sometimes abrupt
and bold : the rocky precipices, adorned with
pendulous and creeping plants, rich in verdant
foliage or clustering flowers, rose almost perpen¬
dicularly from the water; the hills were orna¬
mented with clumps of the graceful cypress-shaped
casuarina; and in the narrow border of lowland,
that in many parts extended from the shores to
the foot of the mountains, the hibiscus tiliaceus ,
the betonica splendida , the inoccirpus , and other
trees of larger growth, reared their majestic forms,
and spread their stately branches, clothed with
dark and glossy foliage, whne round their gigantic
stems, and spread from bough to bough, the beau-

b 2

4

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

tiful and large bell-flowering convolvolus, was often
hung in wild luxuriant wreaths.

The walk from Fare to the head of the lake was
delightful; for more than a mile, it was actually
under what the natives call the maru uru, bread¬
fruit shade, large groves of this useful tree growing
on each side of the path. A number of small
plantations give variety to the wild scenery, and
many of the raatiras , or inferior chiefs, have
erected their dwellings near the path. Hautia
had, when we first arrived, a noble house standing
at the southern end of the lake. Along the
eastern shore, small villages were seen amidst a
grove of cocoa-nut and bread-fruit trees. A suc¬
cession of agreeable sensations has arisen in my
mind on a Saturday afternoon, when, passing
along the lake in my canoe, which was paddled by
two native attendants, I have seen the columns
of smoke curling up among the bread-fruit trees,
where the inhabitants were dressing their food for
the following day. Sometimes I have received
their salutations from the shore ; and, in contrast
with their peaceful dwellings, and their present
occupation, I have often been struck with the ap¬
pearance of the villages, the dilapidated family
maraes, or idol-temples, mouldering in ruins on
almost every projecting point.

The western side of this extensive lake is bor¬
dered by a low flat tract of land, in many places a
mile wide, extending from south to north. At
the northern extremity of this beautiful piece of
water, there is a narrow channel, by which it com¬
municates with the sea. The western side, though
very different from the opposite shore, adds to the
variety of the scenery; it is thickly wooded, and.
among the trees that reach the highest perfection,

MOUA TABU.

5

the cocoa-nut, waving its crown of elegant leaves,
and the no less elegant casuarina, whose boughs
hang in arches over the water, are most con¬
spicuous. The eastern side was doubtless origi¬
nally the shore of the sea, and the lake filled by
its waters, while the low border of the land on the
opposite side constituted the reef. After the reef
reached the level of the sea at high-water, it
ceased to ascend, but spread horizontally ; frag¬
ments of coral, and pieces of wood, were thrown
upon its widened surface, till at length it resisted
the shock of the ocean, and the waves rolled back
without overflowing it. Every year increased the
substances accumulated on its surface ; vegetation
at length commenced, and the process of organi¬
zation and decomposition, accelerated by the
humidity of the atmosphere and the warmth of
the climate, formed the mould, in which the trees,
at present covering it, spread their roots, and find
their nourishment.

The most conspicuous and picturesque object, in
connexion with the lake scenery, is moua tabu , sacred
or devoted mountain, which rises on the eastern
shore near the northern end. It is a beautiful, and
in one direction appears almost a regular cone, par¬
tially covered with trees and bushes, even to its sum¬
mit, while the shining basaltic or volcanic rocks,
occasionally projecting through the cypress or pine¬
growing casuarina, add to the novel and agreeable
diversity which its figure produces. The northern
shore of the roto , or lake, of Maeva, was the favourite
residence of many of the native kings. Here, also,
the chief who governed the island after the last
visit of Captain Cook, resided, and erected a
house for Mai, or Omai, that he might be near
him. The shores, and even the smooth surface of

6

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the lake itself, have been the scene of some of the
most sanguinary battles that have been fought be¬
tween rival parties on the island, or the people of
Huahine and those of Raiatea and Borabora. Near
its margin, on a rising ground, one of the largest
artificial fortifications in the group still remains in a
state of nearly entire preservation.

But it is not so distinguished by any of these as
by the vestiges of the ancient superstition of the
island, which everywhere abound. Temples to the
gods of the water were erected on every point of
land, and family maraes in almost every grove,
while the extensive national temple of Tane stood
near the northern extremity of the lake, where the
greater number of human sacrifices were offered,
where the idols were usually kept, and the national
religious assemblies convened.

Every object around the lake, and every monu¬
ment of art or labour, in the district of Maeva,
bore marks of its connexion with their ancient
religion. I have often visited the ruins of the
large national temple of Tane, and the site of the
house of Oro, and in my intercourse with the
people of Maeva, at the meeting for inquiries, these
were frequent topics of conversation, as well as
those matters more immediately connected with the
introduction of Christianity, and the advancement
of education.

The multiplication of schools soon increased the
demand for books ; and though a number printed
in Eimeo had been distributed, they were soon found
inadequate to the necessities of the people. The great
desire of all classes for books, hastened the comple¬
tion of the spelling-book already in the press.

I have often been amused with the ingenuity
and perseverance manifested by the natives in

DF.SJItE FOR BOOKS.

7

their endeavours to obtain a substitute for books.
The bark of the paper mulberry was frequently
beaten to a pulp, spread out on a board, and
wrought and dried with great care, till it resembled
a coarse sort of card. This was sometimes cut into
pieces about the size of the leaves of a book ; and
upon these, with a reed cut in the shape of a pen,
and immersed in red or purple vegetable dye, the
alphabet, syllabic, and reading lessons of the spell¬
ing-book, and the scripture extracts usually read
in the school, have been neatly and correctly copied.
Sometimes the whole was accurately written on
one broad sheet of paper like native cloth, and,
after the manner of the ancients, carefully rolled
up, except when used. This was often the only
kind of book that the natives in remote districts
possessed; and many families have, without any
other lessons, acquired a proficiency, that has
enabled them to read at once a printed copy of the
scriptures. It has also gratified us, as indicative
of the estimation in which the people held every
portion of the word of God, and their desire to
possess it, to behold them anxiously preserving-
even the smallest piece of paper, and writing on it
texts of the scripture which they had heard in the
place of worship.

These detached scraps of paper, containing the
sacred texts, were not, like the phylacteries of the
Jews, bound on the forehead, or attached to the
border of the garment, but carefully kept in a neat
little basket. The possessor of such an envied
treasure might often be seen sitting on the grass,
with his little basket beside him, reading, to his
companions around, these portions of the scripture.
I have a number in the hand-writing of the
natives, some of which they have brought, to have

8 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

them more fully explained, or to inquire what
connexion they bore to parts with which they
might be better acquainted. Their use, however,
was superseded by the printing of the Gospel
of St. Matthew, an edition of upwards of two
thousand copies of which was finished in less
than eighteen months after our arrival in Hua-
hine.

The people were anxious to receive them, and
multitudes thronged the place where they were
preparing, for some time before they were ready.
The district of Fare presented a scene strongly re¬
sembling that which Afareaitu had exhibited when
the first portion of the sacred volume was printed
there; and many said they could not sleep, from
the apprehension of not obtaining a copy. As it
was not easy to distribute them to the greatest
advantage, we determined to give a copy to none
but such as could read; but so importunate were
many, that we could not abide by our resolution.
Sometimes those who were scholars induced their
chiefs to apply for a number of copies, guaran¬
teeing their payment, and their suitable appropria¬
tion. From this representation, many were given
to the different chiefs; but we found it desirable
afterwards, in order to insure the most advan¬
tageous distribution, to give only to those who we
ourselves were satisfied could read.

Several blind persons applied at the different
stations, earnestly soliciting books, stating, that
though they could not read, they could hear and
remember as well as those who could see. To
have denied to those suffering natural darkness
the means of obtaining spiritual light, when we
had every reason to believe they were sincere in
their expression of desire for it, would have been

CONVERSION OF IIIRO.

9

cruel; and we rejoice in having been honoured of
God to communicate the gospel, as the servants
of Him who—

-“ from thick films shall purge the visual ray,

And on the sightless eye-ball pour the day.”

It is a pleasing fact, that in the South Sea
Islands, a number of blind persons have not only
had their understandings enlightened by the per¬
ceptive parts of scripture truth, but that to many
it has proved “ the light of life,” more valuable
than natural light, as the soul is more precious
than the body, and eternity more important than
time. Some have died, and we have reason to
believe have entered those realms of day, where
night and darkness are unknown.

One remarkable instance occurred during the
year in which I left the islands. The native name
of the individual to whom I allude was Hiro. He
was the priest of one of the principal temples of
Parea, in the lesser peninsula of the island, or
Huahine iti. He was a priest of Hiro, the god
of plunderers and thieves, and, in perfect accord¬
ance with the spirit of his office, was the captain
or leader of a band of robbers, who spread terror
through the surrounding country. He was one of
the first and most determined opposers of Chris¬
tianity in Huahine; reproaching its adherents,
defying the power, and disclaiming the authority,
of its Author. But, like Saul of Tarsus, he found
it hard to resist.

He was in the prime and vigour of manhood,
being at the time between thirty and forty years of
age. When the number of Christians increased in
his neighbourhood, and the Sabbath-day was first
publicly observed, in order to shew his utter con¬
tempt of Christian institutions, he determined to

10

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

profane that day “ in defiance of Jehovah/’ He
repaired for this purpose to some grounds in the
neighbourhood of the temple, and engaged in
erecting a fence; but while thus employed, his
career of impiety was suddenly arrested. The
twig of a tree came in contact with his eyes ; al¬
most instant blindness followed ; and, like Ely mas,
he was led home by his affrighted companions, who
considered it a visitation from the Almighty.

I had frequent interviews with him afterwards,
one in the precincts of his own temple, which I
visited in company with Messrs. Bennet, Tyerman,
and Barff. His spirit w^as subdued; he subse¬
quently became a humble, and, we trust, sincere
disciple of that blessed Redeemer whom he had
persecuted. He died trusting in the merits of
Christ for acceptance with God the Father. The
history of the conversion of the great apostle to
the Gentiles interested and affected him much ; and
though the scales on his bodily eyes were not
removed, but his blindness continued until his
death, which occurred in 1824, such was the im¬
pression which analogy of circumstances produced,
that when he presented himself for baptism, he
desired to be called Paul.

Other instances of spiritual illumination, equally
pleasing, now exist both in the Society and Sand¬
wich Islands, in reference to individuals suffering
one of the most distressing and hopeless privations
to which humanity is exposed. Some of our most
interesting conversations with the natives have been
with such. “ My eyes,” said a blind man one day to
Mr. Williams, “ behold no attractive objects when I
am engaged in prayer, or hearing the word of God;
and yet my heart wanders, and my thoughts are
often engaged on other subjects. My eves see

EAGERNESS i'OR BOOKS. 11

not another man's property, &c.; and yet, when
I hear it spoken of, my heart covets it. The objects
that tempt others to sin, are unseen by me; but
my imagination creates objects of sin, which often
occupy my thoughts.”

The experience of Bartimeus Lalana, a native
of the Sandwich Islands, is also remarkably in¬
teresting and satisfactory. Blindness is not more
common among the Polynesians than with the
inhabitants of other countries ; yet there are num¬
bers of aged persons who have lost their sight;
and the influence of that sympathy which this
affliction always awakens in a Christian bosom, is
now excited in the natives themselves, though for¬
merly the blind were objects of neglect and ridicule.
There is now connected with the Missionary station
at Bunaauia, or Border’s Point, a blind man, who
could repeat correctly half the Gospel by John,
very soon after it was printed.

When we have been distributing the scriptures,
two or three fine boys or girls have come, begging
for copies, though they could not read—assuring
us, they were learning; and, when they have
failed, they have entreated that we would write
their names on the books, and reserve them till
they were able to read. To our satisfaction, in
this request they have often been joined by their
parents, who have offered payment for the copies.
We have usually complied with their wishes, and
have witnessed the most entire confidence on their
part, as it regarded the ultimate accomplishment
of their wishes, when once their names have been
written.

In Huahine it was necessary to select some public
place for the distribution of the books; the school¬
room was fixed upon, and, on the day appointed,

12 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the place was actually thronged until the copies were
expended. In their application at our own houses,
we found it impossible to restrain the people; they
filled our yards and gardens, and thronged every
window, sometimes to such a degree, that one of
the Missionaries, Mr. Bicknell, found it necessary
to fasten the lower doors and windows of his house,
and retire to the chamber. The natives then pro¬
cured long bamboo-canes, and, fastening their
measure of oil, the price of the book, to one end,
lifted it up to the window. Mr. Bicknell was so
influenced by the ingenuity and determination of
the contrivance, that he distributed a number of
copies, by fixing them in a slit or notch in the end
of the cane presented at his window.

When the edition issued from the press in
Huahine, the proportion for Raiatea, Tahaa, and
Borabora, was sent to the Missionaries residing
in these places ; but the supply was too small,
and numbers of the disappointed individuals, sup¬
posing they should find a greater abundance at
Huahine, came, when the wind was fair, twenty or
thirty miles in their canoes, several of which were
such small and fragile barks as quite astonished
us. I was really surprised at the temerity of the
individuals who had committed themselves to the
mercy of the waves of the largest ocean in the
world, in the hollowed trunk of a tree, twelve or
twenty feet long; the sides of which, when the
men were in it, were not more than four or five
inches above the surface of the water.

It would be too much to suppose that they were
all influenced by the highest motives, in the desire
they thus manifested for the sacred volume; but
while some probably sought it only as an article of
property in high and general esteem, others were

TAHITIAN TRANSLATION.

13

undoubtedly actuated by a conviction that it was
able to make them wise unto salvation, through
faith which is in Christ Jesus.

The intensity of ardour manifested by many at
first, has, as might be expected, subsided : still the
scriptures are earnestly sought, and highly prized,
by a great portion of the adult population.

The whole of the New Testament has been
translated and printed, not indeed in a uniform
volume, but in detached portions, which many of
the natives have bound up together. Separate
portions of the Old Testament have also been
translated, and some of the books are printed ; it
is to be hoped that a uniform edition of the Bible
will, at no very distant period, be circulated among
the people. Whether or not any of the Apocry¬
phal books will ever assume a Polynesian dress,
it is impossible to say, but at present it is im¬
probable.

The dialects spoken by the tribes inhabiting the
different groups in the South Sea, being strictly
analagous to each other, it was hoped that the
Tahitian translation of the scriptures would have
answered for the whole ; there is, however, reason
to fear that distinct translations will be necessary,
not only for the Sandwich Islands, the Marquesas,
and Tongatabu, but also for the Hervey Islands,
which are not more than 600 or 700 miles distant
from the Society Isles. So strong a resemblance,
however, exists between the dialects, that the Tahi¬
tian translation will require only slight variations,
the idioms and structure of the language being, in
all their distinguishing features, the same.

When the uncultivated nature of the language,
into which the scriptures have been translated, is
considered, connected with the remembrance that

14

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

it is only by the labours of the Missionaries that it
has been within the last few years reduced to a
system, and employed in a written form, it cannot
be expected that these books, more than any other
first translations, should be altogether faultless.
The knowledge of the Missionaries themselves in
the language, notwithstanding thirty years’ atten¬
tion to it, is constantly increasing; and, compared
with future translations which their successors or
well-educated natives may make, the present will,
perhaps, appear imperfect. Nevertheless, from
the qualifications of the translators, their unques¬
tionable integrity, and united patient attention to
the preparation of every work, I believe the only
imperfections that may be found, will refer to
minor points of style in idiom or language. Some
of the Missionaries excel in acquaintance with the
original languages, others with the native dialect,
and every copy is inspected by all, before going to
the press.

The year 1819 is also distinguished in the annals
of the South Sea Islanders, by the administration
of the rite of baptism to the first Christian converts
in the islands. Pomare and others made a profes¬
sion of Christianity in 1813; names were written
down; the change became general during the same
year; persecution raged with violence in 1814;
the inhabitants of Tahiti and Eimeo embraced the
gospel in 1815, and those of the remaining group
in 1816 ; and it certainly appears singular that
none should have been baptized until 1819. This
delay, however, did not arise from any doubts in
the minds of the Missionaries as to the nature of
the ordinance itself, the proper subjects of it, or
the manner in which it was to be administered ; on
all these points they were agreed. It arose from a

BAPTISM.

15

variety of circumstances, peculiar in their kind,
local in their influence, and such as they could
neither foresee nor control.

At first, their continuance and their existence
were very uncertain, in consequence of the efforts
of the idolaters, and the war that followed ; after¬
wards the conduct of the king, who, on his first
profession, they would not have hesitated to bap¬
tize, was such, as to induce them to fear that his
baptism would injure the Christian cause among
the people; and subsequently, as they were on the
point of separating and forming distinct stations,
it was thought best to defer it till they should have
entered upon the fields of their permanent labour,
where they hoped to gather around them congrega¬
tions of converts, administer the rite of baptism,
and form Christian churches.

The Missionaries considered the proper subjects
for the ordinance to be those who professed their
faith in Christ, as the only Saviour, and the chil¬
dren of such individuals : but considerable diffi¬
culty was experienced in determining what the
moral or religious qualifications of the adults ought
to be, and the connexion that should exist be¬
tween their baptism, and admission to the commu¬
nion. Although we read different authors on the
subject, their views were seldom altogether adapted
to our circumstances, and I believe we derived but
little real assistance from any.

We desired to bow only to the authority of
scripture, and to follow implicitly its directions.
We considered our circumstances by no means
dissimilar to those of the individuals for whose
guidance the directions of scripture were primarily
given. Having the commission of our Lord to his
disciples for our warrant, and the conduct of his

16

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

apostles iii the execution of it for our model, we
hope we have been enabled to proceed according
to the divine will, and in such a manner as to
secure the approbation of the Christian churches
by which we had been sent to preach Christ
among the gentiles. Our situation at this time
we regarded as most critical, and our procedure
in this respect such as, it was presumed, would
have an important bearing on future generations.

Happily, however, for us, and for all placed in
similar circumstances, the terms of the commission
are unequivocal and explicit; and we could not
but perceive, that by the same warrant, in virtue of
which we preached the gospel, and, as the word is
rendered in the Tahitian, proselyted those among
whom we laboured, we were also bound to bap¬
tize in the name of the Father, and the Son, and
the Holy Ghost. The intimate connexion between
the administration of this rite by the apostles, and
the reception of the gospel on the part of those to
whom they preached, also convinced us of the
design of our Lord, that it should follow the belief
in the testimony concerning him, which we were
commissioned to deliver. Hence, it was regarded
as our duty to baptize those who desired to become
the disciples of Christ, as well as to instruct them
concerning his will.

We did not apprehend that there was any spi¬
ritual virtue or efficacy connected with, or con¬
tained in, baptism, nor did we consider any spi¬
ritual blessings communicated by it, much less
that most important of all, the one thing needful—
a regeneration of the heart. It appeared de¬
signed, by the great Head of the church, to
occupy, in the dispensation of the new testament,
that place which circumcision did in the old.

BAPTISM.

17

The acts of desiring and receiving baptism, on
the part of the subject of it, were viewed as a
public and solemn renunciation of paganism, and
a declaration of discipleship with Christ; and the
circumstance of baptism was regarded as consti¬
tuting the grand, public, and open line of demar¬
cation between the idolatrous and the thus sepa¬
rated or Christian portions of the community.
While we thus felt ourselves bound to baptize
those who, like the Ethiopian eunuch, and those
to whom Philip preached in Samaria, professed
their belief in the Saviour, and the grand truths of
the Christian system, we also felt that it was de¬
sirable to receive suitable evidence of the sincerity
of such profession.

As to the degree of evidence that should be
required, there was a considerable difference of
opinion. A few of our number supposed that
no adults should receive this initiatory rite, but
such as, there was every reason to believe, were
regenerated persons ; and that a general belief in
the testimony that Christ was the Saviour of men,
and a desire to receive farther instruction, how¬
ever sincere it might be, should be accompanied
with an experience of that change of heart, which
these truths, under the special influences of the
Holy Spirit, are adapted to produce; and, in
short, that such only should be baptized as would
be at once unhesitatingly admitted to the Lord’s
supper.

The majority, however, of the Missionaries were
of opinion that the ordinances were totally distinct,
and that though it was proper that every church
member should have been baptized, yet it did not
follow that every one who had received such rite
was thereby admitted to church fellowship. Satis-

III. c

18

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

factory evidence of sincerity in belief that Jehovah
was the true God, and Jesus Christ the only
Saviour, was considered a sufficient warrant for its
administration to those who required it.

No one, however, at any time desired to exer¬
cise undue influence over the opinions of his coad¬
jutors ; and, although uniformity was desirable, we
did not think it important to sacrifice much for
oneness of sentiment or practice in this respect.
After repeated and prayerful deliberation, recog¬
nizing, and aiming to act upon, the broad and
liberal principles upon which the Institution, under
whose patronage we laboured, was founded, it was
mutually agreed that each Missionary should, in
his own station, pursue that course which appeared
to him most in accordance with the declarations of
scripture.

In two of the stations, or perhaps three, the
Missionaries have baptized those only whom they
had reason to believe had been baptized by the
Holy Ghost, and were Christians in the strictest
sense of the term; the children of such persons
they also baptized. In the other stations, the
Missionaries have administered this rite to all
whom they had reason to believe sincere in pro¬
fession of discipleship, without requiring evidence
of their having experienced a decisive spiritual
change. In this respect some slight difference
prevailed, but on every other point there has been
perfect uniformity in their proceedings.

The first public baptism that occurred in the
islands took place in the Royal Mission Chapel at
Papaoa, in Tahiti, on the 16tli of July, 1819.
Pomare, the king of the island, was the individual
to whom, in the midst of what, but a few years
before, had been a scoffing, ignorant, obstinate,

BAPTISM OF POMARE.

19

cruel, and idolatrous nation, that rite was admi¬
nistered. It was the Sabbath-day. The con¬
gregation in the chapel, though less numerous
than during the services of the previous week,
amounted to between four and five thousand. The
subject of discourse was appropriate, Matt, xxviii.
18—20. At the close of the sermons, the Mis¬
sionaries gathered round the central pulpit; the
ceremony commenced with singing. Mr. Bicknell,
one of the Missionaries who had arrived in the
Duff, implored the Divine blessing, and then,
assisted by Mr. Henry, the only other senior Mis¬
sionary at Tahiti, poured the water on his head,
baptizing him in the name of the Father, and of
the Son, and of the Holy Ghost.” The venerable
Missionary then addressed the king, not without
agitation, yet with firmness, “ entreating him to
walk worthy of his high profession, in the con¬
spicuous station he held before angels, men, and
God himself.” Mr. Henry addressed the people,
and Mr. Wilson implored the Divine benediction,
that what had been done on earth might be ratified
in heaven.

Although the subsequent conduct of Pomare
was a matter of the deepest regret to his best
friends, yet there was something in the ceremony
unusuahy imposing; and the emotions associated
with it must have been intense and interesting,
especially to the two elder Missionaries, who had
performed the rite. He had been identified with
the chief events of their lives; upwards of two
and twenty years had rolled by since the provi¬
dence of God first brought them acquainted with
him on the shores of Matavai; and in connexion
with that interview, which memory would, pro¬
bably, present in strong and vivid colours on this

c 2

20 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

occasion, they, perhaps, recollected the opinion
formed of him, by the humane commander of the
Duff, that he appeared the last person likely to
receive the gospel. Yet amid the thickest dark¬
ness that had ever veiled their prospects, in him
the first cheering ray of dawning light had broken
upon them : he was their first convert; in every
difficulty, he had been their steady friend; in every
labour, a ready coadjutor; and had now publicly
professed that his faith was grounded on that rock
whereon their own was fixed, and his hopes, with
theirs, derived from one common source. What
intense and mingled hopes and fears must have
pervaded their hearts ! what hallowed joy must
they have felt in anticipation of his being with
them an heir of immortality, chastened with appal¬
ling, and not ungrounded fears, that after all he
might become a cast-away !

Numbers, both adults and children, were sub¬
sequently baptized in the Windward Islands, but it
was not until some months after, that the ordi¬
nance was dispensed to any in the Leeward or
Society group.

It was in Huahine that the first, from among
those who had renounced paganism in the Lee¬
ward Islands, were thus initiated into the outward
church of Christ. Huahine was a new station,
and few of the inhabitants, when we landed, knew
much more of Christianity than its name. Fifteen
months had elapsed since our arrival, and during
that period, among a people who had every
thing to learn, we had made the doctrines and
general precepts of the gospel the topics of our
discourses. Many of them now came forward, de¬
claring their desire to become the disciples of the
Saviour, to make a public profession of faith in

PREPARATORY INSTRUCTIONS. 21

him by baptism, and to seek instruction in all his
will. We found that, had we been so disposed,
we could no longer defer the rite, with regard at
least to some who applied.

Anxious that it should be on their part a reason¬
able act, and that, before being received, it should
be understood, we proposed to meet one afternoon
every week, with those who desired to be baptized.
At this meeting we endeavoured to instruct them
in the origin, nature, design, and subjects of the
ordinance, together with the duties of those who
should receive it. There was no wish on our parts
to baptize by stratagem, as some of the popish
Missionaries have done, but we sought to make the
people well acquainted with the matter in all its
bearings.—At the first weekly assemblies, between
twenty and thirty of the most promising of the
converts attended, afterwards the numbers ex¬
ceeded four or five hundred.

In the instructions given, the scriptures, and
the scriptures only, were our guide; and we en¬
deavoured to inculcate the doctrine as we found
it there, and as if it had never been controverted.
Our warrant for its administration we derived from
our Lord’s commission to the first Missionaries,
which was also our own. In its nature, we in¬
structed them not to consider baptism as possessing
any saving efficacy, or conferring any spiritual
benefit, but being on our parts a duty connected
with our office, and on theirs a public declaration
of discipleship or proselytism to the Christian faith;
designed to teach unto all, their moral defilement
in the sight of God, and their need of that wash¬
ing of regeneration, and spiritual purification,
which it figuratively signified.

The duties of those who desired it were also

22 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

inculcated, and the necessity that existed not only
for their renunciation of every open idolatrous
practice, and attention to instruction in the princi¬
ples, but a deportment accordant with the precepts
of Christianity, in the conspicuous situation in
which this very act would place them, before those
by whom they were surrounded. We also informed
them, that it appeared to us from the scripture,
that the ordinance was designed for believers and
their children, and therefore directed that, as they
desired them to be brought up in the Christian
faith, they should dedicate them to Jehovah, the
Father, Son, and Holy Spirit, by baptism. It was
found necessary, at the same time, plainly to cau¬
tion them against supposing there was in baptism
any thing meritorious, or on account of which they
would receive any special blessing from God, other
than that which would follow general obedience to
his word. This was the more requisite, as there
was reason to apprehend, that from the influence
of a system in which strict observance of rites and
ceremonies, without regard to motive or moral
character, was all that was necessary, they might
rest satisfied with having received the mere exter¬
nal declaratory rite. We also endeavoured care¬
fully to avoid holding out any prospect of distinc¬
tion, or temporal advantage, as an inducement to
the people to apply for baptism, but constantly and
plainly represented its observance as only an act
of obedience to Him whom they professed to
desire for their Master and their Lord, and who
had promised that his people should be baptized
with the Holy Ghost.

This weekly meeting was designed to answer
another purpose, that of affording us the means of
judging of the sincerity of the candidates, as well

MODE OF BAPTIZING.

23

as of imparting to them necessary instruction.
After several months had been occupied in devot¬
ing one afternoon in the week to their instruction,
it was deemed proper to baptize a number of the
candidates, and two of their children.

It was now necessary to determine upon the
mode : this had never appeared to us a very im¬
portant part of the matter. We should not have
objected to immerse any individuals who had them¬
selves desired it. But as the scriptures are not
decisive on this point, and though it is stated that
Philip and the Eunuch went down to the water, or
into the water, yet it was not in this act, but in the
application of water in the name of the Trinity,
that we considered baptism to consist: in such
application, it is not stated that the Eunuch was
immersed. Hence, we did not explain this, or
other passages of similar import, as signifying
immersion—and consequently the converts did not
desire it. But had one of our own number
thought it proper to have administered this rite by
immersion, I do not think we should have said he
acted wrong in so doing. In this respect, however,
there was no difference of opinion, and conse¬
quently a perfect uniformity of practice prevailed.
With regard to the other modes, we did not think
it was very material whether we poured or sprin¬
kled the element upon the individual.

The 12th of September, 1819, was fixed for the
baptism of the first converts in Huahine. It was
also the Sabbath. A suitable discourse was deli¬
vered in the morning to a numerous congregation
who thronged the chapel. Mr. Davies, being the
senior Missionary at the station, officiated, assisted
by Mr. Barff and myself.

The climate in the South Sea Islands is remark-

24 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

ably fine, the weather warm, the streams abun¬
dant, and the waters clear as crystal; and, had we
been disposed to perform the service in the open
air, under the shade of a spreading grove, we had
every facility for so doing. The converts might
have been led into the river, and, standing on the
bank or in the stream ourselves, we might have
applied its waters to their persons, using the words
prescribed. On such occasions, the most delight¬
ful scenes, of which it is possible for imagination
to conceive, would have been presented; scenes
similar, perhaps, to those often witnessed in the
days of the apostles; and for the sake of effect,
and the associations they would have awakened,
I have sometimes for a moment wished we
had. But the wish has only been momentary;
for whatever might have been the impression of
such a scene, or the emotions enkindled, they
would not have been attended with any valuable
practical result. On the present, therefore, and
every subsequent occasion, the rite was adminis¬
tered before the whole congregation in the place
of worship.

During the ordinary morning service, the ap¬
proved candidates sat in front of the pulpit. At
its close, they kept their places, and, after implor¬
ing the divine blessing upon the service, we pro¬
ceeded to its performance. Their profession of
faith in Christ, and desire to be instructed in his
word, had been received at a preceding meeting ;
and it was only necessary now, after a short address
to the whole, to ask the name of each adult, and
the parents the names of their children. This,
Mr. Davies did,—beginning with Mahine, the
principal hereditary chieftain of the island. Having
received his reply, Mr. Davies immersed his hand

BAPTISM OF MARINE.

25

in a vessel of water, which Mr. Bar IF or myself
held by his side, and then holding his hand over
the crown or forehead of the chief, while the water
from his hand flow T ed or fell upon Mahine’s head,
Mr. Davies pronounced aloud, with distinctness
and solemnity, Mahine e tapape du vau ia oe i te
ioa o te Medua , e o te Tamaidi , e o te Varua
maitai ; 44 Mahine, I apply water to you in the
name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the
Holy Ghost.” Repeating the same words, and
applying the water in the same manner, to every
individual, he proceeded to baptize the whole num¬
ber, who kept their seats during the ceremony.

Mahine was not baptized first because he was
the king of the island, but because he was one of
the earliest converts, and had been most diligent
in his attention, and consistent in deportment.
We were careful to avoid giving any preference to
rank and station, simply as such ; and, on the pre¬
sent occasion, we beheld Hautia, the governor of
the island, and others of high rank, sitting by the
side of the humblest peasants of the land. In
reference to civil or political station, we always
inculcated the requirements of the gospel, that
all should render honour to whom honour is
due, invariably presenting a suitable example of
the most respectful behaviour to individuals of
rank or distinction. But in the church of God,
and in the participation of the privileges of Chris¬
tianity, we as invariably taught that all were bre¬
thren, that there was no precedence derived from
worldly exaltation, that one only was our Lord
and King, the Saviour himself. This principle we
were happy to see recognized by themselves on this
occasion, as some of the principal chiefs sat at the
lowest end.

26 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

The word tapape , used in the first instance, was
that which appeared the most suitable, as we were
anxious to divest the rite of every thing extraordi¬
nary or mysterious. The signification of the word
is to apply water, without expressing the precise
mode of application. They have no word answer¬
ing to the term baptize , as now understood in the
English language, though they have distinct words
for sprinkling, pouring, bathing, plunging, &c.,
but we considered the simple application of water
to approach nearer to the original word baptisto,
than either of these ; and it seemed so appropriate,
as to render it unnecessary to introduce any other.
Subsequently, however, our opinions changed, and
we adopted the original word, which in Tahitian, is
written ba-pa-ti-zo, and used only to signify this
sacred rite. We have thus left it as we found it,
leaving the scripture to speak its own language,
without limiting it to what we suppose its peculiar
signification.

The water was not sprinkled on the face with
force ; the sign of the cross was not made, nor was
water poured on the head from any vessel; but,
taking one hand from the vessel containing the
water, and holding it over the individual, we
allowed so much water as was held in or attached
to the hand, to fall upon the crown or forehead of
the baptized, pronouncing, at the same time, the
name, and the words prescribed in the Gospels.

Some difficulty was experienced with regard to
the names, as many of the natives, especially the
chiefs, have a number ; some of office, others here¬
ditary, and not a few intimately connected with
their former idolatry, or its abominable institutions.
It was not thought desirable that they should
assume a new name on receiving baptism, or that

CHRISTIAN NAMES.

27

it should interfere with any name of office, sta¬
tion, or hereditary title, that might appertain unto
them. But every blasphemous, idolatrous, or impure
name, (and those of some of the Areois and priests
were so to a most affecting degree,) we recom¬
mended should be discontinued, that they should
select those names, by which, in future, they would
wish to be designated. A few of the adults chose
foreign, and in general scriptural names, for them¬
selves or their children.

This produced a considerable change in their
language. Formerly, all names were descriptive
of some event or quality—as Fanauao, day-born,
Fanaupo, night-born, Mataara, wakeful or bright¬
eyed, Matamoe, sleepful or heavy-eyed, Paari,
wise, or Matauore, fearless, &c. A number of
terms were now introduced, as Adamu Adam, Noa
Noah, Davida David, leremia Jeremiah, Hezekia
Hezekiah, Iacoba James, Ioane John, Petero
Peter, &c. with no other signification than being
the names of the persons.

With regard to infants, we only baptized those
whose parents, one or both, were themselves bap¬
tized, and who desired thus to dedicate their chil¬
dren to God, and engaged to train them in the
principles of Christianity ; and then we only bap¬
tized infants, unless the children of more advanced
years understood the nature of the ordinance, and
themselves desired to make, by this act, a public
profession of their discipleship to Christ, and their
wishes to be instructed in his word.

Sometimes the infant was held in the arms of
its parent, who stood up while the rite was admi¬
nistered ; at other times, and I believe invariably
during subsequent years, we have take n the^ child
in the left arm, and #Ff^N®^ GY

1830

LEkaRY.

28 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

hand. Whenever any of our own children have
been baptized, we have brought them to the
chapel, and have performed the ceremony at the
same time and in the same way as with the natives;
that they might perceive that in this respect there
was no difference between us.

The baptism of infants has certainly been
among our most interesting religious exercises.
It was generally performed after morning service
on the Sabbath. We usually addressed a short
and affectionate exhortation to the parents, en¬
forcing their responsibility, and duty towards the
dear children they were thus offering; not indeed
as an innocent child was formerly offered in sacri¬
fice to senseless idols, or to a cruel imaginary
deity, but to be trained up in the nurture and
admonition of that Divine Parent, who has said,

44 I love them that love me, and those that seek
me early shall find me.”

I have been sometimes almost overwhelmed
on beholding the intensity of mingled feeling,
with which three or four smiling infants have
been brought by their respective parents to the
rustic baptismal font. I have fancied, in the
strongly expressive countenances of the parents,
the emotions of gratitude, and the ray of hope
and anticipated joy in the future progress of
the child, when it should exhibit the effects of
that inward change, of which this was the outward
sign.

In strong and distressing contrast with sensa¬
tions of this hallowed and delightful kind, I have
supposed the memory of far different acts, in
which, as parents, many of them had been en¬
gaged, has remained ; I have supposed that recol¬
lection has presented the winning look of conscious

BAPTISM OF INFANTS, 29

innocence, which some dear babe has cast upon
them, or the plaintive cry which from its lisping
tongue first broke upon their ears, but which was
unheeded, and they monstrously committed cool,
inhuman murder—when they should have cherish¬
ed the tenderest and softest sensibilities of the
human bosom : I believe this has not been in my
imagination only. The feeling depicted in the
humane and Christian parent’s countenance, suf¬
fused with tears, has often been an index of no
common inward agitation. Subsequent conversa¬
tion has confirmed the fact; and many have brought
their children to present them unto God in bap¬
tism, who, while idolaters, had more than once or
twice been guilty of the barbarous crime of infant
murder. This practice is abolished ; and, instead
of shameless murder, or pagan sacrifice, the parents
now delight to bring their infants to the Christian
sanctuary, and thus dedicate them to God.

I have been often rather agreeably surprised at
the anxiety of the parents to have their children
baptized. Without inquiring into the origin of
this solicitude, I believe it is not confined to the
inhabitants of the South Sea Islands, and is cer¬
tainly not unpleasant to behold. I recollect at
one time the parents of three children came with
considerable earnestness, and requested me to
baptize their infants, rather earlier than I thought
it should be done. It was not at Huahine, and the
Missionary, under whose care the station was more
particularly placed, was absent; I therefore pro¬
posed to defer it till his arrival. They pressed me
not to decline ; and one of them stated as a reason,
that her child had been ill, and she was afraid it
would die before it had been baptized. “ Sup¬
pose, v I replied, “ that it should, you know that

30 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the child will not lose thereby. No persons will
be admitted to heaven simply because they have
been baptized, nor will any be excluded therefrom
merely because they have not.” “ Yes,” answered
the mother, “ I know that; yet I do not feel satis¬
fied now—but when it has been baptized, my mind
will become easier.” I could not reprove her; I
endeavoured, however, to impress upon her mind
the conviction, that the ordinance, though a duty,
did not itself confer any spiritual benefit, and
relieved her mind by informing her, that I
would baptize the child at the close of the evening
service.

In the preceding detail, I have, perhaps, been
more prolix and minute than the importance of the
subject may appear to demand; I have been in¬
fluenced by a desire to give that information, rela¬
tive to our proceedings in this respect, to the
friends of Missions in general, and to the patrons
of the South Sea Mission in particular, to which,
from the interest they have taken, and the support
they have afforded, I have considered them justly
entitled, and which I cannot but hope will be
satisfactory.

Although I have only given the proceedings of
one station, I believe that, with the exception of
some of the Missionaries baptizing only such adults
as they consider to be true Christians, and eligible
for church fellowship, the ministration has been
uniform in all. With us, those were baptized who
made a credible profession of belief in Christ, and
a desire to become his disciples, without any im¬
mediate view to church fellowship, which we con¬
sidered a subsequent measure.

An address on the nature of baptism, and the
duties of those who had received it, was printed

t

EARNESTNESS IN RELIGION. 31

after the first administration, and widely circulated,
apparently with good effect. The weekly meeting
for instructing those who desired baptism, was
continued, and the first dispensing of that ordi¬
nance produced an astonishing effect upon the
people. Multitudes, who had heretofore been in¬
different, now appeared in earnest about religion,
and the number who attended our preparatory
meeting soon amounted to four hundred. Those
who had been baptized, also, in general attended.

A state of religious feeling, such as I never wit¬
nessed elsewhere, and equal to any accounts of
revivals in America or other parts, of which I ever
read, now prevailed, not only in Huahine, but in
the other Missionary stations. The schools and
meetings were punctually and regularly attended.
The inhabitants of remote districts came and took
up their abode at the Missionary settlement; and
nothing could repress the ardour of the people in
what appeared to us their search after the means
of obtaining the Divine favour. Often have we
been aroused at break of day, by persons coming
to inquire what they must do to be saved—how
they might obtain the forgiveness of their sins, and
the favour of God; expressing their desires to
become the people of God, and to renounce every
practice contrary to Christian consistency.

Many were undoubtedly influenced by a desire
of baptism; this had introduced a new distinction,
which, notwithstanding our endeavours to prevent
it, they probably thought must confer some temporal
or spiritual advantage on those who received it.
But with others it was not so, as the event has
satisfactorily proved : many who at this time were
awakened to an extraordinary religious concern,
have ever since remained stedfast in their prin-

32 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

ciples, and uniform in the practice of every Chris¬
tian virtue. We now felt more than ever the
responsibility of our situation, and were afraid lest
we should discourage, and throw a stumbling-block
in the way of those who were sincerely inquiring
after God. Yet we felt no less apprehension lest
we should be the means of encouraging desires,
and cherishing the delusive hopes of such as were
either deceiving themselves or others, and, under
cover of seeking the favour of God, were actually
pursuing that which they imagined would improve
their temporal condition, or add to their respecta¬
bility in society. Some who had been baptized,
we found it necessary to admonish, lest they should
rest satisfied with the attainments already made,
and neglect the more important considerations.

In the interesting and critical duties now
devolving upon us, we endeavoured to act with
caution, taking the word of God for our directory,
and bearing in mind at the same time the peculiar
circumstances of the people; avoiding precipi¬
tancy in our public measures : so that, if we
erred, it might be on the side of carefulness. The
everlasting welfare of the people was our only
object; this we considered would not eventually
suffer, whatever might be the effect of withholding
baptism from those who might be proper subjects
for it. But by administering this rite to those who
sought it from improper motives, should it render
them satisfied with the sign, instead of the divine
influence signified, we might become accessary to
their fatal delusion.

Under the influence of these impressions, we
were perhaps led to defer the rite of baptism to
those who applied for it, longer than we ought to
have done; and I have known many who have

CAUTION OF THE MISSIONARIES.

33

been candidates upwards of one or two years. Their
views of the doctrine have been in general correct,
in their conduct there has been nothing unchristian
or immoral, and they have uniformly expressed
their desires to become the true disciples of Christ;
but during that period we have not baptized them,
merely because we have apprehended they did not
feel the necessity of that purification of heart, of
which baptism is only the external sign. When
we first administered that ordinance, we had no
idea of the natives thronging in such numbers to
receive it, and consequently, had not deliberated
on the term of that probation which we afterwards
deemed it desirable to institute.

in*

34 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES*

CHAP. II.

Interesting state of the people—Extensive prevalence of a
severe epidemic—Former diseases in the islands com¬
paratively few and mild—Priests the general physicians
—Native practice of physic—Its intimate connexion with
sorcery—Gods of the healing art—The tuabu, or broken
back—Insanity—Native warm bath—Occulists—Sur¬
gery—Setting a broken neck or back—The operation of
trepan — Native remedies superseded by European
medicine—Need of a more abundant supply—Former
cruelty towards the sick—Parricide—Present treatment
of invalids—Death of Messrs. Tessier and Bicknell—
Dying charge to the people—Missionary responsibility.

The same interesting state of the people by which
the close of 1819 had been distinguished, marked
the commencement of 1820. Never were our
direct Missionary labours more arduous and inces¬
sant ; and yet, during no period of our residence
there, were they more delightful. We beheld
indeed the isles waiting for the laws and institu¬
tions of Messiah, and felt that we had been sent to
a people emphatically prepared of the Lord, made
willing in the day of his power.

The inhabitants of the remote districts which we
had periodically visited, were many of them no
longer satisfied with an opportunity for conversa¬
tion on religious subjects once a week, but came
and built their houses in the neighbourhood of
Fare. We recommended those who remained, to

EPIDEMIC INFLUENZA. 35

do the same ; and soon after the annual meetings
in May, they so far complied as to render it unne¬
cessary for us to visit these stations.

One spacious chapel was opened in the latter
end of April, on which occasion I read a transla¬
tion of the sixth chapter of the second book of
Chronicles, and afterwards preached from the sixth
verse. Our Missionary meeting was remarkably
well attended,.and the subscriptions proportionably
liberal; they amounted to between three and four
thousand gallons of oil, besides cotton, and other
trifling articles.

In the midst of this delightful state of things,
the stations were visited with a distressing epide¬
mic, which spread through the whole group of
islands, and proved fatal to many of the people.
It was a kind of influenza, affecting the lungs and
throat; many attacked with it lost their voice. We
suffered in common with the people, and I was
obliged to relinquish all public duty for some
weeks. This kind of calamity has been frequently
experienced in the islands since they have been
the resort of foreign shipping, though we are not
aware that it prevailed before. A kind of dysen¬
tery appeared after the visit of Vancouver’s ship,
which called at the islands in 1790: this proved
fatal to a vast portion of the population. In the
year 1800, the Britannia, a London vessel, an¬
chored at Taiarabu. Two seamen absconded, and
a disease followed, less fatal, but very distress¬
ing, and more extensive, as scarcely an individual
escaped.

These diseases have generally passed through
the islands from the east to the west, in the direc¬
tion of the trade winds. After the above ap¬
peared among the people, it was for some months

d 2

36 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

confined to the Windward Islands; and so general
was its prevalence, that Pomare one day said to
Mr. Nott, “ If this had been a fatal or killing
disease, like that from Vancouver’s ship, no indi¬
vidual would have survived.”

As it began to subside, a canoe, called Hare -
aino, arrived from the Leeward Islands, and after
remaining a week or two at Tahiti, returned to
Huahine. Shortly after this, the people who had
been in the canoe were attacked, and the disease
ultimately spread as completely through this
group, as it had through that at which the foreign
vessel touched. Within the last two years, a
disorder, in many respects similar to that left by
the crew of Vancouver’s vessel, has again swept
through the islands, and carried off numbers of the
people.

The diseases formerly prevailing among the
South Sea Islanders were comparatively few;
those from which they now suffer are principally
pulmonary, intermittent, and cutaneous. The
most fatal are, according to their account, of
recent origin. While idolaters, they were accus¬
tomed to consider every bodily affliction as the
result of the anger of their gods; and the priest
was a more important personage, in time of sick¬
ness, than the physician. Native practitioners,
who were almost invariably priests or sorcerers,
were accustomed to apply such healing remedies
as the islands afforded ; and an invocation to some
spirit or god attended the administration of every
medicine. Tama, Taaroatuiliono, Eteate, and
Rearea, were the principal gods of physic and sur¬
gery. The former, in particular, was invoked for
the cure of fractures and bruises.

From the gods the priests pretended to have

PRACTICE OP PHYSIC.

37

received the knowledge of the healing art, and
to them a part of the physician's fee was con¬
sidered to belong. No animal or mineral sub¬
stances were admitted into their pharmacopoeia;
vegetable productions alone were used, and these
simply pulverized, infused, heated on the fire, or
with red-hot stones, and often fermented. Many
of their applications, however, were powerful,
especially a species of gourd, or wild cucumber.
A preparation, in which milk from the pulp of
the cocoa-nut formed a principal ingredient, was
sometimes followed by almost instant death.
Mr. Barff once took this preparation, at the
earnest recommendation of the people ; but it
nearly cost him his life, although he had not drunk
more than half the quantity prepared.

Frequently, when some medicines were about to
be administered, the friends and relatives of the
patient were sent for, that they might be at hand,
should the effect be unfavourable. They often
expected it would either save or destroy the
patient. Numerous ceremonies were connected
with every remedy applied; and much greater
dependence was placed on the efficacy of the
prayers, than on the effect of the medicine.

When a person was taken ill, the priest or phy¬
sician was sent for; as soon as he arrived, a young
plantain-tree, procured by some members of the
family, was handed to him, as an offering to the
god ; a present of cloth was also furnished, as his
own fee. He began by calling upon the name of
his god, beseeching him to abate his anger towards
the sufferer, to say what would propitiate him, or
what applications would afford relief. Some¬
times remedies were applied at the same time,
or the relatives sent to fetch certain herbs or roots.

38

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

but the priest usually went himself to compound
the raau or medicine: a considerable degree of
mystery was attached to this proceeding, and
the physicians appeared unwilling that others
should know of what their preparations consisted.
They pretended to be instructed by their god, as
to the herbs they should select, and the manner
of combining them. Different raaus , or medicines,
were used for different diseases; and although
they kept the composition of their nostrums a
secret, they were not unwilling that the report of
their efficacy might spread, in order to their ob¬
taining celebrity and extended practice. Hence,
when a person was afflicted with any particular
disease, and the inquiry made as to who should be
sent for, it was not unusual to hear it said—“ O ta
mea te raau maitai no ia mai ”—such a one has a
good medicine for this disease.

The small-pox, measles, hooping-cough, and a
variety of other diseases, to which most European
children are subject, are unknown ; yet they have
a disease called onilio , which in its progress, and
the effects on the face, corresponds with the small¬
pox, excepting that it is milder, and the inequa¬
lities it leaves on the skin soon disappear. There
is another disease, somewhat analogous to this,
resembling the species of erysipelas called shingles,
for the cure of which the natives apply a mixture
of bruised herbs and pulverized charcoal. Inflam¬
matory tumors are prevalent; and the only
remedy they apply, is a mixture of herbs bruised
with a stone. Asthmatic and other pulmonary
affections also occur, and, with persons about the
age of twenty, generally prove fatal.

Among the most prevalent and obstinate diseases
to which, as a nation, they are exposed, is one

SPINAL CURVATURE.

39

which terminates in a permanent affection of
the spine; it usually appears in early life, com¬
mencing in the form of an intermittent or
remittent. The body is reduced almost to a ske¬
leton ; and the disease terminates in death, or a
large curvature of the spine, so as considerably to
diminish the height of the individual, and cause a
very unsightly protrusion of the spine between
the shoulders, or a curvature inwards, causing the
breast-bones to appear unusually prominent.
Multitudes in every one of the Society Islands are
to be seen deformed by this disease, which the
natives call tuapu , literally, projecting; or, as we
should say, humped-back.

After this curvature has occurred, the patient
usually recovers, and, although greatly deformed,
does not appear more predisposed to disease than
others. Those individuals are often among the
most active, intelligent, and ingenious of the
people.

Connected with this disease, there are two re¬
markable circumstances. I am not prepared to
say that it is hereditary, but the children of such
persons are more frequently the subjects of it than
others. It is also singular that it should prevail
principally among the lower classes of society, the
farmers and the mechanics. I know of no prin¬
cipal chief, and I cannot recollect any one even of
secondary rank, thus afflicted : yet their rank and
station are hereditary. This single fact renders
more striking than it otherwise would be, the dif¬
ference in appearance between the chiefs and
people, and it may certainly warrant the inference,
that the meagre living of the latter exposes them to
maladies, from which more generous diet and com¬
fortable modes of life exempt their superiors.

40 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Some say this singular complaint, which was un¬
known to their ancestors, has only prevailed since
they have been visited by foreign shipping. It
does not prevail among the inhabitants of the sur¬
rounding islands ; but whether it be of recent
origin or not, in Tahiti it is very affecting to wit¬
ness the numbers that have suffered; and we
cannot but hope that as industry and civilization
advance, and their mode of living improves, it will
in an equal ratio disappear from among them.

Blindness is frequently induced by the same
disease that precedes the spinal curvature. The
condition of the blind, when suffered to live, must,
under the reign of idolatry, have been truly
lamentable—they were generally objects of deri¬
sion and neglect, if not of wanton cruelty.

Insanity prevailed in a slight degree, but indi¬
viduals under its influence met with a very different
kind of treatment. They were supposed to be
inspired or possessed by some god, who, the
natives imagined, had entered every one suffering
under mental aberrations. On this account no
control was exercised, but the highest respect was
shewn them. They were, however, generally
avoided, and their actions were considered as the
deeds of the god, rather than the man. Under
these circumstances, when the poor wretch became
his own destroyer, it was not regarded as an event
to be deplored. Deafness was sometimes expe¬
rienced ; and there are a few persons in the islands
who can neither speak nor hear distinctly.

In their application to particular diseases, the
priests manifested considerable acquaintance with
the medicinal properties of the herbs, and their
adaptation to the complaint, to relieve which they
were employed ; but their practice must have been

MEDICINE AND SURGERY.

41

very uncertain and ineffectual, though they were
held in high esteem by all ranks. Convulsions
being sometimes experienced, were considered to
result from the direct power of the god. Sudden
death was also attributed to the same cause —and
an attack so terminating, was called rima atua,
“ hand of god/’ Those who died suddenly were
also said to be haruhia e te atua , or uumehia e
te atua : “ seized by the god, or strangled by the
god.” Indeed, the gods were supposed to send
all the diseases with which they were afflicted.

Whatever mystery they might attach to the pre¬
paration and use of medicine, their practice of
surgery, and application of external remedies,
were more simple and straightforward. They did
not apply friction in the same manner as the
Sandwich Islanders sometimes do, viz. by placing
the patient flat on the ground, and rolling a twelve
or fourteen pound shot backwards and forwards
along the back ; but in a far more gentle manner,
by rubbing with the hands the muscles of the
limbs, and pressing them in the same way as the
Indians practise shampooing.

The natives had no method of using the warm-
bath, but often seated their patients on a pile of
heated stones strewed over with green herbs or
leaves, and kept them covered with a thick cloth
till the most profuse perspiration was induced ;
something like that produced by the fashionable
vapour bath. In this state, to our great astonish¬
ment, at the most critical seasons of illness, the
patient would leave the heap of stones, and plunge
into the sea, near which the oven was generally
heated. Though the shock must have been very
great, they appeared to sustain no injury from this
transition.

42 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

There were persons among them celebrated as
oculists, but their skill principally consisted in
removing foreign substances from the eye; and
when applied to for this purpose, they, as well as
others, received the payment or fee before they
commenced their operations; but if the present did
not please them, they, to satisfy their employers,
sometimes took one splinter, &c. out of the eye, and
left another in, that they might be sent for again.
Their surgeons were remarkably dexterous in
closing a cut or thrust, by drawing the edges
carefully together, and applying the pungent juice
of the ape, arum costatum , to the surface. This,
acting like caustic, must hav6 caused great pain.

A fractured limb they set without much trouble ;
applying splinters of bamboo-cane to the sides,
and keeping it bound up till healed. A disloca¬
tion they usually succeeded in reducing ; but the
other parts of their surgical practice were marked
by a rude promptness, temerity, and barbarism,
almost incredible. A man one day fell from a
tree, and dislocated some part of his neck. His
companions, on perceiving it, instantly took him
up : one of them placed his head between his
own knees, and held it firmly; while the others,
taking hold of his body, twisted the joint into its
proper place.

On another occasion, a number of young men,
in the district of Fare, were carrying large stones,
suspended from each end of a pole across their
shoulders, their usual mode of carrying a burden :
one of them so injured the vertebrse, as to be
almost unable to move ; he had, as they expressed
it, fati te tua , broken the back. His fellow-work¬
men laid him flat on his face on the grass; one
grasped and pulled his shoulders, and the other his

OPERATION OF TREPANNING. 43

legs, while a third actually pressed with both knees
his whole weight upon the back, where the bones
appeared displaced. It was not far from Mr.
BarfF’s house where the accident occurred, and,
observing the people assembled, he went to inquire
the cause, and saw them thus engaged. On his
asking what they were doing, they coolly replied,
that they were only straightening the man’s back,
wdiich had been broken with carrying stones.
The vertebrae appeared to be replaced; they bound
a long girdle repeatedly round his body, led him
home, and, without any other treatment, he was
in a short time able to resume his employment.

The operation of trepanning they sometimes
attempted, and say they have practised it with suc¬
cess. It is reported that there are persons living
in the island of Borabora on whom it has been
performed, or at least an operation very much
resembling it: the bones of the skull having been
fractured in battle, they have cleared away the
skin and coverings, and, having removed the frac¬
tured piece of bone, have carefully fitted in a piece
of cocoa-nut shell, and replaced the covering and
skin ; on the healing of which, the man has
recovered. I never saw any individual who had
undergone this operation, but, from the concur¬
rent testimony of the people, I have no doubt they
have performed it.

It is also related, although I confess I can
scarcely believe it, that on some occasions, when
the brain has been injured as well as the bone,
they have opened the skull, taken out the injured
portion of the brain, and, having a pig ready, have
killed it, taken out the pig’s brains, put them in
the man’s head, and covered them up. They
persist in stating that this has been done ; but

44 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

add, that the persons always became furious with
madness, and died. They had no idea of phlebo¬
tomy as a remedy for disease, but were clever at
lancing an abscess, which was generally effected
with the thorn from a kind of bramble, or a shark’s
tooth.

However great the influence of those persons,
who administered medicine, or practised surgery,
might formerly have been, it has entirely ceased
since the people have been acquainted with the
more certain and efficacious application of English
remedies. Like the priests in their temples for¬
merly, the minister of their religion, at every station,
is now sought in all cases of sickness, as their
physician; and no small portion of our time was
occupied in administering medicine, so far as our
scanty means would admit.

This is a task necessarily devolving upon the
Missionaries, as the only Europeans residing
amongst them, either possessing medicine, or
knowing how to use it; and it is a claim which
we never desired to refuse. It is perfectly compa¬
tible with the higher duties of our station—the
cure of their spiritual maladies. We have only to
regret that we have not possessed better qualifica¬
tions, and more ample means for its efficient dis¬
charge. So long as our family medicine has
lasted, we have been ready to share it with those
who were in need, and have often been thankful
(when afflicted ourselves, and destitute) to receive
the simple remedies they were able to supply.

The Missionary Society has readily furnished us
with medical books and instruments; and for our
own use, a liberal supply of medicines : but it has
generally been inadequate to the wants of the
people. Medicine is expensive, and perhaps it

WANT OF MEDICINES.

45

would not be considered a just appropriation of
the Society’s funds, to expend them in providing
medicine for those among whom its agents labour;
yet it is one of the most affecting sights a Mis¬
sionary can witness, when visiting his people, to
behold them enduring the most painful suffering,
pining under the influence of disease, and perhaps
sinking into a premature grave, and to know that,
if he had the means within his reach, he could at
least relieve them.

The occurrences are not unfrequent, wherein an
anxious mother brings a poor sickly child to his
house, with which she is obliged to return unre¬
lieved, not because the disease is remediless, but
because the Missionary has not, it may be, a cheap
and simple remedy to bestow. The natives would
cheerfully purchase so valuable an article as me¬
dicine, by bartering in the islands the produce of
their labour, but they have no means of so doing.
If they send it to England, the return is distant
and uncertain; and mistakes, embarrassing to
them, are likely to occur. It is to be hoped,
however, that as the means of intercommunication
become more frequent and regular, these diffi¬
culties will be removed. Several generous indi¬
viduals have laid the people of some of the islands
under great obligations, of which they are duly
sensible, by sending them out, gratuitously, a libe¬
ral supply of the most useful medicines.

It may not be necessary for a Missionary in a
civilized nation, where the healing art is cultivated,
or going to a country where European colonies are
settled, or commercial establishments are formed,
to be acquainted with the practice of physic. It
is, however, important, and ought to be borne in
mind by those who are looking forward to Mission-

46 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

ary work, and by those who patronize them, that
it would be of the highest advantage for one going
to an uncivilized people, to be acquainted with the
qualities and use of medicine.

A degree of proficiency that would qualify him
to practise in his native country, is not necessary.
But so much knowledge as would enable him to
be exceedingly serviceable to the people, to win
their confidence and affection, and to confer on
him an influence the most important and advan¬
tageous, in accomplishing the great objects of his
mission, might be acquired prior to his departure
from England, without in an injurious degree divert¬
ing his attention from other pursuits. I speak
from painful experience of deficiency in the means
for meeting the necessities of my own family, as
well as those of the people among v/hom I have
resided. I know they still exist, and therefore
express myself more strongly than I should other¬
wise feel warranted to do.

The introduction of Christianity has been fol¬
lowed by a greater alteiation in the general cir¬
cumstances of the people, than even the medical
treatment of the sick. The change has been
highly advantageous to the sufferers, who formerly
experienced the greatest neglect, and often the
most brutal cruelty. As soon as an individual
was affected with any disorder, he was considered
as under the ban of the gods: by some crime, or
the influence of some enemy, he was supposed
to have become obnoxious to their anger, of which
his malady was the result.

These ideas, relative to the origin of diseases, had
a powerful tendency to stifle every feeling of sym¬
pathy and compassion, and to restrain all from the
exercise of those acts of kindness that are so grate-

FORMER CRUELTY TO THE SICK. 47

ful to the afflicted, and afford such alleviation to
their sufferings. The attention of the relatives and
friends was directed to the gods, and their greatest
efforts were made to appease their anger by offer¬
ings, and to remove the continuance of its effects
by prayers and incantations. The simple medi¬
cine administered, was considered more as the
vehicle or medium by which the god would act,
than as possessing any power itself to arrest the
progress of disease.

If their prayers, offerings, and remedies were
found unavailing, the gods were considered im¬
placable, and the diseased person was doomed to
perish. Some heinous crime was supposed to have
been committed. Whenever a chief of any dis¬
tinction was afflicted, some neglect or insult was
supposed to have been Shewn to the gods or the
priest, and the most costly offerings were made to
avert the effects of their wrath, and secure the
recovery of the chieftain. Human victims were
sometimes sacrificed, ceremonies performed, and
prayers offered. These were not made to the na¬
tional idol, but to the tutelar god of the family.

They were all, at times, unavailing; and when
they imagined, in consequence of the rank or
ancestry of the chief, that the deity ought to have
been propitious, but they found he was not, and
the sufferer did not recover, with a singular
promptitude, in powerful contrast with their ordi¬
nary conduct towards their gods, they execrated
the idol, and banished him from the temple, choos¬
ing in his place some other deity that they hoped
would be favourable.

The interest manifested in the recovery of their
chief would depend much upon his age. If ad¬
vanced in years, comparatively little concern would

48 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

be felt for his restoration. Old age was seldom
treated with respect, often with contempt and
cruelty.

In seasons of illness, especially if protracted,
the common people, and the aged, received but
little attention. If the malady was not soon re¬
lieved by the prayers of the priest, and the remedies
he administered, the sufferer was abandoned.
Sometimes he was allowed to remain in the house
of those with whom he was connected. But, in
general, a small temporary hut was erected with a
few cocoa-nut leaves, either near a stream, or at a
short distance from the dwelling. Into this, as to
the condemned cell, the sick person was removed.
For a time, the children or friends would supply a
scanty portion of food, but they often grew weary
of sending this small alleviation ; and it is believed
that many have died, as much from hunger, as
from disease.

This process was sometimes too slow for those
who were connected with the sick, and who desired
to share any property they might possess. If they
thought there was but little prospect of recovery,
they would determine to destroy them at once.
Murder was at times perpetrated, under these
circumstances, with heartless and wanton bar¬
barity. The spear or the club was employed, to
effect what disease had been too tardy in accom¬
plishing. All the persons in the house, when
these deeds of horror were performed, were called
out; and the friends or companions of the sufferer,
armed with spears, prepared for their savage work.
It was in vain the helpless man cried for mercy;
instead of attending to his cry, they “ would amuse
themselves in trying which could take best aim”
with the spear they threw; or, rushing upon him

BURYING ALIVE.

49

with spear in hand, they would exclaim, Tui i vaho ,
pierce through—and thus transfix him to the couch
on which he was lying.

Sometimes they buried the sick alive. When
this was designed, they dug a pit, and then, per¬
haps, proposed to the invalid to bathe, offering to
carry him to the water, either in their arms, or
placed on a board; but, instead of conveying him
to the place of bathing, they would carry him to
the pit, and throw him in. Here, if any cries were
made, they threw down large stones in order to
stifle his voice, filled up the grave with earth, and
then returned to their dwellings.

The natives once gave me an account of an un¬
happy sufferer, whom they were conveying to the
grave; he perceived it at a short distance before
they approached, and, influenced by fear, sprang
from the board, and endeavoured to escape. He
was pursued, and crippled by a large stone, and
thus secured by the murderers. I was acquainted
with two persons, who were sawyers, and resided
some time in the island of Huahine, who had both
been engaged in burying one of their companions,
merely because they felt the few attentions re¬
quired, a burden. One of them, whose name was
Papehara, is dead; the other is still living.

It is unnecessary to add to these details. Every
friend to humanity will rejoice to know, that since
the subversion of that system, under the sanction
of which they were practised, they have ceased ;
and that now, from the influence of Christian
principles, although the aged do not receive
that veneration which is paid to gray hairs and
length of years in some countries, they are treated
with kindness.

The sick are also nursed with attention by their

III. E

50

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

relatives and children; and so far from deeming it
a burden to attend to them, in Eimeo, Huahine,
and, I believe, in some of the other islands, the
natives have formed benevolent societies among
themselves, for the purpose of building houses,
supplying with food and clothing those who, in
their old age and helpless state, have no friends
or children to take care of them. In these dwell¬
ings they are lodged, and clothed, and fed. Per¬
sons also visit them for the purpose of reading the
scriptures, and praying with them; their present
necessities are supplied, the decline of life made
easy, and their passage to the grave comparatively
tranquil and happy. It is only necessary to con¬
trast this with the former treatment of individuals
under similar circumstances, in order to strengthen
our conviction of the incalculable diminution of
misery which has resulted from their reception
of the gospel, and the temporal blessings it has
imparted.

During the year 1820, the Mission in the Wind¬
ward Islands sustained a heavy bereavement in the
decease of Messrs. Bicknell and Tessier. The
latter, who was a man of modest and unobtrusive
habits, but patient and unremitting industry in
the important work of educating the rising genera¬
tion, died on the 23d of July. His Christian
course had not been splendid or attractive, but it
had been undeviating and unsullied. His end was
not only peaceful, but triumphant in faith, and
glowing in anticipation of the holy and spiritual
joys awaiting him in the abodes of blessedness.

Mr. Bicknell, whose health was not firm, fol¬
lowed the remains of his faithful coadjutor to the
tomb; and while standing on the edge of the
closing grave, and addressing the sorrowing multi-

MESSRS. BICKNELL AND TESSIER. 51

tude around, felt indisposed from the exposure.
This was followed by fever, which terminated his
life fourteen days after the death of Mr. Tessier.
Though his illness was short, his mind, towards
the latter part of it, was tranquil, in reliance on
that Saviour who alone can support in the pros¬
pect of dissolution.

I have heard that he was the first individual who
offered his services to the Missionary Society, and
was among the first who landed from the Duff in
1796. He remained in Tahiti till the civil war in
1808 drove him and his companions from the
islands, at which time he visited New South Wales
and England. When Pomare invited the Mis¬
sionaries to return, he was the first to resume his
station, which he never abandoned, till called by
death from a field, on which he had bestowed
upwards of twenty years of patient persevering
toil, and from which, though long barren and
fruitless, he had ultimately been honoured to reap
the first-fruits of a glorious harvest.

In 1818 he removed to the populous district of
Papara, on the south-west side of Tahiti. This
district had, prior to the last war, been the strong¬
hold of idolatry , and was the head-quarters of the
pagan army ; and the inhabitants, until the death
of their chieftain in the memorable battle of
Bunaaui'a, obstinately opposed the progress of
Christianity. Here, under the favourable auspices
of Tati, Mr. Bicknell commenced his labours; and
while Mr. Tessier daily instructed numbers in the
school, Mr. Bicknell collected around him large
and attentive congregations, baptized many, and
gathered an interesting Christian church.

His latest earthly concern regarded the stedfast-
ness and welfare of his charge. On the last even-

e 2

52 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

mg of his life, and but a few hours before his
departure, he addressed Mr. Crook (who had
attended him during his illness, and who was then
about to perform divine service among his people)
on the subject. “ Tell them/ 7 said the dying
Missionary, “ that my conviction of the truth of
those doctrines I have taught, is now stronger than
ever. Tell them I am dying, but that these truths
are now my support. Tell them to be stedfast.”
He left, not only a destitute church and afflicted
congregation, but a sorrowing widow and five
fatherless children, to mourn his departure. Mrs.
Bicknell was afterwards united in marriage with
Mr. Davies, but she did not long survive, and the
children are now orphans. Mr. Caw, who had
been sent out to instruct the natives in ship¬
building and other arts, but who had been long
incapacitated by illness, died about the same
time.

A CHRISTIAN CHURCH.

53

CHAP. III.

General view of a Christian church—Uniformity of pro¬
cedure in the different stations—Instructions from
England—Preparatory teaching—Distinct nature of a
Christian church—Qualifications and duties of com¬
municants—The sacrament of the Lord’s Supper—For¬
mation of the first church of Christ in the Leeward
Islands—Administration of the ordinance—Substitute
for bread—Order of the service—Character, experience,
and peculiarities of the communicants—Ruaiti—Manner
of admitting church members—Regard to the decla¬
rations of scripture—Instances of the power of con¬
science—Appointment of deacons—Improvement in
parental discipline—Great attention to religion.

While the Lord of Missions was thus thinning
our ranks, he was shewing us that the work in
which we were engaged was not ours, but his ;
that though the agent was removed, the agency
under which he had acted was not thereby im¬
peded. The pleasing change we had observed
among our people every year, increased during
the present in an astonishing manner, and we had
the high satisfaction of witnessing the formation
and organization of the first church of Christ in the
Leeward or Society Islands. It took place early
in the month of May, and shortly after the opening
of the new chapel.

54

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Although we did not experience that difficulty
which, from the peculiar circumstances of the
Mission and the people, had attended the first
administration of baptism, we regarded it as a
matter requiring grave and prayerful deliberation.
We felt that our proceedings would influence the
views and conduct, not only of those by whom we
were surrounded, but perhaps of future gene¬
rations. A foundation was now to be laid, on
which, so far as order and discipline were con¬
cerned, the superstructure of the Christian church
in that island was to rise in every succeeding age,
and by which it would certainly be affected in many
important respects. Anxious therefore to begin
aright, we sought, and trust we received, Divine
guidance, endeavouring to regulate our proceed¬
ings altogether by the directions of the sacred
volume. It was, however, difficult to divest our¬
selves entirely of those views of the subject which
we had imbibed from the writings of men.

A Christian church we considered to be a society
of faithful and holy men, voluntarily associated for
the purposes of public worship, mutual edification,
the participation of the Lord’s supper, and the pro¬
pagation of Christianity: the Lord Jesus Christ
was regarded as its spiritual Head ; and only such
as had given themselves unto the Redeemer, and
were spiritually united to him, members. These
were our general views. In England we had be¬
longed to different denominations, and, however
adapted the peculiarities in discipline, of those
communions, might appear to the circumstances
of British Christians, we did not deem it expedient
to take any one altogether for our model. It ap¬
peared to all more desirable, in the existing state
of the people, to divest the churches we might be

INSTRUCTIONS FROM ENGLAND. 55

honoured of God to plant among the Gentiles, of
every thing complicated or artificial, that they
might be established in the purest simplicity of
form, and, as far as possible, according to the
directions of revelation. Had any been pertina¬
cious of their peculiarities, they had now the fairest
opportunity of acting accordingly.

General good, however, was our object; and
that line of procedure, which, as a whole, we could
unitedly pursue, in closest accordance with scrip¬
ture, and at the same time with greatest advantage
to the people, was more desired by every one,
than any peculiar views on minor points. I believe
it is from the paramount influence of these feelings,
more than from any other cause, that such uni¬
formity exists. There was no agreement previously
entered into among the Missionaries, but those of
each station were left, with the people around who
might be brought to a reception of the truth, to
assume for themselves such form of constitution
and discipline, as should in their views be most
accordant with the word of God; and yet I am
not aware, that in any material point there is the
smallest difference among them.

As the subject had long been one of consider¬
able anxiety, we had written to the Directors of
the Society for their advice. They in general
referred us to the New Testament. Several per¬
sons, however, interested in the progress of truth
among the islands, wrote to the Missionaries indi¬
vidually, and also communicated their views to the
public through the medium of the Evangelical
Magazine. * Among others, the Rev. Mr. Great-
head, whose views of church government were
rather peculiar, wrote very fully. His plans were
at first adopted by one or two of the Missionaries;

56 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

yet the free admission, not only to baptism, but to
the ordinance of the Lord’s supper, of such persons
as sincerely desired to receive the same, without
requiring evidence of their being true spiritual
converts to Christ, threatened great irregularity
and confusion; it was therefore discontinued.

In our public instructions, we inculcated on
those who, we had reason to believe, were under
the decisive influence of the Spirit of Christ, the
duty of commemorating his dying love by that
ordinance which he had instituted, and by which
his disciples were to shew forth his death till he
should come.—Those who had been baptized, now
desired to be more particularly informed how, and
in what circumstances, they were to observe this
injunction of the Lord. We, therefore, proposed
to devote one afternoon every week to the instruc¬
tion of such as, having been baptized, desired to
be united in church-fellowship. Fifteen indi¬
duals attended the first meeting, and were after¬
wards joined by others. We met them regularly,
and endeavoured to instruct them as fully and
familiarly as possible in the duty of partaking of
the sacrament; the nature, design, and scriptural
constitution of church-fellowship; the discipline to
be maintained, the advantages to be anticipated,
and the duties resulting therefrom.

Next to the personal piety, which in church-
members is considered indispensable, it appeared
most important to impress the minds of the people
with the distinctness of a Christian church from
any political, civil, or other merely human insti¬
tution. In the system of false religion under
which they had lived, and by which their habits of
judgment had been formed, the highest civil and
sacerdotal offices had been united in one person.—

NATURE OF A CHRISTIAN CHURCH. 57

The king was generally chief priest of the national
temple; and the high-priesthood of the principal
idols was usually held by some member, or near
relative, of the reigning family. On many occa¬
sions of worship also, the king was the represen¬
tative of the god. The chiefs and the gods appear
always to have exercised a combined influence
over the populace. The power of the gods often
seemed only exercised to establish the authority of
the king, who was by the people regarded as filling
his high station by lineal descent from them, while
the measures of the government as often appeared
to be pursued to inspire fear, and secure acknow¬
ledgments for the gods. Hence, when human
sacrifices were required, the priest applied to the
king, and the king gave orders to provide the
victim. Since the kings and chiefs, as well as the
people, had embraced the gospel, and many had
taken the lead in propagating it, and had uni¬
formly adorned it by their example, the people
sometimes said, that had their chiefs been idolaters
or wicked rulers, it would have been improper for
them to have interfered in any matters connected
with Christianity, but that now they were truly
pious, it accorded with their ideas of propriety, that
in the Christian church they should, as Christian
chiefs, be pre-eminent.

We told them they had not imbibed these ideas
in a Christian, but in a pagan school; that the
authority of their kings and chiefs was exerted
over their persons, and regarded their outward
conduct; that they held their high station under
God, for the well-being of society, and were, when
influenced by uprightness and humanity, the
greatest blessings to the communities over which
they presided. We also stated, that in this station

58

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

every Christian was bound, no less by duty to
God than to man, to render obedience to their
laws, to respect and maintain their authority,
and to pay them every due homage. We also
told them, that in the church of Jesus Christ,
which was purely a religious association, so far as
distinctions among men, from dignity of station,
elevation of office, fame, or wealth, were con¬
cerned, all members were brethren; and that
Christ himself was the only spiritual chief or King;
that his influence or reign was not temporal, but,
like his authority, spiritual. The only distinction
recognized in a Christian church, we informed
them, regarded those who acted as officers, and
that such distinctions only prevailed in what con¬
cerned them as a church, or voluntarily associated
religious society, and did not refer to their usual
intercourse with the community of which they
were members, and in which they were governed
by the ordinary regulations established in civilized
society. The exercise of any civil power in matters
purely religious, we did not think would be advan¬
tageous to the latter; and even if such had been
our opinion, we could find in the New Testament
no example or precept to authorize such pro-
ceedure.

The duties which those who united in church
fellowship were required to perform towards each
other, towards those desirous of uniting with them,
and to the careless or irreligious, were also fully
and frequently brought under their notice, together
with the paramount duty of every Christian to
endeavour to propagate Christianity, that the
Christian church might become a kind of nursery,
from which other churches might be planted in the
extensive wilderness of paganism around.

THE LORD’S SUPPER.

59

Next to this, the institution, nature, design, ad¬
ministration, and uses of the Lord’s supper, were
familiarly explained, that they might understand,
as far as possible, the engagement into which they
were desirous to enter, and the observances con¬
nected therewith.

The Lord’s supper, or sacrament, we regarded
as analogous to the passover, symbolical of the
death of Christ as a propitiation or sacrifice, of
which event it was commemorative; that it was
designed to perpetuate the remembrance of His
death, even to the end of time, and was to be in
faith participated by all who build their hopes of
admission to the heavenly state on His atonement.

Having been for some months engaged weekly
in imparting this kind of instruction to those who
had expressed their desire to receive the ordinance
of the Lord’s supper, the month of May was se¬
lected for forming the church. Sixteen individuals,
who in the judgment of charity we had every rea¬
son to believe were sincere Christians, then met
us, and, after imploring the blessing of the great
Head of the church, offering a suitable address,
and receiving their declaration of faith in Christ,
and desire to enjoy the privileges of Christian
fellowship, a voluntary association was formed, the
right-hand of fellowship was given, and they recog¬
nized each other as members of the first church
of Christ in Huahine.

We did not present any creed or articles of faith
for their subscription on this occasion. Sensible
of the insufficiency of all mere human writings,
however excellent, to restrain the mind, or control
the opinions of men, we thought it best to dispense
with them, lest the bare assent, or subscription to
certain articles of faith, or doctrines of truth.

60

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

should be substituted, as grounds of confidence,
for an experience of the influence of those doc¬
trines on the heart. Their names only were
entered in a book kept by the Missionaries for that
purpose, and called the Church-book. This little
meeting was held in the chapel at Fare, on Friday
evening, the 5th of May, 1820 : and it is hoped
that what was done on earth among the dis¬
ciples of Christ below, though it may be dissolved
by death, will be realized in his presence above,
and endure through eternity.

On the following Sabbath, May the 7th, an un¬
usual number attended the large place of worship.
Mr. Davies preached in the forenoon, from Luke
xxii. 19. In front of the pulpit, a neat table,
covered with white native cloth, was fixed, upon
which the sacramental vessels were placed. These
had been furnished from England. Wheaten
bread was an article of diet that we did not very
often obtain ourselves, and which the people sel¬
dom tasted : we should have preferred it for this
ordinance, yet, as we could not, from the irregu¬
larity and uncertainty of our supplies at that
period, expect always to have it, we deemed it
better to employ an article of food as nearly
resembling it as possible, and which was at all
times p rocurable. From these considerations, we
felt no hesitation in using, on this occasion, the
roasted or baked bread-fruit, pieces of which were
placed on the proper vessel.

Wine, we were also thankful to possess for this
purpose; and although w r e have sometimes been
apprehensive that we might be under the necessity
of substituting the juice of the cocoa-nut for that
of the grape, or discontinuing the observance of
this ordinance, (to which latter painful alternative.

ORDER OF THE SERVICE,

61

some of our brethren have been reduced,) we have
been providentially favoured with a sufficiency.
Over the elements placed on the table, a beauti¬
fully white cloth had been spread, before the
accustomed service began. When this was over,
although it was intimated that any who wished
might retire, no one left the chapel. Mr. Davies,
the senior Missionary or pastor of the church,
took his station behind the communion-table;
Mr. Barff sat at one end ; and I took my seat at
the other.

When the communicants had seated themselves
in a line in front, we sung a hymn. The words of
institution, viz. passages of scripture containing
the directions for the observance of this hallowed
festival, &c. were read, a blessing implored, and
the bread, which was then broken, handed to each
individual. The wine was next poured into the
cup, a blessing again sought, when the wine was
handed to the communicants. After this, another
hymn was sung, a short prayer offered, and the
service closed.

I have been thus particular in detailing the
order observed on this occasion, as affording not
only a correct statement of our proceedings at
thris time, but also a brief general view of the
manner of administering this sacred ordinance
in the different Missionary stations throughout
the islands.

It would be impossible to give any thing like an
adequate description of my own emotions, at this
truly interesting service. The scene was worth
coming from England to witness, and I trust the
impression was as salutary as it was powerful and
solemn. I am also quite unable to conceive what
the feelings of our senior colleague must at this

62 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

time have been. He had been many years among
the people before any change in favour of Chris¬
tianity took place, and had often beheld them, not
only ignorant and wretched, sunk to the lowest
state of debasing impurity, and accustomed to the
perpetration of the most horrid cruelty, but alto¬
gether given to idolatry, and often mad after their
idols.

Our joy arose, in a great degree, from the de¬
lightful anticipation awakened in connexion with
the admission of the anxious multitude, who were
waiting to enter into, and, we hoped, prepared of
God to participate in, all the blessings which this
ordinance signified, and in reference to the eter¬
nity we hoped to spend with them, when we should
join the church triumphant above. His joys,
however, in addition to those arising from these
sources, must have been powerfully augmented by
the recollection of what those individuals once
were, and the many hours of apparently cheerless
and hopeless toil he had bestowed upon them, now
so amply, so astonishingly rewarded.

A state of feeling, almost unearthly, seemed to
pervade those who now, for the first time, united
with their teachers in commemorating the dying
love of Christ. Recollection, perhaps, presented
in strong colours the picture of their former state.
Their abominations, their reckless cruelty, their
infatuation in idolatry, the frequent, impure, and
sanguinary rites in which they had engaged—■
their darkened minds, and still darker prospects—
arose, perhaps, in vivid and rapid succession. At
the same time, in striking contrast with their
former feelings, their present desire after moral
purity, their occupation in the worship of Jehovah,
their hopes of pardon and acceptance with him.

DEVOTIONAL FEELINGS.

63

through the atonement made by the offering of his
Son, the boundless and overwhelming effects of
his love herein displayed, and the radiant light and
hopes of everlasting blessedness and spiritual en¬
joyment, which, by the event commemorated, they
were encouraged to anticipate, were all adapted to
awaken, in minds susceptible as theirs, no com¬
mon train of feelings. Often have we seen the
intense emotion of the heart, at these seasons,
strongly depicted in the countenance, and the face
suffused with tears.

The hundreds who remained to witness the
scene were not unconcerned spectators. Their
deep interest in what was passing, was indicated
in their thoughtful and agitated countenances, and
the subsequent conduct of many evinced the kind
of impression they received. The anxious concern
which we had witnessed among the people, since
the preceding summer, appeared to increase, and
demanded redoubled efforts for their spiritual ad¬
vantage. Numbers came as candidates for baptism,
and regularly attended the meeting for the instruc¬
tion of such. Others, from among those who had
been baptized, desired to be admitted to church
fellowship.

Our liveliest affections were awakened on their
behalf; but while we had reason to believe many
were sincere, we had also reason to fear that
others were influenced by less commendable mo¬
tives. Anxious to afford encouragement or caution,
as the circumstances or character of each required,
it was not easy to satisfy our own minds as to the
best manner of proceeding. We feared to dis¬
courage any who were sincerely seeking a more
intimate acquaintance with Christ, and who were
desirous to be fully instructed in all things con-

64 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

cerning bis will. On the other hand, we were
equally fearful of encouraging the indulgence of
improper views, or of admitting to the ordinances
of the gospel any who were uninfluenced by those
motives which Christ would approve.

There was, however, no part of our charge in
whose welfare we now felt so deeply interested, as
the little flock, of which the great Shepherd had
made us the pastors. So far from considering our
work done, with special reference to those whom
we had instructed in the nature of a Christian
church, and had admitted to this fold, we con¬
sidered it as only the commencement of a new
series of important and interesting duties, arising
out of the new relation now subsisting between us.
We experienced an attachment binding our hearts
to theirs, to which we had before been strangers,
and we had reason to believe the feeling was re¬
ciprocal.

Their knowledge was but limited, notwithstand¬
ing all our efforts to instruct them; and as their
duties increased, their situation became more con¬
spicuous, and their temptations greater. Latent
depravity still lurked in their hearts, and it might be
expected that their great spiritual adversary would
not leave them unmolested. We were also fearful
lest the privileges they were raised to enjoy might
engender or nourish secret pride, or induce a
disposition to rest satisfied with having obtained
admission to the outward and visible church of
Christ, and thus lead them to neglect that constant
seeking after God, and the cultivation of those
Christian virtues, by which alone they could sus¬
tain, with credit to Christianity, and benefit to
their own minds, the situation to which they had
been raised. They would naturally become models

ADMISSION OF MEMBERS. 65

of imitation to others, and would exert no ordinary
influence on the community at large. It was
therefore gratifying to behold them humble, prayer¬
ful, watchful, and diligent. The weekly meeting
with the candidates for communion, whose num¬
ber was greatly increased, we constantly attended,
and recommended the church members not to ab¬
sent themselves unnecessarily.

At these times we endeavoured to explain the
truths in which they were most interested, and,
with regard to the members themselves, leaving
the first principles of the doctrines of Christ, we
endeavoured gradually and gently to lead them on
to a more extensive acquaintance with the grand
and varied doctrines of the gospel, and the im¬
portant relative and other duties resulting there¬
from.

These meetings were exceedingly interesting,
from the simple yet unequivocal evidences often
afforded of the operation of the Spirit of the Al¬
mighty upon the hearts of the people. Our little
church, from time to time, received considerable
accessions of such as we had reason to hope were
also members of the church of the first-born, whose
names are written in heaven.

In the admission of members, we acted with
what perhaps many would consider the extreme of
caution. Individuals whose moral character has
been irreproachable, whose views of divine truth
have been clear and scriptural, and whose motives,
so far as we could judge, have been pure, have
remained two, and sometimes three years as can¬
didates, although we could not prefer any allega¬
tion directly against them. The admission of such
has been declined, because we feared, that though
their knowledge was commendable, and their con-

III. F

66 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

duct influenced by the precepts of the gospel, their
hearts were not under its decisive influence; in
short, that they had not undergone that change of
mind, which our Lord himself, in his conversation
with Nicodemus, called being “ born again,” and
without which he had declared no man can enter
into the kingdom of heaven. In other instances,
however, the testimony relative to this change
was so decisive and powerful, that we could not,
dared not, hesitate.

The reason the natives have given of their Chris¬
tian hope, has often been not only satisfactory, as
it regarded the individual, but important, and in a
high degree interesting, as an evidence of the
universality of the depravity of man ; and also as
shewing the effects of Divine truth, under the
influence of the Spirit of God, to be the same
in every clime, producing corresponding effects
upon men of every diversity in colour, language,
and circumstance. Hence, one of the strongest
modern evidences in the history of man, of the
unequivocal origin of Christianity, has been afford¬
ed, and its perfect adaptation to the condition of
the whole human race.

The same latent enmity to the moral restraints
Christianity imposes on the vicious propensities of
men, the same unwillingness to admit its uncom¬
promising claims to the surrender of the heart, was
experienced here, as in other parts. The same
tendency to suppose the favour of God might be
obtained by services which they could perform,
and the same unbelief under convictions of sin, and
unwillingness to go to the Saviour without a recom¬
mendation—that is so often met with in others—
was felt by them.

But while, in these respects, the experience of

DOCTRINAL VIEWS.

67

the converts in the South Sea Islands resembled
that of Christians in other parts of the world,
there were points in which it has often appeared to
us peculiar. We never met with one who doubted
the natural depravity, or innate tendency to evil,
in the human heart. We never met with any who
were inclined to suppose they could, without some
procuring cause, be justified in the sight of God.
This may perhaps arise from the circumstance of
there being no individual among them, whose past
life had not been polluted by deeds which even
natural conscience told them were wrong, and
consequently, no arguments were necessary to con¬
vince any one that he was guilty before God. They
must have denied the existence of the Deity, and
of all by which the living God is distinguished
from their own senseless idols, before they could
for a moment suppose their past lives appeared
otherwise than criminal before Him. Their fearful
state, and the consequences of guilt, they never
disputed, but were always ready to acknowledge
that they must not only appear criminal, but
offensive to the Most High, on account of their
vices. There were, however, in connexion with
these truths, matters associated with the impres¬
sion upon their minds, that sometimes a little
surprised us.

Under declarations of the nature and dreadful
consequences of sin, aggravated as theirs had been,
the denunciation of the penalties of the law of
God, and even under the awakenings of their own
consciences to a conviction of sin, we seldom per¬
ceived that deep and acute distress of mind, which
in circumstances of a similar kind we should have
expected. In connexion with this, when such
individuals were enabled to exercise faith in the

68

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

atonement of Christ, and to indulge a hope of
exemption from all the fearful effects of sin and
guilt, this apprehension has not, in many instances,
been attended by that sudden relief, and that
exstatic joy, which is often manifested in other
parts of the world, by individuals in correspond¬
ing circumstances. Yet, in many instances, we
have not doubted the sincerity of their declara¬
tions, or the genuineness of their faith in the
Redeemer.

We have often tried to account for this apparent
anomaly in their Christian character, but have not
been altogether satisfied with the causes to which
we have sometimes assigned it. It does not
appear, generally, that their emotions are so acute
as ours, or that they are equally susceptible of
joy and sorrow with persons trained in civilized
society. Besides this, though their ideas of the
nature and consequences of sin, the blessedness of
forgiveness, and the hope of future happiness, were
correct so far as they went, yet the varied repre¬
sentations of the punishment and sufferings of the
wicked, and the corresponding views of heaven, as
the state of the greatest blessedness, being to
them partial and new, the impressions were pro¬
bably vague and indistinct; while with us, from
long familiarity, they are at once vivid and power¬
ful. Without pausing to inquire into its cause, it
seemed right to mention the fact; better reasons
may perhaps be assigned.

We have often also remarked, that there are
but few of what would be called sudden conver¬
sions. In general, the process by which their
views and feelings have been changed, has been
gradual, and almost imperceptible, as to its precise
manner of operation, though ultimately most de-

RELIGIOUS EXPERIENCE.

69

cisive in its nature, and unquestionable in its ten¬
dency. Though these gradual transformations are
the general means by which, through the Holy
Spirit, we hope many have been made partakers
of the grace of eternal life, there have been excep¬
tions. Some have been melted under the truth,
others have been led to rejoice in the promises of
the gospel, and raised to gladness and praise.
These facts are adapted to shew that the Spirit of
God is not limited, in the manner of His opera¬
tions on the human mind, to any one particular
kind of order and rule.

The accounts of their views of Divine truth, and
their reasons for desiring to join with us, have
often been delightful and satisfactory, not only in
the Society, but also in the northern isles of the
Pacific. One from a native of the latter, although
it has appeared in the American Missionary Herald,
has not been given to the British public; and its
character is so unequivocal, that I cannot deny
myself the pleasure of inserting it.

Buaiti, the individual to whom it refers, is be¬
tween thirty and forty years of age. I believe I
had the honour of preaching the gospel in his
native islands the first time he ever heard it. It,
however, produced no salutary effect then; nor,
indeed, until some time after. Since I left the
islands, the preaching and instructions of Mr.
Richards have been singularly useful to this indi¬
vidual, as well as to others; he has given every
evidence of their having, under the blessing of
God, produced an entire and highly beneficial
change in his sentiments, feelings, and conduct.

The late queen of the Sandwich Islands, with
her usual benevolence, had always treated him
with kindness; and the recollection of it is still

70 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

retained. Buaiti was his native name, but, when
he was baptized, he wished to be called Bartimeus ;
and, in order to preserve the sense of his loss in
the death of the queen, he requested that Lalana ,
London, the place of her death, might be added to
his name. When he was admitted a member of
the Christian church at Lahaina, he was asked by
the Missionary, Why do you request to be received
into the church ? He replied—

Because I love Jesus Christ, I love you, and I
desire to dwell with you in the fold of Christ, and
to join with you in eating the holy bread, and
drinking the holy wine.

What is the holy bread ?

It is the body of Christ, which he gave to save
sinners.

Do we then eat the body of Christ ?

No; but we eat the bread which means his
body : and, as we eat bread that our bodies may
not die, so our souls love Jesus Christ, and receive
him for their Saviour, that they may not die.

What is the holy wine ?

It is the blood of Christ, which he poured out
on Calvary, in Jerusalem in Judea, to save us
sinners.

Do we, then, drink the blood of Christ ?

No ; but the wine signifies his blood, just as the
holy bread signifies his body: and all those who
go to Christ, and lean on him, will have their sins
washed away by his blood, and their souls saved
for ever in heaven.

Why do you think it more suitable that you
should join the church than others ?

Perhaps it is not, (hesitating.) If it is not pro-
per, you must tell me. But I do greatly desire to
dwell with you in the fold of Christ.

NATIVE TESTIMON Y.

71

Who do you think are the proper persons to be
received into the church ?

Those who have repented of their sins, and have
obtained new hearts.

What is a new heart ?

It is one which loves God, and loves the word of
God, and does not love sin, or sinful ways.

Do you think you have obtained a new heart ?

At one time I think I have, and then again I
think I have not. I do not know,—I hope I have
a new heart.

What makes you hope you have a new heart ?

This is the reason why I hope I have a new
heart. The heart I have now is not like the heart
I formerly had. The one I have now is very bad,
it is unbelieving, and inclined to evil. But it is
not like the one I formerly had. Yes; I think I
have a new heart.

The satisfaction arising from this simple yet de¬
cisive testimony, is increased from a knowledge of
the fact stated by Mr. Richards; namely, that
these questions and answers were not committed
to memory, and merely recited on the occasion,
but that they were the undisguised motives and
feelings by which he was influenced. He had no
knowledge of the questions that would be pro¬
posed, until the time when they would be publicly
asked, and consequently could not have previously
framed the replies he gave. The above may be
taken as a sample of the kind of declarations made
by those who are united in church-fellowship;
and though it relates to a native of the North
Pacific Isles, it resembles, in its principal charac¬
teristics, many given by the natives of the Southern
group. Simplicity is the distinguishing feature in
all their religious intercourse of this kind.

72 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

The meeting of such as were desirous of
uniting with us continued ; and from among those
who attended, many were added to the church.
Besides this meeting, we held one with the com¬
municants only, on the Friday evening preceding
the Sabbath when the ordinance was administered,
which was the first Sabbath in every month. At
these times, new members were proposed by the
Missionary, or by any member, to the whole body.
Inquiry was made of those present, as to their
eligibility, and if any had objections to an indi¬
vidual, he was requested to state them there ; if
not, one or two of the members were directed to
call upon the parties at their habitations, to
converse with them, and report the same at
the next meeting, for the satisfaction of the
church. It was regarded by us a duty, to see
these persons more than once during the inter¬
vening month.

At the next meeting, these individuals were
proposed by name ; the recommendation of the
persons who had visited them, and of the Mission¬
ary, given ; and if the members present knew any
reasons why they should not be united with them,
they were requested to state the same; if not, to
signify assent by lifting up the right hand. * When
the members proposed had been thus individually
approved, as they were usually in attendance,
they were brought to the chapel, and interrogated
singly, as to their reasons for desiring to unite with
us. To these questions brief replies were usually
rendered ; and they were informed that the mem¬
bers of the church, considering them proper per¬
sons, were happy to receive them. The right hand
of fellowship was then given by the Missionaries,
and subsequently by the members, to those thus

FAITH IN THE SCRIPTURES. 73

received; and the meeting closed with devotional
exercises.

We did not require any written confession of
faith, nor invariably a verbal account of experience,
from the persons admitted. In this latter respect,
our procedure was not uniform, but regulated by
the peculiar circumstances of the individual*

There is another pleasing trait in their Chris¬
tian character, namely, their undoubting recep¬
tion of the scriptures, as a Divine revelation.
We have plainly and uniformly stated its truths,
inculcating among them no opinions or sentiments,
on matters of religion, but such as are found in the
Bible ; declaring that what it taught was essential,
and that all the opinions of men, however excel¬
lent, are in comparison unimportant. To the
Bible we have always appealed, as the authority
for what we have taught, stating that its de¬
clarations allowed of no evasion. The injunctions
of scripture they have therefore been accustomed
to receive implicitly, as they are recorded; and
while they exercise their own judgments very
freely in matters of human opinion, I never knew
one, who professed himself a Christian, inclined to
doubt the authority of the Bible. To this standard
we have always referred their sentiments and their
conduct; and by the criterion it furnishes, we always
recommended their examining their own condition,
rather than comparing themselves with others.

Often, when we have recommended some mea¬
sure of a religious or general nature, which we
have supposed would be advantageous to them,
they have inquired, What says the scripture ? Is
there any thing about it in the word of God ? If,
as was sometimes the case, we were under the
necessity of stating, that there was nothing in the

74

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

scripture directly referring to our recommendation,
but that it was according to the general tenor and
spirit of the scriptures, or corresponding with the
practice of Christians in England, or that we
thought it would prove beneficial,—they would
sometimes answer, “ That maybe very good, but
as it is only a matter of opinion with you, we will
think about it.” On the other hand, so far as
those who were members of our churches, or had
been baptized, were concerned, I cannot recollect
any measure we ever proposed, for which we could
refer to the explicit declaration of scripture as our
authority, that they did not at once unhesitatingly
adopt. It was much more satisfactory to us that
the conduct of their lives should be regulated by
principles derived from the scripture, than by the
opinion of their teachers, however highly they
might respect them; and we had always rather
that they should ask, “ What says the word of
God V* than, “ What say the Missionaries V 9 The
opinions of their teachers may change, or teachers
of different opinions may succeed them, but the
word of God will endure unalterably the same,
being a more sure word, w T hereunto they do well
to take heed.

What the experience of my predecessors in the
field may have been, with regard to the manner in
which the natives were disposed to admit the
claims of the scriptures to a divine origin, I am
not prepared to state with confidence. I believe,
however, it was not so much to the divine autho¬
rity, as to the doctrines of the sacred volume, that
they objected. So far as my recollection serves,
with regard to the island of Huahine, the inhabit¬
ants, though not idolaters, certainly were not
Christians, except in name; and in the Sandwich

FAITH IN THE SCRIPTURES. 75

Islands, where, on my first arrival, the people were
more opposed than inclined to all that is essential
to Christianity, I do not remember to have met
with an individual disposed to doubt the origin, or
dispute the authority, of revelation. It was to the
injunctions and doctrines of the Bible, that hum¬
bled their pride, and prohibited their vicious prac¬
tices, &c. that they objected.

It may be said, that while they believed in ido¬
latry—and revelations from the gods by dreams, or
other intimations through the medium of the priests,
were acknowledged—they might suppose the truths
of the Bible to be a collection of revelations
similar in kind to these, only, as a priest on one
occasion stated to me, better preserved, being
“ made fast upon the paper.” But after they had
renounced idolatry, and treated with contempt the
notions formerly entertained respecting the power
of the gods, and regarded all the pretended revela¬
tions of them as deceptions of the priests, the claims
of the Bible remained undisputed.

The uniform acceptance of the declarations of
Scripture as Divine communications to mankind,
was not the result of any arguments employed by
us. We never attempted to establish by argu¬
ment what they were not inclined to doubt. Our
instructions were, therefore, generally delivered in
the simplicity of assertion or testimony, accom¬
panied with suitable admonition and application
to our hearers; taking it as an admitted principle,
that the scriptures contained a declaration of the
will of God.

When asked, as we sometimes were, u How do
you know the Bible is the word of God ?” we did
not adduce an infallible jchurch, by which it had
been determined what were the canonical books,

76

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

and by whom they had been preserved; nor did
we refer them often ,to the testimony of history, to
prove that the persons, whose names were affixed
to the different parts, actually wrote the books
ascribed to them; but we referred them to their
internal evidence, their harmony or accordance
with the works of creation, and the dispensations
of Providence, in their display of the Divine cha¬
racter and perfections, their admirable adaptation
to the end for which they were given, and the uni¬
versality of their application to mankind. Next to
the agency of that blessed Spirit, under whose in¬
fluence those scriptures were first penned, and by
which alone they become the means of spiritual
illumination to any individual, the internal evi¬
dences of the Bible have operated upon the
minds of the natives with greatest force. When
they have been asked why they believed the
scriptures to be the word of God, they have an¬
swered, “ We believe they have a higher than
human origin, because they reveal what man could
never know; not only in reference to God himself,
but our own origin and destinies, and what, when
revealed, appears to us true ; because its declara¬
tions accord with the testimony of our own con¬
sciences, as to the moral character of our actions ;
and because, though written by persons who never
saw us, or knew our thoughts, it describes so
accurately our inclinations, imaginations, motives,
and passions. It must have been dictated by One
who knew what man was, better than we know
each other, or it could not have displayed our
actual state so correctly/’ These, or declarations to
the same effect, if not given in precisely the same
words, were the reasons they frequently assigned
for believing the divine origin of the scriptures.

POWER OF CONSCIENCE.

77

Several remarkable instances of the effect of the
word of God, and the power of conscience, occurred
about the year 1819. One Sabbath morning, Mr.
Nott had been preaching from the words—“ Let
him that stole, steal no more.” In his discourse,
he had refuted the idea they had formerly held,
that theft was no crime, but rather an act of merit,
if committed with dexterity; and had shewn that
the circmutsance of detection or escape did not
alter the moral quality of the act in the sight of
God; that every means employed unjustly to de¬
prive another of his property, was an act of theft,
and that restitution ought to be made for past
robberies, as well as honesty practised for the
future. The next morning, when he arose and
opened his door, he saw a number of natives
sitting on the ground in the front of his dwelling.
Their appearance was rather singular, and the
unseasonable time of their assembling led him to
inquire the cause. They answered, “ We have
not been able to sleep all night; we were in the
chapel yesterday ; we thought, when we were
pagans, that it was right to steal when we could do
it without being found out. Hiro, the god of
thieves, used to assist us. But we heard what you
said yesterday from the word of God, that Jehovah
had commanded that we should not steal. We
have stolen, and all these things that we have
brought with us are stolen goods/’ One then
lifted up an axe, a hatchet, or a chisel, and ex¬
claimed, “ I stole this from the carpenter of such
a ship,” naming the vessel, &c. Others held up
an umeti, or a saw, or a knife ; and, indeed, almost
every kind of moveable property was brought and
exhibited, with confessions of its having been
stolen. Mr. Nott said, rather smilingly, “ What

78

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

have you brought them to me for ? I do not want
them.” (The sentiment had often been circulated,
that the receiver of- stolen goods was as bad as the
thief.) “ You had better take them home, and,
if you have stolen any from your own countrymen,
return them ; and when the ships come again from
which any of the goods have been stolen, take
them back, together with a present to the captain
or the carpenter, expressive of your desire to make
restitution.” They all said—“ Oh, no, we cannot
take them back; we have had no peace ever since
we heard it was displeasing to God, and we shall
have no peace so long as they remain in our
dwellings; w r e wish you to take them, and give
them back to the owners whenever they come.”
Such was the power of conscience, that although
they were even tools, which the natives value more
highly than gold, and although Mr. Nott requested
. them to take them back, he could not persuade
one of them to do so ; they left them all with him,
to be returned to their owners. They went even
farther than this : some had stolen articles from
one of the Missionaries at Eimeo. They fitted up
a canoe, and with the first fair wind undertook a
voyage upwards of seventy miles, for the purpose
of carrying back what they had taken.

In the island of Raiatea, a native, walking on
one occasion towards the mountain, discovered a
hen’s nest, with a number of eggs in it, at the root
of a tree. He eagerly seized the prize, put the
eggs in the native cloth he wore, and proceeded
with them to his house. On the way, he recol¬
lected the commandment—“ Thou shalt not steal,”
and though he had found the nest far from any
habitation, in the midst of the woods, and did not
know that he had robbed any one except the hen,

POWER OF CONSCIENCE.

79

yet he knew the eggs were not his ; and so power¬
ful was the impression of the impropriety of the
action, that he returned to the nest, and very care¬
fully replaced the eggs.

A similar course was pursued by a native with
whom I was once travelling across the island, with
regard to a pocket-knife that he had picked up,
but afterwards threw down, near the same place,
simply because it did not belong to him.

These facts are most pleasing and decisive illus¬
trations of the power of Christian principles. Yet
every individual is not influenced by them. These
were Christian men; there are others who are such
only in name, and who are addicted to the prac¬
tice of pilfering and theft, especially at those
stations near the harbours which are the most fre¬
quent resorts of shipping, where the temptations
are greatest, and the influence of foreign inter¬
course most injurious. Nevertheless, when we
consider that they were formerly, as every navi¬
gator by whom they were visited has testified,
almost a nation of thieves—that Hiro, the god of
thieves and plunderers, occupied a place in their
mythology, and had a temple and priests—we can¬
not but admire the operation of Christian princi¬
ples in producing, in such a number of instances,
a conscientious regard to justice and honesty. It
w r as, there is reason to believe with many, the
result, not of an apprehension of detection, but of
a strict regard to moral rectitude, and the declared
will of Him who said, “ Thou shalt not steal.”

Towards the close of the year 1820, Mr. Davies
left Fare, to supply the station at Papara, in Tahiti,
which had been destitute of a Missionary since the
decease of Messrs. Tessier and Bicknell. The
management of the press, supplying the books for

80 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the whole of the Leeward Islands, the superin¬
tendence of the schools, promoting the civilization
of the people, attending the religious meetings,
together with our pastoral duties, now pressed so
heavily upon us, that we found some assistance
requisite. This we necessarily sought among the
converts, and were happy to find' four persons,
members of the church, suitable to act as assist¬
ants, whom we proposed to the church to elect as
deacons. Diaconi is the term by which they are
designated ; not, however, selected from any strong
predilection to the term, or any extraordinary im¬
portance attached to it, but because a scriptural
term, and one more easily assimilated to the idiom
of their language than some others.

On the 15th of February, 1821, they were set
apart in the church to this office, by an address
from 1 Tim. iii. 10. and prayer for the blessing
of God upon them. Auna, Taua, Pohuetea, and
Matatore, were the persons selected, and so long
as I continued in the islands, we found them
consistent Christians, and valuable coadjutors in
managing the temporal concerns of the church,
visiting the sick, attending the prayer-meet¬
ings, &c.

Religion was now almost the sole business of
the people at Fare, and the adjacent districts;
and although the meetings were frequent, many
continued to visit our dwellings, sometimes by day¬
break ; and often, after we had retired to rest at
night, one or two would come knocking gently at
our doors or windows, begging us to give them
directions, or to answer their inquiries as to the
thoughts that distressed their minds. No time, no
place, appeared to them unappropriate ; and whe¬
ther they sat in the house, or walked by the way

PREVALENCE OF RELIGION. 81

—skimmed the surface of the water in their light
canoe, or laboured in the garden—religion was
the topic of their conversation. Their motives
were various, and probably often of a very mixed
character. Some were influenced by a desire to
be thought well of by their neighbours; many
wished to be baptized without feeling the necessity
of, or more earnestly seeking, that spiritual purifi¬
cation which it signified; and others, perhaps,
considering church-membership as the highest
Christian distinction they could gain, desired to be
admitted to the communion, as an end of their
profession, rather than a means of higher spiritual
attainments.

Such individuals, we deemed it, on all occa¬
sions, necessary to caution with the greatest dis¬
tinctness and fidelity. But while these were the
motives by which we have reason to believe many
were influenced, there were others who certainly
acted from different feelings, who were unable to
rest under a sense of guilt and its fearful conse¬
quences; who desired to hear more about God,
his mercy to sinners, and the love of their Saviour,
that their burden of sin might be removed ; while
some, desirous of expressing their sense of the
goodness of God, were anxious to be informed
what they might do to promote his praise. I can¬
not look back upon this period of my Missionary
life with indifference; nor can I contemplate the
state of the people at this time, without believing
that the Spirit of God was powerfully operating
upon the minds of many. Of this, their subse¬
quent lives have afforded satisfactory evidence.
Instability is one of the prominent traits of Tahi¬
tian character; and did we not believe in a higher
agency than their own purposes or principles, we

in. g

82

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

should fear that many would abandon the pro¬
fession they have made, and return to their former
course of life.

Although the advantages resulting from frequent
meetings for religious conversation were too ob¬
vious to allow us to withhold every encouragement;
and though, under the present circumstances and
feelings of the people, they were peculiarly so;
yet, as many of the communicants, and several
who were desirous of uniting with them, were
females, there were many things in reference to
which they needed advice, but which they did not
deem suitable to introduce at a public meeting.
Mrs. BarfF and Mrs. Ellis, therefore, being able to
converse familiarly in the native language, pro¬
posed to meet the female members of the church,
and those of their own sex who were desirous of
joining them, once a week, for general conversa¬
tion, and mutual spiritual improvement. This
was an interesting meeting; it was held alter¬
nately at our respective habitations, Mrs. BarfF
and Mrs. Ellis both attending. It commenced
with singing a hymn ; a prayer was ofFered, and a
portion of scripture read. After this, the most
unreserved conversation followed, on religious sub¬
jects, the training of their children, and other rela¬
tive duties connected with the new order of things
which Christianity had introduced.

Parental discipline among the people, prior to
their reception of Christianity, had been remark¬
ably lax. The children were their own masters as
soon as they could act for themselves, and the
restraint which the mother could impose was
trifling indeed. Such, indeed, was the abundance
of provision, that the maintenance of a child was a
matter of no anxiety to any one. Hence, if a boy

LAXITY OF PARENTAL AUTHORITY. 83

felt offended with his parents, he left them without
ceremony, attached himself to another family in
an adjacent or remote district, and remained for
months without visiting his father’s house. To
restrain these fugitive habits, and train their chil¬
dren to regular industry, was one of the duties
inculcated on Christian parents; yet the children
could but ill brook any restraint. I have seen a
child, not more than six years old, strike or throw
stones at his mother, and the father would often¬
times be scarcely more regarded. And notwith¬
standing all the instructions they have received,
that important duty, the proper management of
children, is still very imperfectly understood and
practised.

The mothers appeared anxious to influence the
minds of their children, and gain their respect by
kindness. The fathers sometimes had recourse to
harsher measures. Hoibu had two sons, that were
a source of great trouble to him. One of our
number went one day into his house, which was a
native dwelling, with no other ceiling than the
inside of the roof, the ridge-pole extending along
the centre, about twenty feet from the floor. After
talking some time with the man, the visitor heard
something rustling in a long basket of cocoa-nut
leaves at the top of the house, and, looking up,
saw the legs and arms of a boy protruding from
the basket. On inquiring the cause of this, Hoibu
said, the boy had been disobedient, and, in order
to convince him of his error, he had first talked to
him, and then put him into the basket, and, pass¬
ing a rope over the ridge-pole, had fastened one
end of it to the basket, and, pulling the other, had
drawn him up there, that he might think on his
disobedience, and not be guilty of the same again,

a 2

84 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

He was informed that it was rather a novel mode
of punishment, and that it was hoped he would
not keep him there long. He said, no, he should
lower him before the evening. A similar mode of
punishment may, I believe, have been used in
some of our public schools, in which a kind of
large birdcage has been substituted for a basket;
but of this Hoibu had never heard. The invention
was his own, and it was scarcely possible to repress
a smile at the ludicrous appearance of the sus¬
pended boy.

Although the training of their children, and
other domestic duties, which the females were now
called to discharge, were important matters of
inquiry, there were others, more deeply interest¬
ing, frequently brought forward at their meetings.
Some of these questions regarded the children who
were born since the gospel had been introduced,
and who they were most anxious should share all
its blessings ; others frequently referred to such as
they had murdered under the influence of idolatry.
Sometimes a mother would, in enumerating the
crimes of which she had been guilty, recount the
number of her children she had destroyed, and
with anguish relate her struggles of affection, or
pangs of remorse, and the distress she now felt;
observing, that their images were ever present to
her thoughts, and, as it were, constantly haunting
her paths, so that she was afraid even to retire to
the secret places of the bushes for private prayer,
lest their ghosts should rise before her. Often
such individuals would say, they feared there was
no hope of mercy for them, that they had re¬
peatedly committed the premeditated murder of
the innocent, and would perhaps repeat the scrip¬
ture declaration, that no murderer hath eternal

COMPUNCTIOUS RETROSPECTS. 85

life abiding in him, and ask, “ Ought I go to
Jesus Christ for pardon ? were any murderers of
their own children ever forgiven ?”

While some would ask such questions as these,
or state them as the exercises of their own minds,
there were others who would speak of the cruelties
of which they had been guilty, with a want of
feeling that has appeared to border on insensibility
to their enormity. Many, however, especially
those who were most sensible of the mercy of God
through Christ, would on these occasions expatiate
on the amazing forbearance of Jehovah, in sparing
such merciless creatures as they had been. They
would also express their astonishment at the love
of Christ in dying for them; and the abundance
of his compassion, in continuing to send them the
intelligence of his salvation, and, after they had
long disregarded it, not only forbearing, but mak¬
ing them willing in the day of his power; melting
their hearts, drawing them with cords of affection,
and now causing them to rejoice in his love shed
abroad in their hearts.

Occasionally they would, in most affecting
strains, allude to the anguish which the sight of
their neighbours’ children produced, by recalling
to remembrance those whom they had destroyed.
The contrast they often drew between their own
childless and desolate condition through their
former cruel practice of infant murder, and that
of those happy parents who, under the reign of
the Messiah, were surrounded by their children,
was touching and painful. These were topics that
could not be discussed without emotion, either by
those who brought them forward, or by those from
whom direction and advice were sought.

There was another matter connected with this,

£6 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

of scarcely inferior interest, and that was the state
of those infants after death. Are their spirits,
they would say, in outer darkness, where there is
weeping and gnashing of teeth—or are they happy ?
In reply to this, they were informed, that though
they had not sinned, they had suffered death as
the effect of Adam’s transgression, yet that there
was reason to hope and believe they were interested
in the covenant of redemption, the condition of
which the Lord Jesus Christ had fulfilled, and that
therefore they were happy.

It is impossible to conceive the satisfaction of
mind which this opinion has inspired in those who
had been guilty of the destruction of their off¬
spring, though they were still sensible that the
final condition of the murdered infants did not
diminish the criminality of the unnatural deed.

In reference to this point, they would often ask
whether they should in heaven know those they
had been acquainted with on earth, and especially
if there they should recognize the children they
had destroyed. In reply, they were informed,
that from all that was said on the heavenly state
in the scriptures, there was reason to believe that
friends on earth would know each other there, and
that it was probable Christian mothers would meet
their children.

These were not mere speculative inquiries, the
parties had a deep personal interest in them ; and
Mrs. Ellis has been greatly affected in witnessing
the emotions with which these discussions have
been carried on. I can readily suppose it alto¬
gether impossible to conceive of the rapturous
expectation with which a Christian mother, child¬
less and desolate from her own cruelties, would by
faith anticipate meeting in a world of spirits the

FEMALE CONVERSATIONAL MEETINGS. 87

children she had murdered in her days of igno¬
rance on earth, and joining with them to celebrate
the praises of Him who had snatched them from
the region of sin ere they had felt its bitter con¬
tamination, and by whom she had been brought to
share redemption from its curse.

This opinion was not given simply to afford alle¬
viation to the distressed feelings of such unhappy
parents, but because it did not seem opposed, but
rather favoured, by the word of God, agreeable to
the benevolent character of the Deity, and adapted
to enlarge our views of His compassion, without
affecting His other attributes. We could, therefore,
adopt the language and sentiments of the poet, in
the belief that,

“ The harp of heaven

Had lack’d its least, but not its meanest string
Had children not been taught to play upon it.

And sing, from feelings all their own, what men
Nor angels can conceive of creatures, born
Under the curse, yet from the curse redeem’d.

And placed at once beyond the power to fall,

Safely, which men nor angels ever knew,

Till ranks of these, and all of those, had fallen.”

The meeting of the females was closed with
prayer by one of the natives, who, if a mother,
would give the child, she had perhaps been nurs¬
ing in her lap, to some one sitting by. Their
prayers were marked by deep spirituality and
strong feeling; and, I believe, these meetings
were among the seasons of most intense and
painful, or joyous and hallowed emotion, ever
experienced. The individual engaging in the de¬
votional exercise has sometimes, from the strength
of feeling, been unable to proceed, and tears alone
have afforded relief.

88 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Early in the year 1821, in order to cultivate the
most affectionate and profitable intercourse with
our people, we proposed, in addition to visits in
times of sickness, to pay to each family a pastoral
visit, for part of an evening, once a month, or at
least once in the course of two months. Mr. Barff
and myself, dividing the families between us, were
enabled to accomplish this. We were received
with kindness by the parties, and it was our study
to make these visits advantageous. The time was
not spent in the useless recital of the passing reports
of the day; we addressed ourselves to each indi¬
dual, when circumstances admitted, directing and
encouraging them in their adherence to the Sa¬
viour, or inviting them to Him, and concluded
our visit by uniting in prayer for the blessing of
God upon their household, &c. We trust these
domiciliary visits were beneficial; they were often
cheering to our own minds. Some of the many
happy hours I have been privileged to spend in
Missionary occupations have been those passed in
the native families on such occasions. Here
we sometimes saw the household virtues, the
endearments of social and domestic comfort, che¬
rished—shedding their benign, elevating, and
purifying influence upon a family, the principal
members, and sometimes the greater part, of which
were enjoying that blessing which maketh rich,
and addeth no sorrow, and were preparing to join
the family of the redeemed in the abodes of bless¬
edness.

Associated with these delightful duties, there
were others equally needful, but less pleasing,
which we were called to discharge, in connexion
wilh the infant church we had been honoured to
gather. These were acts of discipline, in the

DISMISSAL OF MEMBERS.

89

dismissal of those who, by their conduct, had dis¬
graced the Christian profession. On these occa¬
sions, we presented to their consideration the
direction of the scriptures, and the duty of the
church resulting therefrom; and when it was
necessary to dismiss an individual from fellowship,
it was always done with solemn prayer and most
affecting regret.

We were not called to this painful duty soon or
often. One or two instances occurred before I
removed to the Sandwich Islands. They were,
however, exceedingly distressing, especially the
first, which preyed so constantly upon the mind of
the individual, that, though fully convinced of his
fault, and the propriety of the proceeding, he
never recovered the shock he received. It was
exceedingly painful to those who could no longer,
without dishonouring the Christian name, allow
him to be identified with them, to separate him.
He soon offered every evidence of deep and sin¬
cere penitence, and was affectionately invited to
return to the bosom of the church : but although
he came again among them, a cloud ever after
hung over him; and a disease, aggravated by
mental anxiety, attacked his frame, and soon
brought him to the grave.

Christian churches were formed upon the same
or similar principles in the Windward or Georgian
Islands, some months before this was established
in Huahine. From the peculiar local circum¬
stances of the people, the churches in Tahiti have
been exposed to greater trials than that in Hua¬
hine has yet experienced, especially those formed
in stations adjacent to the anchorage of shipping.
In the vicinity of these, the baneful influence of
foreign seamen is most destructive of moral im-

90

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

provement and Christian propriety; and it is pro¬
bable that there is more immorality among the
inhabitants, and more disorder in the churches, at
the stations which are the resort of shipping, than
in all others throughout the islands. Still the
churches there, have not been, and are not, without
some indication of the Divine care and blessing.

Subsequently, churches were formed in Raiatea,
Tahaa, and Borabora, which have in general pros¬
pered. As their constitution and proceedings
resemble those of Huahine, it is unnecessary to
detail their origin or progress. I have selected
that in Huahine, not because it is superior to
others for its order, or faith, or the piety of its
members, but because it was that of which I was,
with my esteemed colleague, a pastor, till the pro¬
vidence of God called me to another field of Mis¬
sionary labour—and because it was planted in the
station at which I spent the greater part of the time
I resided in the South Sea Islands.

I have also been minute, perhaps too much so,
in detailing its nature, order, and discipline. This
has not arisen from a desire to give it undue pro¬
minency, but because it forms an important epoch
in the history of the people, and is a matter of con¬
siderable interest with many who are concerned in
the extension of the Christian faith throughout the
world; I also conceived the patrons of the South
Sea Mission entitled to the most ample information
oh the subject.

It has not been my object to exhibit the plan
and order of this, or the other churches in those
islands, as models of perfection, nor to claim for
them any degree of excellency which others,
formed and regulated differently in some minor
respects, might not possess; but simply to narrate

FANATICAL VISIONARIES.

91

our own views, and consequent proceedings, in
reference to measures which will be regarded with
indifference by few, whatever may be their peculiar
opinions as to the plan we have pursued. From
all, I would ask fervent prayer, that whatever has
been contrary to the will of God may be amended,
and that what has been agreeable thereto may
continue to receive his blessing. The church of
Christ in Huahine, as well as those in other
islands, has had its trials. Some of its members,
as might be expected, have departed from the faith
and the purity of the gospel. And among the
professors of religion in this and the other islands,
some, designating themselves prophets, have de¬
clared that they have received special revelation
from heaven. They have pretended that they
were inspired by the spirit of John the Baptist,
the woman of Samaria, or the apostle Paul, not
to supersede the gospel, but to add something to it.
The declarations of their visions and dreams have
been the most absurd imaginable. Several of
these visionaries, of both sexes, were persons of
doubtful morals, and some have become profligate.
The Missionaries are of opinion, that a desire to
exempt themselves from the moral restraints of
the gospel, has been the secret but principal
motive by which they have been influenced.
This appears confirmed by their declaring that
when the mind was under the influence of the
spirit by which they pretended to be inspired, they
could not commit sin, as whatever they did during
those seasons was the act of the body alone, and
was not a moral delinquency. Their injurious
efforts were met in a becoming manner by the
great body of the people, and the greater part of
those who were drawn away have manifested their

92 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

penitence, and returned to a more sober way of
thinking, and to a deportment strictly honourable
and virtuous. The instances of this defection have
not been numerous; and I am gratified to know,
that the greater part of those united in fellowship are
increasing in knowledge of the scripture, and sta¬
bility of Christian character; that a number of young
persons, several from the Sunday schools, have
joined it; and that, though formed by sixteen indi¬
viduals in the spring of 1820, it contained, in the
autumn of 1827, nearly five hundred members.

FORM OF GOVERNMENT.

93

CHAP. IV.

Government of the South Sea Islands monarchical and
arbitrary—Intimately connected with idolatry—Differ-,
ent ranks in society—Slavery—The proprietors of land
—The regal family—Sovereignty hereditary—Abdica¬
tion of the father in favour of the son—Distinctions of
royalty—Modes of travelling—Sacredness of the king’s
person—Homage of the people—Singular ceremonies
attending the inauguration of the king—Language of
the Tahitian court—The royal residences—Dress, &c.—
Sources of revenue—Tenure of land—Division of the
country—National councils—Forfeiture of possessions.

The government of the South Sea Islands, like
that in Hawaii, was an arbitrary monarchy. The
supreme authority was vested in the king, and was
hereditary in his family. It differed materially
from the systems existing among the Marquesians
in the east, and the New Zealanders in the south¬
west. There is no supreme ruler in either of these
groups of islands, but the different tribes or clans
are governed by their respective chieftains, each
of whom is, in general, independent of any other.
Regarding the inhabitants of Tahiti, and the
adjacent islands, as an uncivilized people, ignorant
of letters and the arts, their modes of governing
were necessarily rude and irregular. In many
respects, however, their institutions indicate great
attention to the principles of government, an
acquaintance with the means of controlling the

94 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

conduct of man, and an advancement in the orga¬
nization of their civil polity, which, under corre¬
sponding circumstances, is but rarely attained,
and could scarcely have been expected.

Their government, in all its multiplied ramifi¬
cations, in its abstract theory, and in its practical
details, was closely interwoven with their false
system of religion. The god and the king were
generally supposed to share the authority over
mankind. The latter sometimes personated the
former, and received the homage and the requests
presented by the votaries of the imaginary divinity,
and at other times officiated as the head of his
people, in rendering their acknowledgments to
the gods. The office of high-priest was frequently
sustained by the king—who thus united in his
person the highest civil and sacerdotal station in
the land. The genealogy of the reigning family
was usually traced back to the first ages of their
traditionary history ; and the kings, in some of the
islands, were supposed to have descended from the
gods. Their persons were always sacred, and their
families constituted the highest rank recognized
among the people.

The different grades in society were not so dis¬
tinctly marked in Polynesia, as among the inhabit¬
ants of India, where the institution of caste exists;
nor were they so strongly defined in Tahiti as
among the Sandwich Islanders, whose government
was perhaps more despotic than that which pre¬
vailed in the southern islands. The lines of sepa¬
ration were, nevertheless, sufficiently distinct; the
higher orders being remarkably tenacious of their
dignity, and jealous of its deterioration by contact
with inferiors.

Society among them was divided into three dis-

RANKS IN SOCIETY*

95

tinct ranks : the hui arii , the royal family and
nobility—the hue raatira , the landed proprietors,
or gentry and farmers—and the manahune, or
common people. These three ranks were sub¬
divided into a number of distinct classes; the
lowest class included the titi and the teuteu , the
slaves and servants; the former were those who
had lost their liberty in battle, or who, in conse¬
quence of the defeat of the chieftains to whom
they were attached, had become the property of
the conquerors. This kind of slavery appears to
have existed among them from time immemorial.
Individuals captured in actual combat, or who fled
to the chief for protection when disarmed or dis¬
abled in the field, were considered the slaves of the
captor or chief by whom they were protected. The
women, children, and others, who remained in the
districts of the vanquished, were also regarded as
belonging to them ; and the lands they occupied,
together with their fields and plantations, were
distributed among the victors.

We do not know that they ever carried on a
traffic in slaves, or sold those whom they had con¬
quered, though a chief might give a captive for a
servant to a friend. This is the only kind of
slavery that has ever obtained among them, and it
corresponds with that which has prevailed in most
of the nations of the earth in their rude state, or
during the earlier periods of their history. This
state of slavery among them was in general mild,
compared with the affecting cruelty by which it
has been distinguished in modern times, among
those who support the inhuman system of traffick¬
ing in these unhappy beings. If peace continued,
the captive frequently regained his liberty after a
limited servitude, and was permitted to return to

96 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

his own land, or remain in voluntary service with
his master.

So long, however, as they continued slaves or
captives, their lives were in jeopardy. Sometimes
they were suddenly murdered, to satiate the latent
revenge of their conquerors ; at others reserved as
human victims, to be offered in sacrifice to their
gods. Slavery, in every form, is perfectly consist¬
ent with paganism, and it was maintained among
the islands as one means of contributing to its sup¬
port. This kind obtains in most of the clusters,
but is probably far more oppressive in New Zealand
than in the Society Islands. The slaves among
the former are treated with the greatest cruelty,
and often inhumanly murdered and eaten.

The manahune also included the teuteu, or ser¬
vants of the chiefs ; all who were destitute of any
land, and ignorant of the rude arts of carpentering,
building, &c. which were respected among them,
and such as were reduced to a state of dependence
upon those in higher stations. Although the ma¬
nahune have always included a large number of
the inhabitants, they have not in modern times
been so numerous as some other ranks. Since the
population has been so greatly diminished, the
means of subsistence so abundant, and such vast
portions of the country uncultivated, an industrious
individual has seldom experienced much difficulty
in securing at least the occupancy of a piece of
land. The fishermen and artisans (sometimes
ranking with this class, but more frequently with
that immediately above it,) may be said to have
constituted the connecting link between the two.

The bueraatira, gentry and farmers, has ever been
the most numerous and influential class, constitut¬
ing at all times the great body of the people, and

LANDED PROPRIETORS.

97

the strength of the nation. They were generally
the proprietors and cultivators of tire soil, and held
their land, not from the gift of the king, but from
their ancestors. The petty raatiras frequently pos¬
sessed from 20 to 100 acres, and generally had
more than their necessities required. They resided
on their own lands, and enclosed so much as was
necessary for their support. They were the most
industrious class of the community, working their
own plantations, building their own houses, manu¬
facturing their own cloth and mats, besides fur¬
nishing these articles for the king.

The higher class among the raatiras were those
who possessed large tracts of land in one place, or
a number of smaller sections in different parts.
Some of them owned perhaps many hundred acres,
parts of which were cultivated by those who lived
in a state of dependence upon them, or by those
petty raatiras who occupied their plantations on
condition of rendering military service to the pro¬
prietors, and a portion of the produce. These
individuals were a valuable class in the commu¬
nity, and constituted the aristocracy of the country.
They were in general more regular, temperate, and
industrious in their habits, than the higher ranks,
and, in all the measures of government, imposed a
restraint upon the extravagance or precipitancy of
the king, who, without their co-operation, could
carry but few of his measures. In their public
national assemblies, the speakers often compared
the nation to a ship, of which the king was the
mast; and whenever this figure was used, the
raatiras were always termed the shrouds, or ropes,
by which the mast is kept upright. Possessing at
all times the most ample stores of native provisions,
the number of their dependents, or retainers, was
ii r. H

98 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

great. The destitute and thoughtless readily at¬
tached themselves to their establishments, for the
purpose of securing the means of subsistence with¬
out care or apprehension of want.

The bue raatira, or middle class in society, form¬
ed the most important body in times of peace, and
the strength of their armies in periods of war.
Warriors were sometimes found among the atten¬
dants on the king or chief; but the principal de¬
pendence was upon the raatiras. These, influenced
by a noble spirit of independence, accustomed to
habits of personal labour, and capable of enduring
the fatigues of war, were, probably from interest
in the soil, moved by sentiments of patriotism more
powerfully than any other portion of the people.
The raatiras were frequently the priests in their
own family temples ; and the priests of the national
maraes, excepting those allied by blood to the
reigning families, were usually ranked with them.

The hui arii, or highest class, included the king
or reigning chieftain in each island, the members
of his family, and all who were related to them.
This class, though not numerous, was considered
the most influential in the state. Being the high¬
est in dignity and rank, its elevation in the estima¬
tion of the people was guarded with extreme care ;
and the individuals, of whom it was composed,
were exceedingly pertinacious of their distinction,
and jealous of the least degradation by the admis¬
sion of inferiors to their dignity.

Whenever a matrimonial connexion took place
between any one of the hui arii with an individual
of an inferior order, unless a variety of ceremonies
was performed at the temple, by which the infe¬
riority was supposed to be removed, and the parties
made equal in dignity, all the offspring of such an

SINGULAR ORDER OE PRECEDENCE. 99

union was invariably destroyed, to preserve the
distinction of the reigning families.

The king was supreme, and next to him the
queen. The brothers of the king, and his parents,
were nearest in rank, the other members of the
family taking precedence according to their de¬
grees of consanguinity. The regal office is here¬
ditary, and descends from the father to the eldest
son: it is not, however, confined to the male sex ;
these islands have often been governed by a queen.
Oberea was the queen of Tahiti when it was dis¬
covered by Wallis; and Aimata, the daughter of
Pomare II., now exercises the supreme authority in
Tahiti and Eimeo : the daughter of the king of
Raiatea is also the nominal sovereign of the island
of Huahine.

The most singular usage, however, connected
with the established law of primogeniture, which
obtained in the islands, was the father’s abdication
of the throne on the birth of his son. This was an
invariable, and it appears to have been an ancient
practice. If the rank of the mother was inferior /
to that of the father, the children, whether male or
female, were destroyed ; but if the mother origi¬
nally belonged to the hui arii, or had been raised
to that elevation on her marriage with the king,
she was regarded as the queen of the nation.
Whatever might be the age of the king, his in¬
fluence in the state, or the political aspect of affairs
in reference to other tribes, as soon as a son was
born, the monarch became a subject—the in¬
fant was at once proclaimed the sovereign of the
people—the royal name was conferred upon him,
and his father was the first to do him homage, by
saluting his feet, and declaring him king. The
herald of the nation was then despatched round

h 2

100 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the island with the flag of the infant king. The
banner was unfurled, and the young sovereign’s
name proclaimed in every district. If respected,
and allowed to pass, it was considered an acknow¬
ledgment by the raatiras and chiefs, of his succes¬
sion to the government; but if broken, it was
regarded as an act of rebellion, or an open decla¬
ration of war. Numerous ceremonies were per¬
formed at the marae, a splendid establishment was
forthwith formed for the young king, and a large
train of attendants accompanied him to whatever
place he was conveyed.

Every affair, however, of importance to the inter¬
nal welfare of the nation, or its foreign relations,
continued to be transacted by the father, and those
whom he had formerly associated with him as his
counsellors; but every edict was issued in the name
and on the behalf of the young ruler; and though the
whole of the executive government might remain in
the hands of the father, he only acted as regent for
his son, and was regarded as such by the nation.
The insignia of regal authority, and the homage
which the father had been accustomed to receive
from the people, were at once transferred to his
successor. The lands, and other sources of the
king’s support, were appropriated to the mainte¬
nance of the household establishment of the
infant ruler; and the father rendered him those
demonstrations of inferiority, which he himself had
heretofore required from the people.

This remarkable custom was not confined to the
family of the sovereign, but prevailed among the
hui arii and the raatiras. In both these classes,
the eldest son immediately at his birth received
the honours and titles which his father had hitherto
borne.

SACREDNESS OF THE ROYAL FAMILY. 101

It is not easy to trace the origin or discover the
design of a usage so singular, and apparently of
such high antiquity, among a people to whom it is
almost peculiar. Its advantages are not very
apparent, unless we suppose it was adopted by the
father to secure to his son undisputed succession
to his dignity and power. If this was the design,
the plan was admirably adapted to its accomplish¬
ment ; for the son was usually firmly fixed in the
government before the father’s decease, and was
sometimes called to act as regent for his own son,
before, according to ordinary usage, he would him¬
self have been invested with royal dignity.

Considering the inhabitants of the South Sea
Islands as but slightly removed from barbarism, we
are almost surprised at the homage and respect
they paid to their rulers. The difference between
them and the common people was, in many
respects, far greater than that which prevails be¬
tween the rulers and the ruled in most civilized
countries. Whether, like the sovereigns of the
Sandwich Islands, they were supposed to derive
their origin by lineal descent from the gods, or
not, their persons were regarded as scarcely less
sacred than the personifications of their deities.

Every thing in the least degree connected with
the king or queen—the cloth they wore, the
houses in which they dwelt, the canoes in which
they voyaged, the men by whom they were borne
when they journeyed by land, became sacred—
and even the sounds in the language, composing
their names, could no longer be appropriated to
ordinary significations. Hence, the.original names
of most of the objects with which they were
familiar, have from time to time undergone con¬
siderable alterations. The ground on which they

102

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

even accidentally trod, became sacred ; and the
dwelling under which they might enter, must for
ever after be vacated by its proprietors, and could
be appropriated only to the use of these sacred
personages. No individual was allowed to touch
the body of the king or queen; and every one
who should stand over them, or pass the hand over
their heads, would be liable to pay for the sacri¬
legious act with the forfeiture of his life. It was
on account of this supposed sacredness of person
that they could never enter any dwellings, excepting
those that were specially dedicated to their use,
and prohibited to all others; nor might they tread
on the ground in any part of the island but their
own hereditary districts.

The sovereign and his consort always appeared
in public on men’s shoulders,* and travelled in
this manner wherever they journeyed by land.
They were seated on the neck or shoulders of
their bearers, who were generally stout athletic
men. The persons of the men, in consequence of
their office, were regarded as sacred. The indi¬
viduals thus elevated appeared to sit with ease and
security, holding slightly by the head, while their
feet hung down on the breast, and were clasped
in the arms of the bearer. When they travelled,
they proceeded at a tolerably rapid pace, fre¬
quently six miles within the hour. A number of
attendants ran by the side of the bearers, or fol¬
lowed in their train ; and when the men who car¬
ried the royal personages grew weary, they were
relieved by others.

The king and queen were always accompanied
by several pair of sacred men, or bearers, and the

* As represented in the engraving, inserted in the be¬
ginning of vol. ii.

ROYAL TRAVELLING. 103

transit from the shoulders of one to those of
another, at the termination of an ordinary stage,
was accompanied with much greater despatch
than the horses of a mail-coach are changed, or
an equestrian could alight and remount. On
these occasions, their majesties never suffered
their feet to touch the ground; but when they
wished to change, what to them answered the
purpose of horses, they called two of the men,
who were running by their side; and while the
man, on whose neck they were sitting, made little
more than a momentary halt, the individuals who
were to take them onward fixed their hands upon
their thighs, and bent their heads slightly forward :
when they had assumed this position, the royal
riders, with apparently but little effort, vaulted over
the head of the man on whose neck they had been
sitting, and, alighting on the shoulders of his suc¬
cessor in office, proceeded on their journey with the
shortest possible detention.

This mode of conveyance was called amo or
vaha. It could not have been very comfortable
even to the riders, while to the bearers it must
have been exceedingly laborious. The men
selected for this duty, which was considered the
most honourable post next to that of bearers of
the gods, were generally exempted from labour,
and, as they seldom did any thing else, were not
perhaps much incommoded by their office; and
although the seat occupied by those they bore was
not perhaps the most easy, yet as it was a mark
of the highest dignity in the nation, and as none
but the king and queen, and occasionally their
nearest relatives, were allowed the distinction it
exhibited, they felt probably a corresponding sa¬
tisfaction and complacency in thus appearing

104 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

before their subjects, whenever they left their
hereditary district. The effect must have been
somewhat imposing, when, on public occasions,
vast multitudes were assembled, and their sove¬
reign, thus elevated above every individual, ap¬
peared among them. Of the dignity it conferred,
the natives themselves appear to have formed no
inferior idea. It is said that Pomare II. once
remarked, that he thought himself a greater man
than king George, who only rode a horse, while
he rode on a man.

In our different journeys and voyages among
the islands, where there have been but few means
of crossing a stream without fording it, or of land¬
ing from a boat or canoe without wading some dis¬
tance in the water, we have often been glad to be
carried, either across a river, or from the boat to
the shore. On these occasions they have requested
us to mount in ancient regal style. Though we
generally preferred riding on their backs, and
throwing our arms round their necks, we have,
nevertheless, when the river has been deep, seated
ourselves upon their shoulders, and in this position
have passed the stream, without any other incon¬
venience than that which has arisen from the ap¬
prehension of losing our balance, and falling head¬
long into the water.—The inhabitants of Rurutu
have a singular and less pleasant method of con¬
veying their friends from a boat, &c. to the shore.
On the arrival of strangers, every man endeavours
to obtain one as a friend, and carry him off to his
own habitation, where he is treated with the
greatest kindness by the inhabitants of the dis¬
trict ; they place him on a high seat, and feed him
with abundance of the finest food. After an
arrival from a strange island, when a man sees his

HOMAGE TO CHIEFS. 105

neighbour carrying a friend or a new-comer on his
shoulders, he attacks him—a fight ensues, for the
possession of the prize—if the man who formerly
possessed it is victorious, he goes home with his
man on his shoulders, receives a hearty welcome,
and is regarded by the whole district as a brave
fellow ; whereas if he loses the prize, he is looked
upon by all his friends as a coward.

I am not aware that the highest rulers in the
Society Islands received at any time the same
kind of homage which the Hawaians occasionally
paid to those chiefs who were considered to have
descended from the gods. When these walked
out during the season of tabu, the people pros¬
trated themselves, with their faces touching the
ground, as they passed along. A mark of homage,
however, equally humiliating to those who ren¬
dered it, and probably as flattering to the indi¬
viduals by whom it was received, was in far more
extensive and perpetual use among the Tahitians.
This was, the stripping down the upper garments,
and uncovering the body as low as the waist, in
the presence of the king. This homage was paid
to the gods, and also to their temples. In passing
these, every individual, either walking on the
shore, or sailing in a canoe, removed whatever
article of dress he wore upon the shoulders and
breast, and passed uncovered the depository of the
deities, the site of their altars, or the temples of
their worship.

Whenever the king appeared abroad, or the
people approached his presence, this mark of
reverence was required from all ranks; his own
father and mother were not excepted, but were
generally the first to uncover themselves. The
people inhabiting the district through which he

106 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

passed, uncovered as he approached; and those
who sat in the houses by the road-side, as soon as
they heard the cry of te arii , te arii , “ the king,”
the king,” stripped off their upper garments, and
did not venture to replace them till he had passed.
Jf by any accident he came upon them unex¬
pectedly, the cloth they wore was instantly rent in
pieces, and an atonement offered. Any individual
whom he might pass on the road, should he hesi¬
tate to remove this part of his dress, would be in
danger of losing his life on the spot, or of being
marked as a victim of sacrifice to the gods.

This distinguishing mark of respect was not only
rendered at all times, and from every individual, to
the person of the king, but even to his dwellings,
wherever they might be. These houses were con¬
sidered sacred, and were the only habitations, in
any part of the island, where the king could alight,
and take refreshment and repose. The ground,
for a considerable space on both sides, was in their
estimation sacred. A tii, or carved image, fixed
on a high pedestal, and placed by the road-side, at
a short distance from the dwelling, marked the
boundary of the sacred soil. All travellers passing
these houses, on approaching the first image, strip¬
ped off the upper part of their dress, and, whether
the king was residing there or not, walked un¬
covered to the image at the opposite boundary.
After passing this, they replaced their poncho, or
kind of mantle, and pursued their journey.

To refuse this homage would have been con¬
sidered not only as an indication of disaffection
towards the king, but as rebellion against the go¬
vernment, and impiety towards the gods, exposing
the individuals to the vengeance of the supreme
powers in the visible and invisible worlds. Such

CEREMONY OF INAUGURATION. 107

was the unapproachable elevation to which the
superstitions of the people raised the rulers in the
South Sea Islands, and such the marked distinc¬
tion that prevailed between the king and people,
from his birth, until he was superseded in title and
rank by his own son !

The ceremony of inauguration to the regal office,
which took place when the king assumed the go¬
vernment, being one of considerable moment, was
celebrated with a rude magnificence, though, like
every other observance, it was marked with dis¬
gusting abominations, and horrid cruelty. There
was no fixed period of life at which the youth
were said to have arrived at years of manhood.
Unaccustomed to keep even traditionary accounts
of the time of their birth, there were but few whose
age was known. The period therefore when the
young king was formally invested with the regalia,
and introduced to his high office, was regulated by
his own character and disposition, the will of his
father and guardians, or the exigences of the state ;
it generally took place some years before he had
reached the age of twenty-one.

As it was one of the most important events to
the nation, great preparation was made for its due
celebration; and whatever could give effect to the
pageant was carefully provided. The gods indi¬
cated the interest they were supposed to take in
the transaction, by the miraculous events that
occurred at this time. Among those might be
mentioned the sacred aoa, a tree resembling the
banian of India, that spread over the Faa-ape.
This was said to have shot forth a new fibrous
branch at his birth, and this branch or tendril
reached the ground when he was to be made king.
Taneua, a bamboo used on the occasion, was said

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

108

to draw its roots out of the ground at the approach
of the ceremony, and to leap into the hand of the
person who was sent for it.

The inauguration ceremony, answering to coro¬
nation among other nations, consisted in girding
the king with the maro ura , or sacred girdle of red
feathers ; which not only raised him to the highest
earthly station, but identified him with their gods.
The maro or girdle was made with the beaten fibres
of the aoa; with these a number of terw, red fea¬
thers, taken from the images of their deities, were
interwoven with feathers of other colours. The maro
thus became sacred, even as the person of the gods,
the feathers being supposed to retain all the dread¬
ful attributes of power and vengeance which the
idols possessed, and with which it was designed to
endow the king. The sacred girdle which was shewn
to Capt. Cook in the marae at Atehuru, and which
was used by the sovereigns of Tahiti, was five yards
long, and fifteen inches wide. It was covered with
red and yellow feathers: one end was bordered with
eight pieces, about the size and shape of a horse¬
shoe, and fringed with black feathers; the other end
was forked; the feathers were ranged in square
figures. The pendant which Capt. Wallis hoisted
at Matavai was attached to this girdle. Every part
of the proceeding was marked by its absurdity or
its wickedness, but the most affecting circumstance
was the murderous cruelty attending even the pre¬
paration for its celebration.

In order to render the gods propitious to the
transmission of this power, a human victim was
sacrificed when they commenced the fatu raa ,
or manufacture of this girdle. This unhappy
wretch was called the sacrifice for the man raa titi ,
commencement or fastening on of the sacred maro.

ROYAL INAUGURATION. 109

Sometimes a human victim was offered for every
fresh piece added to the girdle ; and when it was
finished, another man, called “ Sacrifice for the pin
raa maro,” was slain ; and the girdle was considered
as consecrated by the blood of those victims. On
the morning of what might be called the coronation
day, when the king bathed, prior to the commence¬
ment of the ceremonies, another human victim was
required in the name of the gods.

The pageant, on this occasion, proceeded by
land and water. The parties, who were to be en¬
gaged in the transactions of the day, assembled in
the marae of Oro. Certain ceremonies were here
performed : the image of Oro, stripped of the sacred
cloth in which he usually reposed, and decorated
with all the emblems of his divinity, was con¬
veyed to the large court of the temple ; the Papa
rahi o ruea , or great bed of Oro, a large curiously
formed bench or sofa, cut out of a solid piece of
timber, was brought out, for the throne on which
the king was to sit.

When these preliminaries were finished, they
proceeded from the temple in the following order.
— Tairi-moa, one of the priests of the family of
Tairi, carried the image of Oro. The king follow¬
ed immediately after the god. Behind him the
large bed of Oro was borne by four chiefs. The
miro-tahua, or orders of priests, w T ith the great
drum from the temple, the trumpets, and other
instruments, followed. Each of the priests wore
a tapaau on the arm, consisting of the braided
leaflets of the cocoa-nut tree. As soon as the
image appeared without the temple, the multitude,
who were waiting to witness the pageant, retired
to a respectful distance on each side, leaving a
wide clear space. The priests sounded their txum~

110 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

pets, and beat the sacred drum, as they marched
in procession from the temple to the sea-shore,
where a fleet of canoes, previously prepared, was
waiting for them. The sacred canoe, or state
barge of Oro, was distinguished from the rest by
the tapaau, or sacred wreaths of platted cocoa-nut
leaves, by which it was surrounded, and which
were worn by every individual on board.

As soon as the procession reached the beach,
Oro was carried on board, and followed by the
priests and instruments of music, while the king
took his seat upon the sacred sleeping-place of
Oro, which was fixed on the shore. The chiefs
stood around the king, and the priests around the
god, until, upon a signal given, the king arose
from his seat, advanced into the sea, and bathed
his person. The priest of Oro then descended
into the water, bearing in his hand a branch of the
sacred mero, plucked from the tree which grew in
the precincts of the temple. While the king was
bathing, the priest struck him on his back with
the sacred branch, and offered up the prescribed
ubu, or invocation, to Taaroa. The design of this
part of the ceremony was to purify the king from
all mahuru huru, or defilement and guilt, which he
might have contracted, according to their own ex¬
pression, by his having seized any land, banished
any people, committed murder, &c.

When these ablutions were completed, the king
and the priest ascended the sacred canoe. Here,
in the presence of Oro, he was invested with the
maro ura, or sacred girdle, interwoven with the
feathers from the idol. The priest, while employed
in girding the king with this emblem of dominion
and majesty, pronounced an ubu, commencing
with Faa atea te arii i tai i motu tabu , “ Extend

DEIFIED SHARKS. Ill

or spread the influence of the king over the sea to
the sacred islanddescribing also the nature of
his girdle, and addressing the king at the close, by
saying —Medua teie a oe e te Arii: u Parent this,
of you, O king;” indicating that from the gods all
his power was derived.

As soon as the ubu was finished, the multitude
on the beach, and in the surrounding canoes, lifted
up the right-hand, and greeted the new monarch
with loud and universal acclamations of Maeva
arii! maeva arii! The steersman in the sacred
canoe struck his paddle against the side of the
vessel, which was the signal to the rowers, who
instantly started from the shore towards the reef,
having the god, and the king, girded as it were
with the deity, on board ; the priests beating their
large drum, and sounding their trumpets, which
were beautiful large turbo, or trumpet-shells. The
thronging spectators followed in their canoes,
raising their right-hand in the air, and shouting
Maeva arii!

Having proceeded in this manner for a con¬
siderable distance, to indicate the dominion of the
king on the sea, and receive the homage of the
powers of the deep, they returned towards the
shore.

During this excursion, Tuumao and Tahui, two
deified sharks, a sort of demi-gods of the sea, were
influenced by Oro to come and congratulate the
new king on his assumption of government. If
the monarch was a legitimate ruler, and one ele¬
vated to the office with the sanction of the superior
powers, these sharks, it was said, always came to
pay their respects to him, either while he was
bathing in the sea, or during the excursion in the
sacred canoe. But it is probable, that when they

112 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

approached while his majesty was in the water,
some of his attendants were stationed round, to
prevent their coming too near, lest their saluta¬
tions should have been more direct and personal
than would have proved agreeable. Yet, it is said
that the parents of the present rulers of some of
the islands, at the time of their inauguration, ac¬
tually played with these sharks, without receiving
any injury.

The fleet reaching the shore, the parties landed,
when the king was placed on the papa rahi o ruea ,
or sacred couch of Oro, as his throne ; but in¬
stead of a footstool, the ordinary appendage to a
throne, he reclined his head on the urua Tafeu ,
the sacred pillow of Tafeu. This was also cut
out of a solid piece of wood, and ornamented with
carving.

The procession was now formed as before, and
moving towards Tabutabuatea, the great national
temple, Tairimoa, bearing the image of Oro, led
the way. The king, reclining on his throne, or
couch of royalty, followed immediately after. He
was borne on the shoulders of four principal nobles
connected w T ith the reigning family. The chiefs
and priests followed in his train, the latter sound¬
ing their trumpets, and beating the large sacred
drum, while the spectators shouted Maeva arii!
as they proceeded to the temple. The multitude
followed them into the court of the marae, where
the king’s couch or throne was fixed upon the
elevated stone platform, in the midst of the unu,
or carved ornaments of wood erected in honour of
the departed chiefs whose bones had been depo¬
sited there.

The principal idol Oro, and his son Hiro, were
placed by the side of the king, and the gods and

COURTLY ADULATION.

113

the king here received the homage and tribute ol
allegiance from the people. A veil must be thrown
over the vices with which the ceremonies were con«
eluded.

Although this ceremony was one of the least
offensive festivities among them, the murderous
cruelty with which it commenced, and the wicked¬
ness with which it terminated, were adapted to
impress the mind with acutest anguish and deepest
commiseration. The abominations continued until
the blowing of the trumpet on board the canoes
required every one to depart from the temple.
They now repaired to the banquet or feast provided
for the occasion, and passed the remainder of the
day in unrestrained indulgence and excess.

The phraseology of the Tahitian court was in
perfect accordance with the elevation, and sacred
connexion with their divinities, which the binding
on the red girdle was designed to recognize and
ratify. The preposterous vanity and adulation in
language, used in epithets bestowed upon the
king of Tahiti and his establishment, fully equal
those employed in the most gorgeous establish¬
ment of Eastern princes, or the seraglios of
Turkish sultans.

It was not only declared that Oro was the father
of the king, as was implied by the address of the
priest when arraying him in the sacred girdle, and
the station occupied by his throne, when placed in
the temple by the side of the deities, but it per¬
vaded the terms used in reference to his whole
establishment. His houses were called the aorai y
the clouds of heaven ; anuanua , the rainbow, was
the name of the canoe in which he voyaged; his
voice was called thunder; the glare of the torches
in his dwelling was denominated lightning ; and

in. i

114 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

when the people saw them in the evening, as they
passed near his abode, instead of saying the torches
were burning in the palace, they would observe
that the lightning was flashing in the clouds of
heaven. When he passed from one district to
another on the shoulders of his bearers, instead of
speaking of his travelling from one place to another,
they always used the word mahuta , which signifies
to fly; and hence described his journey by saying,
that the king was flying from one district of the
island to another.

The establishment and habits of the king often
exhibited the most striking contrast; at one time
he was seen surrounded by the priests, and in¬
vested with the insignia of royalty, and divinity
itself; or appeared in public on the shoulders of
his bearers, while the people expressed every in¬
dication of superstitious reverence and fear. At
other times, he might be seen on terms of the
greatest familiarity with his attendants and do¬
mestics.

He never wore a crown, or any badge of dignity,
and, in general, there was no difference between
his dress and that of the chiefs by whom he was
surrounded, excepting that the fine cloth and
matting, called vane, with which he was often
arrayed, were more rare and valuable than the
dress worn by others. His raiment frequently
consisted of the ordinary pareu, or ahu pu, in
quality often inferior to that worn by some of the
chiefs in attendance upon him.

In some of the islands to the westward, at the
ceremonies of the temple, the people, to shew their
homage, wound folds of cloth repeatedly round
the body of the king, till he was unable to move,
and appeared as if it was only a man’s head rest-

TENURE OE LAND.

115

ing on the immense bale of cloth in which he was
enclosed. I do not know that the kings of Tahiti
ever experienced such treatment from their sub¬
jects. The kings of the former were left in this
ludicrous and helpless situation, while the people
travelled round the island, boxing and wrestling,
in honour of their sovereign, throughout every
district.

The regal establishment was maintained by the
produce of the hereditary districts of the reigning
family, and the requisitions made upon the people.
Although the authority of the king was supreme,
and his power undisputed, yet he does not appear
to have been considered as the absolute proprietor
of the land, nor do the occupants seem to have
been mere tenants at will, as was the fact in the
Sandwich Islands.

There were certain districts which constituted
the patrimony of the royal family; in these they
could walk abroad, as they were sacred lands.
The other districts were regarded as belonging to
their respective occupants or proprietors, who were
generally raatiras, and whose interest in the soil
was distinct from that of the king, and often more
extensive. These lands they inherited from their
ancestors, and bequeathed them to their children,
or whomsoever they chose to select as their heirs.
At their death the parties to whom land had been
thus left, entered into undisturbed possession, as
of rightful property.

The practice of tutuing , or devising by will, was
found to exist among them prior to the arrival of
the Missionaries, and was employed not only in
reference to land, but to any other kinds of pro¬
perty. Unacquainted with letters, they could not
leave a written will, but, during a season of illness,,

i 2

116 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

those possessing property frequently called toge¬
ther the members of the family, or confidential
friends, and to them gave directions for the dis¬
posal of their effects after their decease. This was
considered a sacred charge, and was usually exe¬
cuted with fidelity.

Every portion of land had its respective owner;
and even the distinct trees on the land had some¬
times different proprietors, and a tree, and the land
on which it grew, different owners. The divisions
of land were accurately marked by a natural boun¬
dary, as a ridge of mountains, or the course of a
river, or by artificial means; and frequently a
carved image, or tii, denoted the extent of their
different possessions. Whether these tiis were
designed to intimate that the spirits they repre¬
sented guarded the borders of their property, or
were used as ornaments, I could not learn, but
the removal of the ancient land-marks was regarded
as a heinous offence.

The produce which the king received from his
hereditary estates being seldom sufficient for the
maintenance of his household, the deficiency was
supplied from the different districts of the islands.
The frequency, however, with which the inferior
chiefs were required to bring provisions, was
neither fixed nor regular, but was governed by the
number of the districts, or the necessities of the
king’s steward. Still there was a sort of tacit
agreement between the king and chiefs, as to the
times when they should furnish his provision ; and
the usage among them, in this respect, was gene¬
rally understood.

The provision was ready dressed, though occa¬
sionally the vegetables and roots were brought
uncooked, and the pigs led alive to the king’s ser-

NATIONAL COUNCILS.

117

vants. The pigs, after being presented to the
king, were sometimes taken back by the farmer,
■and fed till required for use. Cloth for the dress
of the king’s servants, houses for his abode, and
canoes, not only for himself, but also for those of
his household, were furnished by the inhabitants of
the islands.

Although the king’s will was the supreme law,
and the government in some respects despotic, it
approximated more to a mixed administration, a
union of monarchy and aristocracy. The king had
usually one confidential chief near his person, who
was his adviser in every affair of importance, and
was, in fact, his prime minister. Frequently there
were two or three who possessed the confidence,
and aided the counsels, of the king. These mi¬
nisters were not responsible to any one for the
advice they gave. So great, however, was the
influence of the raatiras, that a measure of any
importance, such as the declaration of war, or the
fitting out a fleet, was seldom undertaken without
their being first consulted. This was effected by
the friends of the king going among them, and pro¬
posing the affair in contemplation, or by convening
a public council for its consideration.

Their public measures were not distinguished by
promptness or decision, excepting when they
wreaked vengeance upon the poor and helpless
victims of their displeasure. After a meeting of
the chiefs had been summoned, it was a long time
before all came together, and their meetings were
often interrupted by adjournments.

Their councils were usually held in the open
air, where the chiefs and others formed a circle,
in which the orators of the different parties took
their stations opposite to each other. These

1 1 8 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES*

orators were the principal, but not the only
speakers. The king often addressed the assembly.
The warriors and the raatiras also delivered their
sentiments with boldness and freedom. When a
difference of opinion prevailed, and words ran
high, the impetuosity of their passions broke
through all restraint, and sometimes the council
terminated in scenes of confusion and bloodshed ;
or if it ended without open hostility, the chieftains
returned to their respective districts, to assemble
their tenantry, and prepare for war.

POWER OE THE CHIEFS.

119

CHAP. V.

Power of the chiefs and proprietors of land—Banishment
and confiscation—The king’s messenger—The niau, an
emblem of authority—Ancient usages in reference to
crime, &c.— Fatal effects of jealousy—Seizure of pro¬
perty—Punishment of theft—Public works—Supplies
for the king—Despotic rapacity—Extortion of the king’s
servants—Unorganized state of civil polity—Desire a
code of Christian laws—Advice and conduct of the
Missionaries—Preparation of the laws—Public enact¬
ment by the king in a national assembly at Tahiti—■
Capital punishments—Manner of conducting public
trials—Establishment of laws in Raiatea—Prepara¬
tion of those for Huahine.

Every chief was the sovereign of his own district,
though all acknowledged the supremacy of the
king. Each island was divided into a number of
large portions, or districts, called Maataina, a term
also applied to the inhabitants of a district. These
maataina had distinct names, and were under the
government of a chieftain of rank, or dignity be¬
longing to the reigning family, or to the raatiras.
This individual was the baron of the domain, or
the lord of the manor, and was succeeded in his
possessions and office by his son, or the nearest
of his kindred, with a fresh appointment from the
king.

120 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

For treason, rebellion, or withholding supplies,
individuals were liable to banishment, and confis¬
cation of property. The king had the prerogative
of nominating his successor, but could not appro¬
priate the lands of the exile to his own use. The
removal of a chief of high rank, or of extensive in¬
fluence, was seldom attempted, unless the measure
was approved by the other chiefs. The sovereign
was, therefore, more desirous to conciliate their
esteem, and engage their co-operation, than to
prejudice them against his person or measures.
As he had no permanent armed force at his dis¬
posal, he could not, on every occasion, accomplish
his wishes ; and, at times, when he has issued his
mandate for the banishment of a raatira, if the
other raatiras deemed his expulsion unwarrantable,
they have desired him to keep possession of his
lands, and then, remonstrating with the king, have
declared their determination to maintain the cause
of the injured party, even by force of arms. The
extent of power possessed by the raatiras, in the
number of their tenantry and dependants, was
one of the greatest sources of embarrassment to
the government, whose measures were only regu¬
lated by the will of the ruler, or the exigencies of
the state.

In the division of their country, the natives
appear to have had a remarkable predilection for
the number eight. Almost every island, whatever
its size, is divided into eight districts, and the
inhabitants into an equal number of maataina, or
divisions. In each district the power of the chief
was supreme, and greater than that which the king
exercised over the whole. This power extended
to the persons and lives, as weil as the property, of
the people.

POWER OF THE CHIEFS.

121

The inferior chiefs also exercised the same au¬
thority over their dependants. The father was
magistrate in his own family; the chief in his own
district; and the king nominally dispensed law
and justice to the whole. The final appeal, in all
matters of dispute, was made to the chief ruler;
and the parties who resorted to his decision
usually regarded it as binding. There was no regular
police, for the maintenance of public order. The
chief of each district was accountable for the con¬
duct of the people under his own jurisdiction.
The chieftains who were in attendance on the
king, with the servants of his establishment, were
the agents usually employed to carry his measures
into effect. The servants of the raatiras performed
the same duty in their respective localities, and the
king often sent his order to the district chief, who
employed his own men in its execution.

Notwithstanding the many acts of homage paid
to the head and other branches of the reigning
family, and their imagined connexion with the
gods, the actual influence of the king over the
haughty and despotic district chieftains, was
neither powerful nor permanent, and he could
seldom confide in their fidelity in any project
which would not advance their interests as well as
his own. Every measure was therefore planned
with the most cautious deliberation, the approval
and aid of a number of these nobility of the
country being essential to carry it into effect; but
when the interests of the reigning family and those
of the chieftains were opposed, it produced no
small embarrassment. These raatiras, who re¬
sembled the barons of the feudal system, kept the
people under them in a state of the greatest sub¬
jection, and received from them not only military

122 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

service, but a portion of the produce of their lands,
and personal labour whenever required.

Whenever a measure affecting' the whole of the
inhabitants was adopted, the king’s vea , or mes¬
senger, was despatched with a bundle of niaus , or
leaflets. On entering a district, he repaired to the
habitation of the principal chiefs, and, presenting
a cocoa-nut leaf, delivered the orders of the king.
The acceptance of the leaf was a declaration of
their compliance with the requisition, and to
decline taking it was regarded as an intima¬
tion of hostility to the measure proposed.—
Hence the messenger or herald, when he had
travelled round the island, reported to the king,
who had received and who had refused the niau.
When the chiefs approved of the message, they
sent their own messengers to their respective
tenants and dependants, with a cocoa-nut leaf for
each, and the orders of the king.

The niau, or leaflet of the cocoa-nut tree, was
the emblem of authority throughout the whole of
the Georgian and Society Islands; and requisi¬
tions for property or labour, preparations for war,
or the convocation of a national assembly, were
formerly made by sending the cocoa-nut leaf to
those whose service or attendance was required.
To return or refuse the niau was to offer an insult
to the king, and to resist his authority.

If the king felt himself strong enough, he would
instantly banish such an individual, and send
another to take possession of his lands, and oc¬
cupy his station as chief of the district. Should
the offender have been guilty of disobedience to
the just demands of the king, though the lands
might be his hereditary property, he must leave
them, and become, as the people expressed it, a

THE LAW OF FORCE.

123

wanderer “ upon the road but if the king’s con¬
duct was considered arbitrary, and the individual
justified in his refusal by the other chiefs, they
would tapea , or detain him, and protest to the
king against his removal. The parties generally
knew each other’s strength and influence, and
those who had little hopes of succeeding by an
appeal to arms, usually conceded whatever was
required. Personal security, and the rights of
private property, were unknown; and the admi¬
nistration of justice by the chiefs in the several
districts, and the king over the whole, was regu¬
lated more by the relative power than by the
merits of their cause.

They had no regular code of laws, nor any
public courts of justice, and, excepting in offences
against the king and chiefs, the rulers were
seldom appealed to. The people in general
avenged their own injuries. Death or banishment
was the punishment usually inflicted by the chiefs,
and frequently the objects of their displeasure were
marked out as victims for sacrifice.

Destitute, however, as they were of even oral
laws or institutes, there were many acts, which, by
general consent, were considered criminal, and
deserving punishment. These were orure hau 9
rebellion, or shaking the government, withholding
supplies, or even speaking contemptuously of the
king or his administration. So heinous was this
offence, that the criminal was not only liable to
banishment, or the forfeiture of his life, but a
human sacrifice must be offered, to atone for the
guilt, and appease the displeasure of the gods
against the people of the land in which it had
been committed. Lewdness was not regarded as
a crime, but adultery was sometimes punished

124 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

with death. Those among the middle or higher
ranks who practised polygamy, allowed their wives
other husbands. It is reported that brothers, or
members of the same family, sometimes exchanged
their wives, while the wife of every individual was
also the wife of his taio or friend.

Their character in this respect presents a most
unnatural mixture of brutal degradation with
mfuriated and malignant jealousy ; for while their
conduct with respect to the taio, &c. exhibits an
nsensibility to every feeling essential to conjugal
happiness, the least familiarity with the wife, un¬
authorized by the husband, even a word or a look,
from a stranger, if the husband was suspicious, or
attributed it to improper motives, was followed by
instant and deadly revenge.

There is a man now residing in Huahine, whose
face and shoulders are frightfully marked with
deep scars, inflicted by blows with a carpenter’s
axe, on this account. A husband and wife were
once sitting together, when another man joined
the party, and sat down with them. He wore a
taupoo, or bonnet, of platted cocoa-nut leaves:
lifting his hand, and taking hold of it by the part
that shaded his brows, he waved his hand towards
the inland part of the district, in removing his
bonnet from his head. The suspicious husband,
observing the motion of his hand, considered it as
an assignation, that the stranger was to meet his
wife there; and without a word, I believe, being
spoken by either party, he rose up, took down his
spear, which was suspended from the inside of his
dwelling, and ran the man through the body,
accusing him at the same time of the crime of
which he supposed him guilty. Several of the
murders of the Europeans, that have been com-

PUNISHMENT OF THEFT. 125

mitted in the islands of the Pacific, have originated
in this cause.

Theft was practised, but less frequently among
themselves than towards their foreign visitors.
They supposed it equally criminal, yet they do not
in general appear to have attached any moral
delinquency to the practice; but they imagined
they were more likely to avoid detection when
stealing from strangers, than when robbing their
own countrymen. Stealing was always considered
as a crime among them, and every precaution was
taken to guard against it. On this account, their
large bales of valuable cloth, and most articles of
property not in constant use, were kept suspended
from the ridge-pole or rafters of their dwellings;
their smaller rolls of cloth were often laid by their
pillows; and their pigs were driven under their beds
at night, to prevent their being stolen.

This nefarious practice, strange as it may appear,
was supported by their false system of religion,
and sanctioned by the patronage of the gods, es¬
pecially by Hiro, a son of Oro, who was called the
god of thieves. The aid of this god was invoked
by those who went on expeditions of plunder, and
the priests probably received a portion of the spoils.
Chiefs of considerable rank have sometimes been
detected in the act of stealing, or have been known
to employ their domestics to thieve, receiving the
articles stolen, and afterwards sheltering the plun¬
derers. This, however, has generally been prac¬
tised on the property of foreigners.

Among themselves, if detected, the thief ex¬
perienced no mercy, but was often murdered on
the spot. If detected afterwards, he was some¬
times dreadfully wounded or killed. Two very
affecting instances of vengeance of this kind are

120 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

recorded by the early Missionaries. I have also
heard that they sometimes bound the thief hand
and foot, and, putting him into an old rotten
canoe, towed him out to sea, and there left him
adrift, to sink in the ocean, or become a prey to
the sharks.

The haru raa , or seizing all the property of de¬
linquents, was the most frequent retaliation, among
the lower class, for this and other crimes. The
servants of the chiefs, or injured party, went to
the house of the offenders, and took by force what¬
ever they found, carrying away every article worth
possessing, and destroying the rest. If the in¬
habitants of the house received previous intimation
of their purpose, they generally removed or secreted
their most valuable property, but seldom attempted
to resist the seizure, even though every article of
food and clothing, and the mats on which they
slept, should be taken away.

This mode of retaliation for theft, or other
injury, was so generally recognized as just, that,
although the party thus plundered might be more
powerful than those who plundered them, they
would not attempt to prevent the seizure : had
they done so, the population of the district would
have assisted those, who, according to established
custom, were thus punishing the aggressors. Such
was the usual method resorted to for punishing
petty thefts committed among themselves. They
were generally satisfied with seizing whatever they
could find in the houses, yards, or gardens of the
offenders; but when it was practised by order of
the king or chiefs, the culprit was banished from
his house or lands, and reduced to a state of com¬
plete destitution.

Great difficulty was often experienced in dis-

PUBLIC WORKS.

127

covering the thief, or the property stolen ; and, on
these occasions, they frequently resorted to divi¬
nation, and employed the sorcerer to discover the
offender. The thief, when detected, generally
received summary punishment. Mr. Bourne states,
that, in one of the Hervey islands, a man found a
little boy, about eight years of age, stealing food ;
the man instantly seized the juvenile delinquent,
and, tying a heavy stone to his leg, threw him into
the sea. The boy sunk to the bottom, and would
soon have paid for his crime with his life, had not
one of the native teachers plunged into the water,
rescued him, and taken him to his own house,
where he has ever since resided.

The resources of the government consisted in
the personal services of the people, and the pro¬
duce of the soil. From these the revenue was
derived. All public works, such as the erection of
national temples, fortifications, enclosures from the
sea, dwellings for the king, &c. were performed
by the whole population. In each district,
the king had a viceroy, or deputy, to whom his
orders were sent with a cocoa-nut leaf. The
chiefs sometimes assembled together, and divided
the work among themselves. At other times, the
king appointed to each his particular share. Every
chief then issued orders to the raatiras under his
authority, who prepared the materials, and per¬
formed the work. Canoes for the king’s use were
furnished in the same way, and also cloth for him¬
self and his household.

Every district brought provisions at stated in¬
tervals for the king’s use, or for the maintenance
of his numerous retinue. Besides what they
regularly furnished, orders were often issued for
extraordinary supplies, for the entertainment of a

128 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

distinguished guest, or the celebration of a na¬
tional festival. No regular system of taxation
prevailed, but every kind of property was furnished
by the chiefs and people in great abundance, not
only for the king, but for the purpose of enriching
those who were the objects of his favour.

However abundant the supplies might be which
the king received, he was in general more necessi¬
tous than many of the chiefs. Applications from the
chiefs, for food, for cloth, canoes, and every other
valuable article furnished by the people, were so fre¬
quent and importunate, that more than was barely
sufficient for his own use seldom remained long in
his possession. A present of food was usually
accompanied with several hundred yards of native
cloth, and a number of fine large double canoes;
yet every article was often distributed among the
chiefs and favourites on the very day it arrived ;
and so urgent were the applicants, that they did
not wait till the articles were brought, but often
extorted from the king a promise that he would
give them the first bale of cloth, or double canoe,
he might receive. At times they went beyond
this; and when a chief, who considered the king
under obligations to him, knew that the inhabit¬
ants of a district were preparing a present for their
sovereign, which would include any articles he
wished to possess, he would go to the king, and
tapao, mark or bespeak it, even before it was
finished. A promise given under these circum¬
stances was usually regarded as binding, though it
often involved the king in difficulties, and kept
him necessitous.

In the estimation of the people, generosity was
among the greatest virtues of a king; and illi¬
berally was most unpopular. In describing a

DESPOTIC RAPACITY. 129

good chief, or governor, they always spoke of
him as one who distributed among his chiefs
whatever he received, and never refused any thing
for which they asked.

Notwithstanding this generosity on the part of
the king, the conduct of the government was often
most rapacious and unjust. The stated and re¬
gular supplies, furnished by the inhabitants, were
inadequate to the maintenance of the num¬
bers who, attaching themselves to the king’s
household, passed their time in idleness, but were
fed at his table. Whenever there was a deficiency
of food for his followers or guests, a number of
his servants went to the residence of a raatira,
or farmer, and, sometimes without even asking,
tied up the pigs that were fed near the dwell¬
ing, plundered the abode, ravaging, like a band
of lawless robbers, the plantations or the gardens,
and taking away every article of food the poor,
oppressed labourer possessed. Sometimes they
launched a fine canoe that might be lying near,
and, loading it with their plunder, left the indus¬
trious proprietor destitute even of the means of
subsistence; and, as they were the king’s servants,
he durst not complain.

When the king travelled, he was usually attend¬
ed by a company of Areois, or a worthless train of
idlers; and often when they entered a district that
was perhaps well supplied with provisions for its
inhabitants, if they remained any length of time,
by their plundering and wanton destruction it was
reduced to a state of desolation. Sometimes the
king sent his servants to take what they wanted
from the fields or gardens of the people ; but often,
unauthorized by him, they used his name to
commit the most lawless and injurious outrage

III. K

130 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

upon the property of the inhabitants; whose lives
were endangered, if they offered the least resist¬
ance.

Mahamene, a native of Raiatea, gave, at a public
meeting in that island, the following account
of their behaviour. “ These teuteu,” (servants
of the king,) said he, u would enter a house, and
commit the greatest depredations. The master of
the house would sit as a poor captive, and look on,
without daring to say a word. They would seize
his bundle of cloth, kill his largest pigs, pluck the
best bread-fruit, take the largest taro, (arum roots,)
the finest sugar-cane, the ripest bananas, and even
take the posts of his house for fuel to cook them
with. Is there not a man present who actually
buried his new canoe under the sand, to secure it
from these desperate men V’

Nothing fostered tyranny and oppression in the
rulers, and reduced the population to a state of
wretchedness, so much as these unjust proceed¬
ings. Those who, by habits of industry, or desire
of comfort for themselves and families, might be
induced to cultivate more land than others, were,
from this very circumstance, marked out for de¬
spoliation. They had no redress for these wrongs,
and therefore, rather than expose themselves to the
mortifying humiliation of seeing the fruits of their
labour taken to feed a useless and insulting band
that followed the movements of the king, they
allowed their lands to remain untilled, and chose to
procure a scanty means of subsistence from day to
day, rather than suffer the insults to which even
their industry exposed them.

-So far were these shameless extortions practised,
that during the journey of an European through
the country, he has been attended by a servant of

EXTORTION OF THE KING’S SERVANTS. 131

the king, and when, in return for provisions fur¬
nished, or acts of kindness shewn, by the hospitable
inhabitants, he has made them a trifling pre¬
sent, it has been instantly seized by the vassal of
the chief, who has followed him for that purpose.
The poor people were also allowed to dispose of
their produce to the captains or merchants that
might visit them for the purpose of barter, but the
king or chief frequently requested the greater part,
or even the whole, of what they might receive in
return for it.

That they should have improved in industry, or
advanced in civilization, under such a system, was
impossible, and that they should, under such cir¬
cumstances, have tilled a sufficient quantity of
ground to furnish supplies for the shipping, is a
matter of greater surprise, than that they should
not have cultivated more. The humiliating degra¬
dation to which it reduced the farmers, and the
constant irritation of feelings to which this wretched
system exposed them, were not the only evils that
resulted from it. It naturally led the raatiras to
regard their chiefs as enemies, and generated
disaffection to their administration. It also greatly
diminished their resources, for, under the discou¬
ragements resulting from constant liability to plun¬
der, the people were unable to furnish those sup¬
plies, which they would otherwise have found it a
satisfaction to render.

This system of civil polity, disjointed and ill
adapted as it was to answer any valuable purpose,
was closely interwoven with their sanguinary ido¬
latry, and sanctioned by the authority of the gods.
The king was not only raised to the head of this
government, but he was considered as a sort of
vicegerent to the supernatural powers presiding

132 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

over the invisible world. Human sacrifices were
offered at his inauguration ; and whenever any one,
under the influence of the loss he had sustained by
plunder, or other injury, spoke disrespectfully of
his person and administration, not only was his life
in danger, but human victims must be offered, to
cleanse the land from the pollution it was supposed
to have contracted.

The intimate connexion between the government
and their idolatry, occasioned the dissolution of
the one, with the abolition of the other; and when
the system of pagan worship was subverted, many
of their ancient usages perished in its ruins. They
remained for some years without any system or
form of government, excepting the will of the king,
to whom the inhabitants usually furnished liberal
supplies of all that was necessary for the mainte¬
nance of his household, and the accomplishment of
his designs.

The raatiras exercised the supreme authority in
the divisions over which the king had placed them.
But when circumstances occurred, in which, under
idolatry, they would have acted according to their
ancient custom, they felt embarrassed. Many of
the people, free in a great degree from exposure to
seizure, and the more dreadful apprehension of
being offered to the gods, evinced a disinclination
to render the king the supplies and support he
needed.

The sacrificing of human victims to the idols had
been one of the most powerful engines in the hands
of the government, the requisition for them being
always made by the ruler, to whom the priests
applied when it was pretended the gods required
them : the king, therefore, sent his herald to the
petty chieftain, who selected the victims. An in-

UNORGANIZED POLITY. 133

dividual who had shewn any marked disaffection
towards the government, or incurred the displea¬
sure of the king and chiefs, was usually chosen.
The people knew this, and therefore rendered the
most unhesitating obedience : but the subversion
of idolatry having annihilated this feeling, many,
free from the restraint it had imposed, seemed
almost to refuse lawful obedience, and to with¬
hold rightful support.

Their government continued in this unsettled
state for four or five years; during which, the
people brought provisions and supplies to the king,
and furnished the accustomed articles for his es¬
tablishment, either according to arrangements made
among themselves, or in obedience to his requisi¬
tions. The superior and subordinate rulers over
the people endeavoured to preserve the peace of
society, and promote the public welfare, by pun¬
ishing offenders according to the nature of their
crimes, but without any regular or uniform pro¬
cedure. The only punishment inflicted was ban¬
ishment, and, in a few instances, seizure for theft.
It was, however, evident that another system must
be introduced, instead of that which, with the tabu
and idolatry, had been abolished.

It is a fact worthy of note, that although no
people in the world could be more vicious than
they were prior to their renunciation of paganism,
yet such was the moral influence of the precepts of
Christianity on the community at large, and conse¬
quently on the conduct of many who were Chris¬
tians only by profession, that for some time crimes
affecting the peace of society were but few. Theft,
to which ever since their discovery they have been
proverbially addicted, was rarely committed. It
was not, however, to be expected that this state

134 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

of things would be permanent; and after a few
years, the force of example, and the restraining
influence of the preceptive parts of Christian truth,
began to diminish on the minds of those over
whom it had exerted no decisive power, and who,
in their altered behaviour, had rather followed
popular sentiment and practice, than acted from
principle. When therefore this class of persons
began to act more according to their true cha¬
racter, the chiefs found it necessary to visit their
delinquency with punishment; and the welfare of
the nation required that measures should be adopt¬
ed for maintaining the order and peace of the
community.

Having as a nation embraced Christianity, they
were unanimous in desiring that their civil and
judicial proceedings should be in perfect accord¬
ance with the spirit and principles of the Christian
religion. Hence they were led to seek the advice
of their teachers, as to the means they should
adopt for accomplishing this object. The Mis¬
sionaries invariably told them that it was no part
of their original design to attempt any change in
their political and civil institutions, as such; that
these matters belonged to the chiefs and governors
of the people, and not to the teachers of the re¬
ligion of Jesus Christ. To this they generally
replied—that under the former idolatrous system
they should have been prepared to act in any
emergency, but they were not familiar with the
application of the principles of Christianity, espe¬
cially in reference to the punishment of crime.

In compliance with these solicitations, the Mis¬
sionaries illustrated the general principles of scrip¬
ture, that in all the public stations they sustained,
they were to do unto others as they would that

PRINCIPLES OF LEGISLATION. 135

others should do unto them—that with regard to
government, Christianity taught its disciples to fear
God and honour the king—to render to Cesar the
things which were Cesar’s, as well as to God the
things which were God’s—that the power which
existed was appointed of God—and that magis¬
trates were for a terror to evil-doers, and a praise
to them that do well. These general principles
were presented and enforced as the grounds of pro¬
ceeding in all affairs of a civil or political nature.

The Missionaries, though frequently appealed
to by the people, generally left the determination
of the matter to their own discretion, declining to
identify themselves with either party, in any of
their differences. They promised, however, to the
chiefs such assistance as they could render in the
preparation of their code of laws, and constitution
of government, but were exceedingly anxious that
it should be the production of the king and chiefs,
and not of themselves. They had hitherto avoided
interfering with the government and politics of the
people, and had never given even their advice,
excepting when solicited by the chiefs. When
the conduct of petty chiefs or others had affected
their own servants, or persons in their employ¬
ment, if they have taken any steps, it has been as
members of the community, and not as ministers
of religion.

After the introduction of Christianity, the chiefs
were among the first to perceive that the san¬
guinary modes of punishment to which they had
been accustomed were incompatible with the spirit
and precepts of the gospel, and earnestly desired
to substitute measures that should harmonize with
the new order of things. The king applied for
assistance in this matter, soon after the general

136 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

change that took place in 1815. The Missionaries
advised him to call a general council of the chiefs,
and consult with them on the plans most suitable
to be adopted. Whether his recollection of the
unpropitious termination of former councils in¬
fluenced him, or whether he was unwilling to dele¬
gate any of that power to others, with which here¬
tofore he had been solely invested, is uncertain ;
but he objected to the assembling of the chiefs
at that time, still requesting advice from the Mis¬
sionaries. This they readily afforded, both as to
the general principles of the British constitution,
the declarations of scripture, and the practice
of Christian nations. Their own sentiments, in
reference to their duty at this time, will best
appear from the following extract of a public letter,
bearing date July 2, 1817.—

“ During many years of our residence in these
islands, we most carefully avoided meddling with
their civil and political affairs, except in a few
instances, where we endeavoured to promote peace
between contending parties. At present, how¬
ever, it appears almost impossible for us, in every
respect, to follow the same line of conduct* We
have told the king and chiefs, that, being strangers,
and having come to their country as teachers of
the word of the true God, and the way of salvation
by Jesus Christ, we will have nothing further to
do with their civil concerns, than to give them
good advice; and with that view several letters
have passed between us and the king. We have
advised him to call a general meeting of all the
principal chiefs, and, with their assistance and
approbation, adopt such laws and regulations as
would tend to the good of the community, and the
stability of his government; and that in these

FIRST CODE OF LAWS.

137

things, if he desired it, we would give him the best
advice in our power, and inform him of what is
contained in the word of God, and also of the laws
and customs of our own country, and other civi¬
lized nations.”

The first code of laws was that enacted in
Tahiti in the year 1819 ; it was prepared by the
king and a few of the chiefs, with the advice and
direction of the Missionaries, especially Mr. Nott,
whose prudence and caution cannot be too highly
spoken of, and by whom it was chiefly framed.
The code was remarkably simple and brief, in¬
cluding only eighteen articles. It was not alto¬
gether such as the Missionaries would have wished
the nation to adopt, but it was perhaps better
suited to the partial light the people at that time
possessed, and to the peculiar disposition of Po¬
rn are. He was exceedingly jealous of his rights
and prerogatives, and unwilling to admit the
chiefs to a participation in his power. His will
still continued to be law, in all matters not in¬
cluded in their code; and with regard to the re¬
venue which the people were required to furnish
for his use, he would admit of no rule but his own
necessities, and consequently continued to levy
exactions as his ambition or commercial engage¬
ments might require.

The Missionaries would have regarded with
higher satisfaction an improvement in the prin¬
ciples recognized as the basis of the relation sub¬
sisting between the king, chiefs, and people, some
division of the power of government—enactments
proportioning the produce of the soil to be fur¬
nished for the king, and securing the remainder to
the cultivators. But having recommended these
points to the consideration of the rulers, they did

138 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

not think it their duty to express any dissatisfac¬
tion with the code, imperfect as it was, and they
uniformly avoided expressing any opinion which
might weaken the power of the king, being de¬
sirous rather to afford him every facility in the
settlement of the government of the country, than
to throw difficulties in his way.

In the month of May, 1819, the king, and
several thousands of the people from Tahiti and
Eimeo, assembled at Papaoa, for the purpose of
attending the opening of the Royal Mission
Chapel, and the promulgation of the new laws.
The anniversary of the Tahitian Missionary
Society being held at the same time, the Mis¬
sionaries from the several stations, in these two
islands, were then at Papaoa.

The thirteenth day of the month was appointed
for this solemn national transaction ; and the spa¬
cious chapel which the king had recently erected
was chosen as the edifice in which this important
event should take place. It was thought no dese¬
cration of a building reared for public devotion,
and solemnly appropriated to the worship of the
Almighty, and other purposes directly connected
with the promotion of his praise, that the grave
and serious engagements by which the nation
agreed to regulate their social intercourse, should
be ratified in a spot where they were led to expect
a more than ordinary participation of the Divine
benediction. During the forenoon, the chiefs and
people of Tahiti and Eimeo assembled in the
Royal Chapel, and about the middle of the day
the king and his attendants entered. The Mis¬
sionaries were also present-—but, regarding it as a
civil engagement, attended only as spectators.
The king, however, requested Mr. Crook to solicit

ENACTMENT OF LAWS.

139

the Divine blessing on the object of the meeting.
He therefore read a suitable portion of the sacred
volume, and implored the sanction of the King of
kings upon the proceedings that were to follow.
Nothing could be more appropriate than thus
acknowledging the Power by whom kings reign,
and seeking His blessing upon those engagements
by which their public conduct was to be regulated.
The blessing of the Most High having been thus
sought, the king, who had previously taken his sta¬
tion in the central pulpit, arose, and, after viewing
for a few moments the thousands of his subjects
who were gathered round him, commenced the inte¬
resting proceedings of the day, by addressing Tati,
the brother and successor of the late Upufara,
who was the leader of the idolatrous and rebel
army defeated in November, 1815. “ Tati,” said

the king, “ what is your desire ? what can I do
for you ?” Tati, who sat nearly opposite the
pulpit, arose and said, “ Those are what we want
—the papers you hold in your hand—the laws;
give them to us, that we may have them in our
hands, that we may regard them, and do what is
right.” The king then addressed himself to
Utami, the good chief of Te Oropaa, and in an
affectionate manner said, “ Utami, and what is
your desire ?” He replied, “ One thing only is
desired by us all, that which Tati has expressed—
the laws, which you hold in your hand.” The
king then addressed Arahu, the chief of Eimeo,
and Veve, the chief of Taiarabu, nearly in the
same manner, and they replied as the others
had done. Pomare then proceeded to read and
comment upon the laws respecting murder, theft,
trespass, stolen property, lost property, sabbath¬
breaking, rebellion, marriage, adultery, the judges*

140

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

court-houses, &c., in eighteen articles. After
reading and explaining the several particulars, he
asked the chiefs if they approved of them. They re¬
plied aloud, u We agree to them—we heartily agree
to them/’ The king then addressed the people,
and desired them, if they approved of the laws, to
signify the same by holding up their right hands.
This was unanimously done, with a remarkable
rushing noise, owing to thousands of arms being
lifted at once. When Pomare came to the
law on rebellion, stirring up war, &c. he seemed
inclined to pass it over, but after a while pro¬
ceeded. At the conclusion of that article, Tati
was not content with signifying his approbation in
the usual way only, but, standing up, he called in
a spirited manner to all his people to lift up their
hands again, even both hands, setting himself an
example, which was universally followed. Thus all
the articles were passed and approved.

The public business of the day was closed by
Mr. Henry’s offering a prayer unto Him by whom
princes decree judgment; and the people retired to
their respective dwellings.

Pomare subsequently intimated his intention of
appropriating Palmerston’s Island as a place of
banishment for Tahitian convicts, and proposed to
the Missionaries to publish his request that no
vessel should remove any who might be thus
exiled. The laws which the king read to the
people were written by himself, and were the first *
written code that ever existed in the islands; he
afterwards wrote out, in a fair, legible, and excel¬
lent hand, a copy for the press. Printed copies
were distributed among the people, but the original
manuscript, in the king’s hand-writing, signed by
himself, is in the possession of the London Mis-

CAPITAL PUNISHMENTS.

141

sionary Society. The laws were printed on a large
sheet of paper, and not only sent to every chief
and magistrate throughout both islands, but posted
up in most of the public places.

The sentence to be passed on individuals who
should be found guilty of many of the crimes pro¬
hibited by these laws, was left to the discretion of
the judge or magistrate; but to several, the
penalty of death was annexed; and, only a few
months after their enactment, the sentence of
capital punishment was passed on two individuals,
whose names were Papahia and Horopae. They
were inhabitants of the district of Atehuru, and
were executed on the twenty-fifth of October, 1819,
for attempting to overturn the government.
Papahia had been a distinguished warrior, and was
in the very prime of life. He was a man of daring
character, and turbulent conduct. He came
several times to my house, during our residence
at Eimeo; and although, in consequence of his
restless and violent behaviour, I was not prepos¬
sessed in his favour, my personal acquaintance
made me feel additional interest in the melancholy
fate of the first malefactor on whom the dreadful
sentence of the law was inflicted. The lives of
these unhappy men were not taken by thrusting a
spear through the body, or beating out the brains
with a club, or by decapitation, which were the
former modes of punishment, but they were hanged
on a cocoa-nut tree, in a conspicuous part of the
district. In the year 1821, a conspiracy was formed
to assassinate the king, and two men, who were pro¬
ceeding to the accomplishment of their murderous
purpose, were apprehended, with others concerned
in the plot. The names of the two leaders were
Pori and Marin. Sentence of death was passed

142 ' POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

upon them, and they were hanged on a rude
gallows, formed by fastening a pole horizontally
between two cocoa-nut trees. These are the only
executions that have taken place in the islands.
It is not probable that many will be thus punished.
The Missionaries interceded on behalf of the
culprits, and secured a mitigation of punishment
for the rest of the offenders.

The judicial proceedings in the different dis¬
tricts of Tahiti, were divested, as much as pos¬
sible, of all formality; and though some trifling
irregularities, and slight embarrassments, as might
be expected, were occasionally experienced, among
a people totally unaccustomed to act in these mat¬
ters according to any prescribed form, yet, upon
the whole, the administration of justice by the
native magistrates, was such as to give general
satisfaction. The following account by an eye¬
witness* of their proceedings on one of these
occasions, will not be uninteresting.

“ At the time appointed, a great many people,
of both sexes and all ages, assembled under some
very fine trees, near the queen’s house. A small
bench was brought for the two judges; the rest
either stood or sat upon the ground, forming
something less than a semicircle. We were pro¬
vided with low seats near the judges. The two
prisoners were seated crosslegged upon the
ground, under the shade of a small tree, about
twenty paces in front of the judges. They were
both ill-looking men, dressed in the graceful tiputa.
When all was ready to begin, one of the judges
rose, and addressed the prisoners at considerable
length. He explained to them the accusation
which brought them there, and read to them the
* Capt. G. C. Gambler, R. N.

TRIAL BY JURY.

143

law under which, if proved guilty, they would be
punished. When he had finished, and called
upon them to say whether it was true or not, one
of them got up, and answered with great fluency,
and good action. He maintained their innocence,
and called a witness to confirm it. The witness,
very artfully, turned his evidence to the account
of the prisoners. Others also, in some way or
other, favoured the accused, and the defendants
were therefore discharged, from want of evi¬
dence.”

On the 12th of May, 1820, a code of laws was
unanimously and publicly adopted in Raiatea, and
recognized as the basis of public justice by the
chiefs and people of Tahaa, Borabora, and Mau-
piti. The substance of the Raiatean laws was
copied from those enacted by the government of
Tahiti during the preceding year. They extended
to twenty-five articles, imbodying several most
valuable enactments omitted by the Tahitian code.
The most important of these was the institution of
Trial by Jury . This was certainly the greatest
civil blessing the inhabitants of the Pacific had
yet received; and future generations will cherish
with gratitude the memory of the Missionaries of
Raiatea, at whose recommendation, and with
whose advice, it was established by law in these
islands.

Naturally violent and merciless under a sense
of injury, we often found them too severe towards
offenders; and while we occasionally interceded
on behalf of those whose punishment appeared
greater than their crime, we lost no opportunity of
conveying just and humane, as well as scriptural
ideas on matters of jurisprudence, without, how¬
ever, interfering with their proceedings, or coante-

144 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

nancing the misdeeds of those we might recom¬
mend to mercy.

The new laws had now been nearly three years
established in Tahiti and Eimeo. Those of Raia-
tea, Taliaa, and Borabora had also been for more
than twelve months in operation among the inha¬
bitants of these islands. The chiefs of Huahine
had virtually made the latter the basis of their
administration of justice, but no code had yet been
officially promulgated.

They had already applied to us for assistance
in preparing the laws for the islands under their
dominion. This we had cheerfully rendered to
the best of our ability, at the same time recom¬
mending them still to defer their public enactments
until they had deliberately observed the effect of
those already in force among the inhabitants of
the adjacent islands. It was also proper to obtain
the sanction of the queen’s sister, then residing
at Tahiti, who is nominally the sovereign of Hua¬
hine, the government of the island having been
formerly presented to her by Mahine, the resident
and hereditary chieftain. This grant, which tran¬
spired several years before any of the parties em¬
braced Christianity, has often occasioned incon¬
venience. The internal government of the island
has always been maintained by the resident chiefs,
but in all matters materially affecting the people/
or their relation to the governments of other
islands, it has been considered necessary, as a
matter of etiquette, or courtesy at least, to consult
Teriitaria; and hence it was thought desirable to
submit the laws to her inspection, and receive
her sanction. Though affecting only the resident
chiefs and people, and maintained entirely by the
authority of the former, they were to be promul-

LAWS FOR HUAHINE.

145

gated in her name, as well as that of Mahine, and
the other chiefs of the island. The introduction
of new laws being a matter of importance to the
nation, it was deemed suitable that a deputation
from the chiefs should proceed to Tahiti, for the
purpose of receiving the queen’s approval. It was
also desirable that Mr. Barff, or myself, should
accompany this embassage, that we might make
inquiries of Mr. Nott, and others, relative to the
adaptation of the laws in force there, to the circum¬
stances of the people, and might alter, if neces¬
sary, those prepared for Iluahine.

in.

L

146

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

CIIAP. VI.

Fomare’s proposed restrictions on barter rejected by the
chiefs of the Leeward Islands—Voyage to Eimeo—De¬
parture for Tahiti—Danger during the night—Arrival
at Burder’s Point—State of the settlement—Papeete—
Mount Hope—Interview with the king—The laws revised
Approved by the queen—Arrival of the Hope from
England—Influence of letters, &c.—Return to Eimeo—
Embarkation for the Leeward Islands—A night at sea—
Appearance of the heavens—Astronomy of the natives—
Names of the stars—The Twins—Tradition of their origin
-—Arrival in Huahine.

Early in 1821, the brig which had been pur¬
chased in New South Wales for Pomare, arrived
in Tahiti. Soon after this, the king sent a mes¬
senger to the Leeward Islands, with a bundle of
niaus, or emblems of royal authority, and a pro¬
posal to the chiefs, that they should become
joint proprietors, and furnish a required quantity
of native produce, viz. pigs, arrow-root, and
cocoa-nut oil, towards payment for the vessel.
The herald left his message and bundle of niaus
at Huahine, in the name of Teriitaria, and passed
on to Raiatea. in a day or two afterwards
we learned that instructions had been sent down
to the chiefs, not to dispose of any of the above-
mentioned articles, nor to allow the people to
barter them to any ship, or even to the Mission-

POMARE AND TAMATOA. 147

aries, but to reserve them for the vessel. We
represented to the chiefs the injustice of not allow¬
ing every man, provided he paid their just demands,
to dispose of the fruits of his own industry; and
they stated their intention that it should be so at
Huahine, whatever restrictions might be imposed
upon the people of Tahiti. The queen’s sister,
the nominal ruler of the island, residing at Tahiti,
was influenced, they observed, by the advice and
measures of Pomare, and often perplexed them by
her directions.

On the fourteenth of April, 1821, Pomare’s
messenger returned from Raiatea. Tamatoa, the
king of that island, and the chiefs of those adja¬
cent, had refused to receive the niaus, or to join
Pomare in his commercial speculations. They
had at the same time agreed to unite, and procure
a vessel for themselves, in which to trade from the
islands to the colony of New South Wales, and
had sent up a special messenger, with a letter to
the chiefs of Huahine, requesting them to unite in
the enterprise. A public meeting was convened,
in which the propositions from Pomare on the one
hand, and of Tamatoa on the other, were freely
discussed. The result was, that although all were
more disposed to join the Raiatean than the
Tahitian chiefs, they declined both for the present,
and despatched the respective messengers to their
superiors, with declarations to that effect.

The wind, which had set in from the westward
on the fourteenth, continued during the whole of
the fifteenth, and, as it seemed tolerably steady,
it was proposed that our boat should be prepared
for the voyage to Tahiti. It was also thought best
that I should accompany Auna and Matapuupuu
on their embassy to the queen’s sister. During:

l 2

148

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the evening I waited on the chiefs, and took my
leave; the native chieftains did the same; and
their final instructions were, to induce, if possible,
Teriitaria to come and reside at Huahine ; but that,
if she preferred remaining at Tahiti, she should
give up all interference with the government of the
island, and delegate it to them, independently of
all foreign control.

The wind continuing to blow from the westward
through the night, early on the morning of the
sixteenth we prepared for embarkation. The boat
was rather rude in appearance, being one I had
from necessity built, with the assistance of the
natives, while residing in the island of Raiatea, in
the early part of 1820. It was about thirty-six
feet in length, and capable of carrying forty per¬
sons. The breeze increased in strength as the
morning began to dawn, and about day-break we
sailed from Fare harbour. Auna, Matatore, and
Matapuupuu were my companions, and our boat
was manned by about ten strong and active natives.
As we were bounding over the waves of the har¬
bour, and entering upon the wide-spread bosom of
the Pacific, we lost the sprit of one of our matting-
sails in the sea, and cou)d only carry one sail. This
circumstance, although it prevented our proceeding
so rapidly as we should otherwise have done, con¬
tributed perhaps to our safety, for the wind was
high and the sea rough. By noon we had entirely
lost sight of Huahine, and about sunset we ob¬
tained our first distant glance of the lofty peaks
of Eimeo. The wind now blew what the natives
called a strong toerau , or westerly gale, and the
agitation of the sea was proportionably increased.
The inside of our open boat was, however, perfectly
dry, and it appeared to shoot along, as the natives

VOYAGE TO EIMEO.

149

expressed it, upon the tops of the waves, until at
length we heard, amid the stillness of the night,
the welcome sound of the long heavy surf, rolling
in solemn grandeur, and dashing in loud, though
distant roar, upon the coral reefs. This, though
adapted to inspire apprehension and terror in the
minds of those unaccustomed to navigate among
the islands, was a gladdening sound to us, as it
indicated our approach to land. We were several
miles distant when we first heard the roaring of
the surf; but, proceeding with rapidity, we soon
came in sight of it. Sailing in a line parallel
with the reef till we came to an opening, we
entered Taloo or Opunohu harbour, and landed
near the Missionary settlement shortly after mid¬
night, having sailed a distance of about one hun¬
dred miles in the space of twenty hours.

The natives seldom evince much concern about
their accommodations, when voyaging or travelling.
Frequently, when landing for the night, they kindle
a fire on the sea-beach, and, having cooked their
bread-fruit or other provision, which they usually
carry with them, lie down in the boat, or on the
sand by its side, and, spreading the sails as a
tent, or wrapping themselves in them, substitute
them for bed and bedding, and sleep comfortably
till the morning. Most of those, however, who
were my fellow-voyagers on this occasion, had
formerly resided at this settlement, on terms of
friendship with many of the inhabitants. To the
dwellings of these they repaired, while I pursued
my way up the valley to the residence of my friend
Mr. Platt, whom I awoke from his midnight re¬
pose, and, after receiving from him a kind wel¬
come and some refreshment, I retired to rest til!
sunrise.

150 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

During the forenoon of the 18th, our men went
to the mountains, and cut down a new sprit for
our sail, and prepared for the prosecution of the
voyage. The favourable breeze had, however,
been succeeded by a perfect calm, and the rays of
the sun were exceedingly oppressive. As it ap¬
peared probable that the men would have to row
the whole of the way, we agreed to defer our
departure till the evening. This afforded me an
opportunity of attending public worship with the
native Christians of the settlement, and addressing
the congregation assembled.

The sun was approaching the western horizon,
when we took leave of our friends, and embarked,
to prosecute the remaining parts of our voyage. We
passed across the beautiful bay, which, for its size
has justly been denominated one of the finest in
the world, and, continuing within the reefs to
Maharepa, again sailed forth on the ocean, about
eight o’clock in the evening.

The excitement, watching, and fatigue of the
preceding part of our voyage, having induced an
exhaustion of strength and spirits, we had not
advanced far upon the open sea, before I became
oppressed with a sensation of drowsiness, which I
could not remove. During my voyages among
the islands, I have passed many nights at sea with
the natives in an open boat, and generally found
them watchful and alert during the early hours of
darkness, but wearied and sleepy towards morning ;
and whenever I have felt rest necessary for myself,
have usually taken it before midnight, that I might
be more vigilant when my companions should
become drowsy. This was my purpose in the
present instance. The wind had indeed ceased,
but the surface of the sea was agitated with a

DANGER AT SEA.

151

quick and cross motion; the current was against
us; and it was uncertain how soon in the morning
we should reach Matavai, our port of destination
in the island of Tahiti. I therefore gave Mata-
puupuu charge of the helm, which I had hitherto
kept during the whole of the voyage, and, direct¬
ing him to awake me in about an hour's time,
wrapped myself in a cloak, and lay down upon the
seat in the stem of the boat, where, notwithstanding
the motion of the sea, and the rattling and shaking
occasioned by the movements of the oars, I soon
fell into a sound sleep.

The refreshing and beneficial effects of my
repose were, however, entirely neutralized by the
sensations I experienced at its close. I cannot
describe my emotions, when I awoke, and found it
was broad day-light, and, turning to the helm,
saw Matapuupuu fast asleep, with his hand still
on the tiller; and then, looking forward along the
boat, beheld every individual motionless; the
rowers leaning over their oars, the others stretched
along the bottom of the boat, and every one in
the most profound sleep. Before I attempted to
awake any one, I involuntarily looked for the
island we had left: it was still in sight. I then
looked on the opposite side, for that to which we
were going: it was also in sight, but the lofty
mountains rising at the head of Matavai were far
to the north, and indicated that the port to which
we were bound was many miles behind us. In
fact, we appeared to be about midway between
Tahiti and Eimeo, drifting to the southward, far
away from both, as fast as the current could
bear us.

Fully sensible of our critical situation, if the
breeze which just began to ripple the surface of

152

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the water should increase, I instantly awoke my
companions, and asked them how they came all
to fall asleep together. They looked confused, on
beholding the broad light of day, and replied that
each had imperceptibly fallen under the influence
of sleep, without knowing that the others were
in the same situation. Recollecting that I had
in the first instance set them the example, I
could not much censure their conduct; I there¬
fore directed their attention to the mountains
in the vicinity of Matavai and Papeete, or Wilks’
Harbour, far in our rear, and, as Burder’s
Point was the nearest part of the coast, urged
them to apply with vigour to their oars, that we
might reach it before the wind became so strong
as to arrest our progress.

The men, refreshed by their slumbers, which
had been favoured by the undulating motion of
the boat on the water, broke a few cocoa-nuts,
drank the milk, cheerfully grasped their oars, and
pulled steadily towards the shore. After about
five hours’ hard rowing, we reached the beach,
and were cordially welcomed by our friends,
Messrs. Darling and Bourne, who resided at
Burder’s Point. In the afternoon, several of the
natives, who had come with us to Tahiti, set out
for Papara, to visit their friends, who had accom¬
panied Mr. Davies from Huahine during the pre¬
ceding year.

I spent this and the following day at Burder’s
Point. The respect and affection manifested by
the natives towards their teachers was gratifying,
and the general improvement in the habits of the
people, and the appearance of the settlement, en¬
couraging. Newly planted gardens and enclosures
appeared in every direction: several good houses were

153

burder’s point.

finished ; some were plastered and thatched ; and
others, though only in frame, and presenting the
appearance of mere skeletons of buildings, indi¬
cated a state of progressive improvement. The
public burying-ground, situated on the border of
the settlement, was kept remarkably neat. The
outline of the grave was defended by a curb, or
border, of fragments of coral planted in the
ground, while the grave itself was covered with
small pieces of white coral and shells, brought
from the adjacent shore. The school was a good
building; and the chapel, erected near the ruins
of the ancient marae, which I visited during my
stay, was one of the most compact I had seen in
the Georgian or Society Islands. The walls were
framed and boarded ; the roof thatched with fara,
or palm-leaves. The floor was boarded, the pulpit
and appendages remarkably neat, and the whole
area of the chapel filled with seats. It was also
fitted up with a gallery, the first ever erected in
the South Sea Islands; the gallery, and other
parts of the interior, having been finished under
the direction and by the assistance of Mr. Darling,
were neater, and more European in appearance,
than any I had hitherto beheld.

The advancement in civilization had not, however,
been so striking or rapid at this station as at some
others; but the effects of its progress were such as
to afford encouragement, and to warrant the anti¬
cipation of its ultimately extending throughout
the entire population of a district that had felt the
ravages of war, and the demoralization of paganism,
as much as any in the group.

About ten in the morning of the 21st we took
leave of our friends at Burder’s Point, and, after
rowing about four hours between the reefs and the

154 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

shore, reached Papeete, or Wilks’ harbour, where
the queen and her sister were residing. On land¬
ing, the deputation from the Huahinean chiefs
repaired to the abode of Teriitaria, and Mata-
puupuu delivered their message. She replied,
“ that she was anxious to remove to Huahine, and
would return with them, if Pomare would allow
her to leave Tahiti; but said she would see them
again, and, before they returned, deliver her final
reply.”

On the brow of a hill, forming the commence¬
ment of a range extending from the vicinity of the
shore to the lofty interior mountains, Mr. Crook
formerly, at this station, had erected his abode.
Having waited on the queen, and other members
of the royal family residing with her, I walked up
this hill, which Mr. Crook had designated Mount
Hope, and was happy to find himself and his family
well. The situation he had selected for his abode,
though inconvenient on account of its distance
from the settlement, and the fatigue induced by
the ascent, has nevertheless peculiar advantages;
the air is remarkably pure, the temperature gene¬
rally cooler than on the adjacent lowlands, and the
prospect delightful and extensive.

With his agreeable family I passed the remainder
of this day, and the following, which was the Sab¬
bath. The congregation at the public religious
services consisted of about five hundred hearers,
who were in general attentive; the singing was
good, and the voices of the men better than I have
heard elsewhere. The female voices are generally
clear and distinct, and they sing well in most of the
stations, but the voices of the men are seldom mel¬
low or sonorous.

About ten o’clock on the following day I took

INTERVIEW WITH POMARE. 155

leave of the friends at Mount Hope, and, accom¬
panied by the chiefs from Huahine, proceeded to
Matavai, where Pom are resided. It was near
noon when we arrived, and, soon after landing,
the messengers waited upon the king, told him
they had been sent by the chiefs of Huahine, to
request Teriitaria to return, and reside there—and
expressed their conviction that he would approve
of the same. He replied —Ua tia ia ia oti ra
May e tai ai . “ It is agreed—but let May be over,
and then go alluding to the annual meetings
held in the month of May.

I took up my abode with Mr. Nott, and spent
the whole of the week in revising, with him and
one or two of the chiefs from Huahine, the laws
which had been prepared for that island. In this
revision we endeavoured to correct what was de¬
fective in those already published in Tahiti and
Raiatea. This employment occupied a number of
hours every day... It was a matter of importance :
I was anxious that their laws should be framed
with the utmost care, and felt desirous that we
should avail ourselves of Mr. Nott’s familiar ac¬
quaintance with the character of the people, and
his observation on the effect of the laws on the
inhabitants of Tahiti and Eimeo. I wished also
to consult with Mr. Davies, but he was too far off.
Mr. Nott stated, that the greatest defects he had
observed, arose from the power vested in the
hands of the magistrate to punish according to his
own discretion those who were convicted. In
consequence of this, the same crime was followed
by different punishments, in different parts, or by
different magistrates. In order to remedy this,
the punishment to be inflicted was annexed to the
prohibition of the offence. The laws, it was

156

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

hoped, would by these means be less uncertain in
their influence.

Another subject of importance was the revenue
of the government, and the means of support for
the king and chiefs. On this subject, Pomare
had refused to make any regulations, preferring to
demand supplies from the people as his necessities
might require, rather than receive any regular
proportion of the produce of the soil. Private
property, therefore, was still insecure, and the
industrious cultivator of the land was not sure of
reaping the fruits of his labour. This was remark¬
ably manifest at the present time, when the king
of Tahiti, in his anxiety to pay for the vessel that
had been purchased in his name, after making
repeated applications to the chiefs for large
numbers of pigs, prohibited every individual from
selling to a captain or other person any commodity
he might have for barter, but required them to
bring all to him, in return for which he sometimes
gave them articles of the most trifling value. To
remedy this defect, several laws were added to
those prepared for the people of Huahine, and a
certain tax, somewhat resembling a poll-tax, pro¬
posed, by which it was fixed what proportion of
the produce of the island each individual should
furnish for the use of the king, and also of the
chief of the district in which he resided. The
remainder was to be inviolably his own, for use
or disposal. The treatment of offenders, between
their apprehension and trial, was also regulated.
These were the principal additions made to the
Huahinean code.

The trial by jury had been incorporated in the
laws of Raiatea. The alterations were approved
of by the chiefs who had come from Huahine, and

ARRIVAL OF THE HOPE.

157

were by them shewn to Teriitaria, who signified
her entire satisfaction in their being adopted as
the laws of Huahine. At the same time she in¬
formed the chiefs, that, after the approaching
meetings, she intended to remove to Huahine, but
did not wish them on that account to defer the
public enactment of the laws, whenever it should
appear desirable.

The most important object of our visit being
now accomplished, we returned to Papeete, in¬
tending to proceed to Eimeo. About noon on the
28th, we embarked in our boat, hoisted our sails,
and were on the point of leaving the shore, when
a messenger arrived with intelligence that a vessel
was approaching Matavai, so that instead of putting
out to sea, our course was instantly directed thi¬
ther. A brig of considerable size was advancing
towards the harbour. We hailed her approach
with joyful hopes that she would bring us

. u News of human kind,

Of friends and kindred, whom, perhaps, she held
As visitors, that she might be the link
Connecting the fond fancy of far friendship.”

Meeting the vessel at the entrance of the bay,
we found it was the Hope, of London, having Mr.
and Mrs. Hayward from England, and Mr. and
Mrs. Wilson from New South Wales, on board. As
the vessel was under full sail, we could only greet
their arrival by signal, and follow them to the
harbour. They had, however, scarcely anchored,
when we found ourselves alongside, and, ascending
the deck, were happy to exchange our mutual con¬
gratulations. A number of cattle, some belonging
to the passengers, others sent as presents by Mr.
Birnie to the chiefs, having suffered much during

158 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the voyage, were speedily landed. After this, we
accompanied our friends to the shore, elated with
the anticipated pleasure of intelligence from home.
In this respect we were not disappointed. A few
letters which were at hand we received on board,
and the rest as soon as the boxes containing them
were opened. We broke the seals, skimmed the
contents, and glanced at the signatures with no
common feelings, reserving a more careful perusal
for a season of greater leisure.

No opportunity equally favourable for receiving
intelligence from England, had occurred since our
arrival. Mr. Hayward had proceeded from the
islands to England; he had met our friends and
relatives there, and had been enabled to satisfy
them.in a variety of points, of which, though of
confessedly minor importance, they were anxious
to be informed. He had left them, and returned
direct to us ; and the simple fact that we were
conversing with one who had traversed scenes long
familiar, and vividly present to our recollections,
and one who had mingled in the society of those
dearest on earth to us, appeared to shorten the
distance by which we were separated, and to re¬
move the most formidable barriers to intercourse.
We had a thousand questions to ask, and the
evening was far too short for the answer of half our
inquiries, or the perusal of our letters.

Mingled and intense are the emotions with
which a lonely sojourner in a distant and uncivi¬
lized part of the world receives a packet from his
native land. This is especially the case when the
symbol of mourning appears on the exterior of any
of his letters. The unfolded sheet is sometimes
put aside, as the eye, in its first glance over the
lines, has been arrested by a sentence conveying

INFLUENCE OF LETTERS FROM HOME. 159

tidings of the departure of some dear and valued
relative or friend.

Notwithstanding the painful sensations occa¬
sioned by the knowledge of the fact, that some
dear object of the heart's attachment or esteem
has been for some months consigned to the cheer¬
less grave; the arrival of epistles from those we
have left in our native land, produces emotions more
powerful, and satisfactions more elevated, than any
other circumstance. Letters sent home by those in
distant climes, may convey all that undiminished
affection prompts, but they awaken no recollections
connected with the locality, the companions, and
the circumstances of those by whom they are writ¬
ten. The scenes and society by which the writers
are surrounded, are foreign ; and, next to the feel¬
ing of curiosity, the greatest interest they excite
arises from the connexion with those for whose
welfare every concern is felt. Very different are
the effects of a letter from home, to residents in a
distant land. Every circumstance connected with
it awakens emotion; even the name of the place,
whence it is dated, recalls a thousand associations
of by-gone days. They seem to hear again the
familiar voice, and involuntarily mingle once more,
in imagination and in feeling, with the circle which
friendship and attachment had often drawn round
the domestic hearth; and while perusing letters
from home, feel all the force of the poet’s excla¬
mation,

How fleet is a glance of the mind !

Next to the enjoyment of the Divine favour,
letters from friends are among the sources of
sweetest solace, and most cheering encouragement,
to the sojourner in a foreign land. They excite a
train of feeling which must be experienced, to be

160 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

understood. They cheer the spirits, often fainting
under the effects of an insalubrious clime, the silent
prostration of debilitating sickness, or the opposi¬
tion and the trials of situation. They convey to
his mind the gratifying conviction, that the indi¬
vidual to whom they are addressed is not forgotten
by those in whose enjoyments and pursuits he once
participated.

This consideration not only revives his spirit, but
imparts a fresh impetus to his movements, and
adds new energy to his efforts. Letters from those
abroad are gratifying to friends at home; and if
they are so, to those who participate the pleasures
of sincere, enlightened, and glowing friendship, and
who are encircled by a thousand sources of enjoy¬
ment, how much more welcome must they be to
the distant and often lonely absentee, who, though
surrounded by multitudes of human beings, is yet
doomed to perfect solitude, in respect to all mutual
and reciprocal interchange of sympathy in thought
and feeling.

Sure I am, that did the friends of those who
have gone to distant, barbarous, and often inhos¬
pitable lands, know the alleviation of trials, and
the satisfaction of mind, their epistles are adapted
to produce, they would not be content with simply
answering the letters they may receive, but would
avail themselves of every opportunity thus to ex¬
change their sympathies, and impart their plea¬
sures, to those who are cut off from the many
sources of enjoyment accessible to them.

Did the friends of the exile abroad also know
the painful reflections to which a disappointment,
in reference to expected intelligence, gives birth,
they would endeavour to spare him that distress.
In his lonely, distant, and arduous labours, a

*

VALUE OF CORRESPONDENCE. 161

Missionary requires every solace, assistance, and
support that his friends can impart. The com¬
munications he receives from his patrons are valu¬
able, but they are frequently too much like letters
of business, or treat only of general subjects. His
communications from his relatives and friends are
of a much more touching and interesting character.
These, though they deeply affect, do not engross
his soul; he feels connected with, and interested
in, the general advancement of the Redeemer’s
kingdom, and the gigantic energies of those insti¬
tutions of Christian benevolence and enterprise,
which, under God, are changing the world’s moral
aspect. The reports, &c. of these institutions
should be sent, and, in addition to these, a regular
correspondence should be kept up with the Auxi¬
liary Missionary Societies with which he may have
been connected—the Sabbath-schools in which he
may, perhaps, have been a teacher—but especially
the Christian church of which he may have been a
member. It should not be confined to a bare
reply to letters, but should be regular and con¬
stant.

Sometimes we have been six, nine, or twelve
months on the island of Huahine, and during that,
or a longer period, have seen no individual, except
our own two families, and the natives. At length,
the shout, Epahil e pahi! “ A ship ! a ship!” has
been heard from some of the lofty mountains
near our dwelling. The inhabitants on the
shore have caught the spirit-stirring sound, and

A ship ! a ship !” has been echoed, by stentorian
or juvenile voices, from one end of the valley to
the other. Numbers flock to the projecting rocks
or the high promontories, others climb the cocoa-
nut tree, to obtain a glance of the desired object,
in. M

162 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

On looking out, over the wide-spread ocean, to
behold the distant sail, our first attempt has been to
discover how many masts she carried; and then,
what colours she displayed ; and it is impossible to
describe the sensations excited on such occasions,
when the red British banner has waved in the
breeze, as a tall vessel, under all her swelling can¬
vass, has moved towards our isolated abode.

We have seldom remained on shore till a vessel
has entered the harbour, but have launched our
boat, manned with native rowers, and, proceeding
to meet the ship, have generally found ourselves
alongside, or on deck, before she has reached the
anchorage. At the customary salutations, if we
have learned that the vessel was direct from
England, and, as was frequently the case, from
London, our hopes have been proportionably
raised; yet we have scarcely ventured to ask the
captain if he has brought us any tidings, lest his reply
in the negative should dispel the anticipations his
arrival had awakened. If he has continued silent,
we have inquired whether he had brought any
supplies ; if he has answered No, a pause has en¬
sued ; after which, we have inquired whether he
had any letters; and if to this, the same reply has
been returned, our disappointment has been as
distressing as our former hopes had been exhila¬
rating. We have remarked, that probably our
friends in England did not know of his departure.
This has been, we believe, the ordinary cause why
so many ships have arrived in the islands from
England without bringing us any intelligence,
except what we could gather from two or three odd
newspapers that have been lying about the cabin.
Though it has been some alleviation to believe,
that, had our friends known of the conveyance.

DEPARTURE FROM EIMEO.

163

they would have written; yet the relief thus
afforded is but trifling, compared with the pain
resulting from the absence of more satisfactory
communications. Notwithstanding the length of
time we had often been without seeing an indivi¬
dual who spoke our native language, excepting in
our own families, we would, in general, rather the
vessel had not at that time arrived, than that such
arrival should have brought us no intelligence.

No disappointment, however, was experienced
on the occasion, in connexion with which these
remarks have been introduced. The Hope had
brought a valuable supply of such articles as we
needed; and Mr. and Mrs. Hayward, in addition
to the letters of which they were the bearers,
afforded us much satisfaction by the accounts they
gave of those of our friends whom they had seen.
The communications from England required the
united consideration of the Missionaries ; and this,
with other engagements, detained us a week longer
in Matavai.

On the 4th of May, we took our leave. Heavy
rains detained us at Papeete until nearly dark, but
the weather clearing soon after sunset, we again
launched our boat, and, being favoured with a fair
wind, arrived in Eimeo before midnight. Anxious
to reach Huahine by the Sabbath, the following
being the week in which the Missionary anni¬
versary occurred, which was Saturday, we arose
early the next morning, and prepared to depart:
but the wind being westerly, was contrary, and
prevented us. About six in the morning, how¬
ever, it changed to the north and eastward, and,
continuing to blow steadily in that direction for
an hour or two, we sailed from Eimeo about eight
o'clock.

J64

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

The sea was agitated, and the swell continuing
from the westward, after the breeze from that
quarter had subsided, was against us. The wind,
though favourable, was but light, and our progress
consequently slow. Our little bark containing the
portion of supplies from the Hope, for the Mis-
sionaries in the Leeward Islands, was heavily
laden. These amounting to several tons, besides
the number of natives on board, not only kept the
boat steady, but brought it considerably lower in
the water than I had seen it before. About mid¬
day we lost sight of Eimeo. Continuing our
course in a north-westerly direction, soon after
sun-set, while the radiance of the departed lumi¬
nary invested the horizon with splendour, we had
the high satisfaction to behold the broken summits
of what we considered the Huahinean mountains,
shewn in beautiful though indistinct contrast with the
brightness of the heavens and the sea. The dura¬
tion of twilight within the tropics is always short;
hence the rich sunset scene, which the peculiarity
of our situation had rendered singular and imposing,
was soon followed by the darkness of night, which in
much less than an hour veiled surrounding objects.
The glance, however, which we had obtained of
the mountains of Huahine, was serviceable and
cheering; it convinced us that the current had not
swept us aside from our course, and it enabled us
to fix satisfactorily the direction in which to steer
until morning. Although our rest had been but
broken and short during the preceding night, our
present situation repressed any desire for repose.

Nothing can exceed the solemn stillness of a
night at sea within the tropics, when the wind is
light, and the water comparatively smooth. Few
periods and situations, amid the diversified cir-

A NIGHT AT SEA.

165

eumstances of human life, are equally adapted to
excite contemplation, or to impart more elevated
conceptions of the Divine Being, and more just
impressions of the insignificancy and dependence
of man. In order to avoid the vertical rays of a
tropical sun, and the painful effects of the reflec¬
tion from the water, many of my voyages among
the Georgian and Society Islands have been made
during the night. At these periods I have often
been involuntarily brought under the influence of
a train of thought and feeling peculiar to the
season and the situation, but never more power¬
fully so than on the present occasion.

The night was moonless, but not dark. The
stars increased in number and variety as the even¬
ing advanced, until the whole firmament was over¬
spread with luminaries of every magnitude and
brilliancy. The agitation of the sea had subsided,
and the waters around us appeared to unite with
the indistinct though visible horizon. In the hea¬
ven and the ocean, all powers of vision were lost,
while the brilliant lights in the one being reflected
from the surface of the other, gave a correspon¬
dence to the appearance of both, and almost forced
the illusion on the mind, that our little bark w r as
suspended in the centre of two united hemi¬
spheres.

The perfect quietude that surrounded us was
equally impressive. No objects were visible but
the lamps of heaven, and the luminous appearances
of the deep. The silence was only broken by the mur¬
murs of the breeze passing through our matting sails,
or the dashing of the spray from the bows of our
boat, excepting at times, when we heard, or fan¬
cied we heard, the blowing of a shoal of porpoises,
or the more alarming sounds of a spouting whale.

160 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

At a season such as this, when I have reflected
on our actual situation, so far removed, in the
event of any casualty, from human observation and
assistance, and preserved from certain death only
by a few feet of thin board, which my own un¬
skilful hands had nailed together, a sense of the
wakeful care of the Almighty has alone afforded
composure; and when I have gazed on the mag¬
nificent and boundless assemblage of suns and
worlds, whose rays have shed their lustre over the
scene, and have remembered that they were form-
ed, sustained, and controlled, in all their complex
and mighty movements, by Him on whose care I
could alone rely, I have almost involuntarily uttered
the exclamation of the psalmist, “ Lord, what is
man, that thou art mindful of him !”

The contemplation of the heavenly bodies, al¬
though they exhibit the wisdom and majesty of
God, who “ bringeth out their host by number,
and calleth them all by names, by the greatness of
his might/ 7 impressed at the same time the con¬
viction that I was far from home, and those scenes
which in memory were associated with a starlight
evening in the land I had left.

Many of the stars which I had beheld in Eng¬
land were visible here: the constellations of the
zodiac, the splendours of Orion, and the mild
twinkling of the Pleiades, were seen ; but the
northern pole-star, the steady beacon of juvenile
astronomical observation, the Great-bear, and
much that was peculiar to a northern sky, were
wanting. The effect of mental associations, con¬
nected with the appearance of the heavens, is sin¬
gular and impressive. ' During a voyage which I
subsequently made to the Sandwich Islands, many
a pleasant hour was spent in watching the rising

THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE. 167

of those luminaries of heaven which we had been
accustomed to behold in our native land, but which
for many years had been invisible.—When the
polar-star rose above the horizon, and Ursa-major,
with other familiar constellations, appeared, we
hailed them as long absent friends; and could
not but feel that we were nearer England than
when w 7 e left Tahiti, simply from beholding the
stars that had enlivened our evening excursions
at home.

But although, in our present voyage, none of
these appeared, and the southern hemishere is less
brilliant than that of the north, it exhibited much
to attract attention. The stars in the Fish, the
Ship, and the Centaur, the nebulse or magellanic
clouds, and, above all others, Crux, or “ Cross
of the South,” are all peculiar to this part of the
heavens. This latter constellation is one of the
most remarkable in the southern hemisphere. The
two stars forming the longest part, having nearly
the same right ascension, it appears erect when in
the zenith, and thus furnishes a nightly index to
the flight of time, and a memento to the most
sublime feelings of grateful devotion.

With my fellow-voyagers I could enter into
nothing like reciprocally interesting conversation
on these subjects. Their legends of the nature
and origin of the stars were absurd and fabu¬
lous ; and my attempts to explain the magnitude,
distances, or movements of the heavenly bodies,
appeared to them unintelligible—

Their u souls proud science never taught to stray
Far as the solar walk or milky-way.”

The natives of the islands were, however, accus¬
tomed in some degree to notice the appearance

168 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

and position of the stars, especially at sea. These
were their only guides, in steering their fragile
barks across the deep. When setting out on a
voyage, some particular star or constellation was
selected as their guide in the night. This they
called their aveia, and by this name they now
designate the compass, because it answers the
same purpose. The Pleiades were a favourite
aveia with their sailors, and by them, in the pre¬
sent voyage, we steered during the night. We
had, indeed, a lantern and a compass in the boat,
but, being a light ship’s compass, it was of little
service.

Although the Polynesians were destitute of all
correct knowledge of the sciences, the first prin¬
ciples of which have been recently taught in the
academy more regularly than they had heretofore
been, they had what might be called a rude system
of astronomy. They possessed more than one
method of computing time; and their extensive
use of numbers is astonishing, when we consider
that their computations were purely efforts of mind,
unassisted by books or figures.

Their ideas, as might naturally be expected,
were fabulous in the extreme. They imagined
that the sea which surrounded their islands was a
level plane, and that at the visible horizon, or
some distance beyond it, the sky, or rai , joined
the ocean, enclosing as with an arch, or hollow
cone, the islands in the immediate vicinity. They
were acquainted with other islands, as Nuuhiva,
or the Marquesas, Vaihi, or the Sandwich Islands,
Tongatabu, or the Friendly Islands. The names of
these occurred in their traditions or songs. Sub¬
sequently, too, they had heard of Beritani, or
Britain, Paniola, or Spain, &c. but they imagined

ASTRONOMY OF THE NATIVES. 169

that each of these had a distinct atmosphere, and
was enclosed in the same manner as they thought
the heavens surrounded their own islands.
Hence they spoke of foreigners as those who
came from behind the sky, or from the other side
of what they considered the sky of their part of
the world.

What their opinions were, as to the material of
the heaven to which they gave such definite boun¬
daries, I could never learn; but, according to their
mythology, there was a series of celestial strata,
or tua , ten in number, each stratum being the
abode of spirits or gods, whose elevation was regu¬
lated by their rank or powers; the tenth, or last
heaven, which was perfect darkness, being called
te rai haamama of tane, and being the abode of
the first class only.

We often experienced a degree of confusion
in our ideas connected with their use of the
termpo, night or darkness, and its various com¬
pounds. They usually, but not invariably, spoke
of the region of night as i raro , or below.
In this instance, in describing the highest hea¬
ven, the purest region, they spoke of it also as
the po. After describing the nine heavens, or
stratum of clouds or light, inhabited by the differ¬
ent orders of inferior deities, they represent the
tenth, or most remote from the earth, and the
abode of the principal gods, as te rai haamama no
tane , &c. the opening or unfolding to the po, or
perpetual darkness. From this mode of .repre¬
sentation, it appears that the islanders imagined
the universe to be chaotic, and that in its vast im¬
mensity their islands and ocean, with the sky arch¬
ing over them, were enclosed, and that below the
foundation of the earth, on which they stood, and

170 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

above the firmament over their heads, this po, or
darkness, prevailed.

With respect to the origin of the sun, which
they formerly called ra, and more recently mahana,
some of their traditions state that it was the off¬
spring of the gods, and was itself an animated
being; others, that it was made by Taaroa. The
latter supposed it to be a substance resembling
fire. The people imagined that it sank every
evening into the sea, and passed, during the night,
by some submarine passage, from west to east,
where it rose again from the sea in the morning.
In some of the islands, the expression for the
setting of the sun is, the falling of the sun into
the sea. On one occasion, when some of the
natives were asked whither the sun went, they
said, Into the sea. On being asked, further, what
prevented its extinction, they said they did not
know. It was then inquired, “ How do you know
that it falls into the sea at all ? Did you ever
see it?” They said, No, but some people of
Borabora, or Maupiti, the most western islands,
had once heard the hissing occasioned by its
plunging into the ocean.

One of the most singular of their traditions,
respecting the sun, deserves attention, from the
slight analogy it bears to a fact recorded in
Jewish history. It is related that Maui, an
ancient priest or chief, was building a marae, or
temple, which it was necessary to finish before the
close of the day; but, perceiving the sun was
declining, and that it was likely to sink before the
work was finished, he seized the sun by his rays,
bound them with a cord to the marae, or an
adjacent tree, and then prosecuted his work till
the marae was completed, the sun remaining sta-

ASTRONOMY OF THE NATIVES. 17 !

tionary during the whole period. I refrain from all
comment on this singular tradition, which was
almost universally received in the islands.

Their ideas of the moon, which they called avae
or marama , were as fabulous as those they enter¬
tained of the sun. Some supposed the moon was
the wife of the sun ; others, that it was a beautiful
country in which the aoa grew. I am not aware
that they rendered divine homage either to the
sun or moon—theirs was a far less rational and
innocent system than the worship of the host
of heaven: they, however, supposed the moon to
be subject to the influence of the spiritual beings
with whom their mythology taught them to people
the visible creation; and to the anger of those
spirits, they were accustomed to attribute an
eclipse. During an eclipse, the moon is said to
be natua , bitten or pinched, as well as swallowed.

The stars, which they call fetia or fetu , were
by some considered as the children of the sun and
moon; by others, the progeny of a principal star.
They are, however, generally supposed to be inha¬
bited by spirits of the departed, or to be the spirits
of human beings, several principal stars being
designated by the names of distinguished men.
The phenomenon called a shooting star, they sup¬
posed to be the flight of a spirit, and an omen of
the birth of a great prince. Many of the constel¬
lations, and more of the single stars, have distinct
names. Mars they call fetia ura , red star. The
morning star they call fetia ao , star of day; or
horo poipoi , forerunner of morning, and the even¬
ing star Taurua o hiti ite a hiahi, tw T ilight-rising
Taurua. The Pleiades they call matarii, small
eyes. The nebulse near the southern pole, called
the Magellanic clouds, are denominated mahu ,

172 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

mist or vapour, and are distinguished by the terms
upper and under, one being above, the other
below. The bright line of light occasioned by
innumerable numbers of remote stars, and called
the via lactea , or milky-way, they denominated the
long blue cloud-eating shark. But one of the most
remarkable facts is, that the constellation which in
Europe is called the Twins, is so named by them ;
only, instead of denominating the two stars Castor
and Pollux, they call them Pipiri and Rehua or na
ainanu , the two ainanus; and, to distinguish the one
from the other, ainanu above, and ainanu below.

The following, which is the native legend of
their origin, is amusing.—The father went by
torch-light to fish for the marara or flying-fish,
and, having succeeded, returned to his house.
His two children, Pipiri and Rehua, were in their
beds, but not asleep. The mother said, I will go
and awake the children, (that they may partake.)
-—Let them not be awoke till morning, said the
father; are children awakened at night ? By and
by they will be desiring their food, even now
perhaps they know of it.—Cups were filled with
salt-water for each of the children. When the
fish was dressed, the parents sat down to eat,
(not in the house, but in the open air, or
under a distinct roof close by.)—The children,
who overheard what was passing, thought, When
they are satisfied, perhaps they will bring ours.—
As their parents sat, the mother said, I will carry
this, behold it is cooked. The father objected.
The children broke through the back part of the
house, and came and stood on a stone, (since
called the stone whence the ainanu* fled.) The

• Ainanu signifies to desire or long for any particular
kind of food.

THE EARTH SUPPOSED TO BE FIXED. 173

parents went into the house, and looked anxiously
for the children, but they were not.—I said, I would
go and awake the children, exclaimed the mother,
and behold they are not here, but are gone.—The
parents saw the children, and pursued to seize
them ; but the children, the boy first and his sister
after him, flew up to the skies. The end of their
girdles being towards the earth, the parents took
hold of them, and all were carried to the sky, and
became stars.

Like most uninformed persons, they supposed
the earth was stationary, being borne on the
shoulders of a god, fixed upon a rock, which they
called the rock of foundation supported by pillars,
and that the sun, moon, and stars, moved from
one side of the arched heavens to the other.
When we at first endeavoured to impart to them
more correct ideas of astronomy, and exhibited a
terrestrial globe, explanatory of the shape of our
earth, and illustrative of that of the moon, of the
planets, and other heavenly bodies, they were
greatly surprised; but when we called their
attention to a celestial globe, and represented to
them the relative position of the heavenly bodies,
and explained the motion of the planets of our
system round the sun, they were at first invariably
sceptical. It could not possibly be, they said,
that the earth went round, as all things remained
stationary during the twenty-four hours ; which
would not be the fact, if the earth on which they
stood moved. Frequently they have said, If sucl
was the fact, when our beds w T ere turned down¬
wards we should all fall off, and all our vessels
of food, &c. would be upset or lost. Finding,
however, that we persevered in the expression
of our sentiments to the contrary, they would

174 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

sometimes remark, “We believe it because you say
so, but we cannot understand it.” These obser-
vations were made only when the subject was first
brought under their notice. The intelligent among
them now entertain more consistent views.

Among the Hervey Islands, they worshipped a
god of thunder; but he does not appear to have
been an object of great terror to any of them. The
thunder was supposed to be produced by the clap¬
ping of his wings. The ignis fatuus they considered
as one of their most powerful gods, proceeding, in
his tutelary visitations, from one marae to another.

But it is now high time to return from this ap¬
parently long digression, which, though somewhat
diffuse, has an immediate bearing on the astrono¬
mical knowledge and the nautical acquirements of
these islanders, and bring our voyage to its ter¬
mination.

The wind being light but fair through the night,
and the sea pleasantly smooth, we kept on our
course till the dawn of morning began to appear, and
when the day broke, had the satisfaction of behold¬
ing the island of Huahine at no very great distance,
and immediately before us. We approached on
the eastern side, but the wind being unfavourable
for sailing to the settlement, we stood towards the
shore. When we found ourselves within half a mile
of the reef, we lowered our sails, and, manning the
oars, rowed round the northern point of the island.
By eight o'clock, on the 5th of May, we entered
Fare harbour, and, on our landing, had the happi¬
ness to find our families and friends well. It was
the Sabbath, and we repaired with gratitude to the
house of God, to render our acknowledgments for
preservation.

REQUEST FOR THE LAWS.

175

CHAP. VII.

Promulgation of the new code of laws in Huahine---Lite¬
ral translation of the laws on Murder—Theft—Trespass
— Stolen property—Lost property—Barter — Sabbath¬
breaking—Rebellion—Bigamy, &c. —Divorce,&c.—Mar¬
riage—False accusation—Drunkenness—Dogs—Pigs—-
Conspiracy— Confessions — Revenue for the king and
chiefs—Tatauing—Voyaging—Judges and magistrates—
Regulations for judges, and trial by jury—Messengers
or peace-officers—Manner of conducting public trials—
Character of theHuahinean code—Reasons for dissuading
from capital punishments—Omission of oaths—Remarks
on the different enactments—Subsequent amendments
and enactments relative to the fisheries—Land-marks—
Land rendered freehold property—First Tahitian par¬
liament— Regulations relating to seamen deserting
their vessels—Publicity of trials—Beneficial effects of
the laws.

The laws and regulations which had received the
sanction of Teriiteria at Tahiti, were approved by
the chiefs of Huahine, at a public national assem¬
bly held in the month of May, 1822. Mamae, a
leading raatira, requesting that the laws might be
enacted, his request was acceded to, and, after
some slight modifications, they were promulgated in
Huahine, and Sir Charles Sander’s island, under

176

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the authority of the queen, governors, and chiefs.
They were subsequently printed, and circulated in
every part of the islands.

In a letter which Mr. BarfF transmitted with a
printed copy, speaking of the laws, he remarks,
“You will find them, in every material point, the
same as when you left the islands !” I insert a
literal translation of this code, not because it was
the last promulgated, nor that I consider it supe¬
rior in every respect to those by which it was pre¬
ceded, but because it was adopted by the people
with whom I was most intimately connected, and
received a greater degree of the attention of my
colleague and myself, than any of the others. It
might, perhaps, have been abridged, or a mere
enumeration of the laws might have furnished
all the information that is interesting ; yet the first
code of laws adopted, written, and printed among
a people, who, but a few years before, were igno¬
rant heathen, and lawless savages, is a document
so important in the history of the people, as to
justify its entire insertion. The title is E Ture na
Huahine: “ A Law,* or Code of Laws, for Hua-
hine, caused to grow in the government or reign of
of Teriiteria, Hautia, and Maliine, subordinate
(rulers) ,, and the Imprint is—“ Huahine, printed
at the Mission Press, 1823.”

The following is the Introduction immediately
after the names of the queen and two principal
chiefs—

“ From the favour of God , we have our govern¬
ment. Peace to you (People) of Huahine

* There is no word in their language for law. The
Hebrew word has been introduced, as according with the
genius and idiom of Tahitian better than any other.

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

177

Literal Translation of the Laws of Huahine and
Sir Charles Sander’s Island .

I. Concerning Murder.

If parents murder their infants, or children unborn, if
wot the parents but the relatives, if not them, a stranger,
or any person who shall wantonly commit murder, shall
be punished—shall be transported to a distant land, unin¬
habited by men—such (a land) as Palmerston’s Island.
There shall (such criminals) be left until they die, and
shall never be brought back.

II. Concerning Theft.

If a man steal one pig, four shall he bring as a recom¬
pense ; for the owner of the pig two, for the king two. If
he have no pigs, two single canoes, for the owner of the
pig one, for the king one. If (he have) no canoes, bales
or bundles of native cloth, two of them, if the tusks of the
pig were growing up out of its mouth.* Each bale shall
contain one hundred fathoms (200 yards) of cloth, four
yards wide. If a half-grown pig, five fathoms. If a small
pig, twenty fathoms in the bale. For the owner of the
pig one half, and for the king the other. If he have no
cloth, arrow-root. If the pig stolen was a large one,
forty measures.f For a half-grown pig twenty measures,
and for a small one ten. For the owner of the pig one
part, for the king the other. Let the arrow-root of the
king, and the owner of the pig, be equal. If not arrow-
root, some other property. Thus let every thing stolen be
paid for. Let four-fold be returned as a recompense,
double for the king, and double for the owner. If he
(the thief) have^no property, let him be set to work on the
lands of the person he has robbed. If he refuse, his land
shall be the king’s, and he shall w 7 ander on the road f for
an unlimited period. If the king restore him, he shall
return to his land, if not (thus) restored he shall not
return. The magistrates or judges shall award the
punishment annexed to this crime in the laws, and that
only. The judge shall not demand the value of the pro¬
perty from the relatives of the thief/’

* A full-grown hog, of the largest size, is thus denominated.

1 A measure contains five or six pounds weight.

t The figurative term for banishment.

III. N

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

178

To this law, in the revision of the laws which
took place in 1826, two or three particulars were
added; one increasing the punishment with the
repetition of the crime, and another expressly refer¬
ring to those depredations in which burglary was
committed, and a chest or box broken open.

III. Relating to Pigs.

If a pig enters a garden, and destroys the produce, let
no recompense be required, because of the badness of the
fence he entered. If stones are thrown at a pig, and it be
bruised, maimed, or killed, the man thus injuring it shall
take it, and furnish one equal in size, which he shall take
to the owner of the pig killed or injured. If he has no
pig, he shall take some other property, as a compensation.
For a large pig, twenty measures of arrow-root, and for a
smaller one, ten. If not arrow-root, cocoa-nut oil, as
many bamboo canes full, as measures of arrow-root would
have been required. If not (this) personal labour, for a
large pig he shall make twenty fathoms of fencing, for a
small one five, for the owner of the pig killed. If it be a
good fence, and is broken (through the hunger or obsti¬
nacy of the pig) and the produce is destroyed, the pig
shall not be killed, but tied up, and the magistrate shall
appoint the recompense the proprietor of the garden shall
receive. The owner also shall mend the broken fence.

IV. Concerning Stolen Goods or Property.

If a man attempting to steal property obtains it, and
sells it to another, and the purchaser knew it to be stolen
property which he bought—if he does not make it known,
but keeps it a secret, he also is a thief; and as is the
thief’s, such shall be his punishment. Every person con¬
cealing property stolen by another, knowing it to be
stolen, is also a thief; and as is the thief’s, such shall be
his punishment.

V. Concerning Lost Property.

When an article that has been lost is discovered by any
one, and the owner is known to the finder, the property
shall be taken to the person to whom it belongs. But if
such property be concealed, when the finder knew to
whom it belonged, and yet hid it, he also is a thief; and
that his punishment be equal to that of a thief, is right.

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

179

VI. Concerning Buying and Selling, or Barter.

When a man buys or exchanges goods, let the agree*
ment be deliberately and fairly made. W^hen the bargain
is finally and satisfactorily made, if one retains his (the
article received,) and the other takes away his (the article
given,) but after a short season returns it, the other
(person) shall not take it again, unless he desires to do
so ; if agreeable to him to take it, it is with himself. If it
be an article, the damage or defects of which were not
perceived at the time of exchanging, but after he had
taken it to his house were discovered, it is right that it be
returned; but if the defects were known at the time of
bartering, and when taken to the house were reconsidered,
and then returned, it shall not be received.

VI L Concerning the Disregard of the Sabbath.

For a man to work on the Sabbath is a great crime be¬
fore God. Work that cannot be deferred, such as dress¬
ing food when a sick person desires warm or fresh food,
this it is right to do *, but not such work as erecting
houses, building canoes, cultivating land, catching fish^
and every other employment that can be deferred. Let
none travel about to a long distance on the Sabbath. For
those who desire to hear a preacher, on the day of food
(the preceding day) it is proper to travel. If inconvenient
to journey on the preceding day, it is proper to travel on
the Sabbath (to attend public worship;) but not to wander
about to a great distance (to different villages) on the
Sabbath. The individual who shall persist in following
these prohibited occupations, shall be warned by the
magistrates not to do so; but if he will not regard, he
shall be set to work, such as making a piece of road
fifty fathoms long, and two fathoms wide. If, after this,
he work again on the Sabbath, let it be one furlong.

VIII. Concerning Rebellion, or Stirring up War.

The man who shall cause war to grow, shall secretly
circulate false reports, shall secretly alienate the affections
of the people from their lawful sovereign, or employ any
other means for actually promoting rebellion, the man
who acts thus shall be brought to trial ; and if convicted
of stirring up rebellion, he shall be sent to his own district
or island, and if he there again stir up rebellion, his sen-
tenee shall be a furlong of road. If he repeat the offence^

180 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

lie shall be banished to some distant island, such as Pal¬
merston's, and shall return only at the will or pleasure of
the king.

IX. Regarding Bigamy,

It is not proper that one husband should have two
wives, nor that one wife should have two husbands. In
reference to the man who may have had two wives from a
state of heathenism, let nothing be said, but let it remain ;
but if one of his wives die and the other remain, he shall
not have two again. When a man obstinately persists in
taking another wife, the magistrate shall cause his second
wife to be separated from him; and shall adjudge, to both,
labour as a punishment. The man shall make a piece of
road forty fathoms long, and two fathoms wide : and the
woman shall make two floor-mats; if not these, four
wearing mats ; half for the king, and half for the governor
(of the district.)

X. Concerning a Wife formely Forsaken.

The man, who, in a state of heathenism, forsook his
wife and married another woman, shall not return to his
former wife, neither shall the wife (having married
another husband) return to the husband she forsook when
in a state of heathenism. The man or the woman that
shall persist to return, shall be punished ; the punishment
adjudged, shall be similar to that which is annexed to the
breach of the ninth law r .

XI. Concerning Married Women, and Married Men.

This law respects the crime of adultery. [It is unne¬
cessary to give the details of its enactments; it requires
compensation in property for the offended party, and pro¬
hibits the offenders from marrying during the life of the
injured individuals.]

XU. Concering (Divorce) Putting away Husbands,
and Putting away Wives.

That a man should put away his wife, who has not been
unfaithful to him, is wrong. The magistrates shall admo¬
nish such an one that he receive his wife again. If he
will not regard the admonition, let him be punished with
labour till the day that he will return to his wife. If he
is obstinate, and will not return, then they shall both
remain till one of them die ; the husband shall not marry

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

181

another wife. The woman, also, who shall forsake, or
put away her husband without cause, the above is the
regulation w r ith regard to such. But if a man put away
his wife on account of her great anger (violent temper,)
and for her bad behaviour, such man put (her) away, the
magistrates shall admonish the wife and the husband that
they live together: but if they are perverse, they shall
remain ; the wife shall not take another husband, and the
husband shall not take another wife. They shall also be
adjudged to labour till they live together again. The
husband’s work shall be on the road or the plantation.
The wife shall perform such work as weaving mats or
beating cloth. For the king one part, and for the gover¬
nor the other part, of the work they shall do.

XIII. Concerning the Not Making Provision for the
Support of the Wife.

If a man does not provide food for his own wife, but afflicts
her with hunger, the magistrate shall admonish such a
husband that he behave not thus ; but if he will not hear
their counsel, and his wife, on account of this evil treat¬
ment, (she) leave, let him be sentenced to labour (if not
a weak and sickly man) until the day that he will behave
kindly to his wife. The work shall be such as making a
road, or erecting a fence, for the king and the governor.

XIV. Concerning Marriage.

Marriage is an agreement between two persons, one
man and one woman, that they will be united in marriage.
It must not be with a brother or a sister, but with a dis¬
tant relation or a stranger, that a person may properly
(lawfully) marry.

The marriage ceremony shall be performed by a Mis¬
sionary, or magistrate. Those purposing to marry shall
make the same known unto a Missionary, or to a magis¬
trate ; and the Missionary (or magistrate) shall cause it
to be intimated to the people, that the propriety (of it)
may be known. Perhaps there may be some cause that
would render it improper for them to marry ; if not, then
they may marry. This is the evil (that would render it
unlawful): perhaps the man may have forsaken his wife in
some island or country, and may have travelled to another
land, deceitfully to marry. So also it may be with the
wife, and is also the regulation. Therefore shall the Mis¬
sionary request the people, if they know of evil conduct

182 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

in any other land, that would render it unlawful, to make
it known to him ; then shall the marriage not take place.
But if there be no evil (that would render it unlawful)
then they may marry. On the day of assembling for wor¬
ship, the Missionary shall publish this word—he shall
then say unto all the people, “ Such an one, and such an
one, desire or propose to be united in marriage. The
people will then seek or inquire, if there be any just cause
why they should not live together.

When the day arrives for the celebration of marriage,
let persons also come as witnesses. The Missionary shall
then direct the man to take the right hand of the woman,
when he shall say unto him, “ Will (or do) you take this
woman to be your lawful wife, will you faithfully regard
her alone (as your wife,) until death ? Then shall the
man answer, u Yes” The Missionary shall now direct
the woman to take the man by the right hand, and shall
ask her, “ Will (or do) you take this man to be your
lawful husband, will you be obedient unto him, will you
faithfully regard him alone, (as your husband until death ?)
Then shall the woman answer, “ Yes ”

After this, the Missionary shall declare unto all the
people, “ These two persons have become truly (or law>-
fully) man and wife, in the presence of God and man.”
The register of the marriage shall be written by the Mis¬
sionary in the marriage book, and signed by himself, the
parties, and the witnesses. Thus shall marriage be solem¬
nized. Let none become man and wife secretly, it is a
crime.

XV. Concerning False Accusation.

The man who shall falsely accuse another before a ma¬
gistrate, with intent to have the accused person brought to
trial, or the man who shall falsely come as a witness, it
being his intention or purpose, in giving false evidence,
that the accused may be convicted or punished ; if his
accusation or evidence is proved to be false, the penalty
that would have been adjudged to the accused, (had he
been found guilty,) shall be transferred to such false
accuser

XVI. Unnatural Crime.

This law refers to a crime, for the prohibition of which,
perpetual banishment, or incessant hard labour for seven
years, is annexed as the punishment of those who shall he
guilty of its perpetration.

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

183

The XVIIth regards Seduction— the XVIIIth Rape—
and the XIXth Fornication : the punishment annexed to
the commission of these crimes is, hard labour for a spe¬
cified period.

XX. Concerning Drunkenness.

If a man drinks spirits till he becomes intoxicated, (the
literal rendering would be poisoned,) and is then trouble¬
some or mischievous, the magistrates shall cause him to
be bound or confined; and when the effects of the drink
have subsided, shall admonish him not to offend again.
But if he be obstinate in drinking spirits, and when in¬
toxicated becomes mischievous, let him be brought before
the magistrate, and sentenced to labour, such as road¬
making, five fathoms in length, and two in breadth. If
not with this, with a plantation fence, fifty fathoms long.
If it be a woman that is guilty of this crime, she shall
plat two large mats, one for the king, and the other for
the governor of the district; or make four hibiscus mats,
two for the king, and two for the governor; or forty
fathoms of native cloth, twenty for the king, and twenty
for the governor.

XXI. Damage done by Dogs or Hogs.

Concerning dogs accustomed to steal or bite, and pigs
which bite or rend whatever may come in their way.
When a dog steals food secretly, and is addicted to the
practice of devouring young pigs, kids, or goats, fowls, or
any other small kinds of property, the owner of the dog
shall make restitution. If a pig has been devoured, a pig
shall he return as a recompense ; or a fowl, a fowl shall
be returned. That which is returned shall be equal to
that which has been destroyed. He shall also kill such
dog. But if the owner persists in keeping such dog,
fourfold shall he return as a remuneration for all it
destroys ; twofold, (half) for the king, and twofold (half)
for the owner of the property destroyed. A dog also
addicted to the habit of biting children, shall be killed.
The man who knows that he has a savage or biting dog,
and refuses to kill it, (after having been by the magistrate
requested to do so,) if a child be bitten by such dog, the
dog shall be kilied, and its owner punished with labour,
for persisting in keeping such a mischievous dog. The
punishment specified in the XXth law shall be adjudged
to him. Hogs also accustomed to devour young or suck-

184

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

ing pigs, kids, or fowls, and accustomed to bite or attack
children, shall be removed to another place, or killed.
If the owner be obstinate, and will neither remove nor
kill the pig, after having been admonished by the magis¬
trates, they shall kill the hog, and punish the owner with
labour, for obstinately keeping such a dangerous hog.
His punishment shall be such as that specified in the
twentieth law*

XXII. Concerning Wild or Stray Pigs.

There are no pigs without owners. No one shall hunt
pigs on the mountains, or in the valleys, under the pretext
that they are without owners. The wild pigs in the
woods (or ravines) whose owners are not known, belong
to the people of the valley. When the original proprietor
is known, though the pigs may have become wild, they
are still his. If one of such pigs be destroyed, (or eaten)
it shall be paid for; the parties who took it shall make
restitution with a pig equal in size to that which has
been destroyed. The man who is obstinate in hunting
pigs on the mountains or in the valleys, on the pretext
that they are pigs without owners, he is the same as a
thief; and as is the thief's, such also (shall be) his punish¬
ment—that (which is) written in the second law.

XXIII. Concerning Conspiracy.

When one man knows that another man is planning or
purposing to murder the king, or is devising to kill any
other person, or is planning to steal property, or is pur¬
posing to commit any other crime; if he keep such counsel
or deed planned in his own heart, and does not reveal it,
or, when he is questioned, he conceals, and does not fully
declare what he knows, he is like such men, and his
punishment shall be equal to that adjudged to those who
have engaged in such conspiracy (or criminal design.)

XXIV. Concerning the Man who makes known.

If a number of persons shall form their plans—if two
in their plan, then two ; if three, then three ; if ten, then
ten—if, when they have devised the commission of any
crime, one of their number shall go to the magistrate, and
shall fully disclose unto him the purpose and plan formed
(if he be not the foundation of that combination, if he be
not the person who [first] devised it,) that man shall not be

NEW CODE OF LAWS. 185

punished. But those who do not confess shall receive
judgment.

XXV. Concerning the unauthorized Climbing

for Food.

Climb not, unauthorized, another person’s tree for food;
the man who does this is criminal. To beg, to ask expli¬
citly the owner of the land (is right.) The man who
steals food in a garden, or by the side of the house, takes
that which is not given by the owner of the land. If the
proprietor of the land desire that he may be tried, he shall
be tried, and punished with labour. For food stolen from
a garden—for the owner of the enclosure he shall perform
labour, such as erecting a fence, the length being regu¬
lated by the value of the food stolen. But if it was food
growing wild, or unenclosed, he shall make forty fathoms
of road, or four fathoms of stone-work.

XXVI. Concerning Revenue for the King and

Governors.

Every land that has received the word of God, and
those that have not, whose institutions are good, agree
that it is right to furnish property for their own king, who
holds the government, and for the governors of the dis¬
tricts. It is also a thing frequently exhibited in the word
of God, and taught by Jesus, our Lord, when he said,
“ Render unto Cesar the things that are Cesar’s ?” There¬
fore it is right that we do the same. Let every individual
contribute towards the revenue of the king. The man of
great property must furnish more than the man of less
property. Such as governors of districts, shall give two
hogs yearly. If not hogs, arrow-root ten measures ; if not
this, cocoa-nut oil ten bamboos full; they must be good-
sized bamboos.

The raatiras, farmers, or small-landed proprietors, shall
each give one hog annually. If not a hog, arrow-root five
measures ; if not this, oil five bamboos. Those, also, who
do not possess land, but belong to this country—or belong¬
ing to another land, but residing here—this shall be their
contribution, one pig for one year, (smaller than that
furnished by the farmers ;) if not a pig, arrow-root three
measures, or oil three bamboos.

This is another property that the farmers shall prepare
for the king that holds the government: Each district shall
prepare every year two mats, ten fathoms long, and two

1 86 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

fathoms wide ; if not large mats, fine hibiscus mats, one
from each (family); if not this, three fathoms of native
cloth, each.

This is the property for the governors, which the farmers
of their own districts shall furnish for a year: One pig
each; if not a pig, arrow-root five measures, or oil five
bamboos, good bamboos. And as for the king, two mats
shall the inhabitants of the district furnish for their own
governor, (the mats) shall resemble, in length and breadth,
those for the king. If not large mats, hibiscus mats one
each, or cloth three fathoms each. This is the revenue
which the districts shall furnish for their governors each
year, the inhabitants of each district for their own gover¬
nor ; and this is the property which the governors and
people shall provide for the king. The man who, on
account of illness, is unable to furnish the property here
specified in the year, shall meet with compassion from the
king and governors. But if it be from indolence, or any
other cause, that he does not, he shall be banished, he
shall not be detained by any one. Let the farmers act
generously towards their king and governors in furnishing
provisions, it is right. Of such as bread-fruit, arum, plan¬
tains, yams, and such kinds of food, let a portion be taken
to the king and governors ; let it be taken undressed. Not
like the great feedings, they shall be entirely abolished;
—but observing the week or the month, it may be brought.
There shall be no pigs, but fish, if desired. Thus shall
we do well.

XXVII. Concerning Marking with Tatau.

No person shall mark with tatau, it shall be entirely
discontinued. It belongs to ancient evil customs. The
man or woman that shall mark with tatau, if it be clearly
proved, shall be tried and punished. The punishment of
the man shall be this—he shall make a piece of road ten
fathoms long for the first marking, twenty (fathoms) for
the second; or, stone-work, four fathoms long and two
wide; if not this, he shall do some other work for the
king. This shall be the woman’s punishment—she shall
make two large mats, one for the king, and one for the
governor ; or four small mats, for the king two, and for the
governor two. If not this, native cloth, twenty fathoms
long, and two wide; ten fathoms for the king, and ten for
the governor. The man and woman that persist in tatau-
ing themselves successively for four or five times, the

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

187

figures or ornaments marked shall be destroyed by black¬
ing them over, and the individuals shall be punished as
above written.

XXVIII. Concerning Voyaging in Large Companies.

When a member of the reigning family, or a governor,
or other man of rank or influence, shall project a voyage
to another land—such as those from Raiatea or Tahiti,
visiting. Huahine—it is right that he select steady men,
such as are of the church, or have been baptized, not im¬
moral and mischievous men, that cease not from crime ; such
should remain in their (own) land. But if these voyagers
continue to bring troublesome persons, when they land
upon the shore, the magistrates shall admonish them not
to disturb the peace of the place, nor wander about at
night. If they do not regard, such disturbers shall be
bound with ropes until their masters depart, when they
shall be liberated.

XXIX. Concerning the Magistrates or Judges.

When a man is accused of a crime, such a man may,
perhaps, take enticing property (a bribe) to the magistrate
or judge, that his sentence may be diminished; but the
magistrate or judge shall on no account receive such
bribe or property. The magistrate or judge who shall
receive the property (or present) taken by such individual,
is criminal. His oflice shall be discontinued or taken
away ; neither shall he ever be eligible to be a magistrate
or judge again.

XXX. Concerning New Laws.

If any crime comparatively small should arise, and
which is not specified in these laws, it is right that this
code be altered. Annually the laws shall be revised or
amended. Then shall the prohibition of such crimes as
may have been omitted, be inserted, together with the
punishment annexed to their commission ; that the usages
in this land may be straight, or correct.

Regulations for the Judges, the Jury, and the Messengers,
(or Peace-officers.)

Concerning the Principal Judges.

1. The king, or supreme governors, shall select the chief
judges ; and when a judge dies, or is interdicted that he

188

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

may not judge, or when a judge removes to another land,
the king and supreme chiefs shall nominate another, to
perform the duties thus discontinued.

2. The duties of the chief judges. This is their duty.—
When a man is tried, and his guilt fully established, the
judge shall pronounce the sentence on his crime. The
punishment written in the law, and annexed to his crime
(shall be adjudged) and no other sentence.

3. Concerning recording the transactions or proceedings.
—-The judge shall write the name of the prisoner, with
his crime, the names of the parties by whom he was
accused, the punishment adjudged for his crime, in a book,
for the inspection of the king and the people.

4. Concerning the emolument.—The property or salary
of the chief judges shall be given yearly by the king. All
fines or confiscations shall belong to the king, or the parties
specified in the laws.

Concerning the (subordinate) Judges or Magistrates .

1. The king or supreme chiefs shall selector appoint the
magistrates for all the districts.

2. Their duties.—A person accused of any crime, if the
principal judge is not at the place, shall be brought before
the magistrates of the district, who shall try such indivi¬
dual (in their respective districts;) at other seasons of public
trial they shall also assist.

3. When a crime is committed, such as theft, or other
similar offence, the person whose property has been stolen
shall go to a magistrate, and give information of the same.
The magistrate shall write the names of the accused and
the accuser. If the person whose property has been stolen,
or who has been injured, desires that the offender should
be prosecuted, he shall be tried; but if not, he shall not
at once be brought to trial.

4. The magistrates shall endeavour to extinguish every
kind of evil that may appear, especially quarrelling,
family broils, obstinate contentions, and fighting, that
peace may be preserved. Let not the people treat them
with disrespect.

5. When sentence has been pronounced, let the magis¬
trate inspect its execution, and direct the messengers or
officers that it be fully attended to.

6. It is with (or it is the duty of) the king to furnish the
remuneration for all the magistrates; such remuneration
shall be yearly given, for their vigilance in making straight
that which was crooked.

NEW CODE OF LAWS,

189

Concerning the Jury .

1. No man shall be tried for any great crime without a
Jury, There shall always be a jury, excepting in minor
offences, quarrels, &c.

2. When a man is tried for any crime, the judge shall
select six men to be a jury, men of integrity shall he
select; they shall mark or hear attentively the untwisting
or investigation (of the matter.) When the evidence and
examination are ended, the jury shall confer privately
on the statements and evidence they have heard during
the trial, the words of the accusers, and the words of the
accused, with the evidence or testimony of the witnesses.
If they unitedly think the person tried is really guilty,
that he committed the crime (there having been the evi¬
dence of two credible witnesses,) and if they agree that
he is guilty, one of their number shall address the judge,
saying, This man is really guilty. Then shall the judge
pronounce the sentence upon the criminal; the sentence
written in the law shall he pronounce. But if the whole
of the jury think the man accused is not guilty, then one
of their number shall say, There is no guilt. If it be one
of the king’s family that is tried, then the jury shall be
members of the reigning family, (or individuals also of
equal rank :) if a landed proprietor or farmer that is tried,
of landed proprietors or farmers, only, shall the jury be
composed.

3. If during the trial the jury desire to put any question
to the prisoner, or to the witnesses, it is right they should
do so.

4. If the accused person observes any one on the jury,
whom he knows to be a cruel or evil-minded man, or a
man of whom his heart does not approve, it will be right
for him to say to the judge, “ Remove that man, let him
not be on the jury.” Then shall the judge seek another
man in the place of one so removed, and shall proceed in
the trial of the accused. If it be two or three on the jury,
of whom the prisoner does not in his heart approve, they
shall be removed ; but in reference to four, or the whole
jury, it will be improper. When two are removed, two
others the judge must seek; when three, then must the
judge seek to fill the place of those removed, and then
judge the person accused.

Concerning the Messengers of the Magistrates.

Their duties.—This is the duty of the messenger, (or
peace-officer.) When a man is accused to a magistrate,

190 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the magistrate shall send a messenger to the accused per¬
son, to bring him before the face of the magistrate, and
guard or take the custody of him during the trial. When
the trial has terminated, the messenger shall superintend
the execution of the sentence pronounced by the magistrate
or judge, and, in subordination to the magistrate, shall
vigilantly inspect the convicts, till the sentence be accom¬
plished.

2. Concerning their remuneration.—The king shall give
annually to the messengers, such property as may be
appropriated to them, for their vigilance in preserving the
order (and peace) of the land.

Directions for the Judges and the Jury.

1. The Judges and the Jury shall not regard the ap¬
pearance (circumstances) of men. If a man of influence
(be brought before them) let him be a man of influence ;
if a neighbour, let him be a neighbour; if a relative, let
him be a relative ; or a friend, let him be a friend; this
they shall not regard. That which is written in the laws,
and that alone, shall they regard.

3. When an offence is committed, such as theft or
adultery; if the injured person desires that the offender
should be tried, he shall go himself to the magistrate, and
give information. The magistrate shall write his name,
and the name of the person accused, that it may be regular
in trial. But offences which affect the whole island, such
as murder, rebellion, conspiracy, working on the Sabbath,
it shall be competent for any person to give information to
the magistrate; and the magistrate shall write his name,
and the name of the person accused. The magistrate
shall not regard or bring to trial on vague reports. It is
proper that some individual should go and lodge the in¬
formation.

3. When a person is brought to trial, and when the
magistrates are assembled—the accused, and the accuser,
and the witnesses, being also present—the magistrate or
judge shall publicly declare the crime of which the
offender is accused, and shall then ask him if it is a true
word or accusation. If the prisoner replies, “ Yes, it is a
true word,” the judge shall pronounce the sentence. But
if the person accused replies, “ It is not, I did not commit
the offence then shall the judge request the person on
whose information he was appreJiended, to state his accu-

NEW CODE OF LAWS.

191

sation. If there be two witnesses, let there be two ; if
three, (let there be) three. It is proper that witnesses
should have the clearest, strongest evidence. Then shall
the judge request the prisoner to declare what he has to
say. If there be a person there that knows the accused to
be innocent, he shall give his evidence ; and if there be
two, let there be two; if three, let there be three; they
shall deliver all their word or evidence. If the person
accused wishes to ask his accuser any questions, it is right
for him to do so. He shall inquire of the judge, and the
judge shall repeat the question to the accuser.

4. No man shall be confined without cause. When a
pig breaks into a garden, the owner of the pig shall not be
bound, but information shall be given to the magistrate,
and he shall send his messenger to bring the owner of the
pig, that he may be tried according to Law III. The
same course shall be adopted in all petty offences : but for
murder, theft, rebellion, &c. and all great crimes, it is
proper to secure (the offender.) Let not the confinement
be long before the person is brought to trial. One, two,
or three days will be sufficient. Let it not be longer.

5. When petty offences are committed, the district ma¬
gistrates shall try the offenders; but in all great crimes,
the judges and the jury shall assemble in one place for the
trial.

6. When a man is tried by a district magistrate, and
sentenced by him, if the person sentenced think that the
judge has been irritated with him, and has increased his
punishment; if (from these considerations) he shall say—
I will go to the chief judge and the jury to be tried, it is
right that he do so. They shall both go before the supreme
judge and a jury, to be tried.

7. When a man is tried, convicted, and sentenced by
the jury and judge, he shall not be maltreated, as by beat¬
ing with a stick, piercing with a spear, or enduring any
other savage practice. It shall not be practised. The
punishment appropriate shall be adjudged.

8. When a man is convicted of any great crime by the
judge and the jury, and they unanimously think that he
deserves punishment; then the judge shall write on a
paper his crime, and his own and the jury’s decision on
which he has been sentenced. This shall be taken to the
king, and if the king approves of their decision, he shall
write upon a paper brought by the judge, 66 It is fully
approved,” and write his own name underneath, then

192 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

shall the punishment be inflicted on such offender. If tho
king desire to mitigate the sentence, he may do so, but
cannot increase it.

The names of the judges, magistrates, and
messengers, or police officers, for Huahine and
Sir Charles Sander’s Island, follow this last regu¬
lation, and close the first official document issued
by the government of these islands—and, next to
the sacred writings, the most beneficial ever pro¬
mulgated among the people.

I have endeavoured to give a correct and even
servile translation of this important publication.
The idiom and peculiar phraseology of the original,
I have almost invariably retained, rather than
sacrifice fidelity to improvement of style. In some
respects I have wished that several enactments
had been otherwise than they are; these parts,
however, have not been omitted; and notwith¬
standing their imperfections, considering the cir¬
cumstances of the parties by whom they were
framed, regarding them also as the first effort of
their legislation as a Christian people, and the
basis of their future civil institutions, they imbody
all the great principles of national security, per¬
sonal liberty, general order, public morals, and
good government. And if no Solon or Lycurgus
should appear among them, it is not too much to
hope that, amidst the variety of character daily
unfolded, and the means of improvement which
the introduction of letters imparts, that political
economy will not be neglected, but that legislators
will arise, whose genius shall model and prepare
such improvements in their system of jurispru¬
dence, as shall render it in every respect conducive
to general prosperity and individual happiness.

In the Tahitian and Raiatean codes, when first

OMISSION OF CAPITAL PUNISHMENT. 193

promulgated, the punishment of death was an¬
nexed to the crime of murder, and rebellion or
treason. But by the laws of Huahine and its
dependency, capital punishment was not inflicted
for any crime. In the first law, prohibiting murder
and every species of infanticide, the penalty an¬
nexed to its commission, instead of being death,
is banishment for life to Palmerston’s, or some
other uninhabited island. This was in consequence
of our particular recommendation. We were con¬
vinced, that if, under any circumstances, man is
justified in the infliction of death, it is for murder
alone; but an examination of those parts of the
bible which are generally supposed to authorize
this punishment, did not fix on us the impression
that the Almighty had delegated to man the right
of deliberately destroying a human being, even for
this crime.

In our views of those parts of the sacred writ¬
ings, we may perhaps have been mistaken; but
in reference to the great principles on which public
justice is administered, the plan recommended
appeared in every respect preferable. Death is
not inflicted, even on the murderer, from motives
of retaliation or revenge; and if it be considered
that his life is forfeited, and is taken to expiate
his crime, the satisfaction which the injured party
derives from such expiation must be of a very
equivocal kind. At the same time, the very exe¬
cution of the sentence imparts to the executioner
somewhat of the character of an avenger, or excites
the apprehension that it is done under the influence
of irritated and vindictive feelings.

The great design of capital, and even other
punishments, is the security of society, and the
prevention of crime. The death of the criminal

III. o

194 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

preserves society from any future injury by his
means; and the fatal punishment inflicted, it is
presumed, will deter others from the commission
of similar offences. The security of the commu¬
nity from all future violation or outrage, is certainly
obtained by the death of the criminal; but expe¬
rience and observation abundantly demonstrate
the inadequacy of public executions to restrain
from the most appalling deeds. Every repetition
of the awful spectacle appears to diminish its
horrific character, until those habituated to felony
become familiar with its heaviest punishment. The
principal end of public executions is thus defeated,
the general tone of public feeling lowered, and
that which was designed to be the most effectual
moral barrier, is at length converted into an occa¬
sion, or sought for as an opportunity, for the com¬
mission of crime.

By recommending the omission of capital punish¬
ments, we avoided this evil, and, regarding the
peculiar circumstances of the nation, were in hopes
thereby indirectly to elevate the tone of moral
feeling, and improve the sensibilities, of a people
emerging from a state of barbarism, in which mur¬
der, and retaliated murder, had not only been
familiar, but committed with brutal satisfaction.

The existence of a number of islands uninha¬
bited, but capable of cultivation, and, from the
cocoa-nut trees growingon their borders, and the fish
to be found near their shores, capable of furnishing
the means of subsistence, and yet too remote to
allow of the convicts returning, or proceeding to
another island in any vessel they could construct,
appeared to afford the means of answering every
end of public justice. The community would be
as safe from future injury, as if the offender had

REASONS AGAINST CAPITAL PUNISHMENT. 195

been executed ; and we had a firm conviction, that
a life of perpetual solitude, and necessary labour,
would be regarded by many as more intolerable
and appalling than speedy death.

We have always regarded it, as less difficult to
render laws, once established, more sanguinary,
than lenient afterwards. Another consideration,
by which we were also influenced, was, the season
to exercise repentance, or supplication for mercy,
which it would afford the criminal before he was
called to the bar of the Almighty. To the offender
this was most important, and as it could be be¬
stowed without danger to the donors, we were
always desirous that it should be' granted. No
opportunity for observing the practical effects of
this law has yet occurred, no murder having been
committed in any of the islands since its enact¬
ment. Within two years after the promulgation
of the Tahitian code, four executions for conspiracy
and treason took place. The influence of these
appeared by no means salutary; and, in the revi¬
sion of the laws of Tahiti in 1826, banishment for
life was substituted as the penalty for those crimes
to which death had before been annexed. One
individual was sentenced to perpetual solitude, and
was to have been furnished with a few tools, together
with such seeds and roots as, it was presumed, would,
when cultivated, afford the means of subsistence ;
but before he was actually transported, circum¬
stances occurred which induced the king to miti¬
gate his sentence. It has never been intended
to send any number of felons to the same island;
hence distinct and distant islands have been ap¬
propriated to the residence of traitors and mur¬
derers.

The observations on this article may appear

& 2

196 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

have been unnecessarily extended; but the im¬
portant character of the law itself, and the differ¬
ence in its penalty from that ordinarily inflicted,
have induced more lengthened remarks than I
should otherwise have offered. Since the first
publication of this work, I have been led carefully
to review the opinions here exhibited, and the
result is, a stronger conviction that capital punish¬
ment, certainly for every crime excepting murder,
is not less opposed to sound policy, or a due regard
to the welfare of society, than repugnant to every
humane feeling and Christian sentiment.

Another distinguishing and important feature in
their judicial proceedings is, the omission of oaths ,
in appointing the jury, or examining witnesses.
No oath is administered on any occasion : deli¬
berate assertion is received as evidence; and false
evidence is regarded as equally criminal with false
accusation, and is, I believe, punished accordingly.
- The second law is one of those regulations pe¬
culiar to particular and local communities. Their
swine and their gardens are among their principal
sources of maintenance and wealth. The animals
are not kept in sties or other enclosures, but range
the district at liberty; a great proportion of their
food being derived from the cocoa-nuts, bread¬
fruit, plums, chesnuts, and other fruits that fall
from the trees. During the season of fruit, these
are abundant, and the pigs feed and sleep in quiet¬
ness under the shade; but during the other seasons
of the year, they are very troublesome. Their ma¬
terials for fences are not good ; and a large strong
and hungry hog will easily force a way into the
garden with his tusks or his teeth, and often do
great mischief in a very short time. In 1 826 this
law was revised, and rendered more simple.

SABBATH-REBELLION—POLYGAMY. 197

The sixth enactment, relating to barter, was
required, not only for the exchanges, or trade,
carried on among the natives themselves, but
for the prevention of misunderstandings between
them and those foreigners by whom they might
be visited for purposes of traffic. They are
naturally fickle, and were formerly accustomed to
return articles which they exchanged, merely be¬
cause they desired to repossess whatever they
might have given for it; this practice led to fre¬
quent altercations, and, when trading with foreign¬
ers, to serious quarrels.

The law which prohibits labour on the Sabbath-
day, is perhaps enforced by a penalty dispropor-
tioned to the offence. It ought, however, to be
observed, that as a nation they were accustomed
to pay the strictest regard to this day from religious
considerations, before the legal enactment was
made, which was principally designed to prevent
annoyance to those who were desirous to devote
the day to religious services. The road which the
offenders were to make, was not much more than
a footpath, with a small trench dug on each side,
and raised in the centre, from the sand or earth
taken from its borders.

The eighth law, referring to rebellion, is trans¬
lated from the amended code of 1826, simply
because this article was much shorter than that of
1823. It contains the substance of the former
enactment, which had been copied verbatim from
the Tahitian code, and was drawn up by Pom are,
it fixes the punishment for the third offence to
perpetual banishment, instead of leaving it optional
with the judges to banish, or sentence to public
abour for seven years or for life.

The ninth regulation can only be of temporary

198 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

application, and the necessity for its introduction
arose from the peculiar circumstances of the
people, while passing, as it were, from paganism to
Christianity. Prior to the subversion of heathen¬
ism, polygamy prevailed more or less in all the
South Sea Islands : some of the chief women had
also a plurality of husbands. This regulation did
not require those who had entered into these
relations in a heathen state to dissolve them on
becoming Christians-, and was only designed to
prevent any one from making these engagements
after they had become such: it is a circumstance
which merits notice, that there were very few who
did not of their own accord, and by agreement
among themselves, disannul this relationship ex¬
cepting with one individual. They knew that, with
more than one person, it was inconsistent with the
precepts of the bible; and this consideration in¬
duced the discontinuance of their former practice.
If their previous habits of life, and the notorious
licentiousness of their character, be regarded, their
conduct in this respect is a striking illustration of
the power of Divine truth upon their minds, and
of the attention they considered its injunctions
to require. This article was amended in 1826,
and it was enacted, in the event of a man mar¬
rying a second wife, without her knowing that
he was already a married man, he should not
only be sentenced to public work, but should
furnish compensation for the female he had thus
injured.

The twelfth enactment, which regards the disso¬
lution of the marriage contract, is rather a singu¬
lar article. The influence of former institutions
appears to require it, or at least something of the
kind. Formerly, with whatever ceremonies the

LAW CONCERNING MARRIAGE. 199

engagement had been made, nothing could be
more brittle than the bond which held together
those united in matrimony. The engagement was
not regarded as binding any longer than the caprice
or inclination of the parties dictated. Accustomed
thus to relieve themselves for any unpleasantness
in temper, &c. it was to be feared that the separa¬
tions resulting from them would lead to the arrang¬
ing of new contracts. To avoid the confusion and
inconvenience of this, the present regulation was
introduced; and although it was not supposed that
hard labour would revive affection in the bosoms of
those who, notwithstanding they had solemnly
agreed to dwell together for life, had yet become
estranged from each other; yet it was presumed,
that the admonition from the magistrate, and the
consequence of obstinate alienation, might induce
the parties to impose a little restraint upon their
tempers, and to make an effort to live together in
peace, if not in kindness and in love.

The degradation of the female sex is an invari¬
able accompaniment of paganism; and, in addition
to the humiliation and slavery to which those in the
South Sea Islands were reduced while the com¬
munity were heathens, they were often exposed to
the sufferings of hunger and want, from the neglect
or unkindness of their savage and imperious hus¬
bands.

The thirteenth enactment, requiring provision to
be made for them, may be regarded as an indica¬
tion of the light in which the nation at this time
viewed their former treatment of the females, or
an expression of their determination to prevent its
recurrence.

The law concerning marriage is a most important
enactment, and may be justly regarded as the basis

200 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

of all their regulations for domestic comfort, and
the spring of every household virtue. It was
thought that the season of assembling for public
lecture during the week, which was on Wednesday
evening, would be preferable to the Sabbath, for
giving the notice, or, what is termed with us, pub¬
lishing the bans, but the marriage was not to take
place till the following week. Though the law
only prescribes the terms in which the contract
shall be made, the people usually expect a short
address, and prayer for the Divine blessing; and
on that account, in general, prefer applying to the
Missionaries to perform the ceremony. No fees
are received by either party for solemnizing the
marriage, or entering the record. In the revision
of the code in 1826, this law was considerably
improved, by annexing to the public announce¬
ment of the intention of the parties, the rea¬
son why such public declaration was made,
viz. that any who knew of just cause why the
marriage should not take place, might declare
the same.

Dogs are numerous in the islands, though not
now reared as formerly for food. They are
generally indolent, unsightly, and ill-bred, and
are a great nuisance in most of the settlements.
Disputes are not frequent among the natives, but
they arise as often on account of the depredations
of their dogs and hungry pigs, as from any other
cause. Neither their dogs nor swine are con¬
fined, but they prowl about, destroying fowls,
kids, and young pigs. Several instances have
occurred, in which children have been attacked
and injured by savage and hungry swine. Under
such circumstances, formerly, redress would have
been sought, or vengeance taken, with the club

PRODUCE OF TREES.

201

or the spear. To diminish the number of useless
animals, and to secure greater care over others,
the twenty-first regulation was made, which ren¬
dered the owners in some degree responsible for
any mischief they might occasion.

Such was the population of the islands for¬
merly, that every bread-fruit and cocoa-nut tree
had its owner; and a single tree, it is said, had
sometimes two proprietors. Subsequently, how¬
ever, extensive clusters or groves of trees were to
be met with, having no other owner than the chief
of the district in which they grew. The fruit of
these, it was formerly their practice to gather
in its season, without asking the consent of
any one. The proprietor of the land could appro¬
priate to his own use any number of the trees, by
affixing such marks as were indications that they
were rahuaia , or prohibited. This practice being
connected with certain idolatrous ceremonies, was
discontinued with the abolition of the system. As
the population increased, the people became more
careful of their trees, and the practice of gathering
promiscuously the fruit from those trees not en¬
closed, appeared generally undesirable. There are,
however, a number of persons at most of the settle¬
ments, who have scarcely any other sources whence
they can derive a supply. In order to afford them
an opportunity of procuring this, and at the same
time securing to the proprietors their right to the
disposal of the fruit growing on their own lands,
the twenty-fifth regulation was framed, and applied
to most of the trees whose fruit is used as an article
of food.

The government having been hitherto an arbi¬
trary monarchy, the king and chiefs had been
accustomed, not only to receive a regular supply

202

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

of all the articles produced in the islands, but to
send their servants to take whatever they required,
however abundant the supply furnished might
have been. This practice destroyed all security
of individual property, and, so long as it continued,
was a great barrier to the improvement of the peo¬
ple. It had always appeared to us desirable to
introduce such regulations, in reference to this sub¬
ject, as would procure for the king and chiefs a
revenue more ample than the system of extortion
and plunder had ever furnished, and at the same
time secure inviolate to the people the right of
private property.

In proposing any regulation of this kind to the
chiefs, we always felt some degree of delicacy, and
found the introduction of the measure attended
with difficulties. To the chiefs it appeared in
some degree depriving them of their power, and
rendering them dependent on the donations of the
people; and there were others who, connecting the
prosperity of the people with the continuance of
the monarchical government, were not free from
apprehension lest the restraint imposed on the
chiefs should diminish their influence in the nation,
and destroy the authority of the sovereign. The
proposition arose from no desire on our part to
limit the influence of the chiefs, or reduce them to a
state of dependence; on the contrary, we were satis¬
fied that a certain proportion of the produce of the
soil, fixed by law, and regularly paid, would give
them greater power than they had ever enjoyed
before; and though some were apprehensive of a
contrary effect, the rulers and chiefs of Huahine
readily embraced the plan, and, heartily recom¬
mending it to the adoption of the people, have
found it much more productive than the former

JUDICIAL PROCEEDINGS.

203

system of oppression. To the people, the advan¬
tage of this enactment is incalculable. They have
already begun to taste the enjoyments resulting
from the secure possession of their property, and
the satisfaciton of contemplating the produce of
their labour as inviolably their own. No regu¬
lation, before introduced, appears so much adapted
to promote agriculture, industry, and advancement
in civilization.

In 1826, this enactment was improved: the pro¬
portion of tribute, individuals in the several classes
of society should furnish, was definitely fixed, and
the whole rendered more explicit. Although this
regulation has been subsequently introduced, and
still further extended, in the codes of some of the
other islands, this being the first enactment on the
subject, promulgated by any of the infant govern¬
ments of Polynesia, may be regarded as the basis
on which the right and security of private property
is established.

The remaining articles in the first Huahinean
code refer to the regulation of their judicial pro¬
ceedings, and are designed to supply the deficiency
that appeared in the laws of other islands pre¬
viously introduced. In these the power of the
judge and magistrate was discretionary, both as to
the kind and degree of penalty for several offences.
This was found to open a door for the abuse of
power, and was frequently very unsatisfactory to
the people. From these considerations we were
led to recommend the chiefs to annex the punish¬
ment to the prohibition of the offence, and restrict
the magistrate to the infliction of such penalty only
as the law enjoined : this plan has appeared in
general to give satisfaction, though it is often at¬
tended with practical difficulties ; these, however,

204 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the increasing experience of the people will pro-
bably enable them to remove.

In 1826, the regulations regarding the local
magistrates was improved, and two were appointed
to preserve the peace in each district, from whose
decision any one could appeal, even in petty cases,
to the judges of the island. At the same time,
the salaries of the magistrates, as well as those of
the judges, which are paid by the king, were defi¬
nitely fixed.

The law which declared that, “ No man should
be tried for any great offence (viz. one which
affected his person, liberty, or possessions) without
a jury/’ we have always regarded as the basis of
their public justice. The liberty granted to the
prisoner, of objecting to any members of the jury,
is a valuable security for the proper and impartial
investigation of the case.

In 1826, this enactment was also amended, and
it was then enjoined, not only that a chief or raatira
should be tried by his equals, but that if a peasant
or mechanic were brought to trial, the jury also
should be peasants or mechanics. Every friend of
liberty, of the natural rights of man, and to the
order and good government of society, must re¬
joice that these infant nations should have enjoyed,
so early in their civil existence, the security which
the trial of a subject by his peers is adapted to
insure. At the same time it was also enacted,
that, in all cases, the jury should be unanimous in
their verdict.

Besides these regulations, which were included
in the first legislative code, established in 1823,
and improved in 1826; at this latter period,
several important articles were added, and the
Huahinean code now contains fifty-laws. The first

VARIOUS ENACTMENTS.

205

of those introduced at this time, regarded the
education or discipline of the children, and was
designed to counteract the fugitive habits in
which they indulged, prior to the establishment of
regular schools. Formerly the children were ac¬
customed to resist all parental restraint, and,
whenever they chose, to leave their parents' abode,
and associate with other children, or take up their
residence in any other part of the island.

The facility with which the means of support
might in general be obtained, rendered it a matter
of little or no inconvenience to the parties to whom
such children might, at the age of eight, ten, or
twelve years, attach themselves. The person with
v/hose establishment they might unite, exercised
no guardianship over them; and their distance
from the dwelling of their own parents, removed
them from the restraint and superintendence of
those on whom naturally devolved the preservation
of their morals and the formation of their character.
To prevent the sanction and support which chil¬
dren absconding from their homes had been accus¬
tomed to receive, and to promote a more general
attention to the reciprocal duties of parents and
children, this regulation was introduced.

Another enactment prohibited the revival of
those amusements and dances which were immoral
in their tendencies.

A third prohibited husbands from ill-treating
their wives.

The fourth referred to their fisheries, and, by
fixing the proportion of fish taken which should be
given to the king and governors was adapted to
prevent dissatisfaction.

The most advantageous regulation, however,
introduced at this period, for the first time in any

206 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

of the legal enactments, was that which regarded
the boundaries of lands. This law required that
all disputes about land-marks should be referred to
the judges, or settled by the decision of a jury;
and that the boundaries of all the lands, fields,
&c. throughout the island, should be carefully
ascertained, and, with the dimensions, descrip¬
tions of the land, and the names of the owners,
should be entered in a book called the Book of the
Boundaries of Lands. A copy of the boundaries of
oach land, with the name of its owner, signed by the
principal judge, and sealed with the king’s seal,
was to be prepared, as a document or legal title to
the possession of such land in perpetuity.

Many difficulties presented themselves in adjust¬
ing the rights of different claimants to the same
lands. Prior to the introduction of Christianity, the
lands often changed owners during the internal wars
that prevailed; and the descendants of those who at
this anterior time possessed or occupied the land,
preferred their claims. But as those who possessed
the lands at the abolition of idolatry, held them
either as the fruits of conquest, or the gifts of the
king, it was decreed that those who possessed
them then should be considered as their lawful
owners, and that no claim referring to a period
antecedent to this, should be admitted. This law,
by which the lands of the islands were made the
freehold property of their possessors, is one of the
most important in its influence on property that
had yet been enacted. The unalianable right
in the soil would thus descend from the father to
the son, and no man could be deprived of this
natural right but by a flagrant violation of the laws
of his country.

In the year 1824, when the infant, Pomare III,

FIRST PARLIAMENT. 207

was recognized by the nation as the successor to
his father in the government of Tahiti and Moorea,
the Tahitian code was revised and enlarged. At
this time a most important law was introduced,
which gave to the nation, for the first time, what
might be termed a representative government, and
rendered the Tahitian a limited, instead of an
absolute monarchy. It was then decreed that
members from every district should meet annu¬
ally, for the purpose of enacting new laws, and
amending those already in existence. The dura¬
tion of the session was to be regulated by the
business to be transacted. The inhabitants of the
districts were to select their representatives and
fresh deputies, or members, every three years. It
was at first enacted, that two should be sent from
each district; but the same law authorized the
body which might be thus convened, to increase
the number to three or four from each, if it were
found desirable. No regulation was to be regarded
as a law, but such as had been approved or pro¬
posed by them, and had received the sanction of
the king; and every regulation made by them, and
approved by the king, was to be observed as the
law of the land.

The printed report of the session of what may
be termed the Tahitian parliament, which assem¬
bled in May, 1826, contains an alteration of two
laws, and four new regulations. The first of these
is sufficiently important to justify its translation,
it is—

Concerning Seamen who may leave their Vessels,

!. The captain, or master of the vessel, who shall turn
one of his crew on shore, without the consent of the gover¬
nor of the district, is criminal. He shall pay thirty

208

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

dollars ; twenty to the king, six to the governor, and
four to the man who shall conduct the seaman back to
his ship.

2. The man who shall forsake his ship, and hide him¬
self on shore, shall be immediately apprehended. The
man that finds and apprehends (each deserter) shall
receive eight dollars, if he was taken near at hand ; and
fifteen dollars, if brought from a distance.

3. The person who shall entice any man belonging to a
ship, so that he abandon his ship, and the man who shall
hide or secrete him who shall so abscond, shall be tried, and
(if convicted) his sentence shall be to make fifty fathoms
of pathway or road, or to build eight yards of stone pier
or wall.

4- A seaman who shall have concealed himself on
shore, and who shall be found after his ship has sailed,
shall be brought to trial, and his sentence shall be to
make fifty fathoms of road.

One of the greatest sources of annoyance to the
natives, and inconvenience to foreigners, has been
the conduct of seamen who have absconded from
their ships, or been turned on shore by the masters
of trading vessels. To prevent as much as possible
seamen from leaving their ships, this law was
enacted ; and by subjecting to a punishment
with hard labour, both the deserters, and those
who may favour their desertion or concealment, it
is adapted to answer the end proposed.

A copy of this law, with an English translation
printed on the same paper, is given by a person
whom the government appoints for that purpose,
to the master of every vessel entering any of their
harbours. The regulation is so just in its nature,
and so salutary is its tendency in regard to those
who visit the islands, as well as the community on
shore, that the most ready acquiescence in its
requirements may be reasonably expected.

HARBOUR REGULATIONS.

209

The harbour laws, or regulations, enacted in
1829, are not less important to public justice, than
in reference to the security they are designed to
afford; and as they point out the sources of evil
to which the people are exposed, as well as the
objects intended to be secured, their insertion may
be advantageous.

HARBOUR REGULATIONS.

REGULATIONS TO BE OBSERVED BY SHIPS ENTERING THE
HARBOUR OF HUAHINE.

1. Any ship or vessel entering the harbour of Huahine,
for the purpose of trading or procuring refreshments, shall
be protected by the laws and regulations of the place;
for which protection a fee of four Spanish dollars, or an
equivalent, shall be paid to the chief governor, or gover¬
ness, as the case may be, before any trade shall commence,
or refreshments be supplied.—JM. B. This regulation does
not refer to the small vessels or boats belonging to the
islands; but should any such vessel or boat arrive from
his Britannic Majesty’s colony of New South Wales, or
Van Diemen's Land, without a regular license, or regis¬
ter, she will be seized, and the people confined, until an
opportunity offers of sending them back, or a conveyance
be sent for them ; and should they prove to be prisoners of
the crown of Great Britain, the colonial government will
pay any reasonable remuneration for their maintenance,
and a salvage will be paid by the owner of the vessel
(should the same have been piratically taken) for retaking
her.

2. Should any seaman desert from his ship, he shall be
immediately apprehended and taken on board, and the
person apprehending him shall receive four dollars, or an
equivalent, before he is given up, which of course the
commander or master of the ship will stop out of his
wages.

3. Should any seaman desert about the time of the ship’s
sailing, and succeed in secreting himself until she is gone
to sea, he will, as soon as found, be put to work on the

HU P

210

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

roads, or other public employment, until an opportunity
offers to send him off the island.

4. As many disturbances and much distress have been
caused, by people being landed among the Society Islands
without the smallest means of support; such a practice is
hereby forbidden under a penalty of forty dollars, or an
equivalent, for every person so landed, to be paid by the
master, or commander, or person so landing him or them.

5. No person is to be landed for the purpose of remain¬
ing after the ship or vessel that brought him has left,
without the permission of the governor of the place at
which he is desirous of remaining.

6. Should the governor give his permission to any per¬
son to remain on the island for the recovery of his health,
during the absence of the ship, it is expected that the
master or commander will furnish him with any reasonable
supply for his support, as many seamen have been left in
the greatest distress from the neglect of this precaution :
be it known, that a recurrence of it will cause a statement
to be made of the case, to the government to which the
vessel belongs, that the master, or commander, or other
person so offending, may be proceeded against on his
arrival there, as the laws of his own country direct on that
behalf.

7. As soon as any ship or vessel appears within a rea¬
sonable distance of the reefs, a pilot will be sent to con¬
duct her in ; and when she leaves, he will, in like manner,
take her to sea, for which service he is to receive six
Spanish dollars, or an equivalent.

8. All masters, commanders, and other persons, residing
on, or visiting, this island, are charged strictly to observe
these regulations ; and as it is the duty of any and all of
his Britannic Majesty's subjects, to enforce the laws of
their own country, so it will be to give all advice and
assistance in securing offenders against them, and stating
their name, and other particulars, to the government of
New South Wales, or to the secretary of the admiralty,
should the case refer to a person belonging, or likely to
return, to Great Britain, with the name of the person, the
ship, and the place to which she belongs.

FOREIGN SEAMEN.

211

The above regulations for ships entering the harbour of
Huahine, having been submitted to me, I deem them just
and equitable, and have transmitted a copy of the same to
my government, together with this flag, red above , white in
the middle , and red below , proposed for the Georgian and
Society Islands.

Given under my hand on board H.M. ship Satellite, at
Raiatea, this 17th day of March, 1829.

I. LAWS, Commander.

The people have always felt more difficulty in
the enforcement of those regulations which refer
to subjects of other governments residing among
them, than to the natives of their own islands.
The sentencing of such sailors as may desert from
their ships, or may be found on shore after their
vessels have sailed, to hard labour on the public
roads or quays, is probably the most effectual
plan they could have adopted to deter seamen
from the very frequent practice of forsaking their
vessels.

The promulgation of an official printed code
among the inhabitants of these islands, not only
formed an epoch in their history, but introduced
a new order of feeling and action in their civil
relations, as a community governed by laws which
they had deliberately and unitedly adopted. Per¬
spicuity and plainness had been studied in the
framing of their laws, and in several instances we
should have preferred even greater explicitness. The
public administration of justice, under the former
system, had been exceedingly unceremonious and
simple; and although the change now introduced
had rendered it rather more complex, it was
neither intricate nor perplexing. In several of the
islands, I believe, court-houses have been built.
There were none, however, in Huahine when I left,

f 2

212 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

though i have since heard that they were erecting
one for the chief judges.

No investigations or trials have ever taken place
with a closed doors,” but all causes are tried in
open court. In some of the islands, the bell-man
goes round the district, to give public notice before
any trial takes place. Their places of justice have
usually been the governor’s house, or the open air,
frequently the court-yard in front of the chiefs
dwelling, an open space in the centre of the settle¬
ment, or near the sea-beach. A wide-spreading
tree, or clump, is usually selected, and under its
shade the bench is fixed, and the trial attended.
The hour of sun-rise is usually chosen, as they
prefer the coolness of the morning to the heat of
noon.

Important as this change in the civil constitu¬
tion was to all the great interests of the people,
there were doubtless many who were either insen¬
sible of the advantages that would accrue to them¬
selves and their posterity, or were unable to appre¬
ciate their value. There were others, however,
among different ranks in society, who thought and
felt differently, and occasionally exhibited the high
sense they entertained of natural and acknow¬
ledged rights, and the security they expected from
the laws they had adopted. Many illustrations of
this remark might be adduced, I shall only cite
one that occurred in the Society Islands, and I
simply relate it as a fact, without offering any com¬
ment. I was absent at the time it occurred, and
it was regulated entirely by the natives themselves,
without consulting or even acquainting the Mis¬
sionary who was there.

In the autumn of 1822, the queen of Tahiti, the
widow of Pom are, visited Huahine. Her attend

JUDICIAL IMPARTIALITY.

213

ants, who followed in her train from Tahiti, re¬
quiring a piece of timber, she directed them to cut
down a bread-fruit tree growing in the garden of a
poor man on the opposite side of the bay, near
which her own residence stood. Her orders were
obeyed, and the tree was carried away. Teuhe,
the owner of the spot on which it stood, returning
in the evening to his cottage, saw that the spoiler
had been there : the stump was bleeding, and the
boughs lay strewed around, but the stately trunk was
gone. Informed by his neighbours that the queen’s
men had cut it down, he repaired to the magistrate
of the district, and lodged a complaint against her
majesty the queen. The magistrate directed him
to come to the place of public justice the following
morning at sun-rise, and substantiate his charge:
he afterwards sent his servant to the queen, and
invited her attendance at the same hour. The
next morning, as the sun rose above the horizon,
Ori, the magistrate, was seen sitting in the open
air, beneath the spreading branches of a venerable
tree : on a finely-woven mat, before him, sat the
queen, attended by her train ; beside her stood the
native peasant; and around them all, what may
be termed the police-officers. Turning to Teuhe,
the magistrate inquired for what purpose they had
been convened. The poor man said, that in his
garden grew a bread-fruit tree, whose shade was
grateful to the inmates of his cottage, and whose
fruit, with that of those which grew around, sup¬
ported his family for five or seven months in every
year; but that, yesterday, some one had cut it
down, as he had been informed, by order of the
queen. He knew that they had laws—he had
thought those laws protected the poor man’s
property, as well as that of kings and chiefs; and

214 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

he wished to know whether it was right that, with¬
out his knowledge or consent, the tree should have
been cut down.

The magistrate, turning to the queen, asked if
she had ordered the tree to be cut down. She
answered, ‘ Yes.'—He then asked if she did not
know that they had laws. She said, ‘ Yes but she
was not aware that they applied to her. The magis¬
trate asked, 4 If in those laws (a copy of which he
held in his hand) there were any exceptions in
favour of chiefs, or kings, or queens/ She an¬
swered, ‘ No/ and despatched one of her attend¬
ants to her house, who soon returned with a bag
of dollars, which she threw down before the poor
man, as a recompense for his loss.—‘ Stop/ said the
justice/ we have not done yet/ The queen began
to weep. 6 Do you think it right that you should
have cut down the tree without asking the owner’s
permission V continued the magistrate. ‘ It was
not right/ said the queen. Then turning to the
poor man, he asked, 6 What remuneration do you
require V Teuhe answered, If the queen is con¬
vinced that it was not right to take a little man’s
tree without his permission, I am sure she will not
do so again. I am satisfied—I require no other
recompense/ His disinterestedness was applaud¬
ed ; the assembly dispersed; and afterwards, I
think, the queen sent him, privately, a present
equal to the value of his tree.

MESSRS. DARLING AND BOURNE.

215

CHAP. VIII.

Visit from the Windward Islands—Opposition to the
moral restraints of Christianity—Tatauing prohibited
by the chiefs—Revival of the practice—Trial and pe¬
nalty of the offenders—Rebellion ‘against the laws and
government—Public assembly—Address of Taua—De¬
parture of the chiefs and people from the encampment
of the king’s son—Singularity of their dress and ap¬
pearance—Interview between the rival parties—Return
of Hautia and the captives—Arrival of the deputation
at Tahiti—Account of Taaroarii—-Encouraging circum¬
stances connected with his early life—His marriage—
Profligate associates—Effects of bad example—Disor¬
derly conduct—His illness—Attention of the chiefs and
people—Visits to his encampment—Last interview—•
Death of Taaroarii—Funeral procession—Impressive
circumstances connected with his decease and interment
—His monument and epitaph—Notice of his father—•
His widow and daughter—Institution of Christian
burial—Dying expressions of native converts.

During the year 1821, besides going to Tahiti, 1
made three voyages to Raiatea, and spent seve¬
ral weeks with the Missionaries there. These
voyages were not dangerous, although we were
often out at sea all night, and sometimes for nights
and days together.—The Hope, whose arrival at
Tahiti in April had afforded us so much satisfac¬
tion, called at Huahine on her way to England,
with a cargo she had taken in at Tahiti. Shortly

216 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

after this, we were also favoured with a visit from
Messrs. Darling and Bourne, who accompanied
the captain of the Westmoreland from Tahiti, in
the ship’s long-boat. After meeting the Mission¬
aries of the Leeward Islands at Raiatea, they
passed some weeks with us in Huahine. Their
visit was peculiarly gratifying, being the first we
had received from any of the Missionaries in the
Windward Islands, though we had been at Fare
harbour upwards of three years. The season they
spent with us was also distinguished by one or two
important circumstances.

Paganism had been renounced in 1816, and a
general profession of Christianity followed the
commencement of the Mission here; there were,
however, a number who felt the restraint Chris¬
tianity imposed upon their evil propensities, to be
exceedingly irksome. These were principally
young persons ; and though, from the influence of
example, or the popularity of religion, they had
attached themselves to the Christians, they were
probably hoping that a change would take place
in the sentiments of the nation more favourable to
their wishes, and relax the restriction which the
precepts of scripture had imposed. They did not,
however, disturb the tranquillity of the community.

But when the chiefs intimated their intention of
governing for the future according to the principles
and maxims of the Bible, and that the new code
of laws had received the sanction of Pomare-
vahine, as well as that of the ruling chiefs on the
island, they began to be apprehensive that the
existing state of things was likely to be permanent.
They then first exhibited a disposition to oppose
their application. Several who had transgressed
had been by the chiefs admonished and dismissed;

TATAUING PROHIBITED. 217

the latter, at the same time, firmly declaring their
determination to enforce the laws which they had
promulgated.

Among other prohibitions, that of tatauing, or
staining the body, was included. The simple act
of marking the skin was not a breach of the peace,
but it was intimately connected with their former
idolatry, always attended with the practice of
abominable vices, and was on this account pro¬
hibited. In the month of July, it was discovered
that a number, about forty-six young persons, had
been marking themselves. The principal chiefs
said, that formerly the disobedience of so nume¬
rous a party to any order of the chiefs, would have
been considered equivalent to a declaration of war,
and they should have sent armed men after them
at once, and either have slain or banished the
delinquents; but now, as they had laws, they
wished to know whether it would be right that
they should all be tried, and, if found guilty, have
the sentence annexed to the crime pronounced
against them.

We told the chiefs it would not be wrong, and
the next morning attended the trial. It was con¬
ducted with the greatest candour and forbearance
on the part of the magistrates and accusers, and
an equal degree of submission on the part of the
offenders, though it appeared they had supposed
that from their numbers, and the circumstance of
one or two young chiefs of distinction being among
them, the government would not have noticed
their conduct. They were sentenced to build a
certain quantity of stone-work on the margin of
the sea.

In a day or two afterwards, it was discovered
that Taaroarii, the king’s son, a youth about

2l8 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

eighteen years of age, had also been tataued ; and
this being considered as an expression of his dis¬
approbation of his father’s proceedings, and of his
determination as to the conduct he designed to
pursue, produced a great sensation among the
people. His venerable father was deeply affected,
and the struggle between affection for his son, and
his duty to the people, was evidently strong.
The latter prevailed ; he directed him to be tried,
and attended him to the trial: here he affection¬
ately admonished his son to profit by his expe¬
rience, and warned the spectators, telling them
not to be deceived, and suppose that the laws, by
which they had mutually agreed to be governed,
would be violated with impunity. Some of the
latter observed, If the king’s son does not escape,
what will become of the common men ?

Taaroarii, the chief of Sir Charles Sanders’
Island, and the expected successor to his father in
the sovereignty of Huahine, now assisted in build¬
ing the portion of stone-work allotted to him. His
friends and attendants performed the greater part
of the labour-—still, there was a feeling of pride,
that would not allow him to stand altogether idle.
I visited his house one evening, and entered freely
into conversation with him on the subject. He
observed, that he was sorry for what he had done,
but appeared to indicate, that he did not wish it
to be thought that the work assigned him was any
punishment.

Several unsteady young men and women, who
followed the example of the first party, were also
tried, and sentenced to similar punishments ; and
afterwards two principal personages in the island,
by having their bodies tataued, joined their party:
these two were, the son of the king of Raiatea, who

DISAFFECTION TO THE LAWS. 219

was residing at Huahine—and his sister, who had
been married to a member of Mahine’s family.
Their party was now strong, both in point of
number and influence, and we expected that the
simple circumstance of marking the person with
tatau, was only one of the preliminaries of their
design ; and in this we were not mistaken.

In the month of August, we heard that Taaro-
arii, with a number of those whom the chiefs had
sentenced to labour on the public works, had left
their employment, and were gone to Parea, in the
northern part of the island. They told the officers of
the chief appointed to superintend them, that they
intended in a few days to return. The people
were greatly attached to the king’s son, and the
officers, willing to shew him every indulgence, did
not oppose his removal; but reports were soon
circulated, that he was employing emissaries to
invite the disaffected to join him, with the assur¬
ance, that as soon as they were strong enough, he
intended to assume the government of the island,
and abolish the laws—that under his reign every
one should follow his own inclinations, with regard
to those customs which the laws prohibited. His
father being absent at Raiatea, he had judged the
present a favourable time for making a vigorous
effort.

On the evening of the ninth of September,
which was the Sabbath, a messenger came from
the chiefs while we were engaged at family prayers,
informing me that a large party of wild young men
had gone to Parea, and that the son of the king of
Raiatea was preparing to follow them. I went
down to his dwelling ; his wife and several of his
principal men were persuading him to remain, and
not unite himself with those whose designs were

220 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

evidently unfavourable to peace. I mingled my
entreaties with theirs, but it was of no avail. His
own men, finding he could not be deterred unless
by violence, desisted; while a number of young
fellows, like-minded with himself, urging him to
depart, he hastened after the party that had gone
to Parea. As soon as Hautia, the deputy-gover¬
nor of the island, heard it, he gave orders for the
people to prepare to go, and fetch them back the
next day.

On the following morning, accompanied by
Messrs. Darling and Bourn, I went down to the
settlement about sunrise, to witness the proceed¬
ings of an assembly convened to consider the
events of the preceding day. It was one of the
most interesting of the kind I ever attended. The
public council was held in the open air, on the
sea-beach, in the shade of several tamanu-trees,
that grew in front of the governor’s house. Hautia
sat on a rustic native seat, near the trunk of the
principal tree. The chiefs of the different districts,
and the magistrates, were assembled near him,
while most of the people of the settlement had
gathered round, to witness their proceedings, full
of anxiety for the result.

It appeared from the declarations of several,
that the conduct of the young men, and especially
the chiefs’ sons, had not proceeded from any
desire to ornament their persons with tatau, but
from an impatience of the restraint the laws im¬
posed ; that they had merely selected that as a
means of shewing their hostility to those laws, and
their determination not to regard them; that if
they might be allowed, without molestation, to
follow their own inclinations, no disturbance of
the present sort would be attempted; but that if

PUBLIC ASSEMBLY.

221

the restraints of the laws were imposed, and their
penalties enforced, they were determined to with¬
stand them. It was also reported that they were
armed, and intended to resist all attempts to en¬
force their obedience.

After a short declaration, it was proposed to go
and address them first with kindness, but firmness,
inviting them to return; that if they accepted the
invitation, well; if not, that they should attempt to
bind them, and bring them back; that if they re¬
sisted, to use force, but by no means to have re¬
course to arms, unless they should be first assaulted.
This was acceded to by all present. The men
repaired for their arms, and in half an hour the
greater part of the inhabitants of the district assem¬
bled in front of the chief’s house, ready to set out
as soon as he should lead them.

Before they started, Taua, a tall well-made
chief, who had formerly been a warrior and a
priest, and who was one of their orators, stood up
in the midst, and addressed the assembly. His
person was commanding, his features masculine,
his head uncovered, and his hair short, black,
and slightly curled. A mantle of finely woven
bark was thrown loosely over his shoulders, his
loins were girded with a purau, and in his hand he
held a light spear.

He spoke with considerable judgment and effect.
They might as well, he said, leave their weapons
at home, as to any use which he expected they
would be required to make of them, but that still
it was perhaps best to go prepared, and to shew
these misguided young men, especially the king’s
two sons, that it was their determination to make
the laws, to which they had openly agreed, the
rule of public conduct, to maintain them as they

222 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

were, and not to bend them to the views of those
whose object was to introduce disorder and to
foster crime; to let them know at once, that
though they were chiefs, they, as well as their
subjects, must respect the laws, or sustain the
consequences. We think they will submit, (he
added,) but perhaps we are mistaken, and the
issue of this day is not altogether certain. God,
who overrules all events, and sometimes uses the
wicked to accomplish his purposes, may, perhaps,
design by them to punish and to humble us, and
to give them a temporary ascendency; we ought
therefore to look to Him.

I do not vouch for the accuracy of the language,
but these are the sentiments he expressed.

Drawing to a close, he turned towards us, as we
were sitting on a rustic rail near the outside of the
assembly, and observed, that though he appre¬
hended there was no danger, it would be well to
be prepared ; for should they be overcome, although
the young chiefs might be inclined to favour us,
they could not restrain their followers; that our
property would be a temptation; and that as we
were supposed to have facilitated the introduction
and enforced the observance of the laws, it might
be necessary, in order to our safety, that we should
leave the island, even before sunset. A degree of
excited animation, attended with a lively and im¬
pressive action and an impassioned feeling, which
greatly affected us, breathed through the whole of
his harangue, and during the latter part we could
not refrain from tears.

Shortly after Taua closed, Hautia, who was clad
in a loose parau round his loins, a light and beau-
fully fringed purau mat thrown like a mantle
loosely over his shoulders, and holding a light

MARCH AGAINST THE REBELS. 223

spear in his hand, arose, and came and took
leave of us, and then set off towards Parea,
surrounded by the chiefs, and followed by their
adherents.

When he rose, and gave with his spear the sig¬
nal to move onward, there was an evident indica¬
tion of strong excitement, which continued till
they had left the courtyard, not only among
those who were going, but among the women,
children, and others, who were spectators. Hautia’s
wife walked on by the side of her husband ; many
of the other women also went to see the issue of
the rencounter. We remained till all had de¬
parted.

The chiefs and their people did not proceed in
one unbroken column, but, after the departure of
Hautia and his companions, followed in small
detached parties, consisting of a chief, and three,
four, or five of his dependants. Their appearance,
equipment, and dress presented a singular spec¬
tacle. The symmetry of form, well-shaped and
finely turned limbs and graceful steps of some,
together with their tasteful, cumberless dress, the
light spear in their hand, and the excitement of
their countenance, presented a figure that could
not be contemplated without admiration ; and the
only feelings of a different order, on beholding
such an individual, were those of regret at the
errand on which he was going.

There were others, however, very different in
appearance, which made the contrast the more
striking; some exceedingly corpulent and heavy,
others spare in habit, all arrayed in a different
kind of dress from that they ordinarily wore, and
some presenting frightful figures. Many wore a
kind of turban, others a bandage of human hair,

224 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

across their forehead, and round the back of the
head.

The most singular head-dress was that worn by
Buhia, one of the chiefs of Maeva. It w~as a
kind of wig, consisting of long and yellow beards,
fastened in a sort of net-work fitted to the head.
Whether they were the beards of vanquished ene¬
mies, that had been taken as trophies by his an¬
cestors, as the Americans are accustomed to pre¬
serve the scalps of their prisoners, I did not learn.
The singularity of his appearance was greatly in¬
creased by two or three small whales’ teeth, the
roots of which were fixed to the net-work, while
the points projected through the hair like very
short horns : one was placed over each eye, and, I
think, one over one of the ears. The other parts
of his dress were altogether those of an ancient
warrior; and his appearance was so singular, that
I could not forbear stopping him a moment, to
examine his head-drees, and inquire about it. He
informed me that the hair was the beards of men,
and that the design of it was to excite terror. On
my inquiring what the horny appearances were, I
was informed that they were the neho or tara of
taehae tahito , teeth or horns of ancient cannibals
or wild men. I informed him they were young
whales’ teeth ; but he seemed inclined to doubt it.
I could not but think, as I looked at him, that he
certainly had succeeded tolerably well in rendering
himself a terrible object. One of his attendants,
Maro, a plump-bodied, round-faced, good-natured
looking man appeared in perfect contrast with his
chief, and it was impossible to behold him without
a smile. His person was rather stout and short,
his hair was cut close to his head, the upper part
of his body was uncovered, but round his waist he

MARCH AGAINST TIIE REBELS. 225

wore a pareu reaching to his knees. He had a
drummer’s jacket on, highly ornamented, and
scarlet-coloured; it was, however, too small for
him to get it on his back, or to pass his muscular
arms through the sleeves; it was therefore fixed
on the outside of his pareu, the body of the jacket
hanging down in place of the skirts of a coat, while
the sleeves, passing round his waist, were tied in
a knot in front. His equipment was in perfect
accordance with his uniform, for the only weapon
that he had was a short brass-barrelled blunder¬
buss, called by the natives vaha rahi , or great-
mouth.

Although the events of the morning had been
such as were adapted to awaken very different
feelings, yet when he turned round his good-
natured face to bid me farewell, I could not for¬
bear smiling. His person, dress, arms, and a habit
of leaning forwards, which, as he hastened by,
exhibited very fully the scarlet jacket, rendered his
appearance ludicrous in the extreme.

When the parties had all started, we returned to
the valley to breakfast, but were surprised, as we
passed through the settlement, to behold almost every
house deserted. We inferred that those women
and children who had not accompanied the men
to Parea, had retired to places of greater security,
or better observation. After breakfast, we spent
some time in prayer that no blood might be shed,
but that the issue of the interview between the
rival parties might be conciliatory. We then
launched our boat, fixed our masts and rudder,
twisted up our matting sails, and waited, not with¬
out anxiety, the arrival of intelligence.

The chiefs, before they left, had appointed the
following signals. If there was no resistance made

HI. Q

226 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

by the young chiefs and their adherents, all would
remain quiet till they returned. If they had to
fight, they would send a man to fire a musket so
near the valley that we might hear it. If the rival
party was numerous, and there was danger, two
would be fired.

We remained in a state of great suspense during
the forenoon, and scarcely saw an individual in the
settlement. About twelve o’clock we heard one
musket fired, and very shortly afterwards another.
This only increased our embarrassment, for al¬
though two had been fired, they had not been fired
together, and, judging from the report, we inferred
that one was much nearer than the other. We,
therefore, determined to wait farther intimation,
before we took any measures for personal se¬
curity. In this state of uncertainty we con¬
tinued, supposing a conflict had certainly com¬
menced ; and that the two shots we had heard,
had, perhaps, occasioned an equal loss of lives.

At two o’clock in the afternoon, however, our
anxiety was relieved by the arrival of Tauira, whom
the chiefs had sent to inform us that all was peace ;
that Moeore, the son of the king of Raiatea, and
his adherents, had surrendered on the arrival of
Hautia, and that the parties were retiring to the
settlement. The messenger was almost breathless
with speed; and while resting, he united with us
in rendering grateful acknowledgments for the
agreeable tidings. In an hour or two, Taauroa,
one of our people, arrived, and told us the reports
we heard were only random shots, fired as expres¬
sions of joy, and that it had been done without the
knowledge of the chiefs.

Towards sunset we walked to the adjoining dis¬
trict of Haapape, where we were delighted to meet

TRIAL OF THE REBELS.

227

Hautia and his friends returning; the young chief,
who was about six-and-twenty years of age, with
his adherents, following in their train as captives.
We mingled our congratulations for the issue of
the events of the day. We were also thankful to
learn, that although one individual had a very
narrow escape, yet no life had been lost, and no
person injured.

Two days afterwards we attended the trial of
the rebels, at a special court, held in the open air.
The conduct of each was candidly and impartially
examined ; and, as many, it was found, had gone
merely to accompany the chief, or to procure food,
without any intention of joining in the rebellion,
they were liberated. The others, who had not
only designed but commenced hostilities, by plun¬
dering the plantations, killing and eating the hogs
of the party favourable to the laws, were sentenced
to public labour, and were set to work in small
parties, with police-officers to attend them. Al¬
though they were repeatedly interrogated as to the
reasons for their conduct, they said but little in
reply. In the evening of the same day, great
numbers of the people attended our weekly ser¬
vice, when I endeavoured suitably to impress their
minds in reference to the recent painful events,
by directing them to the history of Absalom’s re¬
bellion.

There have been two or three slight insurrec¬
tions in Tahiti since the promulgation of the laws,
but they have affected only a small number.
They have not been recent, and the laws seem
firmly established; but there are many, in all
the islands, who find them an irksome restraint,
and would most willingly, if an opportunity of¬
fered, abrogate them. Such individuals desire

q 2

228 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the return of the time when there was no law*
and every one followed his own inclinations.
In Huahine, though they have been frequently
violated, I do not think any attempt has been
made to disannul them, since the one above
alluded to.

The South Sea Islanders are generally addicted
to war. It occurred very frequently, prior to the
introduction of Christianity. During the fifteen
years Mr. Nott spent in the islands, while the
people were pagans, the island of Tahiti was in¬
volved in actual war ten different times. The
Missionaries were painfully familiar with it. It
surrounded their dwellings; and the wounded in
battle have often, with the wounds fresh and bleed¬
ing, repaired to their houses for relief. This,
however, was the only time that I saw any thing
like it, though we often heard its rumours. Re¬
ports of war have indeed been heard, especially at
Tahiti—where, since the death of the late king,
very powerful interests, and perhaps some latent
feelings of ancient rival ship, have been brought
into collision, and where the conduct of some, in
the highest authority, has not been at all times the
most honourable or conciliatory—but no actual
hostility has yet existed. In the Leeward Islands,
also, reports of war, and warlike preparations, have
appeared—more particularly in reference to the
bold and martial chieftain of Tahaa, and some of
the restless spirits among the inhabitants of Bora-
bora, once celebrated for their military prowess,
and masters of most of the Leeward group—but
it has been only rumour.

The transient affair at Huahine, in connexion
with which these remarks have been introduced,
and similar occurrences in Raiatea and Tahaa—

CONTINUANCE OF PEACE.

229

between the chiefs, together with a great body of
the people, on the one side; and those dissatisfied
with the moral restraints to which under idolatry
they had been unaccustomed, on the other—are
the only public disturbances that have occurred. A
few disaffected and lawless young fellows in Raia-
tea, supposing the Missionaries were chiefly instru¬
mental in the adoption and maintenance of the
laws, formed a plan for murdering them, and over¬
turning the government. Mr. Williams, who was
to have been the first object of their vengeance,
averted the threatened danger by what appeared
to him, at the time, a circumstance entirely acci¬
dental, but which afterwards proved a remarkable
interposition of Providence for the preservation of
his life. With these exceptions, the inhabitants
have, since their adoption of Christianity, enjoyed
uninterrupted peace- during a longer period than
was ever known before.

Noble instances of calm determination not to
appeal to arms, have been given by Utami and
other governors ; the love and the culture of peace
having indeed succeeded their delight in the prac¬
tice of war, even in the most turbulent and fighting
districts. It is well known, Mr. Darling observes,
in reference to the district of Atehuru, that the
inhabitants of this part of Tahiti were always the
first for war. False reports having reached the ear
of the king’s party, that the people of Atehuru
entertained evil designs against the royal family,
rumours of war were spread by the adherents
of the king, but, instead of rejoicing, as they
would formerly have done, every one appeared
to dread it as the greatest calamity. They gathered
round the house of the Missionary, declaring that,
if attacked, they would not fight, but would wil-

230

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

lingly become prisoners or slaves, rather than go to
war. The mischief was thus prevented—those
with whom the reports had originated were sought
out—an appeal was made to the laws, instead of
the spear . The punishment annexed to the cir¬
culation of false and injurious reports was inflicted
on the offenders, and the parties united in amity
and friendship.

As they feel the blessings of peace increase
with its continuance, their desires to perpetuate it
appear stronger. Its prevalence and extent are
often surprising, even to themselves; and some of
the most striking illustrations of the advantages of
true religion, and appeals for its support and
extension, are drawn from this fact, and expressed
in terms like these : Let our hands forget how to
hi te omore, or vero ti patia, lift the club, or
throw the spear : Let our guns decay with rust, we
want them not; for though we have been pierced
with balls or spears, if we pierce each other now,
let it be with the word of God : How happy are
we now! we sleep not with our cartridges under
our heads, our muskets by our side, and our hearts
palpitating with alarm : We have the Bible, we
know the Saviour; and if all knew him, if all
obeyed him, there would be no more war.

It is not in public only that they manifest these
sentiments ; in ordinary life at home they act upon
them. The most affectionate and friendly inter¬
course is cultivated between the parties who for¬
merly cherished the most implacable hatred, and
often vowed each other’s extermination. Offices
of kindness and affection are performed with
promptitude and cheerfulness; and though by
some their weapons are retained as relics of past
days, or securities against invasion, by many they

AVERSION FROM AVAR.

231

are destroyed. Often have I seen a gun-barrel,
or other iron weapon, that has been carried to the
forge, committed to the fire, laid upon the anvil,
and beaten, not exactly into a plough-share or a
pruning-hook, (for the vine does not stretch its
luxuriant branches along the sides of their sunny
hills,) but beaten into an implement of husbandry,
and used by its proprietor in the culture of his
plantation or his garden. Their weapons of wood
also have often been employed as handles for their
tools ; and their implements of war have been con¬
verted with promptitude into the furniture of the
earthly sanctuary of the Prince of peace. The
last pulpit I ascended in the South Sea Islands
was at Rurutu. I had ministered to a large con¬
gregation, in a spacious and well-built chapel, of
native architecture, over which the natives con¬
ducted me at the close of the service. The
floor was boarded, and a considerable portion of
the interior space fitted up with seats or forms.
The pulpit was firmly, though rudely constructed ;
the stairs that led to it were guarded by rails, sur¬
mounted by a bannister of mahogany-coloured
tamanu wood; the rails were of dark aito wood,
and highly polished. I asked my companions
where they had procured these rails; and they
replied, that they had made them with the handles
of warriors’ spears!

Our friends from the Windward Islands, who
were with us when the disturbance at Huahine
occurred, had been with us a month, when Pomare’s
vessel called at Huahine, on her way from New
South Wales to Tahiti. Circumstances requiring,
that as many of the Missionaries in the Leeward
Islands as could leave their stations should meet
those of the Windward group, Mr. and Mrs. Wil-

232 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

liams, Mrs. Ellis, and myself, accompanied our
friends on board the Governor Macquarie.

After five days at sea, finding ourselves near the
land, we entered our boat, which had been towed
at the stern of the vessel, and, rowing to the shore,
landed a few miles to the southward of the settle¬
ment at Burder’s Point. No effort had been
wanting on the part of the captain, to render our
voyage agreeable; but, from the smallness of the
cabin, number of the passengers, frequent rains,
and contrary winds, it had been tedious and
unpleasant, and we were glad to find ourselves on
shore again. Exhausted by the fatigues of the
voyage, we found the walk to the settlement
laborious ; but on reaching the dwellings of our
friends, the welcome, the refreshment, and the
rest, we there received, soon recruited our strength
and spirits.

We had accomplished our business, and were at
Papeete preparing to return, when, on the 24th of
September, about three o’clock in the afternoon, a
vessel of considerable size was seen approaching
Point Venus. By the aid of a glass, we perceived
that it was a three-masted vessel, and, in endea¬
vouring to ascertain its signal, we were surprised
on beholding a large white triangular banner flying
at the top-gallant-mast head. The ship was too
distant to allow of our reading the motto, or per¬
ceiving with distinctness the device, and we could
only conjecture the character of the vessel, or the
object of the visit.

The next morning, a note from Mr. Nott con¬
veyed to us the gratifying intelligence, that the
ship was direct from England, and that G. Bennet,
Esq. the Rev. D. Tyerman, a deputation from the
Society, with three Missionaries, had arrived. The

ARRIVALS FROM ENGLAND. 233

captain had come over in his boat, and, anxious
to welcome our newly arrived friends, I accompa¬
nied him in his return to the ship. On reaching
the Tuscan, we were happy to see Messrs. Jones,
Armitage, and Blossom, with their wives, and,
afterwards proceeding to the shore, had an oppor¬
tunity of greeting the arrival of the deputation.

The next morning the ship proceeded to
Papeete; and, in the forenoon of the same day,
Messrs. Williams and Darling, having returned
from Eimeo, we met the deputation, read the
letters from the Directors, acknowledged the ap¬
pointment of the deputation as a proof of their
attachment, and expressed our sense of their
kindness in forwarding supplies.

The letters they had brought, and the accounts
of their intercourse with our friends, were cheering;
and after spending upwards of a week very plea¬
santly in their society, I returned to Eimeo in my
own boat, Mr. and Mrs. Williams, and Mrs. Ellis,
having sailed to Huahine a week before, in the
Westmoreland. Contrary winds detained me
another week at Eimeo, during which I visited
Pomare. On the 12th of October we set sail, and,
after passing two nights at sea, reached Fare har¬
bour in safety on the fourteenth.

The year 1821 was an eventful period in the
political annals of Huahine, not only in reference
to the promulgation of the new code of laws, but
also in regard to the death of Taaroarii, the king’s
only son, the chief of Sir Charles Sanders’ Island,
and the heir to the government of Huahine. This
event took place very soon after my return from
Tahiti.

The circumstances preceding his death were
distressing.

234 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

The young chieftain was in his nineteenth year;
his rank and influence led us to indulge cheering
anticipations; and, during his juvenile years, he
was greatly beloved by the people. He had also,
when it was supposed he could scarcely have
arrived at years of discretion, shewn his contempt
for the idols of his country, his desire to be
instructed concerning the true God, and had
prohibited the licentious and idolatrous cere¬
monies of the Areois, when few were favourable
to Christianity. Subsequently, Taaroarii had be¬
come a diligent pupil of the Missionaries. We
could not but hope that Divine Providence was
raising him up to succeed his father, and to
govern the islands under his authority, for the
stability of the Christian faith, and the advance¬
ment of the people’s best interests.

These hopes, however, were disappointed. He
treated Christianity and the worship of God with
respect, was a steady enemy to the introduction or
use of ardent spirits by chiefs or people, and was
not a profligate man; but, soon after our estab¬
lishment in Huahine, a number of the most
abandoned young men, of that and other islands,
attached themselves to his retinue, which was
always numerous, became his companions, flattered
his pride, and, in many respects ministering to
his wishes, they infused their own evil principles
into his mind.

Being naturally cheerful and good-natured, he
was induced by his companions, first to neglect
instruction, then the public worship of God, and,
subsequently, to patronize and support his fol¬
lowers. His venerable father beheld the change
with poignant grief, and used all the affection,
influence, and authority of a parent, to lead him

TAAROARII. 235

from those evil courses; but his efforts, and those
of other friends, failed.

In order to draw him from this influence, a
matrimonial connexion was arranged, and he was
united in marriage with the daughter of Hautia,
who, next to Mahine, was the highest chief, and
deputy-governor of the island. His daughter was
near the age of the king’s son ; and though rather
inferior in rank, she was in every other respect a
suitable partner, and proved a faithful and affec¬
tionate wife.

A house was built for him near the dwelling of
his wife’s family, and a more commodious one
for the youthful couple, adjacent to his father’s
residence. It was, however, soon manifest that
the baneful influence of his former associates
was not destroyed. They gathered around him
again, and he gave himself up to their guidance
and control.

His wife was treated with cruelty, but still con¬
tinued attentive to his comfort. A number of the
most profligate of the young men attached to his
establishment, having tataued themselves, he was
induced to submit to the same, it is supposed, with
a view to screen them from punishment. They
imagined the magistrates would not bring him to
public trial; and if he was exempted, they knew
they should escape.

When it was found that the young chief had
actually violated the laws, the magistrates came to
the king, to ask him whether he should be tried.
The struggle was severe ; but, under the influence
of a patriotism worthy of his station, he said he
wished the laws to be regarded, rather than those
feelings which would lead him to spare his son the
disgrace to which he had subjected himself. To

236 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

convince the people that the government would
act according to the laws, and to deter others from
their violation, he directed that his son should be
tried. Taaroarii received the sentence with apparent
indifference, but was so exasperated with his father,
that he more than once threatened to murder him,
or to cause his destruction.

Some months after this he broke a blood-vessel,
it is supposed, with over-exertion at the public
work appointed as a penalty for his crime. After
this, he laid aside his labour; his people would at
the first have performed the work for him, but he
would not allow it, and appeared to identify himself
with them, in the humiliating situation to which
they had reduced themselves. In the conversations
we sometimes had with him, he seemed to regret
having connected himself with the party who now
considered him as their leader.

Shortly after this event, symptoms of rapid con¬
sumption appeared, and assumed an alarming
character. All available means were promptly
employed, but without effect. His father fre¬
quently visited him, and his wife was his constant
attendant. In order to try the effect of change of
air, he was laid upon a litter, and brought on men’s
shoulders into the valley, where a temporary
encampment had been erected near our dwell¬
ing. The chiefs of the island, with their guards,
attended, and, when they reached the valley,
fired three volleys of musketry, indicative of their
sympathy.

While he remained here, we often saw him;
he was generally communicative, and sometimes
cheerful, excepting when the topic of religion was
introduced, and then an evident change of feeling
took place; he would attend to our observations,

TAAROARIl’s LAST ILLNESS. 237

but seldom utter a syllable in reply, and seemed
unwilling to have the subject brought under consi¬
deration. This was the most distressing circum¬
stance attending his illness, and to none more
painfully affecting than to his aged father.

On the last day of his life, Mrs. Ellis and our
two elder children, to whom he had always been
partial, went to see him; he appeared compara¬
tively cheerful, listened to all that was said, and
shook the children by the hand very affectionately,
when they said, la ora na , or, Farewell. I spent
some time with him during the same afternoon,
and it was the most affecting intercourse I ever
had with a dying fellow-creature.

The encampment was fixed on an elevated part
of the plain, near which the river, that flowed
from the interior mountain to the sea, formed a
considerable curvature. The adjacent parts of the
valley were covered with shrubs, but the margin of
the river was overgrown with slender branching
purau, and ancient chesnut-trees, that reared their
stately heads far above the rest, and shed their
grateful shade on the waters, and on the shore.
Near the edge of the cool stream that rippled over
the pebbles, and at the root of one of these stately
trees, I found the young chieftain, lying on a port¬
able couch, surrounded by his sorrowing friends
and attendants.

I asked why they had brought him there : they
said that he complained of heat or want of air,
and they had brought him to that spot that he
might enjoy the refreshing coolness of the stream
and the shade. I could not but admire their
choice as I sat beside him, and felt, after leaving
the portions of the valley exposed to the sun’s
rays, as if I had entered another climate. The

238 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

gentle but elastic current of air swept along the
course of the river, beneath foliage that often
formed beautiful natural arches over the water,
and through which a straggling sun-beam was here
and there seen sparkling in the ripple of the
stream.

After mingling my sympathy with the friends
around, I spoke at some length to the young man,
whose visage had considerably altered since the
preceding day. I endeavoured to direct his mind
to God, for mercy through Christ, and affection¬
ately urged a personal and immediate application,
by faith, to him who is able to save even to the
uttermost, and willing to receive even at the
eleventh hour, &c.

All prospect of his recovery had ceased ; our
solicitude was therefore especially directed to his
preparation for that state on which he was so soon
to enter. This indeed had been our principal aim
in all our intercourse with him. On this occasion
he made no reply, (indeed I suppose he was unable,
had he been disposed,) but he raised his head
after I had done speaking, and gazed stedfastly
upon me, with an expression of anguish in his
whole countenance, which I never shall forget, and
which is altogether indescribable. Whether it
arose from bodily or mental agony, I am not
able to say, but I never beheld so affecting a
spectacle.

Before I left his couch, I again attempted to direct
his mind to the compassionate Redeemer, and, I
think, engaged in prayer with him. The evening
was advancing when I took leave, and the con¬
viction was strongly impressed on my mind, that it
was the last day he would spend on earth. My
eye lingered on him with intense and mingled

TAAROARIl’s LAST ILLNESS. 239

interest, as I stood at his feet, and watched his
short and laborious respiration; his restless and
feverish head had been long pillowed on the lap
of his affectionate wife, whose face, with that of
every other friend, was suffused with tears. His
eye rolling its keen fitful glance on every object,
but resting on none, spoke a state of feeling remote
indeed from tranquillity and ease. I could not
help supposing that his agitated soul was, through
this her natural window, looking wishfully on all
she then was leaving; and as I saw his eye rest
on his wife, his father, his friends around, and
then glancing to the green boughs that waved
gently in the passing breeze, the bright and clear
blue sky that appeared at intervals through the
foliage, and the distant hills whose summits were
burnished with the splendour of the retiring sun—
I almost imagined the intensity and rapidity of his
glance indicated an impression that he would never
gaze on them again. Such was the conviction of
my own mind ; and I reluctantly retired, more
deeply than ever impressed with the necessity of
early and habitual preparation for death.

O ! how different would the scene have been,
had this interesting youth, as earth with all its
associations receded, experienced the consola¬
tions and the hopes of the gospel. I presume
not to say that in his last hours, in those
emotions of the soul which nature was too much
exhausted to allow him to declare, and which
were known only to God and to himself, he
was not cheered by these anticipations. I would
try to hope it was so : for indications of such
feelings, his sorrowing and surviving friends
anxiously waited.

How striking the contrast between his last day

240 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

on earth, and that of Teivaiva, another youth of
Huahine, and, like Taaroarii, an only son and an
only child, who, when he saw his sorrowing
parents weeping by the side of the couch on which
lie lay, collected his remaining strength, and, rous¬
ing himself, said — u I am in pain, but I am not
unhappy; Jesus Christ is with me, and he supports
me : we must part, but we shall not be parted long;
in heaven we shall meet, and never die. Father,
don't weep for me. Mother, don’t weep for me. We
shall never die in heaven.” But the latter of these,
while in health and comfort, had been happy in
the ways of religion, seeking the favour of God :
the former had neglected and departed from those
ways, and had lived in the practice of sin.

About nine o’clock in the evening, Mahine sent
word that his son was worse. Mr. BarfF and my¬
self hastened to the encampment, and found him
apparently dying, but quite sensible. We remain¬
ed with them some time, endeavoured to ad¬
minister a sihall portion of medicine, and then
returned. A short time before midnight, on the
25th of October, 1821, he breathed his last.

When the messenger brought us the tidings of
his death, we repaired to the tent, found his
parents, his wife, and an aunt who was exceed¬
ingly fond of him, sobbing and weeping bitterly by
the side of the corpse. The attendants joined in
the lamentation; it was not the wild and frantic
grief of paganism, formerly so universal on such
occasions, but the expression of deep anguish
chastened by submission to the Divine will.
We mingled our sympathies with the mourners,
spent a considerable time with them, endeavouring
to impart consolation to their minds, and then
returned to rest, but not to sleep.

SYMPATHY WITH THE MOURNERS. 241

The sudden departure of the young chieftain,
and the circumstances connected with it, power¬
fully affected our minds. We had been intimate
with him ever since our arrival in the islands, had
received many tokens of kindness from him, had
watched his progress with no ordinary interest,
especially since his removal to Huahine in 1818.
We had considered him as the future sovereign of
the island in which we should probably spend our
days, but he was now for ever removed. We
hoped we had been faithful to him. But at times
such as this, when one and another was removed
from the people amongst whom we laboured, we
were led to reflect on the state into which they
had entered; and when their prospects had been
dark, and their character doubtful, we could not
but fear that we perhaps had not manifested all the
solicitude which we ought to have done, nor used
means available for the purpose of leading them
to Him, who alone could deliver from the fear of
death, and all the consequences of conscious guilt.
Reflections of this kind were now solemn and in¬
tense, and I trust profitable.

The funeral was conducted in the Christian
manner: a coffin was made for the body, and a
new substantial stone vault was built in the south¬
west angle of the chapel-yard; on account of
which, his interment was deferred until five days
after his decease.

About three o’clock in the afternoon of the 30th
of October, we repaired to the encampment of the
king, and found most of the people of the island
assembled. About four the procession left the
tent. Mr. BarfF and ngyself walked in front, fol¬
lowed by a few of the favourite attendants of the
young chief. The coffin was borne by six of his

ii r. r

242

P O L Y N E SIA N R E S E A R C11E S.

own men; it was covered with a rich yellow pall,
of thick native cloth, with a deep black border.
Six young chiefs, in European suits of mourning,
bore the pall; amongst them was the son of the
king of Raiatea. His wife, his father, and near
relations, followed, wearing also deep European
mourning. Mrs. Barff and Mrs. Ellis, with our
children, walked after these; the tenantry of his
own district, and servants of his household, came
next; and after them, the greater part of the popu¬
lation of the island.

When we reached the place of sepulture, I
turned, and looking towards the valley, beheld,
I think, a scene of the most solemn interest that
ever I witnessed. Before us stood the bier, on
which was laid the corpse of the individual of
brightest hopes among all I beheld, destined for the
highest distinction the nation knew, whose tall,
and, for his years, gigantic form, open and manly
brow 7 , had promised fair for many years of most
commanding influence, an influence which we
once hoped would have advanced his country’s
welfare. Beside that bier stood his youthful
widow, weeping, we have reason to believe, tears
of unfeigned sorrow; and w 7 ho, in addition to the
loss she had sustained, was on the eve of becom¬
ing a mother. Near her stood his venerable
sire, gray with age, and bending with infirmities,
taking a last sad look of all that now remained
of what had once been the stay of his declining
years, his hope and joy; towards whom, in all his
wayward courses, he had exercised the affection
of a father.

Around them stood the friends, and, along the
margin of the placid ocean, and emerging from
the shadowy paths that wound along the distant

FUNERAL OF TAAR0AR11.

243

valley, the mourning tribes, the father, and the
mother, with their children, were seen advancing
slowly to the spot. Each individual in the whole
procession, which, as they walked only two abreast,
extended from the sepulchre to the valley, wore
some badge of mourning; frequently it was a white
tiputa , or mantle, with a wide black fringe.

When the greater part had reached the chapel
yard, Mr. Barff addressed the spectators, and I
offered a prayer to the Almighty, that the mournful
event might be made a blessing to the survivors.
The body was then deposited in the tomb—the pall
left on the coffin. The father, the widow, and
several other friends, entered, took a last glance,
and retired in silence, under strong and painful
emotion. When we withdrew, the servants placed
a large stone against the entrance, and left it til!
the following day, when it was walled up. The
tomb was whitewashed, and a small coral stone
placed perpendicularly, at the end towards the sea,
on which was inscribed in the native language, this
simple epitaph, “ Taaroarii died October 25th,
1821.” On the following Sabbath, a discourse
was delivered from 2 Kings xx. 1. in reference to
the solemn event.

I never saw persons more deeply affected than
the friends of the deceased had been during his
illness, especially his excellent father, and his
wife. For many days prior to his death, the latter
sat by his couch, supporting his aching head in
her lap, wiping the cold perspiration from his
brow, or refreshing him with her fan, w r atching
with fondest solicitude his look, and aiming, if
possible, to anticipate his wishes. It ended not
with his decease. She scarcely left his body until
It was interred, sitting on one side, while his aunt,

n 2

244 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

or some other relative, sat on the other, through
the day; and when overcome with fatigue and
watching, falling asleep in the same station at
night; yet I never heard the least murmur or
repining word against the dealings of God. It
was but the excess of sorrow, on account of the
bereavement. Two months afterwards she became
a mother; and, during our continuance on the
island, Mrs. Ellis was considered as the guardian
of her infant daughter. Since our departure, the
child has been trained, by its mother, according
to the direction of Mrs. Barff, and will probably
succeed to the government of the island at its
grandfather’s death.

Mahine, the pious and venerable chief, still lives
to be an ornament to the Christian religion, a
nursing father to the infant churches established
in his country, and the greatest blessing to the
people whom he governs. His daughter-in-law,
who it was hoped would have supplied to him the
place of his departed son, has been removed by
death, and disappointed those hopes. The orphan
princess, an interesting and amiable child, is
under the Christian guardianship of Maihara, the
daughter of the king of Raiatea, and sister to the
nominal queen of the island.

Many barbarous ceremonies attended pagan
interment, but, since the abolition of idolatry, the
rites and usages of Christian burial, as far as they
seemed desirable, or the circumstances of the
people would admit, have been introduced, and
are generally observed. At each of the Missionary
stations, a piece of ground near the sea-shore, and
at some distance from the houses, has been devoted
by the government to the purposes of interment,
and all who die near are buried there.

MODES OF INTERMENT.

245

Those who die in the remote districts are buried
by their friends near the place; sometimes in the
vicinity of their little rustic chapel, at others in the
garden near their dwelling. They are not always
deposited in a coffin, as the survivors are often
destitute of boards and nails; they are, however,
decently interred, usually wrapped in native cloth
and matting, and placed in the keel or lower part
of a canoe.

If there be a native Missionary or teacher near,
he is called to officiate at the interment; if not, a
male branch of the family usually offers up a
prayer when the body is committed to the earth.
Some inconvenience was sustained when the
natives first embraced Christianity, with regard to
the burial of those who died at a distance from the
Missionary station. The heat of the climate was
often such as rendered it necessary to inter them
on the day of their decease, or on that which fol¬
lowed, and they had not time to send for a native
teacher. To obviate this, a prayer suitable to be
offered up at the time of interment was written,
and distributed among the natives, for the use of
those who resided at a distance. This appeared
not only according to Christian propriety, but
necessary, to guard against any latent influence of
the former superstitions, which might lurk in the
minds of those who, though they renounced ido¬
latry, were but very partially instructed in many
points of Christian doctrine.

At the Missionary stations, the corpse has sel¬
dom been brought to the place of worship. We
in general repair to the house, and, offering up a
prayer with the family, accompany the procession
to the place of interment; our practice, however,

246 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

in this respect is not uniform, but is regulated by
circumstances.

On reaching the burying-ground, we stand by
the side of the grave, which is usually about six
feet deep, and when the coffin is lowered down,
address the friends of the deceased, and the spec¬
tators, and conclude the service with a short
prayer.

At first they believed that the deceased must be
in some degree benefited by this service; and
that such should occasionally have been their
ideas, is not surprising, when we consider the
mass of delusion from which they had been so
recently delivered. This, however, rendered it
necessary for us to be more explicit in impressing
upon their minds, that the state of the dead was
unalterably fixed, and that our own benefit alone
could be advanced by attending it.—But the views
and ceremonies connected with death, and with
the disposal of the body, either in the pagan or
Christian manner, are unimportant in comparison
with the change in the individuals who have died,
and the views and anticipations which, under these
systems, different individuals have entertained.
6 ‘ One thing, of all I have read or heard,” said the
aged and venerable Matahira, “ now supports my
mind—Christ has said, £ I am the way.’ ”

a He the beloved Son,

The Son beloved, Jesus Christ,

The Father gave,

That we through him might live,”

was sung by another in the native language, with
the last breath she drew. “ I am happy, I am
happy,” were among the last words of the late
distinguished regent of the Sandwich Islands.

CHRISTIAN TRIUMPH.

247

These are expressions no pagan ever used, in look¬
ing forward to his dissolution. They result alone
from the effects which the mercy of God in Christ
is adapted to kindle in our hearts, augmented by
gratitude to Him who hath brought life and immor¬
tality to light.

248

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES

CHAP. IX.

Arrival of the deputation in Huahine—Death of Pomare—
Notice of his ancestry—Description of his person—His
mental character and habits—Perseverance and profi¬
ciency in writing—His letter to England, &c.—Fac¬
simile of his hand-writing—Translation of his letter on
the art of drawing—Estimation in which he was held
by the people—Pomare the first convert to Christianity—
His commendable endeavours to promote its extension
—Declension during the latter part of his life—His
friendship to the Missionaries uniform—His aid im¬
portant—Circumstances connected with his death—
Accession of his son Pomare III.—Coronation of the
infant king—Encouraging progress in learning—Early
death—Extensive use of letters among the islanders—
Writing on plantain-leaves—Value of writing-paper—
South Sea Academy—Trials peculiar to Mission families
among uncivilized nations—Advantages of sending
Missionary children to civilized countries.

Soon after our return from Tahiti, the indisposition
of Mr. and Mrs. Williams required a suspension of
their exertions in Raiatea, and a visit to New
South Wales.

On the 8th of December, 1821, the shout of
E pahi , e ! A ship, ho ! re-echoed through our
valley; we proceeded towards the beach, and, on
reaching the sea-side, beheld a large American
vessel already within the harbour. The captain
soon landed, and informed us that our friends
Messrs. Bennet and Tyerman were in the ship.

DEATH OF POM ARE.

249

We hastened on board, conducted them to the
shore, and welcomed them to our dwellings.
Mr. Bennet took up his abode with Mr. Barff,
while we were happy to accommodate Mr. Tyer-
man. The chiefs and people, who had been led
to expect a visit from our friends, greeted their
arrival with demonstations of joy; these friends
remained some time in Fare, and the period they
spent with us was one of unusual interest and
enjoyment.

In the close of this year, 1821, the Mission and
the nation experienced the heaviest bereavement
that had occurred since the introduction of Chris¬
tianity. This was the death of the king, Pomare II.
which took place on the seventh of December, the
day preceding the deputation’s arrival in Huahine.
His health had been for some time declining, but
his departure at last was sudden. I spent the
greater part of a Sabbath afternoon with him at
Eimeo, in the beginning of October. He was
then unable to leave the house, but was not con¬
sidered dangerously ill. I was then for some days
with him, and had not seen him since. He had
long been afflicted with the elephantiasis, a dis¬
order very prevalent among the people ; but the
principal cause of his dissolution was a dropsical
complaint, to which he had been for some time
subject.

The conspicuous station Pomare had occupied in
the political changes of Tahiti, since the arrival of
the Missionaries, the prominent part he had taken
in the abolition of idolatry, the zeal he had mani¬
fested in the establishment of Christianity, and
the assistance he had rendered to the Missionaries,
caused a considerable sensation to be experienced
among all classes by his death; and as his name

250 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

is perhaps more familiar to the English reader than
that of any other native of the South Sea Islands,
some account of his person and character cannot
fail to be acceptable.

Pomare, originally called Otoo, was the son of
Pomare and Idia : the father was sovereign of the
larger peninsula when it was visited by Cook,
and was then called Otoo; subsequently, being
aided by the mutineers of the Bounty, he became
king of the whole island, and adopted the name of
Pomare, which at his death was assumed by his
son, and has since been the hereditary name of the
reigning family. Idia, his mother, was a princess
of the adjacent island of Eimeo, and sister to Mo-
tuaro, one of the principal chiefs at the time of
Cook’s visit.

Pomare was the second son of Otoo and Idia,
the first having been destroyed according to the
regulations of the Areois society, of which they
were members. He was born about the year 1774,
and was consequently about forty-seven years of
age at the time of his decease. Tall, and propor-
tionably stout, but not corpulent, his person was
commanding, being upwards of six feet high.*
His head was generally bent forward, and he
seldom walked erect. His complexion was not
dark, but rather tawny; his countenance often
heavy, though his eyes at times beamed with
intelligence. The portrait of Pomare, in the
frontispiece to the first volume of this work, is
from one taken at Tahiti by an artist attached to
two Russian ships of discovery, that visited the
islands a short time before his death, and, ex¬
cepting a little undue prominency in the forehead,
is a good likeness.

* His fathers height was six feet four inches.

CHARACTER OF POM A RE.

2 51

His character was totally different from that of
his father—who was a man of enterprise, excessive
labour and perseverance, bent on the aggrandise¬
ment of his family, and the improvement of his
country, clearing waste tracts of land, planting
them, and generally occupying the people with
some public work. Pomare took no delight in
exertions of this kind; his habits of life were
indolent, his disposition sluggish, and his first
appearance was by no means adapted to produce
a favourable impression on a stranger's mind.
Captain Wilson conceived such an idea of his
stupidity and incapacity, as to suppose him the
last person on whom any favourable impression
would be made.

He was, however, though heavy in his appear¬
ance and indolent in his habits, inquisitive, atten¬
tive, and more thoughtful perhaps than any other
native of the islands;—a keen observer of every
thing that passed under his notice, although at the
time he would not appear to be paying particular
regard. He was not only curious and patient in
his inquiries, laborious in his researches, but often
exhibited a great degree of ingenuity. I have
sometimes been in his company, when he has
kept a party of chiefs in constant laughter, as
much from the coolness with which his expres¬
sions were uttered, as the humour they con¬
tained. He was not, however, fond of convi¬
viality or society, but appeared to be more at ease
when alone, or attended only by one or two
favourite chiefs.

In mental application, Pomare certainly ex¬
ceeded every other Tahitian; and, had he been
free from practices which so banefully retarded his
progress, and enjoyed the advantage of a regular

252

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

and liberal education, there is every reason to
believe the development and culture of his intellect
would have shewn that it was of no inferior order.

He had heard much, from the early visitors to
his island, of king George, and appeared, on more
than one occasion, desirous to make the British
sovereign his model. He was walking one day in
the district of Pare with great dignity, in the
company of the Missionaries, when he suddenly
stopped, and said, “ Does king George walk in
this way V’ As soon as he in any degree com¬
prehended the use of letters, he manifested a great
desire to be able to read and write, and was one of
the first pupils. Looking over the books of the
Missionaries one day, he saw a Hebrew bible : the
singularity of the letter attracted his attention;
and having been informed that it was the language
of the Jews, in which the greater part of the
scriptures was written, he expressed a wish that
one of the Missionaries would teach him to read it,
inquiring at the same time whether king George
understood Hebrew. In this he did not persevere,
but he soon made himself master of the English
alphabet, and could read in the English bible,
not with fluency, but so as to comprehend the
meaning of the plainest parts.

It was, however, in his native language that the
Tahitian ruler made the greatest progress, and in
writing this he excelled every other individual.
Mr. Nott and Mr. Davies were his principal in¬
structors ; the latter has spent many hours with
him, sitting on the ground, and teaching him to
form letters on the sand, probably before Dr. Bell’s
system was introduced to general notice in Eng¬
land. The hand-writing of Pomare, during the
latter part of his life, was much better than that of

CHARACTER OF POM A RE.

253

any of the Missionaries. His earliest letters or
notes, the first ever written by a native, were from
Eimeo. In 1805 he wrote a letter to the Mission¬
aries. In 1807 he wrote one to the Missionary
Society, which being 1 the first despatch ever for¬
warded by a native of those islands to Britain, is a
great curiosity.

The Directors had written, advising him to
banish the national idol, to attend to the instruc¬
tion of the Missionaries, and to discountenance
those sins which were so rapidly depopulating his
country. In reply, he wrote a letter in the native
language, which the Missionaries translated; he
then copied the translation, and both letters, signed
by his own hand, were forwarded to London. He
expresses a determination to banish Oro to Raiatea,
wishes the Directors success in their efforts to in¬
struct the people of Tahiti, which he calls a bad
land, a regardless land. He desires them to send
a number of men, women, and children, to Tahiti,
to send cloth, and then they will adopt the English
dress; but tells them, that, should he be killed,
they will have no friend in the islands.” “ Come
not here after I am dead/’ was his expression. He
also requested them to send him all the curious
things in England, especially those necessary for
writing, and, after enumerating pens, ink, &c.
concluded his request by stating, “ Let no writing
utensil be wanting.” He signed his name, “ Po¬
rn are, King of Tahiti,” &c. superscribed his letter
to “ My Friends the Missionary Society, London.”

Sedentary occupations and amusements appeared
more congenial to Pomare then active pursuits; he
found an agreeable occupation in braiding the
finest kinds of cinet with the fibre of the cocoa-nut
husk; writing, however, was his chief employment

254 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

and recreation. At first, he had a writing-house
erected, that he might follow his favourite pursuit,
uninterrupted by his domestics or the members of
his household ; he then had a table, but, during the
latter part of his life, he usually wrote lying in a
horizontal position, leaning his chest on a high
cushion, and having a desk before him.

Pomare kept a regular daily journal, and wrote
in a book provided for that purpose, every text of
scripture that he heard. Sometimes he wrote out
the prayers he used in social and private devotion;
maintained an extensive correspondence, after the
introduction of writing among the people; pre¬
pared the first code of laws for his kingdom ; tran¬
scribed them fairly with his own hand, and promul¬
gated them with his voice. He also rendered very
important aid to the Missionaries in the translation
of the scriptures, and copied out many portions
before they were printed.

The king was remarkably pleased with engrav¬
ings and paintings, and has often called at my
house to look at the plates in an Encyclopaedia,
frequently asking if I thought it possible for him
to learn to draw. I always told him it depended
on his own industry; that I had no doubt of his
capacity, if he would apply. In connexion with
these encouragements, I received from him the
accompanying note, soon after our settlement at
Afareaitu in 1817. I insert it as a specimen of his
hand-writing, although it is by no means so care¬
fully written as many of his letters, or his copy of
the laws, &c. It will also serve as a specimen of
the idiom of the language, as I have affixed a
literal translation. (See the Engraving.)

His policy as a ruler was deliberative and cau¬
tious, rather than prompt and decisive, and most

/

FAC-SIM I LE,

ERRED TO IN VOL. III. P. 2 !> 4 , OF POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

lzt-> v rfs

zzi, 0*' ezi-tstuo _ ^\&^L-cx*<^

trt, 4 . ‘/^' 2z<-ztsU' / ^ S^Ls -dlZtsuUAJ ■£, ,

yC/ 'tzi^t^'tt&t osZ<- ■£>

AS^COL^ 1 'Ttz-fo, ?im£s Yzk_j . z&mutA*

n^i&L, ezAA-> /^c^yiic<y a 7*c, 4 al^£&Cis

GUts>^ . '^ t SC^€z^' spfysLAs « . C<AK^£^> j£(' -^e. -4s^_^

C-

&C, Z-e*-*s. sj^izcc jr^y-r^ &~e, ^

'C'Zis yfs^e; S&z 'err

:* Z^C '/&t*XAtsyfr.

C£*stAs As,

Z*-^lAl&lAKs *~t/ ^ytOLs 7

fi sS Z?ST''t&Cs7~AL-* -

TRANSLATION.

Dear Friend,

May you and your family be saved by Jesus Christ, the true Saviour. This is my
speech to you, my friend, that you draw (or write) the likeness of a tree, and a bird, and a
house, and send them down here, that I may see them; they will not be known by me, if I
look carelessly at them. I desire to learn that custom or art, that I may know it: perhaps,
I shall not know it much; I may know it a little. Write also to me, and make known to
me your wishes. May you be saved by Jesus Christ,

POMARE.

CHARACTER OF POM ARE. 2 55

of his measures were pursued more with a view to
their ulterior influence, than to their immediate
effect. His views were in many respects con¬
tracted, and he was easily imposed upon by
bold and heedless advisers. He was more ra¬
pacious than tyrannical, and probably would
not have been so rigid in his actions, but for the
influence of those constantly around him, who often
availed themselves of his authority and influence
to advance their own unjust and oppressive pro¬
ceedings. Though destitute of many essentials in
a great prince, the Tahitian ruler was universally
respected. He was beloved by his own family, and
by many of the chiefs, who were under great obliga¬
tions to him, but I do not think he was beloved by
the nation at large. It was rather a respectful
fear than a fond attachment, that was generally
entertained for him. He was exceedingly jealous
of any interference with his prerogative or his in¬
terest, and was frequently attended by a number
of the Paumotuans, or natives of the Palliser
Islands, as a kind of body guard. These were
considered as in some degree foreigners ; and their
selection by the king, as the protectors of his per¬
son, caused dissatisfaction in the minds of several
of the chiefs.

Pomare was not only the first pupil whom the
Missionaries taught to read and write, but he was
also the first convert to Christianity in the island
of which he was king. He made a profession of
belief in the true God, and the only Saviour, in
1812; and there is every reason to believe that,
according to the knowledge he had of Christianity,
and the duties it enjoined, he was sincere. He
bore the persecution and ridicule to which he was
exposed, on this account, with firmness and tern-

256 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

per, mildly entreating those who reviled him, to
examine for themselves.

In the year 1813 he proposed to Tamatoa, the
king of Raiatea, and Mahine the king of Huahine,
to renounce idolatry. They determinately refused;
but he still continued firm in his own principles,
and persevering in all his endeavours to influence
other chiefs in favour of Christianity. It was in
consequence of his recommendation, that Taaroarii,
the son of the king of Huahine, prohibited the
abominations of the Areois, and sent for a preacher
to teach him the word of God. Pomare continued
the steady disciple of the Missionaries for several
years, using all his influence in persuading the
people to renounce their dependence on the idols,
and to hear about the true God. His conduct in
this respect was most commendable, for I never
heard that he had recourse to any other means
than persuasion, or that he ever held out any other
inducements than those which the scriptures pre¬
sent. He had no honours or emoluments to be¬
stow, for he was at that time in exile; and the
constant reproach of his family and adherents was,
that his ruin was inevitable, as he had, by re¬
nouncing the national worship, made the gods his
enemies.

The conduct of the king in the battle of Atehuru,
his treatment of the captives, and his clemency
towards the vanquished, have been already de¬
tailed, as well as his journeys for the purpose of
inducing the people to embrace Christianity. His
baptism, and his promulgation of the laws by which
the islands of Tahiti and Eimeo are now governed,
have been also given.

During the latter part of his life, his conduct
was in many respects exceptionable, and his

CHARACTER OF POMARE.

257

character appeared less amiable than it had been
before. He had shewn his weakness in allowing
the unfounded representations of a transient visiter
to induce him to request that the manufacture of
sugar might not be extensively carried on under
the management of Mr. Gyles. He was also, as
might have been expected, from the circumstance
of his having been the high-priest of the nation
under the system of false religion, and having been
identified with all the religious observances of the
people, too fond of regulating matters purely con¬
nected with public worship or ecclesiastical disci¬
pline ; and, although the Missionaries deemed it
right respectfully to inform him that here the direc¬
tions of scripture were sufficient and supreme, and
could not with safety or propriety be altered in sub¬
serviency to any measures of political expediency,
they uniformly supported his authority, endea¬
voured to strengthen his influence, and increase
his resources, as the rightful sovereign of the
people.

A few years before his death he was induced, by
the representations of designing and misinformed
individuals to engage in injudicious commercial
speculations, with persons in New South Wales.
This proved a great source of disquietude to his
mind, and probably hastened his death. One or
two vessels were purchased for him at a most ex¬
travagant price; and the produce of the island was
required to pay for them, and to defray expenses
connected with their navigation. One of them was
seized, a law-suit instituted in consequence at Port
Jackson, the rahui or tabu laid upon the island,
the rights of property were invaded, and no native
was allowed to dispose of any other article of pro¬
duce, excepting to the agents of the king. He

in. s

258 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

became the chief factor in the island, or rather the
instrument of those who were associated with him
in these commercial speculations, and who used
his authority to deprive the people of the right to
sell the fruits of their own labour. The inhabitants
were required to bring their pigs, oil, &c. and to
receive in return what he chose to give them : the
individuals who urged upon him this policy con¬
sidered all they could obtain by any means as fair
emolument. The welfare of the nation, the natural
rights of the people, the establishment of com¬
merce upon just and honourable principles, were
beneath their regard. It is needless to add,
that these speculations ended in embarrassment
and loss.

The habits of intemperance which Pomare was
led to indulge, in consequence of these associa¬
tions, threw a stain upon his character, and cast
a gloom over his mind, from which he never
recovered, and under the cloud thus induced he
ended his days.

He was also reported to be addicted to other
and more debasing vices, but I have no wish to ex¬
hibit the dark features of his character—truth and
impartiality require what has been said—and it
is with far greater pleasure that we contemplate
his uniform kindness to the Missionaries, and
steady patronage, especially in their seasons of
greatest extremity, when civil wars forced them to
abandon their home, and seek safety in flight.
His unwavering adherence to the profession of
Christianity, amidst the greatest reproach, and his
valuable aid in its introduction, were highly ser¬
viceable to the nation. Without presuming to
pronounce an opinion on his final state, he cer¬
tainly was employed by God (who selects his

CHARACTER OE POM A RE.

259

agents from whatever station he chooses, and
uses them just so long as he sees fit,) as a
principal instrument in subverting idol-worship,
introducing Christianity, and establishing a code
of laws founded on the principles of true religion ;
he is therefore to be considered, if not a father,
undoubtedly as a benefactor to his country. Po-
mare was not averse to religious conversation and
devotional engagements ; we conversed very freely
together the last time I saw him, which was about
two months before his death. He expressed his
apprehensions of the increase of his disorder, but
did not think it likely to prove fatal; he was
shortly afterwards removed to Tahiti, where he
died. During his illness, he was attended by
Mr. Crook, who reminded him, in their last con¬
versation, of the number and magnitude of his
sins, and directed him to Jesus Christ, who
alone could save his soul: all the reply he made
was, “ Jesus Christ alone,” and in about an hour
afterwards expired.

The lamentations of his friends, and of the
people around, were great; a new tomb was
erected for his remains, near the large chapel he
had built at Papaoa. Messrs. Nott, Davies, and
Henry, the senior Missionaries in the island, per¬
formed the religious services at his funeral, which
was attended by all the Missionaries, and mul¬
titudes of the people. Mr. Nott, who had been in
habits of closest intimacy with him, and had better
opportunities of understanding his character than
others, deeply regretted his departure. No one
felt the loss of his assistance more than Mr. Nott,
who was principally employed in translations of
the scripture. For this department Pomare was
well qualified, and always ready to render the

260 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

most important services. He was well acquainted
with the language, usages, and ancient institutions
of the people, and his corrections were usually
made with judgment and care. The compilation
of a dictionary of the Tahitian language, would, if
completed, have been invaluable; but he had
scarcely commenced it systematically, when death
arrested his progress, even in the prime of life.

Pomare was succeeded in the government by his
son, who being proclaimed king immediately after
his father’s death, was crowned, under the title of
Pomare III. on the 21st of April, 1824.

In order that the ceremonies, on« this occa¬
sion, might be performed in the presence of the
inhabitants, the greater part of whom were ex¬
pected to attend, a stone platform was raised,
nearly sixty feet square, upon which another
smaller platform was erected, where the coronation
was to take place.

When the order of the procession was arranged,
it advanced towards the place, preceded by two
native girls, who strewed the path with flowers.
Mahine, the chief of Huahine, and nominally one
of the judges of Tahiti, carried a large Bible, and
was attended by the deputation from the Mission¬
ary Society, who were then at Tahiti, and Messrs.
Nott and Henry ; the rest of the Missionaries fol¬
lowed. Then came the supreme judges, three
abreast; Utami, the chief of Atehuru, bearing a
copy of the Tahitian code of laws. Three other
judges followed; and Tati, the chief of Papara,
walking in the centre, carried the crown. The
young king, seated on a chair, was next borne in
the procession by four young chieftains, an equal
number of chiefs’ sons supporting the canopy over
his head; his mother and his sister walking on

CORONATION OF POM ARE III. 261

one side, and his aunts on the other. His brother-
in-law walked immediately behind, and was fol¬
lowed by Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and the
members of the royal family. The governors, judges
of districts, and magistrates, walking four abreast,
closed the procession.

When they reached the place of coronation, the
king was seated in his chair; in the centre before
him, on small tables, the crown, the Bible, and
the code of laws, were placed. Those who were
to take part in the transactions of the day were
seated around and behind the king.

The youthful Pomare, being only four years of
age, was necessarily passive in the important
business. Mr. Davies, one of the senior Mission®
aries, spoke for him ; and as all were requested to
take a part in the ceremonies, when the king had
been asked if he promised to govern the people
with justice and mercy, agreeably to the laws and
the word of God, Mr. Nott placed the crown on
his head, and pronounced a benediction upon the
young ruler; Mr. Darling then presented him with
a Bible, accompanying the presentation with a
suitable address.

As soon as the coronation ceremony was closed,
a herald proclaimed pardon to all who were under
the sentence of the law. Every exile was directed
to return, and all were exhorted to become good
members of society. The assembly afterwards
repaired to the Royal Mission Chapel, where
Divine service was performed, and thus the first
Christian coronation in the South Sea Islands
closed.

The kings of Tahiti were not formerly invested
with any regal dignity by receiving a crown, but
by being girded with the maro ura P or sacred

262 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

girdle, of which ceremony an account has been
already given. On that occasion they bathed the
king in the sea, before girding him with the sacred
maro. On the present occasion they anointed his
person with oil; a part of the ceremony which, I
think, might have been as well dispensed with.

Shortly after his coronation, young Pomare III.
was placed at the South Sea Academy, in Eimeo,
under the care of Mr. and Mrs. Orsmond, for
the purpose of receiving, with the children of
the Missionaries, a systematic English educa¬
tion. His disposition was affectionate, his pro¬
gress encouraging, and he promised fair to gain
a correct acquaintance with the English lan¬
guage, which, had he lived, by giving him the
key to all the stores of knowledge contained in
it, w r ould have conferred on him a commanding
influence among the people over whom the provi¬
dence of God had made him king. So far as his
faculties were developed, they were not inferior to
those of European children at the same age; but he
was soon removed by death.

Being attacked with a complaint that passed
through the islands about the middle of December,
1826, he was immediately conveyed to his mother's
residence in Pare, where he lingered till the
eleventh of January, 1827, when he died in
Mr. Orsmond's arms. His mother and other
friends standing by, when they saw him actually
in the agonies of death, were so affected that they
could not bear to look upon his struggles, but cast
a cloth over Mr. Orsmond and the dying child he
held in his arms; they removed it in a few minutes,
and found his spirit had fled.

He was Pomare’s only son, and the sole child of
his surviving widow. A daughter of Pomare IL

WRITING GENERALLY ACQUIRED. 263

by a second wife, whose name is Aimata, and who
is about sixteen years of age, being his only sur¬
viving child, has succeeded to the government:
she was married some years ago to a young chief
of Tahaa, to whom her father had given his own
name, so that Pomare is still the regal name.
Her character, perhaps, is yet scarcely formed,
and we can only hope she will prove a blessing to
the nation.

Although Pomare II. was the first pupil whom
the Missionaries taught to write, and who excelled
all others, his example induced many to make an
attempt, while his success encouraged them to
proceed; and it is probable, that as great a pro¬
portion of the population of the Georgian and
Society Islands can now write, as would be found
capable of doing so in many portions of the
United Kingdom. Some progress had been made,
by several of the most intelligent of the converts,
before the abolition of idolatry in 1815, but it is
only since that period that writing has become
general.

Various methods of instruction have been adopt¬
ed ; some of the natives have been taught altoge¬
ther by writing on the sea-beach, or on sand in
the schools; others have learned to write on the
broad smooth leaves of the plantain-tree, using a
bluntly pointed stick, instead of a pen or pencil.
The delicate fibres of the leaf, being bruised by the
pen, become brown, while the other parts remain
green. If it was necessary to read it immediately
after being written: when held up to the light, the
letters were easily distinguished. These plantain-
leaf letters answer very well for short notes to pass
among the natives themselves, but are liable to in¬
jury if conveyed to any great distance, or kept any

254 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

length of time. They are always rolled up like a
sheet of parchment, and have a remarkably rustic
appearance, being usually fastened with a piece of
bark, tied round the roll, the length of which being
formed by the breadth of the leaf, is about twelve
or fifteen inches. 1 have often seen the chief’s
messenger hastening along the road with two or
three plantain-leaf rolls under his arm, or in his
hand, containing the despatches of which he was
the bearer.

Some of the chiefs learned to write on a slate,
but these have always been articles too scarce
and valuable for common use; they were very
highly prized, and preserved with care. The
greatest favour a chief could shew his son,
has sometimes been to allow him to practise
on his slate. We have often regretted that the
supply was not more abundant, and though several
hundreds of the thick slates, without frames, such
as are used in the national schools, have been sent
out by the Society, and others by the liberality of
friends, they have not been sufficient to supply the
different schools; so that many of the natives,
who desire to possess them as their own, are still
destitute. Framed slates are sometimes taken by
traders, as articles of barter; but they are so liable
to break, that the people greatly prefer the kind
above alluded to.

A copy-book has never been used for the pur¬
pose of learning to write ; paper has always been
too scarce and valuable amongst them, to admit
of such an appropriation. And a copy-book,
although highly prized, is used rather as a jour¬
nal, common-place book, or depository of some¬
thing more valuable than mere copies. Writing
paper is still a very valuable article, and proves

D ESI IIE TO It W R1TIN G -PAPER. 265

one of the most acceptable presents that can be
sent them.

I have often been amused on beholding a native,
who had several letters to write, sitting down to
look over his paper, and finding perhaps that he
possessed but one sheet, has been obliged to cut it
into three, four, or five pieces, and regulate the size
of his letter, not by the quantity of information he
had to communicate, but by the extent of the paper
he had to fill. I have recently received upwards
of twenty letters from the natives, some of them,
although they were to travel fifteen thousand
miles, written on very small scraps of paper, and
that often of an inferior kind: part of the small
space for writing being occupied by apologies for
the small paper, and urgent requests, that, if I do
not return soon, I will send them some paper; and
that, if I return, I will take them a supply.

The art of writing is of the greatest service to
the people in their commercial, civil, and domestic
transactions, as well as in the pursuit of know¬
ledge. They are not so far advanced in civiliza¬
tion as to have a regular post; but a native seldom
makes a journey across the island, and scarcely a
canoe passes from one island to another, without
conveying a number of letters. Writing is an art
perfectly congenial with the habits of the people,
and hence they have acquired it with uncommon
facility ; not only have the children readily
learned,but many adults, who never took pen or
pencil in their hands until they were thirty or even
forty years of age, hgve by patient perseverance
learned, in the space of twelve months or two
years, to write a fair and legible hand. Their
comparatively small alphabet, and the simple
structure of their language, has probably been

266 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

advantageous ; their letters are bold and well form¬
ed, and their ideas are always expressed with
perspicuity, precision, and simplicity.*

The South Sea Academy, in which the young
king was a pupil, is an important institution, in.
connexion with the Missionary establishments in
this part of Polynesia. It had long been required
by the circumstances of the European families, and
the peculiar state of Tahitian society; and the
establishment of the Academy was designed to
meet their peculiar necessities in this respect.

There are many trials and privations inseparable
from the situation of a Christian Missionary among
a heathen people. The latent enmity of the mind
familiar with vice, to the moral influence of the
gospel; the prejudices against his message, the
infatuation of the pagan in favour of idolatry, and
the pollutions connected therewith—originate trials
common to every Missionary; but there are others
peculiar to particular spheres of labour. The
situation of a European in India, where, although
surrounded by pagans, he yet can mingle with
civilized and occasionally with Christian society, is
very different from that of one pursuing his solitary
labours, year after year, in the deserts of Africa, or
the isolated islands of the South Sea, where five
years have sometimes elapsed without hearing from
England, where there is but one European family in
many of the islands, and where I have been twelve
or fifteen months without seeing a ship, or hearing a

* Writing apparatus and materials of every kind are in
great demand among them ; most of the letters I have re¬
ceived contain a request that, if possible, I will send them
out a writing-desk, or an inkstand, penknife, pens, a blank
paper book,&c. The widow of Taaroarii, in her last letter,
solicited me to bring her a writing-desk.

ANXIETY OF MISSIONARY PARENTS. 267

word of the English language, excepting what has
been spoken by our own families.

There are disadvantages, even where the Mis¬
sionary is in what is called civilized society, but
they are of a different kind from those experienced
from a residence among a rude uncultivated race.
In either barbarous or civilized countries, the great¬
est trials the Missionaries experience are those
connected with the bringing up of a family in the
midst of a heathen population; and it probably
causes more anxious days, and sleepless nights,
than any other source of distress to which they are
exposed. This was the case in the South Sea
Mission. There were at one time nearly sixty
children or orphans of Missionaries; and there
are now, perhaps, forty rising up in the different
islands, under circumstances adapted to produce
in their parents’ minds the most painful anxiety.

In the Sandwich Islands, during our residence
there, although our hearts were cheered, and our
hands strengthened, by the great change daily
advancing among the people, yet the situation of
our children was such as constantly to excite the
most intense and painful interest. It is impossible
for an individual, who has never mingled in pagan
society, and who does not understand the language
employed in their most familiar intercourse with
each other, to form any adequate idea of the
awfully polluting character of their most common
communications. Their appearance is often such
as the eye, accustomed only to scenes of civilized
life, turns away in pain from beholding. Their
actions are often most repulsive, and their language
is still worse. Ideas are exchanged, with painful
insensibility, which cannot be repeated, and whose
most rapid passage through the mind must leave

268 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

pollution. So strongly did we feel this in the
Sandwich Islands, that the only play-ground to
which our children were allowed access, was en¬
closed with a high fence; and the room they
occupied was one, strictly interdicted to the na¬
tives, who were in the habit of coming to our
dwelling.

We always sought to inspire the natives with
confidence, and admit them to our houses, but
when any of the chiefs came, they were attended
by a large train of followers, whose con versation with
onr own servants we could not restrain, but which
we should have trembled at the thought that our
children heard. The disadvantages under which they
must have laboured, are too apparent to need enu¬
meration. Idolatry had indeed been renounced
by the natives, but, during the earlier part of the
time we spent there, nothing better had been
substituted in its place, and the great mass of the
people were living without any moral or religious
restraint.

Our companions, the American Missionaries, felt
deeply and tenderly, on account of the circumstances
of their rising families, and made very full repre¬
sentations to their patrons; they have also sent
some of their children to their friends in their native
country. The children of the Missionaries in the
South Sea Islands were not in a situation exactly
similar to those in the northern islands. The moral
and religious change that has taken place since
the subversion of idolatry, had very materially
improved the condition of the people, and elevated
the tone of moral feeling among them ; still it
must be remembered, that though many are under
the controlling influence of Christian principle and
moral purity, these are not the majority, and there

SOUTH SEA ACADEMY.

269

is not yet among them that fine sense of decency,
which is so powerful a safeguard to virtue ; and,
besides this, the circumstances of the families are
far from being the most pleasing.

In only two of the islands is there more than
one Missionary; and only at the Academy, where
Mr. Blossom is associated with Mr. Orsmond, is
there more than one family at a station. The duties
of each settlement, from the partially organized state
of society, and the multitude of objects demanding
his attention, are such, that the Missionary cannot
devote the necessary time to the education of his
own children, without neglecting public duties;
hence he experiences a constant and painful
struggle between the dictates of parental affection
and the claims of pastoral care. To afford relief,
as far as possible, from this embarrassment,
the South Sea Academy was established by the
deputation from the Society, and the Missionaries
in the islands, in March, 1824.

In compliance with the earnest recommendation
of the deputation, and the solicitation of his
brethren, Mr. Orsmond removed from Borabora,
to take charge of the institution, over which he
has continued to preside, to the satisfaction of the
parents, and the benefit of the pupils. The first
annual meeting was held in March, 1825 ; the
children had not only been taught to read the
scriptures, and to commit the most approved cate¬
chisms to memory, but had also been instructed
in writing, grammar, history, &c. During the
examination, portions of scripture were read and
recited, copy-books examined, problems in geo¬
metry worked, and parts of catechisms on geogra¬
phy, astronomy, and chronology, repeated. The
whole of the proceedings gave satisfaction to all

^70 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

present, and left an impression on each mind, that
great attention must have been paid by Mr. and
Mrs. Orsmond to the pupils, during the short
period they had been in the school. Subsequent
examinations have been equally satisfactory.

The institution is under the management of a
committee, and its primary design was to furnish a
suitable, and, so far as circumstances would admit,
a liberal education to the children of the Mission¬
aries, “ such an education as is calculated to pre¬
pare them to fill useful situations in future life.”
Native children of piety and talent have access to
its advantages, and it is designed as preparatory to
a seminary, for training native pastors to fill dif¬
ferent stations in the South Sea Islands. It is an
important institution, and will, it is hoped, exert no
ordinary influence on the future character of the
nation at large, as well as prove highly advan¬
tageous to the individuals who become its inmates.
It merits the countenance of the friends of Mis¬
sions. Several individuals have kindly enriched
its library with suitable elementary books, philo¬
sophical apparatus, &c. but these are still very in¬
adequate to the accomplishment of the design con¬
templated.

But while the establishment of this institution is
a just occasion of gratitude to the Missionaries,
it does not remove anxiety from their minds
with regard to .the future prospects of their
families. The nature of their station, and the
spirit and principles of their office as ministers of
Christ, prevent the parents from making any pro¬
vision for their families. The proper settlement
of their children is an object of most anxious soli¬
citude to Christian parents at home—to foreign
Missionaries it is peculiarly so. Their remote and

CHILDREN OF MISSIONARIES. 271

isolated situation precludes their embracing those
openings in Divine Providence for placing their
children in suitable circumstances, of which they
might avail themselves in Christian and civilized
society. The prospects of filling comfortable sta¬
tions there, are all uncertain; professions there
are none; commerce is in its infancy, as will
appear from the fact of its being still carried on by
exchange or barter. The circulation of money is
very limited, and its use known to but few.

The fondest hope of every Missionary is, that
his children may grow up in the fear of God, be
made partakers of his grace, and, under the con¬
straining influence of the love of Christ in their
hearts, imbibe their parent’s spirit, select his
office, spend their lives in supplying his lack of ser¬
vice, and carrying on that work which he has been
honoured to commence. In prosecuting this, they
will have advantages their parents never possessed;
they will have been identified with the people
among whom they labour, and will not appear in
language and idiom as foreigners; but they will
labour under more than counteracting disadvan¬
tages, if they never visit the land of their fathers,
and must necessarily be far less efficient teachers
of the truths of Christianity than their predecessors
in the work.

There are a thousand things known to an indi¬
dual who has received or finished his education
and passed his early days in England, which can
only be known under corresponding circumstances,
and which a Missionary can never, in such situa¬
tions as the South Sea Islands, teach his child.
Those born there may indeed have access to
English literature; but many books, however
familiar and perspicuous to an ordinary English

272 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

reader, will, in many perhaps important parts,
appear enigmatical to those who have never
seen any other society than such as that now
under consideration. It has always appeared
to me, in reference to an uncivilized, illiterate
people, who are to be raised from ignorance, bar¬
barism, and idolatry, to a state of intelligence,
enjoyment, and piety—where their character,
habits, taste, and opinions, have to be formed
principally, if not entirely, by the Missionary-—
that for some generations, at least, every Mission¬
ary’s child, trained for the Missionary work even
by a father’s hand, and blessed with the grace of
God, ought to finish his education in the land of
his parents, prior to entering upon the work to
which his life is devoted.

Many a Missionary spends the greater part of
his life without being able to produce any powerful
or favourable impression upon the people among
whom he has laboured; others expire in a field,
on which they have bestowed fervent prayer, tears,
and toil, but from which no fruit has been ga¬
thered ; the second generation have to commence
their labours under circumstances corresponding
with those under which their predecessors began.
When success attends their efforts, and a change
takes place decisive and extensive as that which
has occurred in the South Sea Islands; yet so
mighty is the work, so deep the prejudices, so
difficult to be overcome are evil habits, and so
slow the process of improvement upon a broad
scale, even under the most favourable circum¬
stances, that the ordinary period of a Missionary’s
life in actual service, is too short to raise them from
their wretchedness, to a standard in morals, habits,
intelligence, and stability in religion, at which

CHILDREN OF MISSIONARIES. 273

those who were instrumental in originating their
emancipation, would desire to leave them. They
never can be expected to advance beyond those
who are their models, their preceptors, and their
guides ; and if the successors of the first Mission¬
aries be in any respect inferior to their predecessors,
the progress of the nation must, in regard to im¬
provement, be retrograde—unless this deficiency
be supplied from some other source.

On this account, it does appear exceedingly de¬
sirable that the successors to the first Missionaries
among an uncivilized people, who may even
renounce idolatry, should be in every respect
equally qualified for this office with those by
whom they were preceded, and that even the chil¬
dren of the Missionaries should be able to carry on,
to a greater degree of perfection, that work which
their parents were privileged to commence.

I am aware that the expense attending a mea¬
sure of this kind will probably prevent its adoption
in those Institutions by whom the first Missionaries
are sent out; but this does not render the measure
less desirable or important in its immediate or
remote and permanent influence upon the con¬
verted nations. The same difficulties occur with
regard to the promotion of civilization, and the
culture of the mechanic arts, among the barbarous
nations. The primary design of all Missionary
contributions is the communication of Christianity
to the heathen; and it is to be regretted that the
smallest portion of the pecuniary means furnished
by Christian liberality for this purpose, should be
appropriated to any other purpose than the direct
promulgation of the gospel.

The difficulties already alluded to, connected
with the Missionary stations, are not the only ones

III. T

274 I0IYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

that exist. They would operate powerfully, sup¬
posing the children were all that the parents could
w r ish ; supposing they were qualified by talent,
disposed by deliberate choice, and prepared by
Divine grace, for the work of Christian Mission¬
aries ; but these indispensable requisites, it is
unnecessary to remark, a parent, with all his soli¬
citude and care, cannot always secure. God
rnay see fit to withhold those decisive evidences
of genuine piety, without which the fondest
parent would tremble at the idea of introducing
even his own child into the sacred office of an
evangelist. How r ever Missionary pursuits may
have been accounted the honour, or have proved
the happiness, of the parent, the child, as he growls
up, may not even possess a desire to engage in the
same: that desire the parent cannot give ; and,
without it, it would, from every consideration, be
both cruel and injurious to urge it.

The alternative is most distressing to contem¬
plate. There are at present no situations of com¬
fort to fill, no trade or business that can be fol¬
lowed. Productive plantations, regular labour,
mercantile establishments, warehouses, and shops,
it is to be expected, will ultimately exist and
flourish in these islands, but they cannot be looked
for in the short period of fifteen years from the
time when the people emerged from gross igno¬
rance, inveterate vice, and the most enervating
and dissipating idleness. The circumstances of
the female branches of the Mission families are,
perhaps, still more discouraging.

I have extended these remarks much beyond
what I intended, when speaking of the South Sea
Academy; and although they may be less inte¬
resting to the general reader than other mat-

CHILDREN OF MISSIONARIES. 275

ters, they will serve to shew what are some of
the trials of a Missionary life among an uncivi¬
lized people. They may also, not only awaken
the sympathies of the friends of Missionaries, but
lead to such a consideration of the subject, as may
result in the suggestion or application of a remedy,
which, if it shall not altogether remove them, will,
at least, alleviate their pressure; which is, perhaps,
felt more heavily by the present generation, than it
will be by their successors.

t 2

276

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

CHAP. X;- :

Voyage to Borabora—Appearance of the Settlement-
Description of the island — Geology—Opening of
the new place of worship—Visit of the Dauntless—
Arrival of the Mermaid—Designation of native Mis¬
sionaries—Voyage to the Sandwich Islands—Interview
between the prince of Tahaa and the princess of Tahiti
—Marriage of Pomare and Aimata—Dress of the parties
and appearance of the attendants—Christian marriage
— Advantageous results — Female occupations — Em¬
barkation for England—Visit to Fare—Improvement of
the settlement—Visit to Rurutu and Raivavai—Final
departure from the South Sea Islands.

Mr. Orsmond, who removed to Raiatea in tl e
close of the year 1818, was accompanied by
Mrs. Orsmond, who, in the communication of
useful instruction to her own sex, and in every
other department of female Missionary labour, was
indefatigable, until her decease, which took place
very soon after her removal from Huahine.

In November 1820, nearly two years after this,
Mr. Orsmond, in compliance with the urgent
request of the chiefs and people, removed to the
island of Borabora, where he established a mission,
and continued his valuable labours till required,
by the united voice of the Missionaries, in the
Windward and Leeward Islands to take charge
of the Academy founded at Eimeo in 1824

EMBARKATION FOR BORABORA. 277

During the year 1821, the inhabitants of Borabora
erected a substantial place of worship ; and in the
beginning of 1822, according to a previous en¬
gagement with Mr. Orsmond, I visited the island,
for the purpose of preaching at the opening of the
new Chapel. Indisposition detained Mr. Bennet
at Hualiine, but the late Rev. D. Tyerman, his
colleague, kindly accompanied me.

On the 24th of January we repaired to the
beach soon after ten, but heavy rains detained us
until nearly two, when we embarked for Raiatea.
The afternoon was calm, but about sun-set a light
breeze came from the south-west. It soon, how¬
ever died away, while a heavy swell running in
a north-easterly direction, continuing, not only
rendered rowing more laborious, but materially
impeded our progress. Boon after ten at night
we entered within the reefs at Tipaemau, having
rowed nearly thirty miles. Landing at Avera, the
shore opposite the opening, our people climbed
some cocoa-nut trees, and, having taken refresh¬
ment, we held on our way within the reefs. The
land-breeze gently filling our sails, Mr. Tyerman
and myself fell asleep in the boat: and I suppose
several of the people did the same, for soon after
midnight we were awoke by the boat's being
aground near the Avapiti. It was soon pushed
into deeper water; and as the wind was light, the
oars were manned, and, about an hour before day¬
break, we landed at the settlement, and entered
Mr. Threlkeld's house, the doors of which were
unfastened. We were shortly afterwards wel¬
comed by our friends, who prepared us an early
breakfast, by no means unacceptable, as we had
taken no refreshment since leaving Huahine on
ihe preceding day. Here we spent the Sabbath,

278

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

pleased with the numbers and attention of the
assemblies for worship. At the close of the native
services, Mr. Tyerman preached in English, after
which we spent a pleasant evening with the Mis¬
sionaries and people.

On the following day we sailed for Borabora,
accompanied by Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and
Faariri, one of the principal chiefs. Two ships
were sailing in the straits between Tahaa and
Raiatea, and appeared bound to the former. At
five in the afternoon we saw the settlement at
Borabora; but the entrance to the harbour is so
circuitous, that it was sunset before we reached the
shore. At the extremity of a pier built in the sea,
to the edge of the deep water, we were met by
Mr. Orsmond, who cordially welcoming our arrival,
led the way to his own dwelling. The sides of the
road along which we passed, was thronged with
healthy-looking children, whom curiosity had
brought to gaze at the strangers.

On the following day we viewed the settlement,
to which the people had given the appellation of
Beulah, gratified no less with the reception we
experienced, than with the evident improvement
among the inhabitants. The school was regularly
attended, and many were well informed in the
great truths of revelation ; the observance of the
Sabbath, we learned, was strictly regarded. There
was a road about eight feet wide, extending nearly
a mile and a half; four or five neat plastered
houses were finished, others were in progress.
Three causeways, upwards of six feet wide, and
elevated two or three feet above the water, ex¬
tended about three hundred and sixty feet into the
sea, and united at the extremity. The chapel,
which was one of the best that had been erected in

"NEW CHAPEL.

279

the islands, was part of a large building one hun¬
dred and sixty feet by forty-eight, comprising a
place of worship, school, and court-house.

On the 1st of February, the chapel, which is
capable of holding 1,100 persons, was opened for
public worship. The floor was elevated at the
extremities of the building. The pulpit was sup¬
ported by a single pillar, and approached by a
winding staircase of neat workmanship. About
ten in the forenoon we repaired to the chapel,
which we were pleased to see nearly filled with
a decently clothed native congregation. After I
had finished the sermon, Mr. Tyerman addressed
the people, Mr. Orsmond interpreted his address,
and concluded the services with prayer. In the
afternoon a discourse on the advantages of affec¬
tion and harmony was preached by Mr. Orsmond ;
and a sermon in English by Mr. Tyerman, in the
evening, terminated the interesting engagements of
the day. On the 3d, which was the Sabbath, I
preached in the new chapel at sunrise. In the
forenoon Mr. Orsmond preached to a numerous
audience. Mr. Tyerman and myself afterwards
united with the little church, consisting of fifteen
members, in partaking of the sacrament comme¬
morative of the Saviour’s death.

Violent and contrary winds detained us some
time in the pleasant settlement at the head ofVaitape
bay, on the west side of the island, which is situated
in 16° 32' S. Lat. and nearly 152° W. Long. Bo-
rabora, as well as the other islands of the group,
is surrounded by a reef rising to the water’s edge,
at unequal distances from the shore. On this reef
there are three low coral islands covered with trees
and verdure, equal to that which adorns those
around Raiatea and Tahaa. There are also four

280 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

other islands separated from the main land, which
is about sixteen miles in circumference. These
islands, like Papeorea in Huahine, are not of coral
formation, but resemble in structure the promon¬
tories on the adjacent shore. Tobua, the prin¬
cipal, forming the south or west side of Vaitape
bay, is not less than three or four hundred feet
above the sea.

In the geology of Borabora, the only peculiarity
is the existence of a species of feldspar and
quartz, but the appearance and shape of the island
is singular and imposing. The high land in the
interior is not broken into a number of small
mountain ridges, but, uniting in one stupendous
mass, rears its magnificent form, which resembles
a double-peaked mountain, to an elevation perhaps
little below 3000 feet above the water. The lower
hills and small islands are not seen at a distance,
so that when viewed from the sea or the other
islands, especially Huahine, (from the north and
western parts of which it is generally visible,) it
appears like a solitary gigantic obelisk or pyramid
rising from the ocean and reaching to the clouds.

The settlement at the head of Vaitape bay com¬
mands a view of every diversity in scenery. The
lofty interior mountain clothed with verdure, and
the deep glens that indent its sides, stand in
pleasing contrast with the hilly or coralline islands
that appear in the west, while the uniformity and
nakedness of the distant horizon is broken by the
appearance of the conical or circular summits of the
mountains of Maupiti or Maurua, upwards of thirty
miles distant. This island was frequently visible
from Borabora, during our visit at this time.

Maupiti is but circumscribed in extent, and its
mountains are less broken and romantic than those

VISIT OF THE DAUNTLESS. 281

of others in the group; it has, however, some
peculiarities. It is the only place in the Georgian
or Society Islands, in which rocks of apparently
primitive formation are found.

After remaining some time at Borabaro, we took
leave of our friends, and sailed for Huahine.

On our way we touched at Raiatea, and were
gratified with the prosperous appearance of the
station. It was then at Vaoaara, but since that
period Mr. Williams, the only remaining Mission¬
ary, has removed to Utumaoro, a fine extensive
district near the northern extremity of the island,
and adjacent to the opening in the reef called the
Avapiti, or double entrance. This station was
commenced in 1823 ; and, in consequence of the
extent of land by which it is surrounded, and the
proximity of the harbour, has been found much
more convenient than that formerly occupied.
The only inconvenience is that which arises from
the lowness, and consequent moisture, of the soil.
The improvement has been rapid, and the trans¬
formation so astonishing, that in a short period,
three hundred enclosures for the culture of sugar,
coffee, and tobacco, with other kinds of produce,
were completed; a substantial place of worship,
schools, and a house for the Missionaries, had
been finished, and the neat plastered dwellings of
the natives extended for two miles along the
beach. The scenery of this district of the island
is much less picturesque than in many other parts;
yet it is impossible to behold the neat and exten¬
sive settlement, with its gardens, quays, schools,
capacious chapel, and cottages, stretching along
the shore, which but a few years before was
covered vrith brushwood and trees, without aston*
ishment and delight.

282 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

On the twentieth of January, shortly after our
return from Borabora, his Majesty’s ship Daunt¬
less, commanded by Captain G. C. Gambier,
touched at Huahine. We were happy to intro¬
duce the commander of the Dauntless, Capt.
R. Elliot, and the officers of the vessel, to the
governor and chiefs of the island, and to welcome
them to our humble dwellings, as well as to expe¬
rience their hospitality on board. The recollection
of the polite and kind attentions of Captain Gam¬
bier, Captain Elliot, and other gentlemen of the
ship, is still grateful to the Missionaries and the
inhabitants of Huahine.

In a week or two after the departure of the
Dauntless, the colonial government-cutter Mer¬
maid arrived in Fare harbour, on her way to the
Sandwich Islands, with a small schooner, the
Prince Regent, as a present from the British
government to the king of those islands. The
captain intimated his intention of touching at the
Marquesas on his return from Hawaii, and politely
offered a passage to any of us who might be
desirous of visiting these islands. We had long
been anxious to attempt the establishment of
Christianity among the inhabitants of the former,
and as the present appeared a favourable oppor¬
tunity, we communicated the same to the deputa¬
tion, and it appeared to them desirable to visit
these places.

It was on the 18th of February, that the de¬
putation informed the captain of their accept¬
ance of his offer, and also requested Mr. Barff
and myself to arrange as to which of us would
accompany the teachers, whom it was proposed
to send. This having been fixed, we sent a letter
to one of the deacons, requesting him to invite

NATIVE MISSIONARIES.

283

the members of the church, and those who were
baptized, to assemble in the place of worship in
the evening. When they were convened, we
met them, and after singing, and imploring in
prayer the Divine guidance, I acquainted them
with the object of our meeting—the opportunity
afforded for sending two of our number to the
Marquesas, on board the ship in harbour,—
and interrogated thenf as to whether we should
do so or not. Hautiei the governor, Anna, Taua,
Pato, and Utu, all persons of influence among
those assembled, expressed their joy at the pro¬
posal, and the whole lifted up their hands to
signify their assent. I then said, “ Whom shall
we send ?” and mentioned the name of Matatore,
one of the deacons of the church, a man in the
prime of life, and one of the most sensible and
useful men in the station, asking the members of
the church if they thought he and his wife
suitable persons. An answer was returned in the
affirmative, and the hands of the assembly were
lifted up. They were both present, and I asked
them if it was agreeable to them to go. They
both answered before the whole congregation,
“ Yes, it is agreeable.” Mr. Barff then addressed
them, and mentioned Tiori, a valuable teacher in
one of our schools; but some of the members
objected, because he was an unmarried man.
Mr. Barff next proposed Puna, but the same
objection was urged. He then named Auna.
The church immediately replied, “ It is agreed.”
Auna was then asked if it was agreed to by
himself; he immediately replied, “ It has been
agreed to long ago.” We had often talked on
the subject: two years before this, in an inte¬
resting conversation, which I held with Anna,

284 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

he said he was exceedingly desirous to go as a
Missionary to some of the islands around; stating,
that their inhabitants frequently appeared to his
mind like persons standing on the verge of a
precipice over a chasm, falling backwards into it,
but stretching out their hands as they fell, and
calling for assistance.

After the assembly had testified its approbation
of the two men and their wives, who had been
proposed, and had expressed their readiness to
go, Mr. Tyerman addressed the persons present,
expressing the pleasure he experienced at their
decision, and offering them suitable encourage¬
ment. Mr. Barff interpreted his speech, Mr. Bennet
also tendered them his congratulations, and exhorted
them to vigilance. When I had interpreted his
address, the meeting was closed with prayer.

On the evening of the 21st, we again assembled
in the chapel. Mr. Bourne, who had arrived on
the preceding day, commenced the services by
prayer, and addressed the people on the duty and
advantages of sending out teachers of Christianity.
I then inquired, of those who had been selected,
the grounds of their readiness to engage in the
enterprise, and the manner in which they desired
and designed to prosecute their work. Auna
replied, “From a sense of the love of God, and
his goodness, and a regard to the direction,
4 Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.' ” His
companion said, “ Our desire is to engage in
this work with humbleness of mind, with prayer,
with gentleness and dependence upon the Lord
Jesus Christ.” Mr. Barff then offered up a prayer
at their designation, and afterwards exhibited the
nature and duties of their office, in an address
from, “ Behold, I send you forth as lambs in the

VOYAGE TO THE SANDWICH ISLANDS. 285

midst of wolves,”*' and concluded the service in
the usual manner.

The arrangements for the voyage being com¬
pleted, we assembled at the chapel about ten
o’clock on the forenoon of the 25th of February :
the native Christians were animated by kind and
appropriate addresses from the church, and were
affectionately encouraged by Mr. Barff and
Mr. Orsmond, the latter being on a visit with us.
The native Missionaries then took leave of their
fellow-Christians in a most solemn and impressive
manner; and, as it had been arranged by
Mr. Barff and myself that I should accompany
them, to aid in the commencement of their la¬
bours, I addressed the people, and, recommending
Mrs. Ellis and our dear children to their kind atten¬
tions under God, I also bade them farewell. The
meeting was peculiarly impressive and affecting;
and, after mutually committing each other, under
deep intensity of feeling, to the guidance and the
keeping of the God of all our mercies, the whole
congregation walked from the chapel to the
sea-shore, where we exchanged our last saluta¬
tions. The deputation, the two native Missionaries
and their wives, five other natives and myself, now
embarked, and the Mermaid stood out to sea.

The weather was on the whole pleasant, and we
reached the Sandwich Islands in about a month
after our departure from Huahine.

While supping at our table, on the night pre¬
vious to our embarkation, the captain had, in
answer to Mrs. Ellis’s inquiries, assured her that
he expected to return in three months ; but seven
months passed without any appearance of our
vessel. In the mean time, a piratical ship touched
* Matt. x. 16.

286 POLYNESIAN RESEAIiCIIES.

at Huahine ; some of the pirates absconded, and
remained on shore. It was found that they knew
something; of our vessels; but as they refused to
say what they knew, surmises arose, and reports
were spread that they had met us at sea, and
either sunk our vessel or murdered the passengers.
Such was the influence of this report when first
circulated, that it was necessary to protect the
deserters from the indignation of the populace.
The whole of their statement was invested with a
degree of mystery, which, together with the very
protracted period of our absence, augmented the
distress of Mrs. Ellis and our friends in Huahine.
From this painful state of anxious uncertainty,
they were however relieved by the appearance of
the Mermaid off Fare harbour early in the month
of October, and by our landing in health and
safety in the evening of the same day. The
pirates had fallen in with the schooner, which had
been separated from us during the early part of
the voyage; they by this means heard of our
destination, &c. and this partial information
accounted for the vagueness of their reports.
In the close of the same month, the invitation I
had received from the chiefs in the Sandwich
Islands, and the American Missionaries, to remove
thither, was submitted to the consideration of the
Missionaries in the Leeward Islands, and they,
with the deputation, were unanimous in opinion,
that we ought to proceed to that important station
by the earliest opportunity. The details of the
first voyage to Hawaii, and some account of our
proceedings there, v will be given in the succeeding
volume.

The Active, a small schooner, commanded by
Captain Charlton, arriving at Huahine soon after,

POMARE AND AIMATA. 287

was engaged to convey us to the Sandwich Islands.
While we were preparing for our departure, viz. in
the month of December, 1822, a marriage took
place between Pomare, the young chief of Tahaa,
and Aimata, the only daughter of the late king of
Tahiti. The parties met at Huahine, which was
midway between the residence of the families to
which they respectively belonged. Young Pomare
had received his name, as a mark of special favour,
from the king of Tahiti.

More than a week before his intended bride
arrived from Tahiti, Pomare sailed from Tahaa,
and landed at Fare, where he was entertained with
the attention and respect suited to his rank and
prospects, by the chiefs of Huahine. It was not,
however, at that time supposed that his consort
would become the queen of Tahiti, as her brother,
with whom her father had left the government,
was then living.

In the month of December, Aimata, accom¬
panied by her mother and aunt, arrived at Hua¬
hine, on board the Queen Charlotte, a brig be¬
longing to the king. The afternoon of the day
on which the vessel anchored was fixed on for her
landing, and introduction to her future husband.
We walked down to the settlement, to witness
the meeting of the youthful pair. A small open
house, belonging to the governor, was the place
appointed for their first interview. When w r e
reached the spot, we beheld the young chieftain,
who, for his age, was remarkably stout, dressed in
full native costume, with a large purau, and a
flowing tiputa; he wore, also, an English beaver
hat. He was seated at one end of the building on
an iri, or native seat, waiting with gravity of ap¬
pearance the arrival of Aimata.

288

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

About a quarter of an hour after we had reached
the place, two or three boats from the vessel rowed
towards the shore. Several of the attendants of
the young princess arrived in the first; and the
queen and her sister, with the youthful Aimata,
landed from the second. The visitors were met
on the beach by the governor of the island, and a
number of chief women, who conducted Aimata to
the house where Pomare and his friends were wait¬
ing. They entered, and, after greeting the friends
present, took their seats near where the young
chief was sitting.

Pomare continued motionless, neither rising to
welcome his guests, nor uncovering his head.
Aimata sat close by her mother’s side, occasionally
glancing at the individual who was to be her hus¬
band, and who sat like a statue before her.

This was the first time either Pomare or Aimata
had seen each other, and the interview was cer¬
tainly a singular one; for, after sitting together
for about twenty minutes, the queen and her com¬
panions rose, and repaired to the house provided
for their accommodation, and Pomare and his
friends returned to their encampment. During the
whole of the time they had been in each other’s
company, they had not exchanged a single word.

Shortly after this meeting, they were publicly
married, and afterwards removed to the island of
Tahiti, which has ever since been their principal
residence. Pomare w T as about sixteen years of
age, and his consort but little, if any, younger.
Since the death of her brother, which took place
in 1827, she has been considered queen of Tahiti,
Eimeo, &c., though the regency, appointed to
govern the islands during the minority of the late
king, still manages the political affairs, acting,

POMARE AND AIM AT A. 289

however, in the name of Aimata, instead of that of
her brother.

Pomare was very young when the inhabitants of
his native island embraced Christianity; the first
time we saw him was in 1819, when he appeared
nine or ten years of age. His establishment, how¬
ever, was at that time nearly as large as it has been
since. He possessed a number of houses in dif¬
ferent parts of Raiatea and Tahaa, and was sur¬
rounded by a numerous train of attendants; one
or two chiefs, of rank and influence, acting as his
guardians, usually accompanied him. During
the early parts of his life, he was frequently carried
about on men's shoulders, according to the an¬
cient custom of the kings of the Society Islands.
When the king of Tahiti embraced Christianity,
this, with other practices connected with idolatry,
was laid aside in the Windward Isles. It was
occasionally adopted by the young chief of Tahaa,
more, perhaps, to gratify the pride of some of his
attendants, than to afford any satisfaction to his
own mind. By him it has now been discontinued
for a number of years ; and young Pomare is pro¬
bably the last Tahitian chieftain that will ever ride
in state on the necks of his people.

Aimata, the only surviving child of the king of
Tahiti, although about the same age, appeared in
perfect contrast to her husband. Her form was
neither athletic nor corpulent, her countenance open
and lively, her jet-black eye sparkling and intelli¬
gent, her manners and address engaging, her dis¬
position volatile, and her conversation cheerful. In
these respects she was the very opposite to Pomare,
who was taciturn and forbidding.

She gave early indications of superior intellec¬
tual endowments ; and, had her mental faculties

nr. u

290 POLYNESIAN RESEAPvCHES.

been properly cultivated, she would probably have
excelled most of her own sex in the society in
which she was destined to exert the highest in¬
fluence. The restraint and application, however,
which this required, were ill suited to her lively
disposition, and uncontrolled habits of life. She
has, nevertheless, been a frequent, and, while she
continued, a promising pupil of the Missionaries,
having, in a short time, made a pleasing progress
in the acquisition of knowledge. She has for some
time made a profession of Christianity. To the
Missionaries she has invariably proved friendly ;
and, since she has been the queen of Tahiti,
has patronized and encouraged their efforts.

Pomare and Aimata had been, by their respective
families, betrothed to each other for some time
prior to their meeting in Huahine. Considerable
preparations had been made for the celebration of
the marriage, and as the parties were nearly re¬
lated to the reigning families in the Windward and
Leeward Islands, arrangements were made for
entertainments corresponding with the rank and
dignity of the bridegroom and his bride.

About noon on the day appointed, the young
chieftain with his guardian and friends reached
the chapel, where we were waiting to receive them.
Aimata, attended by her mother-in-law, the queen
of Tahiti, her sister, and the wife of Mahine, chief
of Huahine, arrived shortly after. The royal party
were attended by the dependents of Hautia, the
governor of the island. In honour of the dis¬
tinguished guest, these dependents or guards were
not only arrayed in their best apparel, which was
certainly any thing rather than uniform, but they also
marched under arms. Many of the raatiras of Hua¬
hine attended, out of respect to the reigning family.

ROYAL MARRIAGE.

291

When the ceremony commenced, Mr. Barff and
myself took our station near the communion table
in front of the pulpit; Pomare and his friends
standing on our right, and Aimata with her re¬
latives on the left. The raatiras formed a semi¬
circle three or four deep immediately behind the
bride and bridegroom, while the body of the chapel
was filled with spectators. Most of the chiefs appear¬
ed in European dresses, some of which being large
loose gowns of highly glazed chintz of a brilliant red
and yellow colour, intermixed with dresses of black
and blue broad cloth, presented a novel spectacle.

The principal part of Pomare’s dress was manu¬
factured in the islands, and worn after the ancient
fashion. Aimata wore a white English gown, a
light pink scarf, and a finely platted hibiscus
bonnet, trimmed with white ribands. The queen,
Pomare-vahine, and all the females of the royal
party, appeared in white dresses of foreign manu¬
facture. The raatiras wore the native costume
peculiar to their rank and station, while the dress
of the multitude behind them presented almost
every variety of European and native clothing.

The rich and showy colours exhibited in the
apparel of the chiefs, the uniform white raiment of
the queen and her companions, in striking contrast
with their olive-coloured complexions and dark
glossy curling hair, presented an unusual appear¬
ance. The picturesque dress of the raatiras, who
wore the purau or beautifully fine white matting
tiputa, bordered round the neck and the edges
with a most elegant fringe, and bore in the right
hand a highly polished staff, or kind of halbert, of
black iron-wood, together with the diversified ap¬
pearance of the spectators, greatly increased the
novel and imposing effect of the whole.

u 2

292 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

During the ceremony, I observed a tear moisten¬
ing the eye of the youthful bride. Agitation of
feeling, perhaps, produced it, as I have every reason
to believe no cloud of anticipated evil overshadowed
her prospects; and she is reported to have said,
that had she not been betrothed, but free to choose
her future partner, she should have selected the
individual her friends had chosen for her.

When the service was over, the registry made,
and the necessary signatures affixed, the parties
returned, to partake of the entertainment provided.
We were invited to join them, but declined the
honour; yet walked down to see the preparation,
and, among other articles of dessert, noticed two
barrels full of pine-apples. As soon as the cere¬
mony was concluded, the governor’s guards, who
were drawn up on the outside of the chapel,
fired several volleys of musketry, and a British
vessel, lying in the harbour, saluted them with
twenty-one guns.

With the abolition of idolatry, all the ceremonies
originally performed at the temple, and which have
been already described, were discontinued, and,
shortly after the reception of Christianity by the
nation, Christian marriage was instituted, and it is
now universally observed. From this moral revo¬
lution some perplexing questions relative to poly¬
gamy have naturally arisen, but, for the principal
difficulties, the code of laws inserted in a preceding
chapter has made suitable provisions.

In the marriage ceremony, the use of the ring
has not been introduced, and the only distinction
that prevails in society, in reference to married and
unmarried females, is, that the wife ceases to be
called by her original name, and is designated by
that of her husband; excepting where the name

DOMESTIC HAPPINESS. 293

of the wife was also an hereditary title of rank or
honour, in which case it is retained.

No change in their customs or usages has taken
place, in connexion with the introduction of the
religion of the Bible, more extensive or beneficial
in its influence on every class in society, than the
institution of Christian marriage. Instances of
unfaithfulness are not indeed unknown, but, con¬
sidering their former habits of life, the partial
influence of regard to character, and the slight
inconvenience in reference to the means of sup¬
port, by which they would probably be followed,
they have but seldom occurred. The solemn and
indissoluble obligations of the marriage vow are
recognised by all who profess to be Christians;
and the domestic, social, and elevated happiness
it has imparted, is readily acknowledged. It has
entirely altered the tone of feelings, and imparted
new principles of conduct in regard to the conjugal
relation.

Originating from the institution of marriage,
and nurtured by its influence, domestic happiness,
though formerly unknown even in name, is now
sedulously cultivated, and spreads around their
abodes of order and comfort its choicest blessings.
The husband and the wife, instead of promiscu¬
ously mingling with the multitude, or dwelling in
the houses of their chiefs, live together in the neat
little cottages reared by their own industry, and
find satisfaction and comfort in each other’s society.
Every household virtue adorns their families; the
children grow up the objects of their mutual affec¬
tion, and call into exercise new solicitudes and
unwonted emotions of delight. Often they appear
sitting together reading the scriptures, walking in
company to the house of God, or surrounding, not

294 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

indeed the family hearth, or the domestic fireside,
which in their warm climate would be no addition
to their comfort, but the family board, spread with
the liberal gifts of divine bounty. The father, at
times, may also be seen nursing his little child at
the door of his cottage, and the mother sitting at
needle-work by his side, or engaged in other
domestic employments. These are the delights it
has imparted to the present race—while the rising
generation are trained under the influence of the
principles of Christianity, and these examples of
social and domestic virtue.

Marriages frequently take place at an early age
among the people ; they do not, however, appear
to be less happy than those celebrated when the
parties are further advanced in life. In former
times the men were often cruel in their treatment
of the women, and considered them as their slaves;
but the husbands now treat their wives with respect,
and often cherish for them the most sincere affec¬
tion. The female character is elevated in society;
the husbands perform the labours of the plantation
or the fishery, recognizing it as their duty to pro¬
vide the means of subsistence for the family; while
the preparation of their food, (especially where the
European mode of living has been adopted by
them,) together with attention to the children, and
the making of clothing, native or foreign, for them¬
selves and the other members of the family, is now
considered the proper department of the females.
They occasionally accompany their husbands and
elder children to work in the plantation or garden,
at particular seasons of the year ; but it is a matter
of choice, and not from fear of cruel treatment, as
formerly. They go to assist their husbands in
planting and gathering in the crops, instead of

DEPARTURE FOR ENGLAND. 295

undertaking alone these labours, while the men
were idling away the noon-day hours in heedless
slumbers, or spending them in songs or other
amusements.

The establishment of schools has in some
degree overcome the love of wandering, and habi¬
tuated them to regularity and perseverance in their
occupations, although at first found irksome and
difficult. Desire of mental improvement, general
acquaintance with writing, and fondness for episto¬
lary correspondence, furnish new and agreeable
occupations for their leisure hours. The introduc¬
tion of needlework, the universal desire for Euro¬
pean clothing, together with the preservation of
these articles of dress, having increased their do¬
mestic duties, occupies a great portion of their time.

With the close of the year 1822, we terminated
our regular labours in the South Sea Islands; and
on the 31st of December, soon after the marriage
of Pomare and Aimata, accompanied by two native
teachers, Taua and his family, and Taamotu, a
female who had been a member of the church, a
teacher in the school, and an affectionate and
valuable companion and assistant to Mrs. Ellis
during my voyage to Hawaii, we embarked in
the Active, and reached Oahu on the 5th of
the following February. Towards the close of
1824, an afflictive dispensation of Divine provi¬
dence removed us from these islands. This was,
the severe and protracted illness of Mrs. Ellis;
the only hope of whose life was derived from the
effects of a voyage to England. On our return
we visited Huahine, anchored in Fa-re harbour,
and had the high satisfaction of spending a fort¬
night in delightful intercourse with our Missionary
friends, and the kind people of the settlement.

29G POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Early in the month of November we again took
leave of our friends and fellow-labourers, hoping
to revisit them when we should return to the
Pacific; feeling, at the same time, that, with
regard to some, perhaps many, we should not meet
again in this world, but cheered with the anticipa¬
tion of meeting in a region where parting would
be unknown. When our anchor was raised, and
our sails spread, the vessel moved slowly out of the
harbour. The day was remarkably fine, and the
wind light, and both these afforded opportunities
of leisurely surveying the receding shore. As the
different sections of the bay opened and receded
from my view, I could not forbear contrasting the
appearance of the district at this time, with that
presented on my first arrival in 1818.

There was the same rich and diversified scenery,
but, instead of a few rustic huts, a fine town, two
miles in length, now spread itself along the margin
of the bay; a good road extended through the
settlement; nearly four hundred white, plastered,
native cottages appeared, some on the margin of
the sea, others enclosed in neat and well-cultivated
gardens. A number of quays were erected along
the shore; the schools were conspicuous; and,
prominent above the rest, was seen their spacious
chapel, since rebuilt, and now capable of accom¬
modating 2000 worshippers. The same individuals
who, on the former occasion, had appeared uncivi¬
lized and almost unclothed islanders, now stood in
crowds upon the beach, arrayed in decent apparel,
wearing hats and bonnets of their own manufac¬
ture ; while, beyond the settlement, their planta¬
tions and their gardens adorned the mountain’s
side. These were but indications of a greater
change among the people. All were professing

STATE OF HUAHINE.

297

Christians. Most of them could read the Bible,
and between four and five hundred had been united
in church-fellowship. This number has been in¬
creased to five hundred, who are walking in the
ordinances and commandments of the Lord blame¬
less. Agriculture has since increased, and some
acres are now planted, or preparing for the culture
of coffee.

Such was the state of general improvement in
Huahine, when we paid our last visit, in the close
of the year 1824; and although the subsequent
accounts have been at times of a chequered com¬
plexion, they have not been more so than might be
expected, and have, upon the whole, been such as
to afford matter for sincere gratitude to the Most
High, and encouragement to all interested in the
moral and spiritual improvement of mankind.

298

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

CHAP. XL

Efforts of the natives to propagate Christianity—Amount
of early contributions—Effect of annual meetings—
Exertions of the first converts—Description of the Pau-
motus, or Dangerous Archipelago—Visits of the people
to Tahiti—Their reception of Christianity—The number
and situation of the Marquesas—Their appearance and
productions—Population, dress, and figure of the natives
—Tatauing—Disposition—Government—War and can¬
nibalism—Attempts to introduce Christianity among
their inhabitants—Pitcairn’s Island—Descendants of the
mutineers of the Bounty—Waihu or Easter Island—
Cape Horn—Juan Fernandez—Alexander Selkirk.

Christianity universally received, and, we have
reason to believe, firmly established in the Georg¬
ian and Society Islands, having overcome the
combined opposition of idolatry, priestcraft, in¬
terest, and pride, with the barriers of depravity
and abomination, which so long despised its
authority, and resisted its appeals—and having
survived the more fatal treachery of the enemies
that have adopted its name, and assumed its garb
—has not been confined to those islands

Acknowledging the command of Christ to
“ teach all nations, and preach the gospel to every
creature/' to be obligatory on all his disciples
imbibing somewhat of the true spirit of Chris-

NATIVE MISSIONS.

299

tianity, which is not restrictive and selfish, but
expansive and communicative—animated by the
spirit of the primitive Christians, and, imitating
their example—the members of the first Polynesian
churches no sooner enjoyed the advantages of
religion themselves, than they adopted vigorous
measures for imparting them to others.

Some notice of their efforts to communicate a
knowledge of Christianity to other tribes in the
Pacific, of the islands to which they have sent
their Missionaries, and others more or less con¬
nected with these, will, it is presumed, not be
unacceptable, as presenting a more distinct view
of the relation these islands bear to Tahiti and the
adjacent group.

An account has already been given of the for¬
mation of Missionary societies in Tahiti, Eimeo,
and Huahine. Others were afterwards established.
Their first remittance to London was in 1821, and
amounted to nearly £1900. The Raiatean society,
besides maintaining at its own expense six native
Missionaries, sent to England, in 1827, £300.
This sum, and the liberal contributions from other
associations, would have been greatly increased,
could the productions, in which the native sub¬
scriptions were furnished, have been disposed of to
the best advantage.

The anniversaries of the native societies, and
their public Missionary meetings, continue to prove
to the inhabitants seasons of delightful satisfac¬
tion. At these meetings their pleasure has been
heightened by the details of native Missionaries
who have returned from distant islands, and the
exhibition of rejected idols from countries where
formerly they had been worshipped. Inhabitants
of remote islands have appeared at their meetings,

300 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

us ambassadors from the tribes to which they be¬
longed, requesting that books and teachers might
be sent to their native land; and chiefs and
kings have also at these periods publicly, with
gratitude to the true God, returned the native
churches their acknowledgments for sending them
instructors.

At the Missionary anniversary held at Raiatea,
m 1828, the king of Rarotoa, an island seven
hundred miles distant, and containing six or seven
thousand people, stood up, and, in his native
dialect, thanked the Raiatean Christians for send¬
ing the gospel to his island, and delivering him
and his people from the bondage of idolatry, and
sin, and death.

The native churches are daily extending the
range of their benevolent operations ; their vessels
penetrate where no ships ever went before, and
their Missionaries land where no foreigner has
dared to set his foot on shore. Yet, wherever
they have been, the merchant or the sailor may
now safely follow, and he will meet with hospitality
and kindness. The following account will appro¬
priately illustrate this remark.

On his passage from Tahiti to New South Wales,
in 1825, in the brig Brutus, Mr. Nott touched at
Aitutake, (the Whylootakie of Cook.) Native
teachers had been there above three years. The
inhabitants were Christians. The passengers
landed ; and when the natives found a Missionary
among them, they requested he would preach to
them, and about 1000 soon assembled. The is¬
landers shewed their visitors every possible kind¬
ness, accompanied them to the ship when they
embarked, and carried a number of supplies as
a present to the captain. After stating these

OUTRAGE IN THE ISLAND OF UA. 301

facts, Mr. Nott, in a letter, dated May, 1825, con¬
tinues—

“ The next island we called at was one of the
Friendly Islands, Eooa , as written by Cook, and
as we have it written on the charts, but which
should be Ua. At this island, also, as there is no
anchorage, we were obliged to stand off and on
while the boat went on shore. Here a circum¬
stance took place, which, among many others,
might be brought forward, to show the value of
Missionary establishments. The boat reached
the land with Capt. Forbes, the chief mate, and
Mr. Torrance. They began to barter with the
natives, and obtained several pigs, some plantains,
cocoa-nuts, &c., but suddenly they were seized,
and every thing was taken from them, without any
offence being given. Axes were held over their
heads, and knives applied to their throats; a rope
was also brought, and formed with a noose, and
hung over their heads, to signify to them what
they must expect, if they offered to escape or resist.
A ransom was then demanded, before they would
let them return to us on board the brig, and
the chief mate was sent off in the boat to fetch
the property. But as it was dark when the boat
readied the brig, it was not proper that she should
return to the shore until morning. During the
night, the prisoners, Capt. Forbes, Mr. Torrance,
and another of the boat’s crew, were kept in the
greatest terror, with a strict guard, and continual
threats. In the morning, the boat was sent on
shore with muskets, (or rather fowling-pieces of
considerable value,) powder, and cloth, to the
amount of £30 or £40, and a New Zealander, who
was on board with us, was sent, to negotiate the
affair, the people being afraid to venture on shore

302 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

ngain. The chief received the property, and
Capt. Forbes was permitted to come on board the
brig, but Mr. Torrance was detained till more
property should be sent on shore, which was done
by the boat, and taken on shore by the New
Zealander. Mr. Torrance was then permitted to
come off to us. At this instant Captain Forbes
exclaimed, ‘ O, Mr. Nott! we see now, more than
ever, what has been done by you and the
Missionaries on the islands where you have re¬
sided, and the trouble you have had in bringing
the natives, from what they were, to what they are
now.’ ”

We have already noticed Pomare, the first con¬
vert in the islands, visiting the different districts
for the purpose of persuading its inhabitants to
renounce their idols, and embrace the Christian
faith. We have seen Mahine, the king of Hua-
hine, sending his messenger to that island for
the same purpose; and we have seen Tapa, and
the chiefs of Raiatea, prosecuting, in 1816, the
work commenced by Mr. Nott and his companion
in 1814, and engaged in subverting idolatry and
preparing his people to receive Christianity, before
any European Missionary had taken up his abode
on their islands. Mai and Tefaora not only dis¬
tinguished themselves by their zeal in the destruc¬
tion of the idols and temples of Borabora, but
the latter sailed over to Maurua, and induced
the chief and people of that island to follow his
example, and discontinue the worship of their
idols.

It is not probable that all who thus distinguished
themselves were fully acquainted with the gospel,
or entirely under the influence of the high and
sacred motives it inspires, but they are convinced

TIIE PEARL ISLANDS.

303

of its superiority to the system of delusion and
iniquity from which they had been released ; and
hence, perhaps, chiefly originated their exertions
to induce its reception by others.

The knowledge of Christianity was early con¬
veyed to the Paumotus, which lie to the north and
east of Tahiti.

To the southward of the Marquesas, innumerable
clusters and single islands, of a totally different
structure and appearance from the larger islands,
cover the bosom of the ocean, and render
navigation exceedingly dangerous. They are
low narrow islands, of coralline formation, and
though among them some few, as Gambier’s
Islands, are hilly, the greater number do not rise
more than three feet above the level of high
water. The names of Crescent, Harp, Chain,
Bow, &c., which some of them have received,
from their appearance, have been supposed to
indicate their shape. Those already known seem
to be increasing in size, while others are con¬
stantly approaching the surface of the water..
Sometimes they rise, like a perpendicular wall, from
the depths of the ocean to the level of its surface;
at other times, reefs or groves of coral, of varied
and beautiful form and colour, extend, in the
form of successive terraces below the water,
to a considerable distance around. Here islands
may be seen in every stage of their progress;
some presenting little more than a point or sum¬
mit of a branching coralline pyramid, at a depth
scarcely discernible through the transparent waters;
others spreading, like submarine gardens or shrub¬
beries, beneath the surface; or presenting here and
there a little bank of broken coral and sand, over
which the rolling wave occasionally breaks ; while

304 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

a number rise, like long curved or circular banks
of sand, broken coral, and shells, two or three
feet above the water, clothed with grass, or adorned
with cocoa-nut and palm trees. They generally
form a curved line, sometimes bent like a horse¬
shoe ; the bank of soil or rock is seldom more
than half a mile or a mile across, yet it is often
clothed with the richest verdure. Within this en¬
closure is a space, sometimes of great extent. In
the island of Hao, the Bow Island of Captain Cook,
it is said, ships may sail many miles after entering
the lagoon. The narrow strip of coral and sand
enclosing the basin is sixty or seventy miles in
length, although exceedingly narrow. Their
lagoons are either studded with smaller reefs, or
form a bay of great depth. The stillness of the
surface of the bright blue water, within the
lagoon, the border of white coral and sand by
which it is surrounded, the dark foliage of the
lofty trees by which it is sheltered, often reflected
from the surface of the water, impart to the in¬
terior of these low islands an aspect of singular
beauty and solitude, such as is but seldom pre¬
sented by the more bold and romantic scenery of
the higher lands. These islands have received
different names: by some they have been called
the Labyrinth, by others the Pearl Islands,
on account of the pearls obtained among them.
The natives of Tahiti designate the islands and
their inhabitants Paumotus, but by navigators
they are usually denominated the Dangerous Ar¬
chipelago.

The islands vary in extent, but are usually
small; most of them, however, are inhabited, and
in some the population is numerous. Their in¬
habitants are tall and robust, dark coloured, and

THE PEARL ISLANDS.

305

amongst the most rude and savage tribes of the
eastern Pacific. Their food principally consists
of fish and cocoa-nuts, as there is but little
land capable of cultivation. Their means of
subsistence are often scanty, and always pre¬
carious. They are exceedingly ferocious, and
addicted to war, which they prosecute with
cruelty, and are said generally to feast on the
slain : a captive child has been fed with the flesh
of her own parent. The trees on the island are but
small, yet the natives formerly built better vessels
than any other nation in the eastern part of the
ocean, and they are more daring and successful na¬
vigators than the more favoured and civilized tribes
which they occasionally visit. Their canoes were
dignified by the Tahitians with the name of pahi ,
a term applied only to their own war-canoes, and
the vessels of foreigners, and they are still superior
to any in this part of the Pacific, excepting those
recently constructed at Tahiti in the European
manner.

The miseries of war had, in the early part of
the reign of Pomare II., king of Tahiti, driven
many of the inhabitants of these islands to the
Georgian group for security. They were pro¬
tected and hospitably entertained by Pomare; and
when his own subjects renounced idolatry, they
also cast away the gods they had brought with
them, and were instructed by the Missionaries.
In 1817 great numbers returned to their native
islands, accompanied by Moorea, one of their
countrymen, who was a pious man, and had been
taught to read. On reaching Anaa, or Chain
Island, his birth-place, he began to instruct the
people with such success, under the Divine
blessing, that, with the exception of the inhabit-
m. x

306

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

ants of one district, the population agreed to re¬
nounce heathenism.

Moorea was subsequently charged with having
deceived his countrymen in the accounts he had
given of the change at Tahiti, and was obliged to
leave the island, as his life was threatened. The
idolaters, convinced afterwards that they had
accused him falsely, burnt their idols, and demo¬
lished their temples. About four hundred of them
then sailed to Tahiti, for books and instruction. They
obtained a supply of books, and became the pupils
of Mr. Crook, who had the satisfaction of admitting;
several of them to fellowship with the Christians under
his care. Early in 1822, Moorea and Teraa were
publicly designated, by the members of the church
in Wilkes’ Harbour, as Christian teachers, and sailed
for Anaa. Shortly afterwards, a canoe from this
island, which is situated in 17. S.lat. 145. W. long,
arrived at Tahiti. These dauntless sailors, who, in
order to procure books, had traversed, in their
rudely built vessels, a distance of three hundred
miles, brought the pleasing tidings, that the inha¬
bitants of Anaa were willing to receive Christianity,
were building a place of worship in every district,
that war, cannibalism, and other atrocities of ido¬
latry, had ceased. Two other teachers, Manao and
Mareuu, were afterwards sent to these islands.

Anaa, when visited by Mr. Crook, in January,
1825, presented a scene of ruin and desolation,
occasioned by a violent tempest, which had been
accompanied by an impetuous inundation of the
sea. Hundreds of large trees, torn up by the
roots, lay strewn in wild confusion on the shore :
a number of dwellings, and fourteen places
of worship, were levelled to the ground. The
calamity had been as sudden as it was severe : the

THE PEARL ISLANDS. 307

falling of the trees, and the rising of the sea over
those entangled among their trunks, and the ruins
of their houses, had occasioned the loss of many
lives. Besides the distress caused by the above
afflictive visitation, he received the unpleasant
tidings of the defection of two of the native teach¬
ers ; but was gratified to learn, that Manao and
Mareuu were stedfast, and that the inhabitants of
ten other islands, among those so thickly spread
over the ocean, between Tahiti and the Marquesas,
had received native teachers. The influence of
Christianity had been salutary, in softening the
barbarous character of the natives of Anaa, yet
their savage dispositions were occasionally mani¬
fested. Desirous to extend the knowledge of the
new religion, they sent two native teachers to
Amanu. The inhabitants of this island attacked
the strangers, wounded one of the teachers, killed
both their wives, and obliged the survivor and his
friends to seek their safety in flight. The wife of
one of the teachers was the daughter of the chief
of Anaa. The report of her murder so enraged many
of the inhabitants, that, forgetting the principles of
forbearance inculcated by the gospel, and so nobly
exhibited by their countrymen on another occa¬
sion, they fitted out a fleet, sailed to Amanu, and
punished with death a number of the inhabitants.

Captain Beechey, who recently visited this ar¬
chipelago, has furnished an interesting account of
the appearance, extent, and structure of many of
these islands, with an affecting description of the
state of the inhabitants; and although he must
have been misled in the report he received of the
Chain Islanders being cannibals, notwithstanding
their having embraced Christianity, his account of
the native teachers, whom he met with, shews the

x 2

308 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

favourable impression their deportment left upon
his mind. Speaking of his intercourse with the
people on an island in 19. 40. S. lat. and 140. 29.
W. long., which he has designated Byam Martin
Island, he observes, “We soon discovered that
our little colony were Christians : they took an
early opportunity of convincing us of this, and
that they had both Testaments and hymn-books
printed in the Otaheitan language, &c. Some of
the girls repeated hymns, and the greater part
evinced a respect for the sacred books, which
reflects much credit upon the Missionaries under
whose care, we could no longer doubt, they had at
one time been.”*

The frigate afterwards visited Bow Island ; and
having spoke of the state of the inhabitants, the ty¬
ranny and brutality of the men, and the debasement
and misery of the females, Captain Beechey, men¬
tioning the presence of the Dart, an English vessel,
states, “ The supercargo of the Dart had hired a
party of the natives of Chain Island to dive for
shells: among these was a native Missionary, a
very well-behaved man, who used every effort to
convert his new acquaintances to Christianity. He
persevered amidst much silent ridicule, and at
length succeeded in persuading the greater part
of the islanders to conform to the ceremonies of
Christian worship. It was interesting to contem¬
plate a body of savages abandoning their supersti¬
tions, silently and reverently kneeling upon the
sandy shore, and joining in the morning and even¬
ing prayers to the Almighty.”!

* Beeckey’s Voyage, vol. i. p. 1G4. t Ibid. vol. i. p. 178.

DISCOVERY Of THE MARQUESAS.

309

The Marquesas.

The most easterly group of the high, fertile, and
populous isles of Polynesia, are situated to the
northward of the Labyrinth, or Dangerous Archi¬
pelago, and about seven or eight degrees distant
from Anaa, or Chain Island. A range of moun¬
tainous islands appears to extend in an almost
unbroken line across the Pacific, in an easterly
direction from Borneo, Java, New Guinea, and
the large Asiatic islands. Diverging from the
Georgian and Society Islands,—Gambier’s, Pit¬
cairn’s, and Easter Island appear to terminate its
south-eastern course, while the Marquesas mark its
north-eastern limit. The latter form two clusters,
which were discovered at different periods, and
are politically, as well as geographically, dis¬
tinct. The south-eastern cluster, comprehending
five islands, Tahuata or Santa Christina, Hivaoa
or La Dominica, Mohotane or San Pedro,
Fatuhiva or La Magdelena, and Fetuuku or
Hood’s Island—were, with the exception of the
last, discovered in 1595 by Alvaro Mendano, a
Spanish navigator, who was proceeding from
Peru to form a settlement in the Solomon
Islands. In honour of the Marques Mendoza,
viceroy of Peru, and patron of the enterprise,
Mendano designated the islands, the Marquesas.
The next account that we have of these islands
is their being visited in 1774, when they were
examined by Captain Cook, who discovered the
island called Hood’s Island, to which he supposed
the natives gave the name of Tebua. In 1789, they
were visited by Marchand, a French navigator,
who saw other lands to the northward ; but it was
not till the following year, when Lieutenant

3 10 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Hergest, in the Daedalus, on his voyage from the
Falkland Islands to Hawaii, touched at the Mar¬
quesas, in March 1792, that the northern cluster was
explored, or, so far as I have heard, any account of
them published. This division consists also of five
islands, Nuuhiva or Nukuhiva, the largest in the
group, called, by Hergest, Sir H. Martin’s Island,
Uapou, Trevenian’s Island, Huakuka or Riou’s
Island, Hergest Rocks, and Robert’s Island.
Although the latter cluster have been called In¬
gram’s Islands, after an American trader, who saw
them soon after the time of Marchand’s visit,* Her-
gest’s Island by Vancouver, and more recently
Washington’s Islands; they are usually, with
the more southern islands, designated the Mar¬
quesas. They extend according to Malte Brun,
from 7. 51. to 10. 25. S. latitude, and from 138.
48. to 140. 29. West long. The native names for
some of the above, I have received from the inha¬
bitants, or the account of Mr. Stewart, who recently
visited them ; in one or two I have followed the
voyagers by whom they have been visited, and some
of them may be incorrect. It very frequently
occurs, that transient visitors mistake the name
of the bay in which their ships anchor, or the
opposite district, for that of the whole island;
hence Ohitahoo, which, according to the ortho¬
graphy now used by other tribes of the Pacific,
would be Vaitahu, the name of one of the dis¬
tricts bordering on the bay in which most vessels
anchor, has been the name generally given to the
island, called by the natives Tahuata.

The geographical extent of the group is inferior
to that of the Georgian and Society Islands. Nuu-
hiva, the largest, is much smaller than Tahiti, and
* Introduction to the DufPs Voyage, p. Ixxxiii,

THE MARQU^SANS. 311

probably not more than fifty miles in circum¬
ference; the mountains are lofty, bold in outline,
and either clothed with verdure, or adorned with
plantations; cascades roll over the sides of the
mountains, and streams flow through the val¬
leys. The land capable of cultivation, however,
is comparatively small, as the islands are not pro¬
tected, like most others in the Pacific, by coral
reefs. The sea extends to the base of the moun¬
tains, and thus prevents the formation and preser¬
vation of that low border of prolific alluvial soil,
so valuable to the Society Islanders. The shores
are rocky and precipitous, and a level beach, or a
good landing-place is seldom met with. Deep,
wide, and extensive valleys abound in the islands,
and are the general places where the inhabitants
abide. The vegetable productions correspond
with those of the islands to the west, and are cul¬
tivated in the spacious valleys. The bread-fruit
is the chief article of support to the inhabitants,
it is cultivated and preserved with peculiar care,
and probably is obtained in greater perfection
among the Marquesas than in any other islands of
the Pacific. So careful are the people when ga¬
thering it, that they frequently suspend a net under
the tree, to prevent such as may drop from being
bruised by falling on the ground. The sea and
their coasts abound with fish, which contribute
materially to their subsistence. They have also
pigs, goats, and fowls, but not in abundance.
Notwithstanding the fertility of their valleys, and
the superiority of their bread-fruit, which grows
spontaneously, seasons of famine are frequent
and severe, and are occasioned by the indo¬
lence of the people, and their dependence on
the bread-fruit crop; a failure in which, reduces

312 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

them to a state of the greatest destitution, and
often leads to the perpetration of the most revolt¬
ing and unnatural crime of murdering and feeding
upon each other.

We have frequently met with the natives of the
Marquesas in other islands of the Pacific. Three
of them attended a public service which I held in
Byron’s Bay, on the island of Hawaii, in 1823.
When the assembly dispersed, they expressed
their approbation of what they had heard. I asked
them from what island they came: they said,
Fatuiva, or La Magdalena, and that there were
seven white men and two negroes living in their
island, but they told them nothing concerning
Jehovah or Jesus Christ. I asked them if they
thought their countrymen would receive and pro¬
tect Missionaries. “ Yes,” they answered, “ we
are sure they would.” “But you kill and eat white
people: Missionaries would not be safe among you.”
After a moment’s pause, they exclaimed, “ Oh no !
Oh no ! you would not injure us, and should never
be injured by us.” In the Sandwich Islands I have
often had a number of Marquesans residing near
me, and visiting my house daily, for the purpose of
teaching me their language, and receiving instruc¬
tion in reading and writing; and though, when I
have questioned them on the practice of eating
one another, they have generally denied it, they
have allowed its existence among other tribes;
and I have often been disposed to attribute such
denial, in reference to themselves, to a sense of
shame, arising from the detestation in which can¬
nibalism is held by those among whom they were
residing, rather than to their actual exemption from
it. The testimony of the natives of Tahiti, and of
foreigners who have resided among them, of the

THE MARQUESANS. 313

Missionaries, and voyagers by whom they have
been visited, seems to be not less decisive than
distressing. Krusenstern, in his voyage round
the world, touched at Nuuhiva, on his way to
Japan. He obtained much information from
Roberts, an Englishman, who had resided some
time on the island, and states that in times of
famine the men butcher their wives, and children,
and aged parents. They bake and stew their
flesh, and devour it with the greatest satisfaction.
Even the tender-looking female will join, if per¬
mitted, in the horrid repast.* Most recent visitors
seem to think the population is diminishing,
and both the physical and moral character of the
people deteriorating. The population is, however,
still greater, in all probability, than that of the
Georgian and Society Islands.

The dress of the Marquesans is usually made
with the inner bark of the paper-mulberry, and
consists of a broad bandage worn round the
waist, and a large square piece like a shawl cast
loosely over the upper part of the body, tied on a
knot on one shoulder, and reaching below the
knees. They wear very showy breast-plates, adorned
with hard red berries of the abrus precatorious,
called by them periperio, and their helmets are
often ingenious. Their canoes and dwellings are
in many respects similar, though inferior, to those
of the westward islands. Their system of religion,
with its appendages of maraes, priests, sorcery,
divination, and sacrifices, is, with slight variation,
a part of that which prevails throughout the Poly¬
nesian tribes, excepting that the human victims
are not buried under the pavement of the temple,
or suspended in a sacred tree, but are eaten within
* Krusenstern.

314 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the marae by the priests. ■ The tabu, or sacred
restriction, prevails in all its force among them,
and is often, in the instance of general restriction,
imposed in a very arbitrary manner. The priests
alone are said to have the power of laying a
general prohibition on certain articles of food
—vegetables, hogs, fish, &c. but every man has
the power of tabuing his own property, and the
tabu operates as powerfully on himself as any
other individual; so that, during its continuance,
he dare not appropriate to his own use the smallest
portion of the article thus prohibited.

Physically considered, the Marquesans are de¬
scribed as among the most perfect of the human
species. The men are said to be tall, strong-
built, and many of them exhibit the finest sym¬
metry of form : they are frequently upwards of six
feet high, their limbs muscular and firm, but not
heavy. Their movements are always agile, often
easy and graceful. In shape and form, the females
limbs are inferior to the men, yet often present most
agreeable models of the human figure, and are
equally distinguished by the liveliness of their
disposition, and the ease and quickness of their
gait and gestures. Some visiters, however, have
represented them as scarcely superior to the
Society Islanders. The complexion of the Mar¬
quesans is much lighter than that of Tahitians,
but it is seldom that the natural colour of
their skin is discernible, on account of the
astonishing manner in which their bodies are
tataued, and the frequent application of a pre¬
paration of turmeric and oil. The shape of the
face is generally oval. The hair is black, occa¬
sionally curling, often bound up on the crown or
side of the head in an elegant and most fantastic

THE MARQUESANS. 315

manner. They manifest a singular taste in cutting
their hair, sometimes the fore-part of the head is
shaved, at other times the whole of the head, ex¬
cepting two small patches, one above each ear,
where the hair is tied up in a sort of knot,
giving to their naked heads a very strange
appearance. Their eyebrows are good; their
eyes are not large, but black, and remarkably
brilliant and quick. Their features are small, and
well formed, but the pleasing effect they would
naturally produce is almost entirely destroyed by
the use of tatau. The Vignette to the present
Volume, representing the natives on the rocks
near the landing-place, when the Dauntless an¬
chored near the shore, exhibits their singular
appearance.

In the practice of tatauing they surpass all
other nations, both as to the extent of the
human body to which it is applied, and the
varied images and patterns thus impressed. Their
tatauing is less rude than that of the Sandwich
and Palliser islanders, less curious and intricate
in its figures than that impressed on the counte¬
nance of the New Zealanders, equally elegant,
and far more profuse, than that of the Tahitians.
The colouring matter itself is of a jet-black, but,
as seen through the white skin beneath which it
lies, it gives the limbs, and those parts of the body
to which it is applied, a blue or dark slate-
coloured hue. The females do not use it more
than those of Tahiti, but many of the men cover
the greater part of their bodies. The face is
sometimes divided into different compartments,
each of which received a varied shade of colour;
sometimes it is covered with broad stripes, crossing
each other at right angles; and sometimes it is

31 G POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

crowded with sharks, lizards, and figures of other
animals, delineated with considerable spirit, free¬
dom, and accuracy., frequently with open mouths,
or extended claws, so as to give the countenance
a most repulsive and frightful aspect. The ope¬
ration of puncturing the skin, and injecting the
colouring matter, (of which a more ample account
has been already given,) must be exceedingly
tedious and painful, as the most tender parts of
the face, such as the inner surface of the lips, and
the edges of the eye-lids, are thus punctured.

Those Marquesans who have been in the schools
in the Society Islands, have not manifested any
inferiority in mental capacity; and those who were
my pupils in the Sandwich Islands appeared to
be equally capable of learning to read, write,
cipher, &c. with the people around them, though
they usually manifested a greater restlessness and
impatience of the application necessary to make
much proficiency; this, I presume, arose from their
natural fickleness and volatile dispositions.

All those I have had any means of becoming
acquainted with, have appeared gay, thoughtless,
and good natured. I never witnessed any thing of
that ferocity of barbarism which has distinguished
their intercourse with most of those by whom they
have been visited; but I have only seen them as
guests among strangers, where the vices, practised
extensively in their native islands, were held in
abhorrence, and where dispositions of hospitality
and kindly feelings were respected and cultivated.
The testimony of almost all who have visited them
concurs in inducing the belief that their morals
are most debased, that their licentiousness is of
the most shameless kind, that their propensity to
theft is universal, and that they are quarrelsome

TIIE MARQUESANS.

317

and murderous. Since Mendano first anchored off
their shores, few ships have visited them, during
whose stay, some blood, either of the European
or natives, or both, has not been shed; and fewer
still, whose crews have not been engaged in
violent and alarming quarrels. The Russian navi¬
gator, whose testimony has been already referred
to, observes, that, though they manifested some
degree of honesty in barter, they appeared to have
neither social institutions, religion, nor humane
feelings. Their general behaviour towards foreign¬
ers has been represented as wild, violent, and fero¬
cious, adapted to inspire any feeling rather than
that of confidence or security. Their government
is feudal or aristocratical, and, for every purpose
of benefit to the community, is feeble and ineffi¬
cient. The inhabitants appear to reside in the
spacious valleys by which the high lands are inter¬
sected, the mountain sides forming the natural
boundaries. The inhabitants of each valley are
said to have their temple ; their priests, and their
chieftain or ruler; sometimes several tribes, inha¬
biting as many valleys, are united under one chief,
but we do not know of any chief who exercises the
supreme authority over any one of the islands. In
each, there appears to be two or more distinct con¬
federations ; and these are frequently at war with
each other, or with the inhabitants of some neigh¬
bouring island. Wars are frequent and cruel;
they do not appear to be carried on from motives
of ambition or revenge, so much as from a desire
for plunder, or to secure a feast upon the bodies
of their enemies. The skulls of the captured are
sometimes worn as trophies of a warrior’s prowess,
or are offered for sale to foreigners. Human bones
constitute part of the furniture of their dwellings,

318 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

and human hair ornaments most of their implements
of war. According to the testimony of the Euro¬
pean Missionaries, by whom they have been most
recently visited, part, if not all, the bodies of the
slain furnish the victor’s banquet. Their feeding
on each other, does not appear to be confined
to seasons of famine, or the feast of triumph, but
to be practised from motives more repulsive and
criminal. LangsdorfF, who accompanied the Rus¬
sian embassy to Japan, states, on the authority of
a Frenchman who had resided some years in the
islands, that the tauas, or priests, often regale
themselves on human flesh, merely from the de¬
light they take in it. For this purpose, they act as
if under the influence of inspiration, and, after
varied contortions of the body, appear to fall into
a deep sleep, before a multitude of spectators;
when they awake, they relate what the spirit has
said to them in their dream. The communication
sometimes is, that a woman or a man, a tataued or
or untataued man, a fat or lean man, an old man,
or a young man from the next valley, or border of
the next stream, must be seized, and brought to
them. Those to whom this is related immediately
conceal themselves near a footpath or river, and
the first person that passes that way, bearing any
resemblance to the description given by the priest,
is taken, conveyed to the marae, and eaten by
the priests.* Conduct more diabolical than that
here described, cannot easily be conceived of. I
have always been reluctant to admit the canniba¬
lism of any of the Polynesian tribes, but the con¬
curring testimony of foreigners of every nation, by
whom the Marquesans have been visited, and of
the native teachers from the Society Islands, who
* LangsdorfF, vol. ii. p. 150.

THE MARQUES A NS.

319

have resided for a long time among them, forces
upon my mind the belief, that they perpetrate this
unnatural crime to as great an extent, and under
circumstances as aggravating, as it has been met
with in any age of the world, or among any por¬
tion of mankind.

The proximity of the Marquesans to the Society
Islands—frequent intercourse formerly maintained
between the islands by means of trading vessels—■
their identity in language, traditions, manners, and
customs with the latter—their numbers, which are
said to exceed those of the inhabitants of the southern
islands—could not fail to make them objects of in¬
terest to those engaged in improving the temporal
and spiritual state of the Tahitians. In 1797, a Mis¬
sion was attempted in Tahuata, but, after a residence
of about twelve months, Mr. Crook was unexpectedly
removed from the islands, and no attempt to intro¬
duce Christianity amongst them was made until
1821, when two natives, from Huahine, were ap¬
pointed to these islands; and I accompanied them,
for the purpose of assisting their introduction,
and ascertaining the state and disposition of the
people, with a view to the ultimate establishment
of European Missionaries among them. Circum¬
stances occurred during the voyage, which pre¬
vented the native teachers from settling at their
original destination, and led to their residence in
the Sandwich Islands. In 1225 the attempt was
renewed, and Mr. Crook conducted thither two
native teachers from Huahine, and one from Tahiti.
Several natives, who had known Mr. Crook during
his former abode, welcomed his return with glad¬
ness. The females recited a ballad composed on
his arrival, as the adopted son of their late chief
Tenae. Some of the inhabitants, he heard, had

320 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

destroyed their idols. The greater part of the
inhabitants of the island, however, were exceedingly
rude, vicious, and disorderly in their behaviour, as
well as strongly attached to their superstitions.
After remaining about a month among them, hold¬
ing repeated conferences with the chiefs and
priests, Mr. Crook left the native teachers under
the protection of a friendly chief in Tahuata, or
Santa Christina. Their prospects of usefulness
were at first encouraging; but the wickedness of
the people was so great, their conduct so violent
and alarming, even to the Tahitians, whom they
threaten to kill and devour, that they were obliged
to return. They were succeeded by others, who
were obliged to leave in 1828. In 1829* Messrs.
Pritchard and Simpson visited the islands, but
such was the impression made upon their minds by
the turbulent and repulsive conduct of the natives,
that they deemed the establishment of a Euro¬
pean Mission impracticable, and returned, leaving
the two native Missionaries, who had been already
two years in Uahou, to prosecute their perilous and
self-denying labours. A chief, whose name is Teato,
received them with professions of friendship, and
at first treated them kindly—but their privations are
great, and prospects dark. These are the only indi¬
viduals at present employed in endeavouring to
soften the savage character, and restrain the brutal
and murderous habits, of the Marquesans. Their
ferocity, insatiable desire of fire-arms and ammuni¬
tion ; their love of war, its sanguinary character,
and the inhuman practice of cannibalism with which
it is usually concluded; their inveterate attach¬
ment to a system which sanctions every vice, and
encourages every cruelty; their abominable licen¬
tiousness, and natural fickleness of disposition-—

321

Pitcairn’s island.

appear to present insurmountable barriers to the
success of efforts such as those now employed ;
and nothing but a belief in the Divine promises
and energy, confirmed by the recent events
which have transpired in the Society Islands,
can induce the hope of any favourable change ;
but from these sources we are warranted in con¬
fidently expecting it. Recent tidings from Tahiti
announce the preparation of one of the Missionaries
to visit them, and settle native teachers in each
island. Every friend of humanity will cordially
wish that this enterprise, not less benevolent than
hazardous, may be successful.

There are several good harbours among the
Marquesas, but, on account of the turbulent and
treacherous conduct of the natives, few of them,
except in St. Christina, are visited.

Near the south-eastern extremity of the Dan¬
gerous Archipelago is situated an island, about
six miles in circumference, having a bold rocky
shore, with high land in the interior, hilly and ver¬
dant. It is supposed to be La Incarnation of
Quiros, but appears to have been discovered by
Carteret in 1767, and by him called, after the name
of the gentleman by whom it was first seen,

pitcairn’s island.

At that time it was uninhabited, and, being des¬
titute of any harbour, and dangerous to approach
even by boats, attracted but little attention, though
it has since excited very general interest in Eng¬
land. It is situated, according to Sir T. Staines,
in 25° S. Lat. and 130° 25' W. Long. When the
murderous quarrels between the mutineers of
the Bounty and the natives of Tubuai obliged the
former, in 1789 and 1790, to leave that island,
nr. y

322 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

they proceeded to Tahiti. Those who wished to re¬
main there left the ship, and the others stood out to
sea in search of some unfrequented and uninhabited
spot of the ocean, that might afford them subsist¬
ence and concealment. Proceeding in an easterly
direction, they reached Pitcairn’s Island, and could
scarcely have desired a place more suited to their
purpose. Here they run the Bounty on shore,
removed the pigs, goats, and fowls to the land,
and, having taken every thing on shore that they
supposed would be useful, set fire to the vessel.
The party consisted of twenty-seven persons, viz.
ten Englishmen, six Tahitians, and eleven women ;*
or, according to another account, of nine English¬
men, and twelve women. In a sheltered and elevated
part of the island they erected their dwellings, de¬
posited in the earth the seeds and young plants which
they had brought from Tahiti, and commenced the
cultivation of the yam, and other roots, for their sub¬
sistence* New troubles awaited them. The wife of
Christian, the leader of the mutineers, died; and he
is said to have seized by force the wife of one of
the Tahitians. Revenge or jealousy prompted the
Tahitian to take the life of Christian, who was shot
while at work in his garden, about two years after
his arrival. The English and the Tahitians seemed
bent on each other’s destruction. Six English¬
men were killed, and Adams, now the only
survivor of the crew, was wounded : every Tahitian
man was put to death. The history of the mu¬
tineers is truly tragical.—The children of these
unhappy men have been trained up with the most in¬
defatigable care and attention to morals and religion
by John Adams, who, with his interesting family
around him, remained undiscovered and unvisited
* Narrative of Briton's Voyage.

Pitcairn’s island. 323

f6r nearly twenty years; when Captain Mayhew
Folger, in the American ship Topaz, of Boston,
touched at their island; and, after maintain¬
ing a friendly intercourse with them for two days,
prosecuted his voyage. No further information
respecting them transpired until 1814, when
Captain Sir T. Staines, in his majesty’s ship
Briton, on his passage from the Marquesas to
Valparizo, unexpectedly came in sight of the
island. Canoes were soon perceived coming off
from the shore ; and it is not easy to conceive
the astonishment of the commander and his officers,
when those on board hailed them in the English
language. The surprise of the young men in the
canoe, who were the sons of the mutineers, when
they came on board an English man-of-war, was
scarcely less than that of their visitors. The
frankness with which they replied to the interroga¬
tories of the captain, evinced the unsophisticated
manner in which they had been brought up ; and
their account of their belief in the most impor¬
tant doctrines, and practice of the great duties
of religion, reflected the highest honour on their
venerable instructor. When they sat down to
breakfast, without any hypocritical or formal show
of devotion, but with a simplicity and earnestness
that alone astonished and reproved those around
them, they knelt down, and implored “ permission
to partake in peace of what was set before them
and at the close of their repast, “ resuming the same
attitude, offered a fervent prayer of thanksgiving
for the indulgence they had received.” The cap¬
tains of the Briton and Tagus went on shore, and
were met on the brow of the hill by Adams’s
daughter, who, after the first emotions of surprise
had subsided, led them to the “ beautiful little

y 2

324 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

village, formed on an oblong square, with trees
of various kinds irregularly interspersed. The
houses,’' Sir T. Staines adds, “ were small, but
regular, convenient, and of unequalled cleanli¬
ness.” After a very affecting interview with John
Adams, (who appeared about sixty years of age,)
and with his rising community, who with tears
and entreaties begged them not to take their father
from them, the captains returned to their ships,
and sent to these interesting people such useful
articles as they could spare. There were forty-eight
persons on the island at this time. This small island
is fertile, though water is not abundant. As soon
as their circumstances became known, a liberal
supply of agricultural implements, and tools, were
sent from Calcutta. Bibles and prayer-books
were also forwarded by the Directors of the London
Missionary Society. They were gladly received by
Adams, and gratefully acknowledged.

Since that time the number of inhabitants has
considerably increased, and, at the present time,
amounts to about eighty, including the seamen
who have left their vessels, married females of the
island, and have taken up their residence on shore.
Apprehensive of the inadequacy of the produc¬
tions of the island to supply their wants, especially
in fuel and water, they intimated, four or five years
ago, their wish to be taken to another country;
and it appeared probable that they might remove
to the Society Islands, or some extensive and fer¬
tile, but uninhabited island in the Pacific : this
desire has, however, ceased, and, since the death of
Adams, they have expressed their wishes to remain.
I have been near their island more than once, and
regret that I had not an opportunity of visiting
them. The captain of the ship in which I returned

EASTER ISLAND.

325

to England had been on shore twice; and his
accounts, with those of others whom I have met
with in the Pacific, were such as could not fail to
excite a deep concern for their welfare.

Two degrees farther from the equator, and rather
more than twenty 'degrees nearer the American
continent, an island is situated, which has attracted
considerable notice from most of the navigators
who have prosecuted their discoveries in the Pa¬
cific. It was discovered by Roggewein, on Easter
day 1722, and called

Easter Island.

This is a small hilly island, bearing evident marks
of volcanic origin, or of having been subject to the
action of subterraneous fire. The hills are conical,
and were by Kotzebue supposed to resemble those
of Hawaii. Nothing can be more contradictory
than the descriptions different voyagers have given
of the appearance of this island. Some, as in
Roggewein’s account, and that of La Perouse,
representing it as rich and fertile ; others, as Fors¬
ter, describing it as parched and desolate. The
population, which La Perouse estimated at about
two thousand, is supposed by Kotzebue to have
increased; by others they are said to have de¬
creased, and not to exceed 1,200. The inhabit¬
ants are evidently part of the race which has spread
itself extensively over the isles of the Pacific, and
they evince that propensity to licentiousness and
theft which mark the larger communities.

The most remarkable objects in Easter Island
are its monuments of stone-work and sculpture,
which, though rude and imperfect, are superior to
any found among the more numerous and civilized
tribes inhabiting the South Sea Islands.- These
monuments consist in a number of terraces or plat-

326 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

forms, built with stones, cut and fixed with great
exactness and skill, forming, though destitute of
cement, a strong durable pile. On these terraces are
fixed colossal figures or busts. They appear to be
monuments erected in memory of ancient kings or
chiefs, as each bust or column had a distinct name.
One of these, of which Forster took the dimen¬
sions, consisted of a single stone twenty feet high
and five wide, and represented a human figure to
the waist; on the crown of the head, a stone of
cylindrical shape was placed erect: this stone was
of a different colour from the rest of the figure,
which appeared to be formed of a kind of cellular
lava. In one place, seven of these statues or busts
stood together :* one, which they saw lying on the
ground, was twenty-seven feet long and nine in
diameter. The largest, however, that La Perouse
saw, was fourteen feet six inches high, and seven
feet six inches in diameter. The inhabitants of
many of the northern and eastern islands make
stone representations of their deities, and of their
departed ancestors, but none equal in size to those
found in Easter Island. When Cook visited this
island, the natives appeared to possess but few
means of subsistence, and to inhabit very small
and comfortless dwellings. A greater abundance
appeared, when they were subsequently visited by
the French navigator; their habitations appeared
more comfortable, one of which was 310 feet long
and ten feet wide.

Easter Island is situated in 27 deg. 8 sec,
south lat., and 109 deg. 43 sec. west long. It is
called by the inhabitants Waihu.

It has been already stated, that Magellan was the
first European w r ho sailed from the Atlantic to the
* Forster’s Voyage, vol, i. p, 586.

JUAN FERNANDEZ. 327

Pacific. The navigation of the Straits was often
tedious and unsafe ; yet it was the only communi¬
cation known for nearly a century after its dis¬
covery, when, in January 1616, Schouten and
Le Maire, two Dutch navigators, passed round the
southern extremity of the American continent,
which, in honour of the town whence they sailed,
they designated Cape Horn. This course is now
almost invariably preferred; and though the sea
is high, and the gales are often boisterous and
severe, the passage round the Cape is found
more expeditious, and less hazardous, than the
way through the Straits.

One of the first objects that arrests the atten¬
tion of many, soon after they enter the Pacific,
is the small island of Juan Fernandez, situated in
lat. 33 deg. 49 sec. S. long. 80.30. The centre is
mountainous, and the shore rocky, having one or
two good harbours. It has received its designa¬
tion from its discoverer,* a Spanish pilot, Juan
Fernandez, who originally, with several Spanish
families, settled on its shores, but removed to
the opposite coast of Chili, when the inhabitants
became subject to his countrymen. It is dis¬
tinguished by its verdant and romantic appear¬
ance, the luxuriance with which peaches, necta¬
rines, apricots, and plums, (produced from seeds
left by different visitors,) grow in different parts of
the island, and by the bright red colour of the soil. —
But it is chiefly celebrated as having been the
abode of Alexander Selkirk, a native of Fife, in
Scotland, who, being left on shore by the captain of
the ship in which he sailed, remained on solitude
on the island four years and four months, when he
was released by Captain Rogers^ on the 2d of
* Rogers’ Voyage of Duke and Duchess.

328 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

February, 1709.* During his residence here, he
subsisted on such vegetables as he found on the
island, with fish, and the broiled flesh of goats,
which he pursued with surprising agility among the
rocky and mountainous parts of the island. Cap¬
tain Rogers observes, that when he came on board
“ he was clothed in goat-skins, and looked wilder
than the first owners of themand adds, “ he had so
much forgotten his language, that we could scarcely
understand him.” Cowper, with his accustomed
sensibility of feeling and felicity of expression, has
commemorated his exile in those beautiful lines
which commence with, u 1 am monarch of all I
survey.” The adventures of Selkirk, in Juan Fer¬
nandez, also furnished De Foe with the materials
for his unrivalled “ Robinson Crusoe.”

* Rogers* Voyage,

NEW HOLLAND.

329

CHAP. XII.

South-western borders of Polynesia—New Holland—
Tempest off the coast—Observations on the aborigines
—New Zealand—Situation — Soil — Productions—Cli¬
mate—Forest scenery—Native flax—Population—Sa¬
vage dispositions of the people—Cannibalism—Govern¬
ment-Slavery—in New Zealand—in Rio Janeiro—
Cruel treatment of New Zealand slaves—Superstitions
—Instance of parental tenderness—Occurrences at New
Zealand—Tatauing—Sham fighting and war dances—
Influence of reports from Tahiti—Prospects of the Mis¬
sion.

The preceding chapter contains a brief notice of
the principal islands and clusters in the eastern
part of Polynesia, and which usually arrest the
attention of those who, by the way of Cape Horn,
enter the Pacific. The countries on the south¬
western borders of this ocean, are not less interest¬
ing ; and, in many respects, they are entitled to a
greater degree of attention. -

The most important of these are New Holland,
and Van Diemen’s Land. In the former is the
new settlement on the Swan River, and the im¬
portant colony of New South Wales ; in the latter,
its flourishing appendages in Van Diemen’s Land.

The navigation of the northern part of this ex¬
tensive island is intricate and dangerous. The
shores of the southern part are rocky and bold,

330 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

affording, however, several harbours, of which
Port Jackson, leading to the town of Sidney, is
probably the most capacious and secure. The
weather is often stormy and the sea tempestuous,
and fatal to the bark that may be exposed to its
violence. We experienced somewhat of its fury
on our first arrival off the coast in 1816.

Our passage from Rio Janeiro had been pleasant;
and, eleven weeks after leaving Brazil, we made
the western coast of Van Diemen’s Land. We
passed through Bass’s Straits on the same day, and
sailed along the eastern shore of New Holland
towards Port Jackson. Soon after day-light the
next morning, we perceived a sail some miles be¬
fore us, which on nearer approach proved to be a
small schooner. Our captain, on visiting her, found
only three men on board, who were in the greatest
distress. They had been at Kangaroo Island pro¬
curing seal-skins, with a quantity of which they
were now bound to Sydney. They had remained
on the island, catching seals, till their provisions
were nearly expended, and, during their voyage,
had encountered much heavy weather, had been
nearly lost, and were so exhausted by fatigue, want
of food, and constant exposure, that they could
not even alter their sails when a change in the
wind rendered it necessary. They had been for
some time living on seal-skins; pieces of which
were found in a saucepan over the fire, when the
boat’s crew boarded them. The men from our
ship trimmed their sails, and our captain offered to
take them in tow; but as they were so near their
port, which they hoped to reach the next day, they
declined his proposal. When he returned to the
ship, he sent them some bread and beef, a bottle
of wine, and some water; which the poor starving

A DISAPPOINTMENT.

331

men received with indescribable eagerness and joy.
The seamen who conveyed these supplies returned
to the ship, and we kept on our way. We did
not, however, hear of their arrival; and as we re¬
mained nearly six months in Sydney after this time,
and received no tidings of them, it is probable their
crazy bark was wrecked, ox foundered during a
heavy storm, that came on in the course of the fol¬
lowing day.

The wind from the south continued fresh and
favourable, and in the forenoon of the next day we
sailed towards the shore, under the influence of
exhilarated spirits, and the confident expectation
of landing in Port Jackson before sunset. About
noon we found ourselves near enough the coast to
distinguish different objects along the shore, and
soon discovered the flag-staff erected on one of the
heads leading to Sydney, our port of destination,
about four miles distant from us, but rather to
windward. The captain and officers being strangers
to the port, some time was spent in scanning the
coast, in the hope of finding an opening still farther
northward ; but at twelve o’clock our apprehensions
of having missed our port were confirmed, as the
latitude was then found, by an observation of the
sun, to be four miles to the northward of Sydney
heads. We had, in fact, sailed with a strong but
favourable wind, four miles past the harbour which
we ought to have entered. Hope, which had
beamed in every eye, and lighted up every coun¬
tenance with anticipated pleasure, when we first
neared the land, had alternated with fear, or given
way to most intense anxiety, when we witnessed
the uncertainty that prevailed among our com¬
panions, as to our actual situation; but disappoint¬
ment the most distressing was now strongly marked

/

332 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

in every countenance. “ About ship,” exclaimed
the captain; immediately the ship’s head was
turned from the land, and, steering as near the
wind as possible, we proceeded towards the open
sea. After sailing in this direction for some time,
the ship was again turned towards the shore;
but the wind, which during the forenoon had
been so favourable, was now against us, and as
soon as we could distinguish the flag-staff on the
coast, we found ourselves farther from it than
before. The wind increased ; and as the evening
advanced, a storm came on, which raged with
fearful violence. The night was unusually dark;
the long and heavy waves of the Pacific rolled
in foam around our vessel; the stormy wind
howled through the rigging; all hands were on
deck, and twice or thrice, while in the act of turn¬
ing the ship from the land, the sails were rent by
the tempest; while the hoarse and hollow roaring
of the breakers, and the occasional glimmering of
lights on the coast, combined to convince us of
our situation, and the proximity of our danger.
The depression of spirits, resulting from the dis¬
appointment, which had been more or less felt by
all on board, the noise of the tempest, the vocifera¬
tions and frequent imprecations of the officers, the
hurried steps, rattling of ropes and cordage, and
almost incessant labours of the seamen on deck,
and the heavy and violent motion of the vessel,
which detached from their fastenings, and dashed
with violence from one side of the ship to the other,
chests of drawers, trunks, and barrels, that had re¬
mained secure during the voyage, produced a state
of mind peculiarly distressing. The darkness and
general disorder that prevailed in the cabin, with
the constant apprehension of striking on some fatal

TEMPEST OFF PORT JACKSON. 333

rock, that might lie unseen near the craggy and
iron-bound shore, and of being either ingulfed in the
mighty deep, or wrecked on the inhospitable coast,
rendered the night altogether one of the most
alarming and anxious that we had passed since
our departure from England. Amidst the con¬
fusion by which we were surrounded, we expe¬
rienced comparative composure of mind, in reliance
on the protection of the Most High,

66 When o’er the fearful depth we hung,

High on the broken wave.

We knew He was not slow to hear,

Nor impotent to save.”

In such a season, confidence in Him who holdeth
the wind in its fists, and the waters in the hollow
of his hand, can alone impart serenity and support.

As the morning advanced, the storm abated;
and at sunrise we found ourselves at a considerable
distance from the shore. Contrary winds kept us
out at sea for nearly a fortnight, which was by far
the most irksome part of our voyage. At length
we again approached the coast, and were delighted,
as we sailed along it on the morning of the eleventh
day, to behold a pilot-boat steering towards us.
Our vessel had been several times seen from the
shore, since the day of our first disappointment;
and as soon as we had appeared in sight this morn¬
ing, the governor of New South Wales, then at
Sydney, had despatched a pilot, with orders to go
out even sixty miles, rather than return without
bringing the vessel in. The pilot boarded us about
twenty miles from Port Jackson, and conducted
us safely within the heads, in the evening of the
same day. Early the next morning, we proceeded
to Sydney Cove, where we cast anchor on the
22d of July, after a passage, including our stay in

334 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Rio Janeiro, of only a few days more than six
months.

Five months elapsed before we could meet with
a conveyance to the Society Islands. This deten¬
tion, however, favoured me with an opportunity of
visiting the chief settlements of New South Wales,
and beholding several of the rare and interesting
animals and vegetable productions of that impor¬
tant colony. I was happy also to experience,
during this period, the friendship and attentions
of the Rev. S. Marsden, senior chaplain of the
colony, the steady and indefatigable friend of
Missions and Missionaries in the South Seas. He
resided at Paramatta, where we passed the greater
part of our stay in New South Wales, in the family
of the late Mr. Hassel, formerly a Missionary in
Tahiti.

The settlements in New South Wales are im¬
portant and prosperous; the whole population is
about 40,000, and the colony will, perhaps at no
very remote period, be inferior to few attached to
the parent country. Combining, in its ample range
of territory, every variety of climate in the tem¬
perate and torrid zones, it is at once adapted to
the growth of the corn of Europe, and the culture
of cotton, coffee, sugar, tobacco, and other valu¬
able productions of those countries which lie within
the tropics. The supply of labour furnished by the
convict population, in agriculture or the mechanic
arts, enables the settler to prosecute his plans of local
improvement or distant commerce ; while the exile
is here favoured with an opportunity of retrieving
his character, and securing the enjoyment of liberty
and comparative comfort. The number of indi¬
viduals, of intelligence and enterprise, who, as
settlers, have transferred to this country their

ABORIGINES OF NEW HOLLAND. 335

families and their capital, has elevated the tone of
moral feeling and public sentiment, among the
more respectable classes of society. The enter¬
prise and activity of the merchants of Sydney, and
the public spirit, industry, and perseverance of the
grazier and the agriculturist, are rapidly augment¬
ing the resources of the colony itself, and increasing
its relative importance. Although the moral and
religious state of its population may not have re¬
ceived so much attention as the peculiar character
of the lower classes have required, it has not
been neglected. Orphan schools have been esta¬
blished, and liberally supported, and other bene¬
volent institutions have been founded. A bible
society has for some years existed, and in no part
of the world would the influence of its precepts
be more salutary. In addition to these means, the
indefatigable labours of the clergymen of the
church of England, and other communions, can¬
not but be highly valuable to the inhabitants of this
rising colony. 1

In company with Mr. S. O. Hassel, I made
several excursions into the interior of the country,
where we frequently saw the inhabitants more
completely in a state of nature, than those we met
with in the vicinity of the principal towns. The
aborigines are but thinly spread over that part of
New Holland bordering on the colony ; and though
the population has been estimated at three mil¬
lions, I am disposed to think that, notwithstanding
the geographical extent of the country, it does not
contain so many inhabitants. Their appearance is
generally repulsive, their faces looking more de¬
formed from their often wearing a skewer through
the cartilage of the nose. Their colour is dark olive
or black, and their hair rather crisped than woolly.

336 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

In proportion to the body, their limbs are small
and weak, while their gait is awkward. Excepting
in the neighbourhood of the chief towns, they were
usually destitute of clothing, though armed with a
spear or lance, with which, even at a great distance,
they are fatal marksmen. They are represented as
indolent, and cruel. Agriculture is unknown among
them, although the indigenous preductions of the
country yield them little if any subsistence. Their
food is scanty, precarious, and loathsome, some¬
times consisting of grubs and reptiles taken in the
hollow or decayed trees of the forest. Occasion¬
ally, however, they procure excellent fish from the
sea, or the lakes, rivers, &c. Their dwellings are
low huts of bark, which afford but a mere temporary
shelter from the weather.

They appear, in physical structure, and other
respects, to resemble the inhabitants of Papua, or
New Guinea, and of the interior of Sumatra, and
other large islands of the Asiatic archipelago.
They are a distinct people from the inhabitants of
New Zealand or the South Sea Islands, altoge¬
ther inferior to them, and apparently the lowest
grade of human kind. Their habits are fugitive
and migratory, and this has perhaps greatly con¬
tributed to the failure of the benevolent attempts
that have been made, by the government and
others, to meliorate their condition, and elevate
their character. The school for aboriginal chil¬
dren, under the patronage of the government, was
a most interesting institution : 1 frequently visited
it, and was surprised to learn that, though treated
with every kindness, the young scholars, when an
opportunity occurred, frequently left the school,
and fled to their native woods, where every effort
to discover their retreat, or to reclaim them, proved

NEW ZEALAND.

337

ineffectual. It is peculiarly gratifying to know
that the local authorities, and the government at
home, are desirous to aid, by every suitable means,
the education, civilization, and moral improvement
of the aborigines of New South Wales; and, not¬
withstanding their present abject condition, and
all the existing barriers to their improvement, it is
most confidently to be anticipated, that the period
will arrive, when this degraded and wretched
people shall be raised to the enjoyment of all the
blessings of intelligence, civilization, and Chris¬
tianity.

To the eastward of Port Jackson and Van Die¬
men’s Land, and rather more than twenty degrees
distant from them, the large and important country
of New Zealand is situated. It was discovered by
Tasman, a Dutch navigator, in 1642. He sailed
along the western shore of the southern island, to
a deep indentation, which he supposed to be a
bay; where he anchored. To this place, in conse¬
quence of an attack from the natives, he gave the
name of Murderers’ Bay ; and, sailing to the north¬
ward, anchored in the bay of the island of the
Three Kings, and finally left the coast without land¬
ing. In 1770 the coasts were explored by Capt.
Cook, who discovered that the bay which Tasman
had entered was the opening to a passage, through
which he sailed, and which bears his name. It
has since been repeatedly visited by traders, for its
excellent timber, or by vessels requiring refresh¬
ments.

New Zealand, which forms the southern bound¬
ary of Polynesia, comprises two large, and several
small, islands, extending from 34 to 47 degrees
south lat. and from 166 to about 180 degrees east
long. The appearance of the coast is bold and

hi. z

338 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

rocky, the land is high and rugged, and the
southern mountains are occasionally covered with
snow. In the large northern island, where the
principal, if not the only, settlements of Europeans
are situated, the climate is salubrious, the thermo¬
meter ranging between 40 and 80 degrees, avoid¬
ing the heat of the tropical climates, yet warmer
than most of the temperate latitudes, generally
equable, and seldom experiencing those sudden
vicissitudes so frequent and injurious in the variable
climate of England. The soil in many parts is
fertile; and though few articles of food are indi¬
genous, or when introduced grow spontaneously,
yet it is capable of a high state of cultivation, and
would probably favour not only the growth of
wheat and other grain, but also of many of the
fruits and valuable productions of the temperate
and tropical climates. The mountains do not
appear so lofty and broken as those of the Society
Islands, and consequently the soil may be culti
vated with greater facility. In addition to the
growth of com introduced by Mr. Marsden, and
the assistants of the Missions at the several sta¬
tions, the natives have long cultivated the Irish
potato with facility and advantage. It is not
indigenous, but was left by some foreign ships,
and it not only furnishes a valuable addition to
the means of subsistence for the natives, but a
very acceptable article of provision for the crews
of the vessels by whem they* are visited. Other
European roots and vegetables have been intro¬
duced, but with less success. The kumara, or
sweet potato, has been long cultivated, although
the fern root furnishes a principal part of the food
for the common people at some seasons of the
year. The country is favourable for rearing cattle

NEW ZEALAND.

339

and sheep, as well as the different kinds of poultry.
Violent storms are sometimes experienced on the
coast of New Zealand, yet the climate, especially
in the northern island, is salubrious and temperate,
considerably cooler than that of the Society Isles.
There the thermometer is never below 60; here it
is sometimes as low as 42, but it seldom rises higher
than between 70 and 80 ; while in Tahiti it is
occasionally upwards of 90 in the shade. The river
Thames, to the south-east, is a fine and capacious
harbour. The coasts are well stocked with fish,
which, with potatoes and fern root, constitute the
food of the inhabitants. These advantages, toge¬
ther with its local situation in regard to New Hol¬
land, and the value of its indigenous productions,
render it of importance to the colony.

Among the native productions of New Zealand,
the most valuable hitherto discovered, is the timber
called pine. This tree, of which there are two
kinds, called koisky and kaokatere, resembles in
every respect, excepting its foliage, parts of fruc¬
tification, and habits of growth, the pines of North
America and Europe, and it has been found exceed¬
ingly valuable, not only for the ordinary purposes
for which pine or deal timber is available, but
also in furnishing masts and spars for vessels.
Vast quantities are exported to New South Wales,
and several large vessels have conveyed cargoes of
it to England. Forests of this timber are extensive,
and contain trees of the largest size.

In 1816, I was at New Zealand, and visited
Waikadie for the purpose of procuring spars. In
company with our captain, and Waivea, the
chief of the district, we visited the adjacent
forests. The earth was completely covered-with
thick-spreading and forked roots, brambles, and

z 2

340 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

creeping plants, overgrown with moss, and inter¬
woven so as to form a kind of uneven matting
which rendered travelling exceedingly difficult
The underwood was in many parts thick, and the
trunks of the lofty trees rose like clusters of pillars
supporting the canopy of interwoven boughs and
verdant foliage, through which the sun’s rays sel¬
dom penetrated. There were no trodden paths,
and the wild and dreary solitude of the place was
only broken by the voice of some lonely bird,
which chirped among the branches of the bushes,
or, startled by our intrusion on its retirement,
darted across our way. A sensation of solemnity
and awe involuntarily arose in the mind, while
contemplating a scene of such peculiar character,
so unlike the ordinary haunts of man, and so
adapted, from the silent grandeur of His works, to
elevate the soul with the sublimest conceptions of
the Almighty. I was remarkably struck with the
gigantic size of many of the trees, some of which
appeared to rise nearly one hundred feet without
a branch, while two men with extended arms could
not clasp their trunks.

Another valuable article of spontaneous growth
in New Zealand, is the native flax, phormium
tenax. I saw considerable quantities of the
plant growing in the low lands, and apparently
moist parts of the soil. It is not like the flax or
hemp plants of England, but resembles, in its
appearance and manner of growth, the flag or iris :
the long broad sword-shaped leaves furnish the
fibre so useful in making dresses for the natives,
fishing-lines, twine, and strong cordage employ¬
ed as running rigging in most of the vessels
that trade with the islanders. It is a serviceable
plant, and will probably furnish an important

NEW ZEALANDERS. 341

article of commerce with New South Wales, or
England.

The population of New Zealand has been esti¬
mated at half a million; which estimate must, from
the unorganized state of society, be mere conjec¬
ture, so that it may exceed this number. The inha¬
bitants are certainly far more numerous than those
of the Society Islands, and appear exempt from
many of the diseases which afflict their northern
neighbours. They are a hardy industrious race,
generally strong and active, not only capable of
great physical exertion, but of high moral culture,
and are by no means deficient in intellect. Their
tatauing and carving frequently display great
taste ; and when we consider the tools with which
the latter is performed, it increases our admiration
of their skill and perseverance. They are, never¬
theless, addicted to the greatest vices that stain
the human character—treachery, cannibalism, in¬
fanticide, and murder. Less superstitious than
many of the natives of the Pacific, but perhaps as
much addicted to cruelty as any of them, if not
more so ; war appears to be their delight, and the
events of their lives are little else than a series of
acts of oppression, robbery, and bloodshed. A
conquering army, returning from an expedition
of murder and devastation, bring home the men,
women, and children of the vanquished, as
trophies of their victory. These unhappy beings are
either reduced to perpetual slavery, or sacrificed, to
satiate the vengeance of their enemies. On these
occasions, little children, whose feeble hands
could scarcely hold the knife or dagger, have
been initiated in the dreadful work of death,
and have seemed to feel delight in stabbing cap¬
tive children, thus imbruing their infant hands in

342

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the blood of those who, under other circum¬
stances, they would have hailed as playmates,
and have joined in innocent and mirthful pas¬
times. Their wars are not only sanguinary, but
horribly demoralizing and brutal, from the cir¬
cumstance of the captives, or the slain, furnishing
the victors with their triumphal banquet. This
revolting manner of destroying, in consequence of
being captured, was rendered more horrid from the
brutal manner in which it was performed : some¬
times they chopped off the legs and arms, and
otherwise mangled the body before they put the
victim to death.

The cannibalism of the inhabitants of New Zea¬
land, and other islands of the Pacific, has been
doubted by some, and denied by others; and
every mind influenced by the common sympathies
of humanity, must naturally resist the conviction
of his species ever sinking to a degradation so
abject, and a barbarity so horrible, until it be
substantiated by the clearest evidence of indis¬
putable facts. But however ardently we may
have hoped that the accounts of their anthro-
pophagism were only the result of inferences
drawn from their familiarity with, and apparent
satisfaction in, deeds of savage murder—the cir¬
cumstantial accounts of the Missionaries and
others, who have resided amongst them, no longer
admit any doubt to be entertained of the revolting
and humiliating fact.

The intercourse they have had with the greater
part of the foreign shipping visiting their shores,
has not been such as to soften the natural ferocity
of their character, to improve their morals, inspire
them with confidence, advance their civilization,
or promote peace and harmony among them-

GOVERNMENT-CLASSES.

343

selves; frequently it has been the reverse, as the
affair of the Boyd, and the desolation of the island
of Tipahee, affectingly demonstrate.

The government of New Zealand is aristocratical
or feudal, and is oppressive, arbitrary, and cruel*
Each chief is supreme among his own tribe or
clan, and independent of every other. In this
respect their system corresponds with that which
prevails in the Marquesas and some other islands,
where right is unknown, and no law acknow¬
ledged but that of power. Many of the chiefs
have probably acquired their ascendancy by skill
and prowess in war, and maintain their authority
by their fame, or superiority in strength and cou¬
rage. The greater part of the people appear to be
comprehended under three classes—the chiefs and
warriors, with their relatives and companions; the
families of peasantry or agriculturists, and fisher¬
men ; and the slaves. The condition of the latter
is most deplorable and wretched. They are cap¬
tives who have been taken in war, or the children
of such, and are enslaved for life. On them
devolves the labour of tilling the ground, dressing
food, and performing all the drudgery for the
household of their chief or master. Slavery in
every state of society is inhuman and unjust to
man, and is criminal before God; but I am dis¬
posed to regard it as less intolerable in civilized
than in savage society. It certainly is so in those
parts where I have witnessed its operation. I
never saw it in all the repulsive deformity in which
it exists in the West Indies, but in South America
I had frequent opportunities of observing the
manner in which the unhappy captives were
treated in that part of the world. The circum¬
stances under which I first saw those, whom

344 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

violence and avarice had depri\ ed of their liberty,
were affecting.

On the 20th of March, 1816, we cast anchor at
the mouth of the harbour of Rio Janeiro. The
light of the next morning presented before us one
of the most magnificent and extensive landscapes
I ever beheld. The mass of granite rock, sur¬
mounted by the fort of Santa Cruz on our right,
the towering Sugar-loaf mountain on our left, the
picturesque island at the mouth of the harbour,
the distant city of St. Sebastian, the turrets of the
castle, the cupolas and spires of the convent,
the lofty range of mountains in the interior, whose
receding summits were almost lost in aerial per¬
spective, where

“ Distance lends enchantment to the view,”

all successively met the eye, together with the
widely expanded and beautiful bay, one of the
finest in the world, studded with verdant islands,
rendered more picturesque by the white cottages
with which they were adorned. The whole scene
was enlivened by the numerous boats, with their
white and singularly shaped sails, incessantly glid¬
ing to and fro on the smooth surface of the water,
and the shipping of different nations riding at
anchor in the bay, or moored to the shore. Among
the vessels, which exhibited almost every variety of
size and form, those by no means least interesting
to us, were two British frigates; one of which was
the Alceste, on her way to China, to join Lord
Amherst’s embassy. These objects excited in our
minds a variety of pleasing sensations, heightened
by the circumstance that the country before us
contained the first port we had entered since leav¬
ing England.

A SLAVE-SHIP.

345

There is something very exhilarating in ap¬
proaching land, or entering a friendly port, after a
long voyage; and the pleasure we felt on this
occasion was so much increased by the novel and
delightful landscapes incessantly opening to our
view, as we sailed along the bay, that we were
unwilling for a moment to leave the deck. Our
enjoyment was, however, interrupted by a spec¬
tacle adapted to awaken sensations very different
indeed from those inspired by the loveliness and
peace of the scenery around us.

We had proceeded about half way to the
anchorage, when we approached a brig sailing also
into the harbour, which, as we came alongside of
her, appeared to be a slave-ship returning from
the coast of Africa. The morning was fine, and
the air refreshing, and this had probably induced
the cruel keepers to bring their wretched captives
up from the dungeons of pestilence and death in
which they had been confined. The central part of
the deck was crowded with almost naked Africans,
constituting part of the cargo of the gloomy look¬
ing vessel.

Though their ages appeared various, the majo¬
rity seemed to have just arrived at that period of
human life, when the prospects of man are
brightest, and the hopes of future happiness more
distinct and glowing, than during any other por¬
tion of his existence : they were most of them, so
far as we could judge, from fourteen to eighteen
or twenty years of age; some were younger.
We regarded them with a degree of melancholy
interest, which for a time rendered us insensible
to the beauties of nature every where spread
before our eyes. Our passing, however, appeared
to affect them but little. The greater part of

346 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

these unhappy beings stood nearly motionless,
though we did not perceive that they were
chained; some directed towards us a look of
seeming indifference; others, with their arms
folded, appeared pensive in sadness; while se¬
veral, leaning on the ship’s side, were gazing on
the green islands of the bay, the rocky mountains,
and all the wild luxuriance of the smiling land¬
scape ; which probably awakened in their bo¬
soms thoughts of “ home and all its pleasures/’
from which they had so recently been torn ; and,
judging of the future by the past short period of
their wretched bondage, their minds were perhaps
distressed with painful anticipations of the toils and
sufferings that would await them on the foreign
shore they were approaching !

Circumstances detained us at Rio Janeiro above
six weeks. I feel it would be injustice to the
parties not to state, that although we were perfect
strangers, we experienced the greatest hospitality
and kindness from the English merchants and
other residents there. During the whole of our
stay, two of these gentlemen accommodated us at
their country houses, a few miles distant from the
city, where all that friendship could devise for our
comfort was generously furnished.

While detained here, we came, for the first
time, into actual contact with slavery. There are,
perhaps, few places where the slaves meet with
milder treatment; but it was most distressing, on
passing the slave market, to observe the wretched
captives there bought and sold like cattle; or to
see two or three interesting looking youths, wear¬
ing a thin dress, and having a new red cotton
handkerchief round their heads, led through the
streets by a slave-dealer, who, entering the dif-

NEW ZEALANDERS.

347

ferent houses or workshops as he passed along,
offered the young negroes for sale ; yet scarcely
a day passed while we were in the town, during
which we did not meet these heartless traffickers
in human beings thus employed. In the English
or Portuguese families with which we had any
opportunities of becoming acquainted, although
the domestic slaves did not appear to be treated
with that unkindness which the slaves in the
field often experience, yet, even here, the whip
was frequently employed in a manner, and under
circumstances, revolting to every feeling of hu¬
manity.

The slaves in Rio Janeiro may, however, be
said to live in ease and comfort, when their cir¬
cumstances are compared with those of New Zea¬
land. Here their means of subsistence is scanty and
precarious, the treatment is barbarous in the ex¬
treme, their lives are held in light estimation, and
often taken in the most brutal manner, for very
trivial causes, while their bodies furnish a hor¬
rible repast for the owner who has murdered them.
During our stay, the Missionaries related some
very affecting accounts of the destruction of slaves
by their masters; and the following has been
published by the Missionaries residing among the
people. A female slave ran away from Atoai, a
chief, and her retreat was for some time unknown
to her master; at length he saw her sitting with
some natives at Koranareka, near his residence.
He led her away, tied her to a tree, and shot her.
Captain Duke, of the Sisters, hearing of the cir¬
cumstance, went to the place, and found the body
of the girl prepared for baking in a native oven,
the large bones of the legs and arms having been
cut out. On his expostulating, they said it wavS

348

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

not his concern, and they should act as they
pleased. They often seem to take a savage
delight in murdering their slaves, in which they
are unawed by the presence of strangers. A few
years ago, a chief of the name of Tuma, killed
with an iron bill-hook, a female slave, who was
employed in washing linen at Mr. Hanson’s door,
though Mr. Kendall and Mr. King, two of the
Missionaries, interfered for her rescue.

Their superstitions seem more vague and indis¬
tinct, and their system of religion more rude and
unorganized, than that of most of the other inhabit¬
ants of the South Sea Islands, though many of
their traditions are singular and interesting. Their
temples are few and insignificant, their priests
probably less numerous and influential, as a dis¬
tinct class, than those of Tahiti or Hawaii for¬
merly were ; their worship less frequent, cere¬
monial, and imposing, and also less sanguinary.
I never heard of their offering human sacrifices.
They believe in a future state, which they suppose
will correspond in some degree with the present.
Like some of the barbarous nations in Africa,
they imagine that it is necessary the spirits of
departed chiefs should be attended by the spirits
of their slaves; this occasions the death of numbers
of unhappy captives. The Missionaries observe,
that it is a common practice to kill one or two
slaves on such occasions. At one time, a child who
resided in the immediate neighbourhood of the
Missionaries was drowned : the father was ab¬
sent, the mother made great lamentation, and
called upon the people around, to put to death
some one, whose spirit should be a companion for
that of her child, on its way to the rainga,
(heaven.) An aged female slave, apprehensive of

NEW ZEALANDERS. 349

the consequence of such an appeal, took refuge
among the high fern, and effectually concealed
herself. A female relative of the deceased child
called out to the slave, assuring her she should be
spared. The poor creature made her appearance,
when the brother of the child was called, and im¬
mediately despatched the slave with a stone
implement.

Although their character is so dark, their
temper so ferocious, and their conduct so violent
and murderous, in some respects their dispositions
appear more humane and amiable than those of
the Tahitians. To the catalogue of their vices
and their cruelties they did not add that deli¬
berate systematic infanticide, which the Areois
practised ; and though not guiltless of this
crime, it was exercised less frequently, and some
of them, especially the fathers, seemed fond of
their children. A pleasing illustration of this
occurred while I was among them ; and I mention
it the more cheerfully, as the general impression
their spirit and behaviour made upon my mind was
of a different kind.

In an excursion to Waikadie, shortly after
leaving the Bay of Islands, we reached Kauakaua,
where Mr. Hall proposed to land. As we ap¬
proached the shore, no trace of inhabitants
appeared; but we had scarcely landed, when we
were somewhat surprised by the appearance of
Tetoro, and a number of his people. The chief
ran to meet us, greeting us in English, with
“ How do you do ?” He perceived I was a
stranger, and, on hearing my errand and desti¬
nation, he offered me his hand, and saluted me,
according to the custom of his country, by touch¬
ing my nose with his. He was a tall, fine-looking

350 POLYNESIAN PvESEARCHES.

man, about six feet high, and proportionably stout,
his limbs firm and muscular, and, when dressed in
his war-cloak, with all his implements of death
appended to his person, he must have appeared
formidable to his enemies. When acquainted
with our business, he prepared to accompany us ;
but before we set out, an incident occurred that
greatly raised my estimation of his character. In
front of the hut sat his wife, and around her
played two or three little children. In passing
from the hut to the boat, Tetoro struck one of the
little ones with his foot; the child cried—and,
though the chief had his mat on, and his gun in
his hand, and was in the act of stepping into the
boat where we were waiting for him, he no sooner
heard its cries, than he turned back, took the child
up in his arms, stroked its little head, dried its
tears, and, giving it to the mother, hastened to
join us. His conversation in the boat, during the
voyage, so far as it was made known to me, indi¬
cated no inferiority of intellect, nor deficiency of
local information. On reaching Waikadie, about
twenty miles from our ship, we were met by
Waivea, Tetoro's brother ; but his relationship
appeared to be almost all that he possessed in com¬
mon with him, as he was both in appearance and
in conduct entirely a savage.

It was in the month of December, 1816, that I
visited New Zealand; and here for the first time
saw the rude inhabitants of the South Sea Islands,
in their native state. At daylight, on the morn¬
ing after our arrival on the coast, we found our¬
selves off Wangaroa bay, where, six years before,
the murderous quarrel took place, in which the
crew of the Boyd were cut off by the natives, and
near which, subsequently, the Methodist Mission-

NEW ZEALANDERS.

351

ary station at Wesleydale, established in 1823,
has been, through the alarming and violent con¬
duct of the inhabitants, abandoned by the Mis¬
sionaries, and utterly destroyed by the natives.
Several canoes, with three or four men in each,
approached our vessel at a very early hour, with
fish, fishing-lines, hooks, and a few curiosities for
sale. Their canoes were all single, generally
between twenty and thirty feet long, formed out
of one tree, and nearly destitute of every kind of
ornament.

The men, almost naked, were rather above the
middle stature, of a dark copper colour, their fea¬
tures frequently well formed, their hair black and
bushy, and their faces much tataued, and orna¬
mented, or rather disfigured, by the unsparing
application of a kind of white clay and red ochre
mixed with oil. Their appearance and conduct,
during our first interview, was by no means
adapted to inspire us with prepossessions in their
favour. Our captain refused to admit them into
the ship, and, after bartering with them for some of
their fish, we proceeded on our voyage.

On reaching the Bay of Islands we were cor¬
dially welcomed by our Christian brethren, the
Missionaries of the Church Missionary Society,
who had been about two years engaged in pro¬
moting instruction and civilization among the New
Zealanders. They were the first Missionaries we
had seen on heathen ground, and it afforded us
pleasure to become acquainted with those who
were in some respects to be our future fellow-
labourers. Having been kindly invited to spend
on shore the next day, which was the Sabbath, we
left the ship soon after breakfast, on the morning
of the 22nd. When we reached the landing-place,

352

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

crowds of natives thronged around us, with an idle
but by no means ceremonious curiosity, and some
time elapsed before we could proceed from the
beach to the houses of our friends.

The Missionaries had on the preceding day
invited me to officiate for them, and I was happy
to have an opportunity of preaching the gospel
on the shores of New Zealand. Several of the
natives appeared in our little congregation, in¬
fluenced probably by curiosity, as the service was
held in a language unintelligible to them. I could
not, however, but indulge the hope that the time
was not distant, when, through the influence of
the schools already established, and the general
instructions given by the Missionaries, my bre-
thren would have the pleasure of preaching, on
every returning Sabbath, the unsearchable riches
of Christ, to numerous assemblies of attentive
Christian hearers. The circumstance of its being
exactly two years, this Sabbath day, since
Mr. Marsden, who visited New Zealand in 1814
■—1815, for the purpose of establishing a Christian
Mission among the people, preached, not far from
this spot, the first sermon that was ever delivered
in New Zealand, added to the feelings of interest
connected with the engagements of the day.

Circumstances detaining us about a week in the
Bay of Islands, afforded me the means of becom¬
ing more fully acquainted with the Missionaries, of
making excursions to different parts of the adja¬
cent country, and witnessing severla of the singular
manners and customs of the people.

An unusual noise from the land anoused us early
on the morning of the 25th, and, on reaching the
deck, a number of war-canoes were seen lying
along the shore f while crowds of natives on the

NEW ZEALANDERS.

353

beach were engaged in war-dances, shouting, and
firing their muskets at frequent intervals. On
inquiry, we found that on the day we had visited
Waikadie, a chief of Rangehoo had committed
suicide, by throwing himself from a high rock
into the sea. This event had brought the chiefs
and warriors of the adjacent country, to investigate
the cause of his death—armed, and prepared for
revenge, in the event of his having been murdered.
A council was held for some hours on the beach,
when the strangers, being satisfied as to the cause
and manner of the chief’s death, preparations for
war were discontinued, and the people of Rangehoo
repaired to their fields, to procure potatoes for
their entertainment. It was Christmas-day, and
about twelve o’clock we went on shore, to dine
with one of the Mission families. In the after¬
noon, I walked through the encampment of the
strangers, which was spread along the sea-shore.
Their long, stately, and in many instances beau¬
tifully carved canoes, were drawn up on the
pebbly beach, and the chiefs and warriors were
sitting in circles, at a small distance from them.
Each party occupied the beach opposite their
canoes, while the slaves or domestics, at some
distance further from the shore, were busied round
their respective fires, preparing their masters’ food.
Near his side, each warrior’s spear was fixed in the
ground, while his patapatu, a stone weapon, the
tomakawk of the New Zealander, was hanging on
his arm. Several chiefs had a large iron hatchet
or bill-hook, much resembling those used by
woodmen, or others, in mending hedges in
England. These, which in their hands were
rather terrifying weapons, appeared to be highly
prized; they were kept clean and polished, and
in. 2 a

354 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

generally fastened round the wrist by a braided
cord of native flax. The patupatu was sometimes
placed in the girdle, in the same manner as a
Malay would wear his knife or dagger, or a Turk
his pistol. The men were generally tall and well-
formed, altogether such as it might be expect¬
ed the warriors of a savage nation would be.
Several of these fighting-men were not less than
six feet high; their limbs were muscular and
firm, and their bodies stout, but not corpulent.
The dress of the chiefs and warriors consisted, in
general, of a girdle round the loins, and a short
cloak or mantle, worn over the shoulders, and tied
with cords of braided flax in front. The rank of
the chief appeared to be sometimes indicated by
the number of his cloaks fastened one upon the
other; that which was smallest, but generally
most valuable, being worn on the outside: the
whole resembled in this respect the capes of a
travelling-coat.

Their physiognomy, indicating any thing but
weakness or cowardice, often exhibited great de¬
termination. They wore no helmet, or other
covering for the head. Their black and shining
hair sometimes hung in ringlets on their shoulders,
but was frequently tied up on the crown of their
heads, and usually ornamented by a tuft of waving
feathers. Their dark eyes, though not large, were
often fierce and penetrating; their prominent fea¬
tures in general well-formed; but their whole
countenance was much disfigured by the practice
of tatauing. Each chief had thus imprinted on
his face, the marks and involutions peculiar to his
family or tribe; while the figures tataued on the
faces of his dependants or retainers, though fewer
in number, were the same in form as those by

NEW ZEALANDER.

355

which the chief was distinguished. The accom¬
panying representation of the head and face of
’Honghi,* the celebrated New Zealand warrior,

who was among the party that arrived this morning
at the settlement, will convey no inaccurate idea of
the effect of this singular practice. The tatauing of
the face of a New Zealander, answering the pur¬
pose of the particular stripe or colour of the High¬
lander’s plaid, marks the clan or tribe to which he

* The bust, from which, by the kindness of the Secre¬
tary of the Church Missionary Society, the drawing of the
above is taken, was executed with great fidelity by ’Honghi
during a visit to Port Jackson.

2 A 2

356

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES..

belongs. It is considered highly ornamental; and,
in addition to the distinguishing lines or curves,
the intricacy and variety of the pattern, thus per¬
manently fixed on the face, constitutes one prin¬
cipal distinction between the chiefs and common
people, and it may be regarded as the crest, or coat
of arms, of the New Zealand aristocracy. Tatau-
ing is said to be also employed as a means of
enabling them to distinguish their enemies in
battle. In the present instance, its effect on the
countenance, where its marks are more thickly
implanted than in any other part of the body, was
greatly augmented by a preparation of red ochre
and oil, which had been liberally applied to the
cheeks and the forehead. Quantities of oil and
ochre adhered to my clothes, from close contact
with the natives, which I found it impossible to
prevent; but this was the only inconvenience I
experienced from my visit.

The warriors of New Zealand delight in swag¬
gering and bravado, for while my companion was
talking with some of Korokoro’s party, one of
them came up to me, and several times brandished
his patupatu over my head, as if intending to
strike, accompanying the action with the fiercest
expressions of countenance, and the utterance of
words exceedingly harsh, though to me unintel¬
ligible. After a few minutes he desisted, but
when we walked away, he ran after us, and, as¬
suming the same attitude and gestures, accom¬
panied us till we reached another circle, where he
continued for a short time these exhibitions of his
skill in terrifying, &c. When he ceased, he in¬
quired, rather significantly, if I was not afraid.

I told him I was unconscious of having offended
him, and that, notwithstanding his actions, I did

NEW ZEALANDERS.

357

not think he intended to injure me. The New
Zealanders are fond of endeavouring to alarm
strangers, and appear to derive much satisfaction
in witnessing the indications of fear they are able
to excite.

A number of tribes from different parts of the
Bay being now at Rangehoo, the evening was
devoted to public sports on the sea beach, which
most of the strangers attended. Several of their
public dances seemed immoral in their tendency,
but in general they were distinguished by the
violent gestures and deafening vociferations of the
performers. No part of the sports, however, ap¬
peared so interesting to the natives, as a sham
fight, in which the warriors wore their full dresses,
bore their usual weapons, and went through the
different movements of actual engagement.

Shungee, or, according to the modern ortho¬
graphy of the Missionaries, ’Honghi, with his
numerous dependants and allies, formed one
party, and were ranged on the western side of the
beach, below the Missionaries’ dwelling. The
chief wore several mats or short cloaks, of various
sizes and texture, exquisitely manufactured with
the native flax, one of them ornamented with
small shreds of dog’s skin, with the hair adhering
to it; these were fastened round his neck, while
in his girdle he wore a patupatu, and carried a
musket in his hand. His party were generally
armed with clubs, and spears nine or ten feet
long.

Their antagonists were ranged on the opposite
side of the beach. At a signal given, they ran
violently towards each other, halted, and then,
amidst shouts and clamour, rushed into each
others’ ranks, some brandishing their clubs, others

358

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

thrusting their spears, which were either parried
or carefully avoided by the opposite party. Several
were at length thrown down, some prisoners taken,
and ultimately both parties retreated to a distance,
whence they renewed the combat. As the day
closed, these sports were discontinued, and the
combatants and spectators retired to their respect¬
ive encampments.

Having filled our water-casks, increased our
supply of provender for the cattle and sheep I had
on board, procured a number of logs of timber
towards the erection of our future dwelling, and
having spent a week very pleasantly with our
Missionary brethren; we took leave of them,
grateful for the assistance of their influence with
the natives, and the kindness and hospitality we
had experienced at their hands.

To the eye of a Missionary, New Zealand is an
interesting country, inhabited by a people of no
ordinary powers, could they be brought under the
influence of right principles. By the Christian
philanthropists of Britain, who are desirous not
only to spread the light of revelation and Chris¬
tian instruction among the ignorant at home, but
are also making noble efforts to send its blessings
to the remotest nations of the earth, it has not
been overlooked.

In 1814, the Church Missionary Society sent
their Missionaries to New Zealand; and, under
the direction and guardianship of the Rev. S. Mars-
den, the steady patron of the New Zealand Mis¬
sion, established their first settlement at Rangehoo
in the Bay of Islands. Considerable reinforce¬
ments have been sent, and three other stations
formed. Since that period, the Wesleyan Mis¬
sionaries commenced their labours near Wangaroa.

NEW ZEALANDERS.

359

The Missionaries and their assistants, who have
laboured at these stations ever since their com¬
mencement, have not only steadily and diligently
applied to the study of the language, which is a
dialect of that spoken in all the eastern portion of
the Pacific, established schools for the instruction
of the natives, and endeavoured to unfold to them
the great truths of revelation, but have from the
beginning, by the establishment of forges for work¬
ing iron, saw-pits, carpenters’ shops, &c. laboured
to introduce among the natives habits of industry,
a taste for the mechanic arts, and a desire to follow
the peaceful occupations of husbandry; thereby
aiming to promote their advancement in civiliza¬
tion, and improve their present condition, while
they were pursuing the more important objects of
their mission.

Success indeed has not been according to their
desires, but it has not been altogether withheld;
the general character of the people, in the neigh¬
bourhood of the settlements, is improved, pleasing
instances of piety among the natives have been
afforded; a number have been baptized, and the
Missionaries are enabled to continue their exer¬
tions, under circumstances which are daily assuming
a more pleasing aspect. We rejoice to know, that
the report of the change which Christianity has
effected in the Georgian Islands, appears to have
exerted a favourable influence here. This has
been manifested on several occasions. The follow¬
ing is one of the most recent instances.

Writing under date of May 22, 1829, the Rev.
W. Williams, one of the Missionaries of the Church
Missionary Society, in describing a visit, made in
company with Mr. Davies, to Kauakaua, observes,
“ In the evening, we were much interested by an

360 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

account given by a chief, who has lately visited
Tahiti. He simply confirmed the testimony given
by others before, that the natives of that island
have undergone a very great change. I asked if
they never fought now ? “ Fight!” said he, “ they

are all become Missionaries.” The natives who
listened to him, said, they should like to go there,
and live at Tahiti, but that their own island would
never leave off its present customs.”*

It was a favourable circumstance attending the
change that has taken place both in the Society
and Sandwich Islands, that each island had its
chief; and that in some instances several adjacent
islands were under the government of a principal
chief or king, whose authority was supreme, and
whose influence, in uniting the people under one
head, predisposed them, as a nation, to receive the
instructions imparted by individuals countenanced
and protected by their chief or king. Persons of
the highest authority not only patronized the Mis¬
sionaries, but frequently added to their instruc¬
tions, their commendation, and the influence of
their own example in having already received
them.

In New Zealand there is no king over the whole,
or even over one of the larger islands. The people
are generally governed by a number of chieftains,
each indeed a king over his narrow territory. A
desire to enlarge their territory, augment their
property, increase their power, or satisfy revenge,
leads to frequent and destructive wars, strengthens
jealousy, and cherishes treachery, keeps them
without any common bond of union, and prevents
any deep or extensive impression being made upon
them as a people. This necessarily circumscribes
* Missionary Record, Oct. 1880.

NEW ZEALAND.

361

the influence of the Missionaries, and is, in a great
degree, the cause which led the Wesleyan Mis¬
sionaries for a time to suspend altogether their
efforts, and which has recently so painfully dis¬
turbed those of their brethren in connexion with
the Church Missionary Society.

The labours of the mechanic and the artisan are
valuable accompaniments to those of the Mision-
ary; but Christianity must precede civilization.
Little hope is to be entertained of the natives follow¬
ing to any extent the useful arts, cultivating habits
of industry, or realizing the enjoyments of social
and domestic life, until they are brought under
the influence of those principles inculcated in the
word of God. And notwithstanding the discou¬
ragements to be encountered, this happy result
should be steadily and confidently anticipated by
those engaged on the spot, as well as by their
friends at home. Their prospect of success is
daily becoming more encouraging. They have
not yet laboured in hope, so long as their pre¬
decessors did in the South Sea Islands; where
nearly fifteen years elapsed before they knew of
one true convert. The recollection of this cir¬
cumstance is adapted to inspire those employed
in New Zealand with courage, and stimulate to
perseverance, as there is every reason to con¬
clude, that when the New Zealanders shall by
the blessing of God become a Christian people,
they will assume and maintain no secondary rank
among the nations of the Pacific.

362

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

CHAP. XIII.

Situation, extent, and productions of Rapa— Singularity of
its structure—Appearance of the inhabitants—Violent
proceedings on board—Remarkable interposition of Pro¬
vidence—Visit of some natives to Tahiti—Introduction
of Christianity into Rapa— Raivavai —Accounts of its
inhabitants—Visit of Capt. Henry—Establishment of a
native mission—Fatal ravages of a contagious disease
Tubuai —Notice of the mutineers of the Bounty — Origin
of the inhabitants—Prevention of war—Establishment
of salutary laws— Rim a tar a —Productions—Circum¬
stances of the inhabitants—Abolition of idolatry—Ge¬
neral improvement —Rurutu— Geological character—
Population—Auura—His voyage to Maurua—Return
to his native island—Destruction of the idols—Visit to
Rurutu—Advancement of the people in knowledge, in¬
dustry, and comfort—Unjust conduct of visitors—Treat¬
ment of the shipwrecked by the natives—Progress of
Christianity.

About seven degrees nearer the equator than New
Zealand, and thirty-six farther to the eastward,
the lofty and many-peaked island of Rapa is situ¬
ated. The first account of this island is given by
Vancouver, who discovered it in his passage from
New Zealand to Tahiti, on the 22d of December,
1791.* According to the observation made at the
time, it was found to be situated in lat. 27. 36. S.

* The mingled emotions of astonishment and fear, with
which the natives regarded every thing on board Vancou¬
ver’s ship, prevented their replying very distinctly to the
queries he proposed ; and he observes, a Their answers to

RAPA*

363

and long. 144.11. W. The mountains are craggy and
picturesque, and the summits of those forming the
high land in the centre, singularly broken, so as
to resemble, in no small degree, a range of irre¬
gularly inclined cones, or cylindrical columns,
which their discoverer supposed to be towers, or
fortifications, manned with natives.

It is the furthest from the equator of a number
of scattered islands, which lie to the south of the
Tonga, Navigators’ and Society Islands, and are
designated by Multe Brun, The Austral Islands.*

Rapa is about twenty miles in circumference, is
tolerably well wooded and watered, especially on
the eastern side. The taro, or arum, is the most
valuable article of food the natives possess, and,
with the fish taken on their coast, forms their chief
subsistence. The breadfruit, mountain plantain,
banana, cocoa-nut, and fruits, have been brought
from Tahiti, but they do not appear to thrive. The
eastern coasts appear the most fertile. On this
side of the island the fine harbour of Aurai is situ¬
ated. The entrance is intricate, but the interior
capacious, extending several miles inland. The
landing on the beach is good, and fresh water
convenient.

almost every question were in the affirmative, and our in¬
quiries as to the name of their island, &c. were continually
interrupted by incessant invitations to go on shore. At
length, I had reason to believe the name of the island was
Oparo , and that of their chief Korie. Although I could
not positively state that their names were correctly ascer¬
tained, yet, as there was a probability of their being so, I
distinguished the island by the name of Oparo, until it
might be found more properly entitled to another.” The
explicit declarations of the natives, made under more fa¬
vourable circumstances, have now determined Rapa to be
the proper name of this island.

* System of Geography, vol. ii. p. 647.

364

RAPA.

In person, the inhabitants resemble those of
Tahiti more than the New Zealanders, though
their language bears the greater affinity to that of
the latter. Vancouver, judging from those he
saw around his ship, estimated their number at,
1500. Mr. Davis, who visited them in 1826, sup¬
posed the population to amount to about 2000 ;
but Messrs. Simpson and Pritchard, in April, 1829,
found that an epidemic had reduced their numbers,
and did not think there were above 500. The island
is divided into several districts, and is governed by
one supreme ruler, or king, and a number of subor¬
dinate chiefs. The name of the present chief is
Tereau. Fortifications crown the summits of many
of their hills; these are so constructed as to render
them impregnable by any means which the assail¬
ants could bring against the besieged. Wars have
not been frequent among them, and, when they
have existed, have been less sanguinary than those
among the islands to the northward.

Their system of religion was exceedingly rude,
and resembled, in some respects, that which
prevailed in Tahiti, though the names of their
gods were difterent. The principal idol was called
Paparua ; it was formed of cocoa-nut husk, curi¬
ously braided, and shaped into a kind of cylinder,
full in the centre, and smaller at the ends, and was
not more than two or three inches long. To the
favour of this god they sought for victory in war,
recovery from sickness, and abundance of turtle.*
Poere was another of their gods ; it was of stone,
twelve or fifteen inches in length. It was fixed in
the ground, and invoked on the launching of a
canoe, and the opening of a newly-built house;
and on its will the supply of water in the springs
* Missionary Chronicle, vol. iv. p. 167

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

365

was supposed to depend. The favour of the gods
was propitiated by prayers, offerings, and sacrifi¬
ces ; human victims were not included among the
latter, which principally consisted in fish.

On my voyage from New Zealand to Tahiti, we
made this island on the 26th of January, 1817.
The higher parts of the mountains seemed barren,
but the lower hills, with many of the valleys, and
the shores, were covered with verdure, and en¬
riched with trees and bushes. The island did not
appear to be surrounded by a reef, and, conse¬
quently, but little low land was seen. The waves
of the ocean dashed against the base of those
mountains, which, extending to the sea, divided
the valleys that opened upon the western shore.
As we were not far from the island when the sun
withdrew his light, we lay off and on through the
night, and, at daybreak the next morning, found
ourselves at some distance from the shore. We
sailed towards the island till about 10 a. m.; when,
being within two miles of the beach, the head
of our vessel was turned to the north, and we
moved slowly along in a direction parallel with the
coast. We soon beheld several canoes put off
from the land, and not less than thirty were
afterwards seen paddling around us. There were
neither females nor children in any of them.
The men were not tataued, and wore only a girdle
of yellow ti leaves round their waists. Their
bodies, neither spare nor corpulent, were finely
shaped; their complexion a dark copper colour;
their features regularly formed ; and their counte¬
nances, often handsome, were shaded by long
black straight or curling hair. Notwithstanding
all our endeavours to induce them to approach the
ship, they continued for a long time at some dis-

366

RAPA.

tance, viewing us with apparent suspicion and
surprise. At length, one of the canoes, containing
two men and a boy, ventured alongside. Perceiv¬
ing a lobster lying among a number of spears at
the bottom of the canoe, I intimated, by signs, my
wish to have it, and the chief readily handed it up.
I gave him, in return, two or three middle-sized
fish-hooks; which, after examining rather curiously,
he gave to the boy, who, being destitute of any
pocket, or even article of dress on which he could
fasten them, instantly deposited them in his mouth,
and continued to hold with both hands the rope
hanging from our ship. The principal person in
the canoe appearing willing to come on board, I
pointed to the rope he was grasping, and put out
my hand to assist him up the ship's side. He
involuntarily laid hold of it, but could scarcely
have felt my hand grasping his, when he in¬
stantly drew it back, and, raising it to his nostrils,
smelt at it most significantly. After a few mo¬
ments' pause, he climbed over the ship's side. As
soon as he had reached the deck, our captain
led him to a chair on the quarter-deck, and,
pointing to the seat, signified his wish that he
should be seated. The chief, however, having
viewed it for some time, pushed it aside, and sat
down on the planks. Our captain had been de¬
sirous to have the chief on board, that he might
ascertain from him whether the island produced
sandal-wood, as he was bound to the Marquesas in
search of that article. A piece was therefore pro¬
cured and shewn to him, with the qualities of which
he appeared familiar; for, after smelling it, he called
it by some name, and pointed to the shore. While
we had been thus engaged, many of the canoes
had, unperceived by us, approached the ship ; and

RAPA.

367

when we turned round, a number of the natives
appeared on deck, and others were climbing
over the bulwarks. They were the most savage¬
looking natives I have ever seen, and their be¬
haviour was as unceremonious as their appearance
was uninviting. Vancouver found them unusually
shy at first, but afterwards remarkably bold, and
exceedingly anxious to possess every article of iron
they saw : although his ship was surrounded by
not fewer than three hundred natives, there were
neither young children, women, nor aged persons,
in any of their canoes.

A gigantic, fierce-looking fellow, who had seized
a youth standing by the gangway, boarded us,
and endeavoured to lift him from the deck; but
the lad, struggling, escaped from his grasp. He
then seized our cabin-boy, but the sailors coming
to his assistance, and the native finding he could
not disengage him from their hold, pulled his
woollen shirt over his head, and was preparing to
leap out of the ship, when he was arrested by the
sailors. We had a large ship-dog chained to his
kennel on the deck, and, although this animal was
not only fearless, but savage, yet the appearance
of the natives seemed to terrify him. One of
them caught the dog in his arms, and was pro¬
ceeding over the ship’s side with him, but per¬
ceiving him fastened to the kennel by his chain,
he was obliged to relinquish his prize, evidently
disappointed. He then seized the kennel, with
the dog in it; when, finding it nailed to the deck,
he ceased his attempts to remove it, and gazed
round the ship, in search of some object less
secure. We had brought from Port Jackson two
young kittens; one of these now came up from
the cabin, but she no sooner made her appearance

368 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

on the deck, than a native, springing like a tiger
upon its prey, caught up the unconscious animal,
and instantly leaped over the ship’s side into the
sea. Hastening to the side of the deck, I looked
over the bulwarks, and beheld him swimming
rapidly towards a canoe lying about fifty yards
from the ship. As soon as he had reached the
canoe, holding the cat with both hands, and ele¬
vating these above his head, he exhibited her to
his companions with evident exultation ; while, in
every direction, the natives were seen paddling
their canoes towards him, to gaze upon the strange
creature he had brought from the vessel. When
our captain beheld the thief thus exhibiting his
prize, he seized his musket, and was in the act of
levelling it at the offender, when I arrested his
arm, and assured him I had no doubt the little
animal would be preserved, and well treated.
Orders were now given to clear the ship. A
general scuffle ensued between the islanders and
the seamen, in which many of the former were
driven headlong into the sea, where they seemed
as much at home as on solid ground, while others
clambered over the vessel’s side into their canoes.
In the midst of the confusion, and the retreat of
the natives, the dog, which had hitherto slunk
into his kennel, recovered his usual boldness,
and not only increased the consternation by his
barking, but severely tore the leg of one of the
fugitives who was hastening out of the ship, near
the spot to which he was chained. The decks
were now cleared; but as many of the people still
hung upon the shrouds, and about the chains, the
sailors drew the long knives with which, when
among the islands, they were furnished, and by
menacing gestures, without wounding any, sue-

RAPA.

369

ceeded in detaching the natives from the vessel.
Some of them seemed quite unconscious of the
keenness of the knife, and, I believe, had their
hands deeply cut by snatching or grasping at the
blade. A proposal was now made to entice or
admit some on board, and take two of them to
Tahiti, that the Missionaries there might become
acquainted with their language, gain a knowledge
of the productions of their island, impart unto
them Christian instruction, and thus prepare the
way for the introduction of Christianity among
their countrymen, as well as open a channel for
commercial intercourse. Our captain offered to
bring them to their native island again, on his
return from the Marquesas; and, could their con¬
sent have been by any means obtained, I should,
without hesitation, have acceded to the plan ; but,
as we had no means of effecting this object, I did
not conceive it right to take them from their native
island by force.

On a former voyage, about two years before this
period, Captain Powel had been becalmed near
the shores of this island. Many of the natives
came off in their canoes, but did not venture on
board ; perceiving, however, a hawser hanging out
of the stern of the ship, about fifty of them leaped
into the sea, and, grasping the rope with one hand,
began swimming with the other, labouring and
shouting with all their might, as they supposed
they were drawing the vessel towards the shore.
Their clamour attracted the attention of the sea¬
men, and it was found no easy matter, even when
all hands were employed, to draw in the rope.
While the greater part of the crew were thus
engaged, a seaman leaning over the stern with a
cutlass in his hand, so terrified the natives, that, as
in, 2 B

370 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

they were drawn near the vessel, they quitted their
hold, and by this means the hawser was secured.
A breeze shortly after springing up, they steered
away, happy to escape from the savages by whom
they had been surrounded.

On the present occasion we experienced a signal
deliverance, which, though it did not at the time
appear very remarkable, afterwards powerfully
affected our minds. As soon as the vessel was
cleared of the natives, and the wind was wafting
us from their shores, I went down to the cabin,
where Mrs. Ellis and the nurse had been sitting
ever since their first approach to the ship; and
when I saw our little daughter, only four months
old, sleeping securely in her birth, I was deeply
impressed with the providence of God, in the pre¬
servation of the child. During the forenoon, the
infant had been playing unconsciously in her
nurse’s lap upon the quarter-deck, under the
awning, which was usually spread in fine weather,
and she had but recently taken her to the cabin,
when the natives came on board. Had the child
been on deck, and had my attention been for a
moment diverted, even though I had been stand¬
ing by the side of the nurse, there is every
reason to believe that the motives which induced
them to seize the boys on the deck, and even
the dog in his kennel, would have prompted
them to grasp the child in her nurse’s lap or
arms, and to leap with her into the sea before we
could have been aware of their design. Had
this been the case, it is impossible to say what
the result would have been; bloodshed might
have followed, and we might have been obliged
to depart from the island, leaving our child in
their hands. From the crude food with which

RAPA.

371

they would have fed her, it is probable she would
have died ; but, from my subsequent acquaintance
with the natives of the South Sea Islands, I do not
think that during her infancy they would have
treated her unkindly. As it was, we felt grateful
for the kind Providence which had secured us from
all the distressing circumstances which must neces¬
sarily have attended such an event.

These brief facts will be sufficient to shew some¬
what of the character of the natives of Rapa, in
1791 and 1817. They continued in this state
until within the last five or six years, during which
a considerable change has taken place.

Towards the close of the summer of 1825, a
cutter belonging to Tati, a chief in Tahiti, on a
voyage to the Paumotus, or Pearl Islands, visited
Rapa, and brought two of its inhabitants to Tahiti.
On their first arrival, they were under evident
feelings of apprehension; but the kindness of
Mr. Davies the Missionary, and the natives of
Papara, removed their suspicions, and inspired
them with confidence. They were both delighted
and astonished in viewing the strange objects pre¬
sented to their notice. The European families,
the houses, the gardens, the cattle, and other
animals, which they saw at Tahiti, filled them with
wonder. They also attended the schools and
places of public worship, and learned the alphabet.
Soon after their arrival, the cutter sailed again for
their island, and the two natives of Rapa returned
to their countrymen loaded with presents from
their new friends, and accompanied by two Tahi¬
tians, who were sent to gain more accurate inform
mation relative to their country, and the disposi¬
tion of its inhabitants. When the vessel ap¬
proached their island, and the people saw their

2 b 2

372 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

countrymen, they appeared highly delighted; and
towards the evening, when, accompanied by the
two Tahitians, they drew near the beach in the
ship’s boat, the inhabitants came out into the sea
to meet them, and carried the men and the boat
altogether to the shore. This to the strangers was
rather an unexpected reception; but, though sin¬
gular, it was not unfriendly, for they were treated
with kindness. The accounts the natives gave
their countrymen, of what they had seen in Tahiti,
were marvellous to them : the captain of the cutter,
procured some tons of sandal-wood ; and when he
left, the Tahitians returned, having received an in¬
vitation from the chiefs and people to revisit their
island, and reside permanently among them; a re¬
quest so congenial to their own feelings, that they
at once promised to comply.

In the month of January, 1826, two Tahitian
teachers and their wives, accompanied by two
others, one a schoolmaster, and the other a me¬
chanic, sailed from Tahiti for Rapa. They carried
with them not only spelling-books, and copies of
the Tahitian translations of the scriptures, but
also a variety of useful tools, implements of hus¬
bandry, valuable seeds and plants, together with
timber for a chapel, and doors, &c. for the
teachers’ houses. They were conducted to their
new station by Mr. Davies, one of the senior Mis¬
sionaries at Tahiti, who was pleased with his visit,
and, upon the whole, with the disposition of the
people, although some appeared remarkably super¬
stitious, and, as might be expected, unwilling to
embrace Christianity. This arose from an appre¬
hension of the anger of their gods, induced by the
effects of a most destructive disease, with which
they had been recently visited. The gods, they

RAPA.

373

imagined, had thus punished them for their atten¬
tion to the accounts from Tahiti. The teachers,
however, landed their goods, and the frame-work of
the chapel. The chiefs received them with every
mark of respect and hospitality, pointed out an
eligible spot for their residence, gave them some
adjacent plantations of taro, and promised them
protection and aid.

The Sabbath which Mr. Davies spent there was
probably the first ever religiously observed on the
shores of Rapa. Several of the natives attended
public worship, and appeared impressed with the
services. These being performed in the Tahitian
language, were not unintelligible to them. The
native teachers were members of the church at
Papara; and as they were but few in number,
and were surrounded by a heathen population in a
remote and solitary island, it being then expected
the vessel would sail on that or the following day,
they joined with Mr. Davies their pastor in comme¬
morating the death of Christ, under the impression
that it was the last time they should ever unite in
this hallowed ordinance.

Situated some degrees from the southern tropic,
the climate is bracing and salubrious, the soil is
fertile, and while it nourishes many of the valuable
roots and fruits of the intertropical regions, is pro¬
bably not less adapted to the more useful produc¬
tions of temperate climes. Mr. Davies estimates
the population at about two thousand. Vancouver
supposed that Rapa contained not less than fifteen
hundred, merely from those he saw around his
ship. In their language, complexion, general cha¬
racter, and superstitions, they resemble the other
islanders of the Pacific, though less civilized in their

374 POLYNESIAN HESEAKCHES.

manners, more rude in their arts, and possessed of
fewer comforts, than most of their northern neigh¬
bours were, when first discovered. Their inter¬
course with Tahiti has not only increased their
knowledge, and their sources of temporal enjoy¬
ment, but has been the means of introducing
Christianity among them, and raising many to the
participation of its “ spiritual blessings.” In 1829,
Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson found that four
chapels had been erected in different stations,
at which, by native Missionaries, religious instruc¬
tion was statedly imparted. The inhabitants ma¬
nifested a pleasing attention during public service,
and their advancement in knowledge exceeded the
expectations of their visitors.

A fresh avenue is here opened for European com¬
merce, and valuable information is likely to result
from the visit of the teachers to this solitary abode.
The English Missionary from Tahiti was the first
foreigner that ever landed on their coasts; but
many years before his arrival, an inhabitant of
some other island, the only survivor of the party
with whom he sailed from his native shores, had
been by tempestuous weather drifted to the island,
and was found there by the native teachers, who
first went from Tahiti. His name was Mapuagua,
and that of his country Manganeva,* which he
stated was much larger than Rapa, and situated in
a south-easterly direction. The people he de-

* The islands which bear the nearest resemblance to
the description here given, are situated in lat. 23. 12. S.
and long. 135. W. They are lofty, verdant, and populous,
and were discovered on the 24th of May, 1797, by Captain
Wilson, in the Duff; by whom, in honour of Admiral Lord
Gambier, they were called Gambier’s Islands .—Missionary
Voyage, p. 118.

RAIVAVAI.

375

scribed as numerous, and much tataued ; the name
of one of their gods the same as that of one for¬
merly worshipped by the Tahitians. An old man
who resided at the same place with the stranger,
gave Mr. Davies the name of eleven places, either
districts of Manganeva, or adjacent islands, which
are unknown to the Tahitians. The information
thus obtained will be valuable in the search for
those islands, which has already been commenced ;
and if no sources of wealth be found, nor impor¬
tant channels of commerce opened, their discovery
will increase our geographical knowledge, and ex¬
tend the range of benevolent operation.

Rapa forms the southern extremity of that part of
Polynesia which Malte Brun has designated the

AUSTRAL ISLANDS.

Raivavai, or High Island,

Is one of the most important of these islands, and is
situated about six degrees to the north-west of Rapa.
It was discovered by Lieut. Broughton, in the Chat¬
ham, on the 2d of December, 1791, who gives its
situation as 23. 42. lat. and 147. 41. W. long. Its
high and broken mountains may be seen in clear
weather at the distance of fifty miles. Around the
sterile centre mountains, there is a considerable
portion of low land. The island is scarcely twenty
miles in circumference. The harbour is open and
insecure ; but, being on the western side, it is shel¬
tered from the prevailing winds. A few years ago
the inhabitants amounted to about 2000, but the
ravages of a fearful epidemic, in the year 1829,
reduced them, it is said, ft) about 800. They

376 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

resemble the South Sea Islanders in many of their
usages, but appear to have been less cruel, and, in
some respects, more ingenious. Their carving is
superior to any found among their more civilized
neighbours. Infanticide was unknown among
them, and we have no evidence that they offered
human sacrifices, though strongly addicted to ido¬
latry. Their temples were extensive, some of
which, with their appendages, though forsaken by
their worshippers, still remain entire. One of them
contains upwards of twenty large stone idols. The
temples, furniture, number, size, and materials of
which their gods are made, manifest the former
zeal and devotedness of the people in the service
of their idols.

In 1819 Pomare visited Raivavai in an Ame¬
rican ship. The inhabitants tendered him their
homage, and sought his protection. On his de¬
parture, he left a man, called Para, as a kind of
political agent among them, who also endeavoured
to teach some of the natives to read.

In the month of January, 1821, Captain
Henry, commanding a vessel belonging to Po¬
mare II. touched at this island. He made it on
the Sabbath-day, and, on landing, found the inha¬
bitants about to assemble in their place of worship.
This building was 117 feet by 27. His arrival
prevented for a short time their commencing the
public service ; but the scene which was afterwards
presented, is described in a letter Captain Henry
wrote to us on reaching Tahiti, as “ affecting and
delightful.” Eight hundred and forty-eight per¬
sons attended; seven hundred of whom entered
the place, the remainder continuing round the
doors. “ Each individual, on entering the church,

RAIVAVAI.

377

kneeled down, and uttered a short prayer.” In
reference to their, deportment, Capt. Henry ob¬
serves, “ The very quiet, devout, and orderly man¬
ner in which they conducted themselves, not only
in church, but during the Sabbath, excited my
highest admiration.”

The open renunciation of idolatry, and the
general profession of Christianity, were effected at
a public festival, which occurred about four months
prior to Capt. Henry’s visit. All the inhabitants,
with the exception of about twenty-five persons,
had declared themselves desirous of Christian in¬
struction, and every one in the island had renounced
idolatry. Most of their former objects of worship
were removed from the temples, and some of those
mutilated stone figures were actually converted
into seats or benches, at the doors of the building
erected for Christian worship. The knowledge of
the individual left by Pomare was very limited;
his behaviour, also, was immoral; and the natives
had sagacity enough to perceive that his conduct
did not accord with what he taught them Chris¬
tianity required; consequently, they refused to
pay much attention to his instructions, but re¬
quested that proper teachers might be sent to them.
In 1822, suitable teachers from Eimeo were sta¬
tioned in this island; these have shewn the utmost
diligence and fidelity in promoting the temporal
and spiritual improvement of the people. In Jan.
1825, when visited by Messrs. Tyerman Bennet,
and Henry, two large places had been erected for
public worship ; at the opening of one of them,
1300 persons were present.* At the same time,
baptism was administered to fifty-two adults, and
* Missionary Chronicle, No. 54, p. 165.

378 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

sixty children. In the latter part of the same
year, I visited Raivavai. The singular, broken,
and romantic shape of the mountains, gave univer¬
sal interest to the scenery; the natives were nu¬
merous, and, though uncivilized, their behaviour
was neither barbarous nor repulsive. They were
anxious to entertain us with hospitality and kind¬
ness, and readily conducted me to whatever was
interesting in the neighbourhood. Their idols
were of stone, which appeared a kind of cellular
lava, of a light ferruginous colour. They were
generally rudely carved imitations of the human
figure. The people appeared ingenious, patient,
and industrious, and the carving of their pad¬
dles, bowls, and other domestic utensils, in the
taste displayed in its devices, and the skill of its
execution, surpassed any thing of the kind I have
seen in the Pacific.

The teachers, Horoinuu, Ahuriro, and Tohi,
gave me a very favourable account of their atten¬
tion to instruction. In 1829, when they were last
visited, it was found that a contagious epidemic,
a kind of malignant fever, had destroyed a great
portion of the inhabitants. This disease was ori¬
ginally brought from Tubuai, and, for a consi¬
derable time after it appeared, from ten to fifteen
deaths occurred daily. If a healthy person came
in contact with the body or clothes of one diseased,
the malady was generally communicated. During
the first stages of the progress of the disease, whole
families, from attending the sick, were simulta¬
neously attacked with the dreadful complaint, and
often buried in one common grave. The visitors
observe, “ Never have we witnessed a more melan¬
choly spectacle; houses are left without inhabit-

TUBUAI. 379

ants; land without owners; and that which was
formerly cultivated, has now become desolate.”

In 1826 Mr. Davies organized a Christian so¬
ciety, or church, among this people, when sixteen
persons were, after due examination, united in
Christian fellowship with the teachers of Eimeo
who were residing among them.* Of these, twelve
have died; to the survivors forty-six were added,
during the time Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson
remained with them, in 1829.

Tubuai.

This island is seventeen miles nearer the equator
than Raivavai, and about two degrees farther to
the westward. It is situated in lat. 23. 25. S. and
long. 149. 23. W. and is not more than twelve
miles in circumference.

Tubuai was discovered by Cook in 1777; and,
after the mutineers in the Bounty had taken pos¬
session of the vessel, and committed, to the mercy
of the waves, Captain Bligh, with eighteen of his
officers and men, this was the first island they
visited. Hence they sailed to Tahiti, brought
away the most serviceable of the live-stock left
there by former navigators, and in 1789 attempted
a settlement here. Misunderstandings between
the mutineers and the natives, and the unbridled
passions of the former, led to acts of violence,
which the latter resented. A murderous battle
ensued, in which nothing but superior skill and
fire-arms, together with the advantages of a rising
ground, saved the mutineers from destruction.
Two were wounded, and numbers of the natives
slain. This led them to abandon the island ; and
after revisiting Tahiti, and leaving a part of their
* Missionary Report, 1827, p. 29.

380 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

number there, they made their final settlement
in Pictairn’s island. Their attempt to settle in
Tubuai is celebrated in a poem by the late Lord
Byron, called, “ The Island, or Christian and his
Companions,” in which are recorded some affect¬
ing circumstances connected with the subsequent
lives and ultimate apprehension of many of these
unhappy men, and several facts relative to the
Society and Friendly Islands.

Tubuai was also the first of the South Sea
Islands that gladdened the sight of the Mission¬
aries who sailed in the Duff. They saw the land
on the morning of the 22d of February, 1797, near
thirty miles distant; and as the wind was unfa¬
vourable, the darkness of night hid the island from
their view before they were near enough distinctly
to behold its scenery or inhabitants. I can enter
in some degree into their emotions on this un¬
usually interesting day. All that hope had anti¬
cipated in its brightest moments, was no longer to
be matter of uncertainty, but was to be realized or
rejected. Such feelings I have experienced, and
can readily believe theirs were of the same order as
those of which I was conscious, when gazing on
the first of the isles of the Pacific that we ap¬
proached. Theirs were probably more intense
than mine, as a degree of adventurous enterprise
was then thrown around Missionary efforts, which
has vanished with their novelty. Our information,
also, is more circumstantial and explicit than theirs
could possibly have been.

Tubuai is stated, in the Introduction to the
Voyage of the Duff, to have been at that time but
recently peopled by some natives of an island to
the westward, probably Rimatara, who, when sail¬
ing to a spot they were accustomed to visit, were

TUBUAI.

381

driven by strong and unfavourable winds on
Tubuai. A few years after this, a canoe sailing
from Raiatea to Tahiti, conveying a chief who was
ancestor to Idia, Pomare’s mother, was also drifted
upon this island, and the chief admitted to the
supreme authority; a third canoe was afterwards
wafted upon the shores of Tubuai, containing only
a human skeleton, which a native of Tahiti, who
accompanied the mutineers, supposed belonged to
a man he had killed in a battle at sea. The scan¬
tiness of the population favoured the opinion that
the present race had but recently become inha¬
bitants of this abode ; and the subsequent visits of
Missionaries from Tahiti, with the residence of
native teachers among the people, have furnished
additional evidence that the present Tubuaian
population is but of modern origin, compared with
that inhabiting the island of Raivavai on the east,
or Rurutu and Rimatara on the west.

In 1817, I touched at Tubuai. The island is
compact, hilly, and verdant; many of the hills
appeared brown and sunburnt, while others were
partially wooded. At a distance it appears like
two distinct islands, but on a nearer approach the
high land is found to be united. It is less pictu¬
resque than Rapa, but is surrounded by a reef of
coral, which protects the low-land from the vio¬
lence of the sea. As we approached this natural
safeguard to the level shore, which is perhaps
more extensive than the level land in any other
island of equal size, a number of natives came out
to meet us. Their canoes, resembling those of
Rapa, were generally sixteen or twenty feet long ;
the lower part being hollowed out of the trunk of a
tree, and the sides, stem, and stern, formed by
pieces of thin plank sewed together with cinet or

382

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

cord, and adorned with shells. The stem pro¬
jected nearly horizontally, but the stern being
considerably elevated, extended obliquely from the
seat occupied by the steersman* The sterns were
ornamented with rude carving, and, together with
the sides, painted with a kind of red ochre, while
the seams were covered with the feathers of
aquatic birds. A tabu had been recently laid on
the island by the priests, which they had supposed
would prevent the arrival of any vessel, and they
were consequently rather disconcerted by our ap¬
proach. Among the natives who came on board,
was a remarkably fine, tall, well-made man, who
appeared, from the respect paid him by the others,
to be a chief. His body was but partially tataued,
his only dress was a girdle or broad bandage
round his loins, and his glossy, black, and curling
hair was tied in a bunch on the crown of his head,
while its extremities hung in ringlets on his shoul¬
ders. His disposition appeared mild and friendly.
His endeavours to induce us to land were unre¬
mitted, until nearly sunset; when, finding them
unavailing, and receiving from the captain an
assurance that he would keep near the island till
the morrow, he expressed a wish to remain on
board, although considerably affected by the mo¬
tion of the vessel.

The next morning we stood in close to the reefs,
and a party from the ship accompanied the chief
to the shore : the population appeared but small;
the people were friendly, and readily bartered
fowls, taro, and mountain plantains for articles of
cutlery and fish-hooks. Their gardens were un¬
fenced, and the few pigs they had were kept in
holes or wide pits four or five feet deep, and fed
with bread-fruit and other vegetables. Only one was

TUBUAI.

383

brought on board, and this was readily purchased.
Many of the natives, in addition to the common
bandage encircling their bodies, and a light
cloth over their shoulders, wore large folds of
white or yellow cloth bound round their heads, in
some degree resembling a turban, which gave
them a remarkably Asiatic appearance. They
also wore necklaces of the nuts of the pandanus ;
the scent of which, though strong, is grateful to
most of the islanders of the Pacific.

They were at this time addicted to unjust and
barbarous war, and sometimes failed to manifest
that hospitality, and afford that protection, to the
voyagers from other countries, which is generally
shewn by the inhabitants of other islands. On
the day after our arrival, two or three natives of
the Paumotu or Palliser’s Islands, which lie to the
eastward of the Society Islands, came on board
our vessel, and asked the captain for a passage to
Tahiti. He inquired their business there ? They
said, that some weeks before, they left Tahiti,
whither they had been on a visit, to return to their
native islands, but that contrary winds drifted
their canoe out of its course, and they reached the
island of Tubuai; that shortly after their arrival,
the natives of the island attacked them, plundered
them of their property, and broke their canoe;
that they wished to go to Tahiti, and acquaint
Pomare with their misfortune, procure another
canoe, and prosecute their original voyage. Two
Europeans, who were on the island at the time,
reported that they were very peaceable in their be¬
haviour ; that the natives of Tubuai had attacked
the strangers because they had tried to persuade
them to cast away their idols, and had told them
there was but one true God, viz. Jehovah. Our

384 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

captain, and some others who were present, asked
why they did not resist the attack ? inquiring, at
the same time, if they were averse to war; know¬
ing that their countrymen were continually en¬
gaged in most savage wars, and were also can¬
nibals. They said they had been taught to delight
in war, and were not afraid of the natives of Tubuai;
that if they had been heathens, they should have
fought them at once; but that they had been to
Tahiti, and had embraced the new religion, as
they called Christianity; had heard that Jehovah
commanded those who worshipped Him to do no
murder, and that Jesus Christ had directed his
followers to love their enemies; that they feared
it would be displeasing to God, should they have
killed any of the Tubuaians, or even have indulged
feelings of revenge towards them; adding, that
they would rather lose their canoe and their pro¬
perty, than offend Jehovah, or disregard the direc¬
tions of Jesus Christ.—Our captain gave them a
passage. Pomare furnished them with a canoe;
they returned for their companions, and subse¬
quently sailed to their native islands.

These natives, in all probability, had never
heard the question as to the lawfulness or unlaw¬
fulness of Christians engaging in war discussed, or
even named, but they had most likely been taught
to commit to memory the decalogue, and our
Lord's sermon on the mount, and hence resulted
their noble forbearance at the island of Tubuai.

Subsequently, the Tubuaians heard more ample
details of the change that had taken place in the
adjacent island of Rurutu, as well as in the Society
Islands—that the inhabitants had renounced their
idolatry, and erected places for the worship of the
true God—and determined to follow their example.

TUBUAI*

385

In the month of March, 1822, they sent a depu¬
tation to Tahiti, requesting teachers and books.
The messengers from Tubuai were kindly wel¬
comed, and not only hospitably entertained by the
Tahitian Christians, but led to their schools and
places of public worship. Two native teachers
were selected by the church in Matavai, and pub¬
licly designated by the Missionaries to instruct the
natives of Tubuai. The churches in Tahiti, so far
as their means admitted, furnished them with a
supply of articles most likely to be useful in
their Missionary station ; and the 13th of June,
1822, they embarked for the island of Tubuai.
Mr. Nott, the senior Missionary in Tahiti, em¬
barked in the same vessel, for the purpose of
preaching to the people, and affording the native
Missionaries every assistance in the commencement
of their undertaking.

Finding, on their arrival, the whole of the small
population of the island, engaged in war, and on
the eve of a battle, Mr. Nott and his companions
repaired to the encampment of Tamatoa, who was,
by hereditary right, the king of the island, ac¬
quainted him with the design of their visit, and
recommended him to return to his ordinary place
of abode. The king expressed his willingness to
accede to the proposal, provided his rival, who
was encamped but a short distance from him, and
whom he expected on the morrow to engage,
would also suspend hostilities. Paofai, a chief
who accompanied Mr. Nott, went to Tahuhua-
tama, the chief of the opposite party, with a mes¬
sage to this effect. He was kindly received, his
proposal agreed to, and a time appointed for the
chiefs to meet midway between the hostile parties,
and arrange the conditions of peace.

nr. 2 c

386 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

On the same evening, or early the next morn¬
ing, the chieftains, with their adherents, probably
not exceeding one hundred on either side, quitted
their encampments, which were about a mile and
a half or two miles apart, and proceeded to the
appointed place of rendezvous. When they came
within fifty yards of each other, they halted. The
chiefs then left their respective bands, and met
midway between them ; they were attended by the
Missionaries, and, after several propositions had
been made by one party, and acceded to by the
other, peace was concluded. The chiefs then
embraced each other; and the warriors in each
little army, wherein the nearest relations were
probably arrayed against each other, perceiving
the reconciliation of their chiefs, dropped their
implements of war, and, rushing into each other’s
arms, presented a scene of gratulation and joy,
very different from the murderous conflict in which
they expected to have been engaged. They re¬
paired in company to the residence of the prin¬
cipal chief, where an entertainment was provided.
Here the Missionaries had a second interview with
the chiefs, who welcomed them to the island, and
expressed their desires to be instructed concerning
the true God, and the new religion, as they usually
denominated Christianity.

On the following morning, the inhabitants of
Tubuai were invited to attend public worship,
when Mr. Nott delivered, in a new building erected
for the purpose, the first Christian discourse to
which they had ever listened. It was truly gra¬
tifying to behold those, who had only the day
before expected to have been engaged in shedding
each other’s blood, now mingled in one quiet and
attentive assembly, where the warriors of rival

TUBUAI.

387

chieftains might be seen sitting side by side, and
listening to the gospel of peace.

Mr. Nott was unexpectedly detained several
weeks at Tubuai; during this time he made the
tour of the island, conversed with the people, and
preached on every favourable occasion that occur-
red. The Queen Charlotte at length arrived;
when, having introduced the native teachers to
the chiefs and people, and recommended them to
their protection, he bade them farewell, and pro¬
secuted his voyage to High Island. The chiefs
had desired that one teacher might be left with each ;
and, in order to meet their wishes, two, Hapunia
and Samuela, from the church at Papeete, were
stationed by Mr. Nott in this island, one with each
of the chiefs. The native Missionaries found the
productions of Tubuai less various and abundant
than those of Tahiti and the adjacent islands.
The habits of the natives were remarkably indo¬
lent, and mimical to health, especially the practice
of dressing their bread-fruit, &c. only once in five
days. Against this the teachers invariably remon¬
strated, and presented to them, also, a better ex¬
ample, by cooking for themselves fresh food every
day. Since that time, a distressing epidemic has,
in common with most of the islands, prevailed in
Tubuai, and has swept off many of the people.
Nevertheless, the native teachers continue their
labours, and the condition of the people is im¬
proved. In February, 1826, when Mr. Davies
visited them, the profession of Christianity was
general; thirty-eight adults and four children were
baptized. The chiefs and people were assisting
the teachers in building comfortable dwellings,
and erecting a neat and substantial house for
public worship.

2 c 2

388 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES,

In 1829, when they were visited, although the
industry of the inhabitants, and their advancement
in civilization, were cheering, their progress in learn¬
ing was but small, and the ignorance or stupidity
of the children discouraging. Less attention was
paid to the teachers than formerly, and consider¬
able disorder prevailed among the people, from the
opposition of some to the laws transmitted by the
king from Tahiti, and the want of promptitude and
decision in those natives who were invested with au¬
thority. At a meeting of the people, which was held
by the appointment of the principal chiefs, while
Messrs. Pritchard and Simpson remained on the
island, it was resolved, that two criminals, one
guilty of murder, having shot one of the magis¬
trates, and another of treason, having devised a
plot against the government, and meditated the
death of the Tahitian teachers, should be banished
for life to an uninhabited island ;* and that others,
less culpable, should be kept in irons during the
pleasure of the chiefs. Measures were also pro¬
posed, which were adapted to induce a better state
of things among all classes of the inhabitants.

Rimatara.

This island lies nearly three degrees westward of
Tubuai, and some miles nearer the equator. It
is about twenty miles in circumference; and
though higher than any of the islands of coral for¬
mation, its hills present but a small elevation. The
soil is fertile, and the lowland, surrounded by a
natural safeguard or reef, is generally attached to
the shore. There is no harbour, nor any opening
in the reefs, excepting for a boat. The hills are
clothed with the trees and shrubs common to the
* Miss. Trans, vol. iv. No. vi. p. 363.

RIMATARA.

389

neighbouring islands, while the valleys and level
grounds yield the fruits and roots which are met
with in Tahiti and the northern clusters. Rimatara,
however, is principally distinguished as the favourite
resort of a beautiful species of paroquet, which is
so numerous as to occasion great annoyance to the
inhabitants, by destroying their fruit. These birds
are small, but their plumage, which is of red,
green, and purple, is rich and brilliant. The fea¬
thers of these little birds have ever been held
in high estimation among the inhabitants of the
other islands, whither they have been conveyed as
the most valuable articles of native commerce.
The population of this island is small, not much
exceeding 300. The natives are well formed;
their hair is straight or curled, and their complexion
fairer than that of the inhabitants of the Society
Islands. They are a quiet, gentle race, occupied
generally in the simplest employments of agricul¬
ture and fishing. They display less native energy
than their neighbours ; and though their sources of
enjoyment are scanty, their crimes and their suffer¬
ings are proportionally less. Diseases are few,
and an unusual number of very aged persons are
found among them. Yet, in a community so small
and isolated, and whose habits were in many respects
mild, and comparatively humane, woman was sub¬
jected to an invidious and humiliating sense of her
inferiority. She was necessitated, by the will of
man, to labour in the culture of the earth, though
deprived of an equal participation of its abundant
and choicest productions. The toil required to
furnish the means of subsistence, was performed
exclusively by the wife, while the husband spent
his hours in indolence and amusement. This state
of things, not more favourable to morals than to

390

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

happiness, was sustained by the rude system of
superstition in which they lived, and which pre¬
vailed in the adjacent islands.

To the exertions of the Missionaries, and native
Christians, in spreading Christianity, we are in¬
debted for our knowledge of the existence of this
island, and the circumstances of its inhabitants;
at least, I have met with no account of it, before
that given by the Missionaries who established
native teachers among the people. Although
the inhabitants of the Society Islands reported
the existence of an island, somewhere to the
southward, which they designated by this name,
the first intelligence that we received of its situa¬
tion, extent, and population, was derived from the
inhabitants of Rurutu, who were driven to the
Society Islands in 1821.

When Auura, the chief of Rurutu, accompanied
by teachers from Raiatea, returned to his native
land, in the year 1821, he found there a number
of the inhabitants of Rimatara. These followed
the example of the inhabitants of Rurutu, in
destroying their idols, and receiving Christian in¬
struction ; sailing shortly afterwards to their own
island, they induced many of their countrymen to
do the same. In the month of June, 1822, the
Christians in Borabora sent two of their number,
Eaarava and Oo, to instruct the inhabitants of this
island in reading, writing, and the first elements
of religion. They were accompanied by the Eu¬
ropean Missionaries, and all received a cordial
welcome from the people. Although the natural
productions of Rimatara were inferior to those of
Borabora, and the comforts of life fewer than
those enjoyed in their native land, this did not
discourage them. They applied themselves with

RIM AT A R A.

391

diligence to the accomplishment of their object,
and such was the success with which their exer¬
tions were attended, that, when Mr. Williams
visited them, in October, 1823, fifteen months after
the arrival of the native teachers, he found the in¬
habitants had renounced their idols, and were living
in harmony among themselves, and with their
teachers, whom they greatly respected. They had
erected a place for the worship of the true God.
This building was sixty feet long, and thirty wide;
the walls were plastered, and the floor was boarded.
A neat pulpit, of excellent workmanship, built,
as was also the chapel, after the plan of that
in which the teachers had been accustomed to
worship in their native island, was also finished.
It was opened for divine worship during Mr. Wil¬
liams' visit; and the congregation, including the
greater part of the population, amounting to about
three hundred, presented a most interesting spec¬
tacle. The females were neatly dressed in white
native cloth, each one wearing a bonnet, which the
wives of the teachers had taught them to make.
Men, who had grown old in the service of idolatry,
and who had never met for worship in any but a
pagan temple, now assembled to render homage
to the living God. The venerable figures, whose
heads were grey with years, appeared in striking
contrast with the youth and sprightliness of the
children by whom they were surrounded. During
the service, all appeared interested and attentive.
At this time, the entire population were under
instruction; and the children's school contained
130 scholars.

About the time of the commencement of the
Mission, an American seaman, of the name of Robert,
accompanied by a number of natives, undertook

392 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

to convey some books from Rurutu to Rimatara,
a distance of about seventy miles. He reached
Rimatara in safety, but, on returning, was driven
out of his course, and perished with several of his
companions. The day after his death, the boat
was picked up by a vessel, about 200 miles distant
from the island; and, by proper treatment, such
of the crew as were still alive, recovered from the
weakness and exhaustion which famine had in¬
duced.

In the year 1825, two years after Mr. Williams
left them, this island was visited by Mr. Bourne,
from Tahaa. He was welcomed by the people, who
had begun to think that they and their teachers
were forgotten by their friends. Twelve months
before his arrival, Oo had been removed by death:
stedfast and faithful to the end of his days, he had
the honour of being the first native Missionary who
had ended his days in communicating the bless¬
ings of Christianity to others. Faarara, his com¬
panion, had lost by death his wife and child. He
was eminently devoted to his work, and, under
these bereavements, was cheered by the sympa¬
thies and esteem of the people, and the evident
advantages that resulted from his efforts. Mr.
Bourne was delighted with the improvement of the
station, and the diligence of the people, especially
of some who were far advanced in years.

Although the circumstances of the females were
considerably ameliorated by the abolition of ido¬
latry, yet the cultivation of the ground, and other
kinds of labour unsuitable to their sex, were still
performed by them. During his visit, Mr. Bourne,
at a public meeting, proposed an alteration of their
established usage in this respect, which was alike
derogatory to the females, and inimical to an

RURUTU.

393

improvement in morals. Each chief present ex¬
pressed his sentiments in favour of the proposal,
and the result, was an unanimous declaration,
“ that, from that day forward, the men should dig,
plant, and prepare the food, and the women make
cloth, bonnets, and attend to their household
work.”* The change thus introduced, by insti¬
tuting a suitable division of labour, has proved
favourable to domestic virtue and social happi¬
ness, while it has augmented the means of subsist¬
ence, and the sources of comfort.

Within the last ten years, the intercourse be-
tween Rurutu and Rimatara has been frequent,
though not always safe.

The last accounts from this island state, that
the people continue to improve in the knowledge
and practice of religion, and to advance in energy
and industry. In order to increase their conve¬
niences, they had sent one of their number to Bora-
bora, a distance of nearly four hundred miles, to
learn the art of carpentry, turning, &c., that, on his
return, he might be able to teach his countrymen.
They had also sent a letter to Mr. Platt, requesting
him to visit them, and establish a Christian church
among them.

Rurutu.

This island, which is situated in lat. 22. 27. S.
and long. 150. 47. W., was discovered by Captain
Cook, by whom it was called Ohetetoa. This is
also one of its proper native names, but is much
less frequently used than Rurutu, by which it is
now generally known. The island is of small
extent, probably not more than twelve miles in
circumference. It is surrounded by a reef of coral,
* Miss. Chron. No. 41. p. 271.

394 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

but is destitute of any harbour, and there is only
one place at which even a boat can land. A narrow
border of low land extends from the shore, and the
interior is mountainous and broken. Rurutu, con¬
sidering its size, presents natural scenery equal in
beauty to any of the adjacent islands, and a
greater variety in its geology than any other.
Many of the rocks are basaltic; others appear
formed of a vesicular kind of ancient lava; besides
which, fibrous limestone is occasionally met with,
and a beautiful and singular stalactites. Garnets
are also found in several parts. The soil is fertile :
most of the productions, used as articles of food in
the Society Islands, flourish here ; while the dra-
cana, the casuarina, and the barringtonia are not
only abundant, but attain an unusual size—the
trunk of the latter frequently exceeding four feet
in diameter.

The inhabitants, though not more numerous than
those of Rimatara, are darker in their complexion,
more enterprising in their character, and active in
their habits. Their temples were numerous, and
their idols, especially their great god, Taaroa, were
among the most singular we have met with in the
Pacific. Their priests, who were their physicians,
maintained great influence over the people, though
their system of worship appears less sanguinary
than that of their more civilized neighbours. They
were addicted to war. Their helmets were among
the most imposing in the South Sea Islands,
and their spears, which were made of the hard
dark wood of the casuarina, were often from
twelve to eighteen feet long. Vessels traversing
this part of the Pacific, occasionally hove-to oft
this island, for the purpose of allowing the natives
to bring off their hogs, fowls, and vegetables, for

RURUTU.

395

barter; but few foreigners went on shore, and
little intercourse was held with them, until the
establishment of a native Mission among them.
The events which led to this are rather remarkable,
and cannot fail to interest those who find pleasure
in noticing the proceedings of Divine providence
in the small and remote, as well as more exten¬
sive and conspicuous, changes that take place in
the circumstances of men.

In the end of 1820, a distressing and contagious
disease made its appearance among the inhabitants
of this island. Accustomed to ascribe every cala¬
mity to the anger of their gods, they attributed
that with which they were now visited, and which
threatened their annihilation, to this cause, and had
recourse to every means which they supposed could
pacify the evil spirit. Still the disease continued,
until not many more than two hundred inhabitants
remained. Among these, Auura, a young and ad¬
venturous chief, determined to seek his safety on the
ocean. He communicated the design to his friends;
and, as some were desirous of proceeding to Tubuai,
to obtain pieces of iron, and others, with himself,
deeming that, if they remained, death was inevit¬
able, thought they could but die at sea, deter¬
mined to accompany him. Taking their wives with
them, Auura and his friends launched his canoe,
sailed to Tubuai, and, after remaining some time,
embarked to return. A storm drove them out of
their course ; and, after having been drifted at the
mercy of the waves for three weeks, their canoe
struck on the reefs which surround Maurua, the
most westerly of the Society Islands. The natives
of this island treated the exhausted voyagers with
hospitality and kindness, and gave them an ac¬
count of the changes that had taken place among

396 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

the islands around them. As soon as they had
recovered from the fatigues of their voyage,
Auura and his companions launched their canoe,
and sailed for Borabora. When they reached the
mouth of the harbour, the wind was unfavourable
for entering, but a boat from the island conveyed
the chief and his wife to the shore, while their
companions continued their voyage to Raiatea,
where they were kindly treated by the inhabitants,
and soon after joined by their chief. Every thing
in the island was new and surprising; and, under
the influence of astonishment, the strangers visited
the dwellings of the Missionaries, the native Chris¬
tians, the chapel, and the schools, and soon be¬
came regular pupils themselves. After having
been some time at Raiatea, they publicly renounced
their idols, and professed themselves the worship¬
pers of the true God. Next to their desire for
instruction themselves, they seemed exceedingly
anxious to return to their native island, to impart
to their countrymen the knowledge they had re¬
ceived. No opportunity for accomplishing their
wishes in this respect, occurred, until a vessel, on
her way to England, touched at Raiatea; we were
on board at the time. The captain generously
agreed to convey them to Rurutu, which he in¬
tended to pass, in his way to Cape Horn. Two
native Christians, and their wives, were, at the
request of Auura, selected to accompany them,
and the short interval, between their appointment,
and the departure of the vessel, was employed in
making preparations. Their friends and neigh¬
bours came forward with promptness and genero¬
sity, and, according to their means, furnished
such articles as were most likely to be useful in
the land to which they were going. The men

RURUTU. 397

were intelligent, active, and devoted Christians,
and their wives pious and amiable women.

On the 5th of July, 1821, they embarked with
the chief and his friends, and, three days after
leaving Raiatea, the ship made Rurutu. The next
day Auura and the Raiateans entered a boat, and
rowed towards the land. When they approached
the shore, the boat’s crew were rather alarmed
by the eagerness with which the people waded
into the sea to meet them ; but, being assured that
it was only indicative of a desire to bid them wel¬
come, they resumed their confidence. They were
startled at being saluted by the inhabitants in the
name of “ Jehovah, the true God of whom they
afterwards found the natives had heard, by means
of a woman who had left Raiatea four or five years
before, and had, by a ship, reached the southern
islands.

As soon as they landed, Mahamene and Puna
kneeled on the ground, and rendered thanks unto
God for their preservation. They were not aware
that the spot on which they made this acknow¬
ledgment was sacred to Oro, and could not account
for the earnestness with which the Rurutuans
exclaimed, “ This party will die.” The strangers
also inadvertently cooked and ate their food in a
place that was considered as sacred : this, with the
circumstance of the females eating with the men,
filled the natives with greater astonishment, and
they waited for some time, expecting to see them
suddenly expire. At length they concluded that
the gods would execute vengeance upon them
during the night; and, so great was their anxiety
on this subject, that they could not wait till daybreak
—one of them went at midnight to the chiefs
house, and, calling aloud, inquired if his wife was

398

POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

not destroyed by the spirit, or god. When they
saw that the whole party had remained uninjured
during the night, they expressed their indignation
at the deception of which tl\ey had been the
dupes.

The Christian natives had no sooner landed,
than they made known the object of their visit,
and proposed to bring the matter more fully before
the inhabitants at a public meeting on the follow¬
ing day. Auura, the chief who had accompanied
them, sent his own idol away by the captain of the
Hope, who sailed on the same evening.

On the next day, which was the 12th of July,
the entire population assembled, and the little
Christian band appeared before them. Auura,
who was then about thirty years of age, of tall and
graceful figure, addressed his countrymen. He
narrated succinctly the leading incidents of his
voyage; alluded to their apprehension that he
“ had been eaten by the evil spirit in the depths
of the sea/’ but declared that God had led him, by
a way that he knew not, to a land where teachers
dwelt, and where the word of God grew and flou¬
rished ;—that he had returned to them, that they
might know the compassion of Jehovah, the name
of the Son of God, and the work of the Holy
Spirit, in enlightening their hearts. He declared,
that their god, whom he designated on this occa¬
sion the evil spirit , was the great foundation of
all deceit, and proposed that his dominion should
be annihilated, and the images, or idols, burnt,
that his influence might cease for ever, and that
the government, or reign, should be given to
Jehovah, &c.

The king and chiefs replied, “ We will receive
the word of life; we will burn the evil spirits ; let

RURUTU.

399

every thing made by our hands, as an object of
worship, be totally charred in the fire.” To these
statements they added this remarkable declara¬
tion—“ Behold, you say, O Auura, that we have
souls, or spirits—till now we never knew that man
possessed a soul.” Auura then introduced the
two Missionaries from Raiatea, stated their object,
and recommended them to the kind attention of
the people.

At this time, two men, pretending to be inspired
by Rurutu’s god, rose up. One said, “ We will
hold the good word.” The other began by de¬
claring his acquaintance with the foundation of
the universe, his descent from Taaroa, his birth in
the heavens—and was proceeding, when the chief
interrupted him, and requested him to demonstrate
his relation to the celestial world, by “ shooting up
into the skyand then, accusing him as the de¬
stroyer of the Rurutuan people, ordered him away.
The teachers then addressed the meeting, and,
after briefly stating their object, recommended
them to provide an entertainment the next day, of
which they and their wives and children should
unitedly partake, and thus prove the deception of
their false gods.

On the succeeding day, a feast was prepared;
turtle, pork, and other kinds of food considered
sacred, were dressed, and a number of both women
and children sat down, and ate of the prohibited
dishes. The priests had declared, that any who
should thus offend, would be instantly destroyed
by the gods of their ancestors—this was to be the
test of their power.

The inhabitants were not uninterested spectators
at this feast; and when, afterwards, they saw no
one convulsed, or suddenly stricken *with death,

400 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

they arose, hurled their idols from the places they
had so long occupied, burnt to the ground three
of their sacred dwellings, in which their idols were
kept, and, on the same day, proceeded, en masse ,
to the demolition of their temples.

A large boat, belonging to Mr. Threlkeld, had
been towed to the island by the vessel which con¬
veyed the teachers. After remaining about a
month in Rurutu, the Raiateans attached to the
boat took leave of their countrymen, launched their
boat, loaded with the rejected idols, and, after
being six days at sea, reached in safety their native
island.

The Christians in Raiatea, who had, in hope
and faith, sent out their first Missionaries, little ex¬
pected such immediate success. A public meeting
was convened, at which the abolished idols were
exhibited, appropriate addresses delivered, and
sincere acknowledgments rendered to the Most
High, for the favourable reception their country¬
men had experienced.

On my return from the Sandwich Islands, in com¬
pany with the deputation from London, I called at
Rurutu, in October, 1822. As we approached the
shore, a native came off, to a distance of one or two
miles, not in a canoe, but in a large wooden dish
used in preparing food; it was about six feet long, and
eighteen inches or two feet wide. The native invited
us to the shore. On landing, we were greeted with
the most cordial welcome by the chiefs and people,
and were astonished at the effects of little more
than one short year’s exertion. Many had learned
to read, and some to write; the teachers had
erected neat plastered dwellings for themselves,
and, under their direction, the people had built a
substantial chapel, eighty feet long, and thirty-six

RURVTLT.

401

feet wide. In this I preached to nearly the whole
of the inhabitants, who were serious and attentive.
After the service, we examined the building, the
pulpit, &c., and were delighted to behold the rail¬
ing round the table in front of the pulpit, and by
the side of the stairs, composed of the handles of
warriors' spears.

Twelve months afterwards they were visited by
Mr. Williams, who found their industry and im¬
provement had been progressive. The young king
had died; and as there were two candidates for
the supreme authority, this led to the formation
of two settlements instead of one: to each of these,
one of the teachers was attached; and as the
friends of Auura had not succeeded in procuring
for him the government of the island, the teacher
attached to his party had proposed, as a sort of com¬
pensation, to make him king of the church. When
this plan was mentioned to Mr. Williams, he informed
them that the Lord Jesus Christ was the King of the
church ! that he was a Prince, as well as a Saviour!
and that in the Bible there was nothing about the ap¬
pointment of any other king of the church. This was
sufficient, and Auura’s friends were content that he
should be supreme in his own district, but subor¬
dinate to the uncle of the late king, who had been
the more successful candidate for the government
of the island. This fact serves to shew the advan¬
tages of European Missionaries occasionally visit¬
ing the stations under the care of native Mission¬
aries. In November, 1824, I again visited Rurutu,
travelled across the mountains from one settlement
to the other, and conversed with most of the inha¬
bitants, many of whom were living in comfortable
dwellings, and wearing decent clothing. Industry,
activity, and cheerfulness, were every where mani-
1II C 2 D

402 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

fest, and the improvement of the people encou¬
raging. Twelve months after our departure, they
were visited by Mr. Bourne. The numbers of
houses were increased, and a general air of com¬
fort pervaded the settlement. Though not very
frequently visited prior to their intercourse with
Raiatea, they were the victims of most unjust
plunder, from those who resorted to their shores
for the purposes of refreshment. A short time
before the first European Missionaries visited
them, an English ship hove-to off the island, and
on the captain’s intimating his wish to obtain pigs
and vegetables, the natives took off a supply, in¬
cluding a number of large hogs, for which they
were promised axes in return. Their canoe was
attached to the vessel by a rope, while the
hogs, &c. were hoisted upon the deck. As soon
as their canoe was empty, the captain threw down
a bundle of pieces of iron hoop, and useless pieces
of iron, and, telling them that was their payment,
cut the rope by which they held to the vessel, and
sailed away. Indignant at the treachery and
robbery of the white men, they returned to the
shore, held a public council, related the conduct
of their visitors, exhibited the payment they had
received, and proposed that they should avenge
themselves upon the next ship that might arrive.
The proposal was received, and it was determined
that, instead of taking off provisions, they should
invite the captain on shore, and then murder him
and his companions; while others should go off
with supplies, with which they should gain ad¬
mittance to the ship, and there murder the
remainder of the crew, and seize the vessel. This
was their purpose when the first Missionaries
visited them. As soon as Mr. Threlkeid was

auiiuTu.

403

acquainted with it, he dissuaded them from it, and
recommended them to give him the articles they
had received, assuring them he would write to the
owners of the ship, who would remunerate them.
The ship was afterwards wrecked and lost, and the
captain no longer employed by his owners.
Another ship, commanded by an individual, who
was chief officer at the time of this unjust trans¬
action, was also lost, and I have not heard of
any recompense being made to the natives. They
however, since they have embraced Christianity,
have treated every foreigner by whom they have
been visited with kindness. Nine months after
our departure in 1824, a large American ship, the
Falcon, Captain B. C. Chase, was wrecked here
The chief officer and crew remained some time on
the island. The captain proceeded to South
America, but, before he left, he delivered the fol¬
lowing testimony to the native teachers. 44 The
natives gave us all the assistance in their power,
from the time the ship struck till the present mo¬
ment. The first day, while landing the things
from the ship, they were put into the hands of the
natives, and not a single article of clothing was
taken from any man belonging to the ship, though
they had it in their power to have plundered us of
every thing. Since I have lived on shore, myself,
officers, and people have received the kindest
treatment from the natives, for which I shall ever
feel thankful. Myself and officers have lived in
the house of Puna, who, together with his wife,
has paid every attention to make us comfortable,
for which I return my sincere thanks, being the
only compensation I can make them at present/’—-
The contrast between this conduct, and their
purpose some years before, is decisive as to the

404 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

benefit Christianity has conferred, while the tes¬
timony of Captain Chase is as honourable to him¬
self as it is just to the people, and satisfactory to
their friends. The last intelligence from this
interesting island, dated 1829, is highly satisfac¬
tory. At this time, Mr. Williams visited them,
opened a new chapel, sixty feet long, and
forty feet wide, inspected both the stations, and
found, in one, scarcely an adult who could not
read, and was gratified with the hospitality of the
people, their industry, improvement, and comfort;
about eighty natives were united in Christian
fellowship.

Westward from the Society Islands, and north¬
west from Rurutu, a number of important and
populous islands and clusters are situated. Some
of them were visited by Cook, Bougainville, La
Perouse, and other early navigators, others have
been recently discovered by the Missionaries, or
masters of vessels conveying native Missionaries to
the different islands. To the inhabitants of most
of these, a knowledge of the gospel has been con¬
veyed by Christians from the Society Islands, and
by many tribes it has been cordially received.
During the summer of 1830, Messrs. Williams
and Barff visited most of these islands, including
the Hervey, Tonga, Hapai, and Samoa, or Navi¬
gators’ groups. They have since transmitted a
very copious and interesting journal of their voy¬
age, with historical and general notices of the
islands and their inhabitants, and an account of
the introduction of Christianity, and its influence
on the people. This, we have reason to believe,
will soon be published ; our additional notices
must therefore be brief and general.

It would appear that, although much has been

CONCLUDING REM AUKS.

405

done for the natives of these distant islands, yet
much still remains to be accomplished. In a
letter written by Mr. Williams, to the late foreign
secretary of the London Missionary Society, dated
October 21, 1830, he states the following par¬
ticulars.

“We visited the Hervey Islands, and found all
our stations in a state of considerable prosperity.’'
—And after narrating an unsuccessful attempt to
land at Savage Island, and describing the plea¬
sure a visit to the Friendly Islands afforded, and
the reasons which induced them to decline visiting
the Fijis, to which they sent native teachers,
Mr. Williams continues:

“ Leaving Tognatabu,we proceeded to the Hapai
Islands, where we met Finau, the king of Vavau,
who, with many of his chiefs, had come to attend
a marriage ceremony: this saved us a voyage, as
we had a teacher from Borabora for that island.
We attended his majesty, and made our proposi¬
tions to him, Mr. Cross and Mr. Thomas kindly
interpreting for us. He replied, that we might
leave the teacher and his wife, if we pleased ; but
it was his determination not to embrace Chris¬
tianity yet, neither to suffer any of his people
to do so; and that he would kill the first that did.
Treating us at the same time with the greatest
respect, he said he looked upon the change as
a matter of importance, and he did not think it
well to use deceit on such an occasion, his mind
being made up on the subject. Several of the
Vavau chiefs have left wives, lands, servants, yam
plantations, and all they possess, and choose to
live in a state of poverty at Lefuga, under the
instruction of Mr. Thomas, rather than return to
their own possessions at Vavau, and renounce

406 POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES.

Christianity, which they must do if they return,
as Finau threatens all with death who do not
abandon their new religion.

“Leaving the Hapai group, we steered direct for
the Samoa group, when we experienced a severe
gale of wind, which afflicted us all with violent
catarrh. One died, and several were reduced to
the point of death. The wind however abating,
by making the land and getting into warmer wea¬
ther, we soon recovered.

“ Very providentially, a chief of the Samoas,
being at Togna, with his wife and family, wished
much to return, and applied to us for that pur¬
pose. We were glad of the opportunity of con¬
veying him home, and he proved an invaluable
acquisition to us ; and we sincerely hope, and fully
expect, he will prove equally valuable to the
teachers we placed there.

“ The Samoa Islands are eight in number, four
in the windward group, and four in the leeward
group ; two of which are much larger than Tahiti,
and all are full of inhabitants. War raging at
two of the principal islands, we thought it best to
commence our labours on one only, which was not
the seat of war, and to which the chief we had
brought from Togna belonged. We used our
utmost endeavours to induce the chiefs to give uo
the war: they promised they would terminate it !
as speedily as possible, and come and learn from
the teachers the lotu , or word of the great God.
We placed eight teachers on the large island of
Savai; four under the protection of the king,
Malietoa, and four under the protection of his
brother. Mr. Barff and I went on shore, and
remained there two nights and three days, during
which time (although probably no European had

CONCLUDING REMARKS. 407

been on shore before) we were treated with the
utmost respect and kindness. A commodious
dwelling was given up, by the chiefs, for our
people to worship and teach in, with four good
dwelling-houses for themselves and families. We
promised the chiefs and people, in the large public
meeting we held, when we exchanged our pre¬
sents, &c., to visit them in ten or twelve months’
time, and that, if they had attended to the instruc¬
tions of the teachers, we would then assure them
that European Missionaries would come and
settle with them as soon as possible. One thing
affected us much : the two largest of the islands,
Upolu and Savai, are about ten miles distant from
each other; war was raging between them ; they
were actually fighting on the shore of Upolu while
we were landing the teachers on the opposite
shore of Savai; the houses and plantations were
blazing at that very time.”

On taking an impartial retrospect of Polynesia,
and surveying man under the influence of his
ferocious passions and unregenerate propensities,
we find ourselves constrained to admit, that the
power of God accompanying his gospel, is the
only antidote in existence for the moral maladies
of the human race. Nothing but this can induce
the fallen sons of Adam to “ beat their swords
i to ploughshares, and their spears into pruning-
hooks;” and when its universal diffusion shall take
place, we> feel assured that “ the nations of the
earth will learn war no more.”

end or VOL. ii r.

London : I'isber, Son, and Jackson, Printers.

*

/

I

I